HI ^ 1 ^ <& 3* H* VW BACON'S NEW GERMAN COURSE COMPRISING IN ONE VOLUME THE ESSENTIALS OF THE GRAMMAR WITH A CONVERSATIONAL READER AND COMPLETE VOCABULARIES By Edwin F. Bacon, Ph.B. Teacher of Modern Languages in Onkonta Statk Normal School NEW YORK MAYNARD, MERRILL, & CO, LONDON, G. W. BACON & CO. HANOVER, SCHMORL & VON SEEFELD 1906 C^rL^ LIBRARY of CONGRESS TwoCODies Received feb iy iyo6 0} Copyright Entry CLASS g~ AXC, NO, d OOPY A. "f V 1 ' Copyright, 1906 By Edwin F. Bacon Entered at Stationers' Hall, London 49 PREFACE f his book contains material for a complete elementary course in German, but no exact method for its use is here prescribed. This must necessarily be left, to a great extent, to the discretion of the teacher and will vary with circumstances, with the age and capacity of the pupil, with the time allotted to the study, and with the ability and inclination of the teacher for German conversation. The ideal method combines thorough grammatical instruction with as much conversation as time and circumstances permit. A distinguishing feature of the work is the manner in which it assists the teacher to whom German is not a native language to grow into the conversational method. This is done by giving all rules and explanations first in very plain English, with copious illustrations and translation exercises, and then repeating, in Ger- man, in a conversational way, such technical terms and forms of expression as are necessary in conducting a recitation in that language. This material will be found in connection with the various grammatical lessons. In addition to this there is much familiar and objective talk suited to the class-room and calculated to keep the language alive on the tongue of both teacher and pupil. ' German is a living language, and by teaching it as such the interest of the pupil is greatly enhanced. To promote its prac- tical use in the class-room in a manner involving no sacrifice of grammatical thoroughness, and no loss of time, was the inspiring motive of the present work, an effort more likely to be successful from the fact that it embodies the author's experience while him- IV PREFACE self growing into the conversational method. It thus represents no untried theory, but an actual success. If the advocates of the strictly " natural method " object to explanations being given in English, the reply is that it is practi- cally necessary in our public schools and colleges, and that it does not hinder the teacher in speaking the language he is teaching. It enables him to refer by page and paragraph to needed expla- nations in the pupil's own language, thus saving time and in no wise impairing the conversational method, but really making it practicable where it could not otherwise be employed. It is the hope and expectation of the author that the conver- sational character of the entire work, the plays suited to the school stage, the map and journey through Germany, together with the gems of poetry and song and the complete vocabularies, may commend it to teachers and promote in the pupil a genuine in- terest in the language. But let not the student be content with all that the book and the teacher can do for him. Let him seek the acquaintance of intelligent Germans, who are everywhere to be found in this country, and thus accustom the ear to the native speech. Then if a visit is ever made to the German Fatherland, he will be at home from the very beginning. The life and literature there open to him will be no small addition to his means of culture and enjoyment ; and German, because he has learned it by a living method, will be to him forever a living language. In the preparation of this work the various German grammars in popular use have been profitably consulted, especially those of Whitney, Thomas and Joynes-Meissner, together with that of Heyse, the universally recognized native German authority. Care has also been taken to conform to the recommendations of the " Report of the Committee of Twelve of the Modern Language PREFACE V Association of America " and to the requirements of the Board of Regents of the State of New York. The excellent discussion of methods in the report of the Committee of Twelve entitles it to a place upon the desk of every progressive teacher. The earnest recommendation there made to the use of " well chosen dialogues with the parts assigned" in place of the memorizing of many poems is here fully met by the conversations and plays of Part II, material already successfully used in the author's former publica- tions. The German spelling throughout this book conforms to the official revisions of 1880 and 1901, a complete guide in this matter being found in Daderis orthographisches Wotlerbuch, which is accepted as authority throughout the German-speaking world. The author's acknowledgments are due to several German scholars, to Professor Arthur H. Palmer, of Yale University, for the critical reading of the grammatical portion of the work in manuscript and for valuable suggestions ; to Prof. George Meister of Boston for the careful reading of the proof-sheets of the en- tire work, -and to Rev. Charles A. Meyer of Oneonta for valuable assistance by word and pen. E. F. B. Oneonta, Jan. 1, 1906. TABLE OF CONTENTS Jj^^The Grammatical references throughout the book are to the sections of Part I. Part I. SEC. I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ii 12 13 14 15 16 i7 18 i9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 A. INTRODUCTORY The Relation of German to English The Alphabet .... German Script Alphabet German Handwriting . Remarks on the Alphabet The Use of Capital Letters . Words not Capitalized The New German Orthography Pronunciation .... The Vowels .... The Modified Vowels (Umlauts) The Nasal Vowels The Diphthongs . The Consonants . Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs Compound Words Review Exercises . Reading Exercise Accent Punctuation .... The Hyphen .... Syllabication .... Beginnings of Conversation . Nouns in Common Use Adjectives in Common Use Verbs in Common Use PAGE I 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 11 11 11 13 14 14 15 17 18 *9 J 9 20 26 27 28 CONTENTS B. THE GRAMMAR. 32 27 28 29 30 31 32 33-64 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5i 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 The Parts of Speech .... The Article The Definite Article .... The Indefinite Article .... Chart of Declensions (article and pronoun) Remarks on the Article and Adjective . The Noun The Declensions ..... The Cases ...... The Present of fjctben, fein and roerben . Peculiar Use of Personal Pronouns The Gender of Nouns .... Gender denoted by Endings . Infinitives, etc., used as nouns The Gender of Compounds . Double Gender of Nouns Double Form of the Plural . Nouns used in the Singular only . Nouns used in the Plural only The " Strong " and " Weak " Declensions Classification of Nouns The eight regular forms of Declension . The first class masculine The second class masculine The third class masculine The first class feminine The second class feminine The first class neuter . The second class neuter The third class neuter . Table of the eight regular forms . Remarks on the Declensions Irregular forms of Declension Declension of Proper Nouns, etc. Review of Nouns Geographical Names and their Derivatives The Seasons ..... The Months . . . The Days of the Week CONTENTS 65-74 The Numerals .... 66 The Cardinals 67 Declension of Cardinals 68 Numeral Compounds . 69 Expressions of Time 70 The Ordinals 71 Declension of Ordinals 72 The Day of the Month 73 Weight, Measure and Quantity 74 Fractions .... 75-81 The Adjective 75 Declension of Adjectives 76 The Strong Declension 77 The Weak Declension . 78 The Mixed Declension . 79 Adjectives used as Substantives 80 Comparison of Adjectives 81 Syntax of Adjectives 82-93 The Pronoun .... 82 Personal Pronouns 83 Remarks on the Personal Pronouns 84 The Pronouns in Personal Address 85 Non-agreement of Pronoun with Antecedent 86 The Pronoun e3 . 87 Possessive Pronouns, mem, beirt etc. 88 The Possessives used Substantively 89 Demonstrative Pronouns, biejer, etc. 90 Interrogative Pronouns, tt>etct)er, roer and nm§ 91 Relative Pronouns, toeldjer, leer and roaS 92 Indefinites ..... 93 Adjectives after the Indefinites 94-98 The Adverb . . 95 Comparison of Adverbs 96 Adverbs from other parts of speech 97 Adjectives from Adverbs 98 A List of Adverbs in common use 99-107 The Preposition .... 100 Prepositions with the Genitive 101 Prepositions with the Dative 102 Prepositions with the Accusative . 70-75 70 71 71 71 72 73 74 74 75 75-83 75 76 76 77 78 79 81 84-107 84 85 86 89 89 9 1 92 94 98 100 101 106 107-110 107 107 108 109 111-119 in 112 114 CONTENTS SBC. 103 104 105 106 107 I 08-1 12 109 IIO III 112 "3 II4-U8 "5 116 117 118 119-174 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 The Prepositions {Continued). Prepositions with the Dative or Accusative Remarks on the Prepositions Contraction with the Definite Article Omission of the Preposition . Idiomatic Phrases with Prepositions The Conjunction General Connectives Adverbial Conjunctions Subordinating Conjunctions The uses of ttienn, matm and al§ The Interjection Construction of Sentences The Normal Order The Inverted Order The Transposed Order General Rules The Verb .... The Principal Parts of a Verb The " Weak " and " Strong " Verbs Names of the Modes and Tenses Use of the Tenses The Indicative and Subjunctive Modes Peculiar uses of the Subjunctive . The Imperative Mode . The Infinitive Mode The Infinitive preceded by $u <3tatt, oljne, and um with Infinitive The Infinitive without gu An English infinitive preceded by to English Infinitive after how, what or where The Passive Voice English Passive rendered into German Active Participles ..... The Present Participle The Past Participle Adjectives with the form of Participles The Future Passive Participle Comparison of Participles The uses of fyibeit, feitt and werbert SBerben and tuollen contrasted CONTENTS XI sec. The Verb {Continued). 143 £aben and fern as Auxiliaries 144 Verbs Conjugated with ^aben or fetn 145 £>aben, Conjugation of . 146 Setn, Conjugation of 147 28erben, Conjugation of 148 The Auxiliaries of Mode 149 Remarks on the Auxiliaries of Mode 150 The Causative Auxiliary laffett 151 Soben, Active Voice .... 152 Soben, Passive Voice .... 153 Examples of Weak Verbs 154 Orthographic Irregularities of Weak Verbs 155 ©eben, Conjugation of . 156 @5d)ert, Conjugation of . 157 The Mixed Conjugation, brennen, femtett, etc. 158 S)enfen, Conjugation of . . . 159 The Reflexive Verb ftcf) freuen 160 Separable and Inseparable Verbs 161 The Inseparable Prefixes 162 The Prefixes tttif} and boll 163 Separable and Inseparable Verbs contrasted 164 5ht§gef)ett, Conjugation of 165 SBetofjnen, Conjugation of 166 Verbs Separably or Inseparably Compounded 167 Verbs with Compound Prefixes 168 ©idj abtoenben, Conjugation of 169 Impersonal Verbs .... 170 Government of Verbs .... 171 The Strong or Irregular Verbs 172 Orthography of the Strong Verbs 173 Classified list of Strong Verbs 174 An Alphabetical list of Strong Verbs . 175 Review of Grammatical Forms PAGE I46 147 148 I50 152 154 155 157 158 160 162 162 164 166 168 168 170 172 172 172 173 173 174 176 176 177 178 179 182 183 184 212 213-217 CONTENTS Part II no. READING AND CONVERSATION. PAGE 1 Die Hande 218 2 Die Karten 218 3 Der Apfel 219 4 Die Feder 219 5 Der Hut . . . 220 6 Die Uhr .......... 220 7 Das Buch 221 8 Das Haus 221 9 Der Garten 222 10 Das Jahr 223 11 Die Geographie 223 12 Die Grille und die Ameise 224 13 Was ich liebe ......... 225 14 Die kleine Wohltaterin ....... 225 15 Du bist wie eine Blume 226 16 Das Kanarienvogelchen ....... 226 17 Die Biene und die Taube 227 18 Der Wolf und das Lamm 228 19 Die Schwalben ......... 228 20 Die Pfirsiche ......... 229 21 Die beiden Vogel 231 22 Das vierspannige Fuder Nahnadeln ..... 231 23 Die Einkehr ......... 233 24 Nicht zu Hause 233 25 Weisheit .......... 234 26 Gleiches mit Gleichem ....... 234 27 Das Heidenroslein . . 234 28 Robert Bruce und die Spinne 235 29 Scheiden .......... 236 30 Die Lorelei 236 31 Der Froschkonig . 237 32 Auf dem Harze 240 33 Deutsche Sprichworter 242 34 Epigramme und Stammbuch-Verse . . . 242 35 Hoffnung . 243 36 Das Schloss am Meere ....... 244 37 Das Veilchen 245 38 Gefunden .......... 246 CONTENTS xm 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5i 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 Der Wirtin Tochterlein Die Grenadiere . Wandrers Nachtlied Vergissmeinnicht Erlkonig Gliickwiinsche Zur Jahreswende O Strassburg Barbarossa . Wunsch Mignon Reiters Morgengesang Hans im Gliick . Eine Tasse Kaffee Ausziige aus Wilhelm Tell Szenen aus Wilhelm Tell Map of the Northern part of Germany Das deutsche Kaiserreich Eine Reise durch Deutschland Auf der Wohnungssuche Im Gasthause Im Hutgeschafte Bei dem Schneider In der Buchhandlung Eine Einladung . Ein Freundschafts Dienst In einem Geschaftsbureau Auf dem Postamt . » Auf dem Bahnhofe Geld, Mass und Gewicht Briefwechsel Translation Exercises German Songs with Music German-English Vocabulary English-German Vocabulary PAGE 246 247 248 249 249 250 251 251 252 253 253 254 254 258 269 271 286 287 289 296 297 298 298 299 30O 30I 302 302 302 303 304 305-3I6 317-324 325-359 360-372 APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR Word-formation. — Derivation and Composition, following p. 372 A NEW GERMAN COURSE PART FIRST INTRODUCTORY 1. The German Language and its Relation to English. German and English are closely related languages. Both belong to the Germanic group of the Indo-European family of languages. English was originally a Low-German or Platt-Deutsch dialect, more nearly related to Holland Dutch than to the High German of the present day. It was the language of the German, or rather Germanic, tribes that conquered England in the fifth century. Since then it has under- gone great changes and has been greatly enlarged and enriched, especially by its union with Norman-French. The historical facts that led to the establishment of a Germanic dialect on the soil of England will be of interest to the student. The original inhabitants of the British Isles were of the Celtic race which occupied, in ancient times, nearly the whole of western Europe. In the early part of the Christian era the Romans conquered the part now known as England and made it a Roman province which they called Britannia ; but in the early part of the fifth century the Roman legions were withdrawn, being needed elsewhere, and the province was thus left to itself. In this weakened condition it was exposed to the inroads of the Picts and Scots (from Scotland and Ireland), and being unable to defend itself against these invaders it sought the aid of its Teutonic neighbors across the North Sea. The Jutes of Denmark responded to this call, but when they had driven off the northern invaders they made war upon and conquered those whom they had come to help. About the same time came two other Teutonic tribes, the Angles and the Saxons, and in the end these three tribes overran and possessed the whole country, driving out or exterminating the Celtic inhabitants and making their permanent home in the land. i 2 INTRODUCTORY From the Angles the country received a new name, Angleland or England. These people called their language Anglisc, though writers of a later date called it Anglo-Saxon, and by this latter name it is now generally known, though it is sometimes called Old English. This Germanic dialect might have remained the permanent language of England but for the Norman conquest of the eleventh century which greatly influenced both language and people. The victory of William the Conqueror, at the battle of Hastings (A. D. 1066), marks an epoch in English history. The new rulers undertook to establish their language as well as their institutions among the conquered people, but this was found impossible. The common people clung to their native dialect, but received, in the course of time, a great number of French words, thus blending the two languages together and creating, in effect, a new one, namely, modern English, which attained its present form about the time of Queen Elizabeth in the sixteenth century. At the same time, and to their mutual advantage, the two races were also blended, so that the Norman conquest is now regarded as a most fortunate event. To the new English thus originating have been added many words from the Latin and other sources, making our language one of the most complex that has ever existed. It is also interesting to know that the Norman conquerors of England were originally of the same Germanic stock as the natives whom they subdued. They were the descendants of a colony of Norse- men or Northmen, bold sea rovers from the Scandinavian peninsula, who had settled in the north of France in the early part of the pre- vious century and had there adopted a French dialect. The English of to-day and their kinsmen in America are, therefore, as to their origin, far more Germanic than their speech. In beginning the study of German the great number of common words that resemble the English makes the vocabulary easy to learn, for it is just the commonest words of our language that belong to the Germanic stock. The greatest difficulty is with the gender of the nouns and with the declensions, in which only the diligent student becomes proficient. INTRODUCTORY 3 Das 2Xlj?l?abct. St a {ah) A a 9? n («») N n 53 a {bay) B b (*«) O o (£ c {(say) C c ? * (>>ajr) P P b {day) D d O q OH a q (g e («r) E e « r («r) R r f (#) F f @ f* (p^ C//^A Deutsche Schreibschrift r ch C^^i V V » ^Oty ' sir ^f4^ ck /x tz a o u INTRODUCTORY German Handwriting jfcw^z^^z^ C^tU^y^ tjt>?rif-^z^Z4^ /t^^-^^>^^^^^' &^y-?4^ws a* \^LSV-&Z^UC#> ) are represented by s. The compound f$ when changed to Roman is, by different writers, variously repre- sented by ss, sz, fs and E, the latter being generally used in this book. 4. In the German character, the short s (3) is used at the end of a word, whether standing alone or in composition, the long s (f) in other positions; e. g., ba$, bie)e3, feljr, fdjort, cmsogefyett, §cw3fdj(uffel, SSaffer. In these examples the round s (§) is written * A finely engraved German copy-book may be had from the publishers of this work. INTRODUCTORY 7 * in cm3gef)en and §au3fd)luffel, because au$ and §au^ are independ- ent words here compounded with gef)en and @d)liiffel ; but 2$ctf= in SSaffer is not a prefix ; it is only a syllable, and hence the long f is used. 5. When an ending of declension is added to a noun, final 3 is changed to f, as in ba§ (&xa§, Gen. be3 @rctfe3, etc., and final fj after a short root- vowel is changed to ff, as in ber ffiufa, Gen. be3 gtuffe3, etc. ; but when the root-vowel is long, the § is retained, as in ber gufj, Gen. be3 gu^e^, etc. 6. In the writing of these characters (3, f, ff, £,) the learner will find frequent cases of uncertainty in which it will be neces- sary to refer to the dictionary, where the printed character will always indicate the one to be written. 6. Capital Letters (@n>£e $ud)fta&ett)* With a capital initial are written : 1. The first word of a sentence, of a line in poetry, and of a direct quotation (as in English). 2. All nouns, common as well as proper, and all words used as nouns ; e. g., ba$ $au§, the house; bie airmen tmb bie 9tocf)en; the poor and the rich. 3. The personal pronoun of the 3d person plural (fie, ifyrer, H)nett, fie), when used in place of the 2d singular in polite address, and also the corresponding possessive %v)v ; e. g., SSoHen ©ie? will you f 2Bo ift 3§r $ud)? 3d) Ija&e e<3 Stjnen gegeben. Where is your hook ? I gave (have given) it to you. 4. Pronouns of the second person (bu, etc.) when they are to come under the eye of the person addressed, as in letters, other- wise not. 5. Parts of titles and proper names ; e.g., Dtto ber ©rofje, Otto the Great; ba§ ^flnigltdje $reuf3t|d)e golktmt, the royal Prussian custom-house ; bie SBeremigten ©tctcttett, the * United States ; ba% £ote 9fteer, the dead sea; bie SMmfdje Settling (the name of a newspaper at Cologne). 8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 6. Adjectives derived from the names of persons ; e. g., bte SSetbmcmnfdje 23udjf)anblitng, the Weidmann bookstore. 7. Adjectives derived from the names of cities or towns ; e. g., bte £ottbotter $3ritrfe, the London bridge. 7. Words not Capitalized. 1. Adjectives derived from the names of countries are not capitalized ; e. g., bte amerifamfdje OJaljne, the American flag. 2. The pronoun id), /, is not capitalized except where it com- mences a sentence ; e. g., ©eftern toax id) in dim g)orf, yesterday I was in New York. 3. Nouns used as other parts of speech (adverbs, prepositions or prefixes) are not capitalized; e. g., morgcn3, of a morning; \aU$, in case ; fetb tlllt, to cause pain. 8. The new German Orthography ($ie neuc beutftfje SHedjtfdjrei&ttng), 1. The German orthography is nearly phonetic. It was re- vised under the direction of the Prussian ministry of education in 1880 and again in 1 901, and now conforms, as nearly as pos- sible, to the spoken language. Spelling books and spelling lessons are unnecessary and unknown in the schools of Germany, „&&)Xdb tote bit rtdlttg fpritf)ft" (write as you correctly speak) is the general rule ; yet to foreigners the spelling presents some diffi- culties, for these two revisions have not been able to make it strictly phonetic. The pronunciation of the people, even of the educated, cannot be taken as a guide in spelling, for there are various dialects, especially the south German as distinguished from that of the north. The standard is said to be the pronun- ciation of the leading actors, who must not let it be known from their speech from whence they came. Their pronunciation is above all provincialisms. 2. As the old orthography is still found in books printed previous to 1880 and has not entirely disappeared from current literature, it may be well to note the principal changes effected by the two revisions. They consist : INTRODUCTORY 9 a. In the omission of the silent t) in such words as 9)?ut, £ei(, Slier, Xct(, rot, tun (formerly written Wlutfy, Xfyetl, Xfyter, %f)al, rotf), tfyun) ; also in the omission of the silent f) in all words ending in -turn ; as, SRetdjtnm, Srrtnm, etc. (formerly written 9?eitf)t()um, Srrtftnm, etc.). b. In writing the ending -ni3 instead of -mfj in such words as ©ebadjtnte, |)tnberm3. c. In writing the ending -terert in all verbs having that sound (a portion of them having formerly been written -tretl), such as ctbbteren, marfdjteren, regieren. d. In replacing c by f or %, according to the sound, in a con- siderable number of words of foreign origin ; as, Seftton, 9Mtton, spctrtigtp, instead of Section, Section, ^arttcip. e. In placing the umlaut sign over capital as well as over small letters ; as, Spfel, Ofen, Uoel (instead of 2(epfel, Oefen, Ue6el.) 9. Pronunciation ($te %u^pvad)c). A correct pronunciation is only to be gained by imitating the voice of a competent teacher, and the following explanations are intended only to assist such instruction. The minute directions for pronunciation sometimes given do not accomplish their purpose. Every pupil will, for better or worse, take his pronunciation from the teacher. Foreign sounds cannot be exactly described. They must be heard. It is therefore only as a basis for drill, conducted by the teacher, that the following explanations and examples are given. 10. The Vowels ($ie Wotak). There is no such variety in the sounds of the vowels as in English, but each vowel may be long or short. A vowel doubled or followed by f) is long. A vowel followed by a double con- sonant, and generally when followed by two separate consonants, is short. %l f a* — % has always the Italian sound, as in papa. a, aa long: ct'ber, t)a'6e, gafj'ne; §aar, Sfiaax. a short : boJ, toa&, fjat, fyat'te, Sftann, gall, ©aft. 10 NEW GERMAN COURSE (§•, £♦ — @ long" is pronounced like a in /# te / when short, nearly like e in met. e, ec long: le'fen, SRe'gen, SBe'fen, mef)r, 23ee're, 9J?eer. c short : e3, beS, ef'fen, bren'nen, fyeffen, toer'fen. In an unaccented syllable, especially at the end of a word, e is very slight and obscure : SBlu'me, $ctr'te, Sam'pe, Sftor'gen. 3f $♦ — 3 has usually the short sound of i in pin, milk. It is long and like e in me when followed by ft, and in some words when followed by some other single consonant. i long : il)m, ifjn, ifjr, t^'ncn ; mtr, btr, SDft'ne, Wbd, toi'ber, ©til. t short : nut, bin, btft, tft, bin'nen, fin'nen, £)tng, 9fting, Sftt'ter. The sound of long i vapine is heard only in the diphthong ei, as in meitt, betlt, fein. ©, 0„ — D long sounds like o in 00/1/ short has no exact equivalent in English ; it resembles u in fun. 0, 00, long : bot, rot, §og, flog, o'ber, $ol)'ne, $oot. short : Oon, Ooll, ^ot'te, SBo'dje, bort, £)orf, 3°™. U, U. — U long is like 00 in moon ; when short it is nearly like 00 in book. it long : $ut, 231u'me, ru'fen, Ufjr, Slnl), @djuf), ©dju'le. u short : 9M1, 9?nm'mer, SBut'ter, £uft, ©tnn'be. 5), t> 4 — g) is always a vowel and is pronounced like the Ger- man t; e. g., ©tyn'tcuj, ©tfl'stem' ; except in some words from the Greek not yet fully naturalized, where it sounds like the umlaut ii ; as in %t)'pf)V&, !QtypO*tf)&' . 11. The Modified Vowels ($ie Umlaute). These vowels (% a, D 0, U ii, fin an) are so peculiar as to be acquired only under the direction of a competent teacher. Ex- amples are : a long : SBti'ber, fdjab'litf), todlj'len, toal)'renb. a short : fjfit'te, tam'me, tp'fel, §dn'be, p&'fce. long : fdjon, Ijo'ren, SBd'get, Sld'mg, £ol)'ne, ©ol)'ne. short : fon'nen, QoTte, SM'fe, Kdp'fe, ©djty'fer. INTRODUCTORY I I it long: grim, ii'ben, (Stfjii'Ier, fitf)'(en, SBii'djer. it short : burnt, fimf, fjitbftf), @d)fttf fcl, ful'len. iiu (like German en or English oy) ; ©ebdu'be, SBdu'me, ctu'^er. 12. The Nasal Vowels ($te Sftafettlaute). Nasal vowels are found only in words borrowed from the French. They are, however, numerous in German, and they retain their French sound. They are represented by the vowels a, e, i, o, followed by m or rt ; but they are only to be acquired from one accustomed to French pronunciation. They appear in such words as 33a|'fin' f reservoir; (Sou-jm', cousin; ©at-fon', sea- son; ^ar-fum' , perfume ; (Sfjam-pignon', mushroom. 13. The Diphthongs ($te Styfjtljottge)- ^C sounds like English long e in me ; e. g., bie, bte'ueu, £)ier f Steb, £ier. 20 and ei sound like i in pine ; e. g., Wax, ^at'fer, em, mem, bem, fern, fern. At the end of a few words the e of ie is separately pronounced ; e. g., ga-mflH St'm-e, %ra=a j 6'bt==e. 2lu sounds like ow in /*?«/; e. g., bleat, bream, fau'feu, £)au3. 2tu and ett sound nearly like oy in %// e. g., §ciu'fer, SBrdu'te, (Ste^bdu'be, neu r neurt, Ijeu'te. 14. The Consonants ($te Sfrmfottantett). There are no silent letters in the spelling of German words, except () in certain connections, and even here it serves to lengthen a preceding vowel, as in u)m, if)U, ifmeu. Consonants will be mentioned only where they differ in sound from the English. 2$ f ft? when final or followed by another consonant, sounds nearly like p : ob, SDteb, 2auh, ejefyabf . (£, c* — In true German words c occurs only in the com- pounds dj, cf, frf). In foreign words it is soft before e, i, andy, 12 NEW GERMAN COURSE otherwise hard. The soft sound of c is like English ts or the German §: D'ce*cm (o'-tsa-an) (St'ce-ro (tsee'-tsa-ro), (St)4m'ber. (£ sounds like k-ts before e or t as in Accept (ak-tsept'), also writ- ten $lf§ept' ; elsewhere it sounds like ck, as in acclamie'ren, also written afftamte'reu. S, bat the end of a word or before another consonant sounds nearly like t : ^>cmb, Sartb, gefartbt. This sound is between t and b. ©, g at the beginning of a word or syllable sounds like g in go: gut, ge'gert, $er'ge, but when final after a, o, u, au, it is like the German 6) though somewhat softer : %olq, mag, lag ; after any other vowel or consonant it is palatal like tf) in id) : ©ieg, Sftagb, £'6'mg. ($ is distinctly pronounced before n: gua'big, (Sfaom. In words of French origin g before e preserves its French sound, which is like z in azure : ^a'ge, D-rau'ge, ge-me'ren. $g f f) at the beginning of a word or syllable is aspirated as in English ; e. g., , f, § at the end of a word or syllable has the hissing sound of s in this. At the beginning of a word or syllable it has a sound between s and z : fte, fel)r, bie'feS, baS-fefbe. A double f (ff) sounds the same as § at the end of a word : SBctf'fer, totffen. &p and ft* — ©p at the beginning of a word sounds like ftfjp : jpre'djen, fpielen, ©pet'fe, and ft at the beginning of a word sounds like )tf)t : fte'tjen, fto'jgen, @tem, but elsewhere fp and ft sound as in English : ^tto'fpe, er'fte, %ixx\t In compounds this initial sound of fp and ft holds good : cm^fpretfjert, cm'ftofjen. $, t sounds as in English in all true German words. In some words taken from the French it sounds like ts : ^a-fton', ©taction', 2tto>t=ttott\ In ify the f) is always silent, as in £f)ron, ^e-o-rie', Xf)er*mo* me'ter. 3$, t> generally sounds like English /, as in SSet'ter (fetter), SBa'ter, toor. In some foreign words it sounds like v ; e. g., SBa'fe, SBiHa, S^e-ne^btg, ^o^af, but at the end of a foreign word it sounds like /as in Wmkta^ttt), SDa'tto. 2®, tt> sounds like English v, as in too, tva§, toaxm, toemt, So'toe, except where it follows a consonant in the same syllable. Here it approaches the sound of the English w, as in jioet, gttmn'gtg, ivoax, fcfittrim'men, ©djtuef'ter. $, 5 always sounds like English & in &r ; e. g., ju, gtoet, Qdt, £erg. i 15. Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs. (&f), d) has a guttural sound after the vowels a, o, it, QU, as in ad), nad), nod), 93udj, aitd), §aud), and a softer or palatal sound after other letters, as in id), midj, retdj, eucfj, burd), meldjer, Sftctb- djen. In words from the French, 6# sounds like sck, as in demote', chamois, (Sf)aufsfettr/ , fireman, 14 NEW GERMAN COURSE Whenever cf) is followed by § in the same syllable it has a f sound ; e. g., Ddj§, 2Baei)$, £atf)§, toad) 'fen. But this rule does not apply where §> is a contraction of e£, as in 23ttd)3 (contraction of 23ucf)e3). In some words from the Greek cJi sounds like k, as in (£t)rtftit£>. In words from the French it is like sh as in (£()cf f (£()Ctrtte f (Sljaife. ff and fy have a hissing sound like s in ///z> ; e. g., SSaffer, baJ3, ©trafee. Note. — ft, although called ess-zet, is not a compound of f and g, but of f and g, and in Roman characters is written ss, fs or id. ®d), f eft sounds like English ^ in disk ; e. g., ©djule, fdjtoctrg, ^ttn'jcfyen, mi'fdjen. ^ff Pf* — Each letter is here pronounced ; e. g., $pferb, Spfetf, SPfunb. $ty, pi) sounds like f; e. g., p^W, *$)t% 91 g, ttg final is pronounced like #£- in thing, although in north Germany there is an added k sound, making 9iing, for example, sound nearly like Ditnf, and ©djretbnng like (Sd)rei6imf. %% sounds like German §, as in ©d)Ctl3, fttjen, fe£en. The German pronunciation is, in general, stronger and more emphatic than the English. One must guard against slighting any sound, especially the vowels. 16. Compound Words (gufammengefeijte Shorter). Words forming a compound, or a word and its prefix, must be separately pronounced and accented ; e. g., beurtetfen (be-ur'tei-len), toeggefyen (toeg'ge^en), beetlen (be^et'len). 17. Review Exercise (SBteberljofattg), 2(ber, rjctbe, gatyne, $aax ; — ba§, §at, SQtonn, gaff, ©aft Sefen, SRegen, mefyr, SO^eer ; — e3, be<§, effen, $arte. 3t)m, tf)n, tfyr, ifynen, mtr, bit, 33t6el ; — in, fjtn, ift, btft. 33ot r rot, SBofytte, $oot ; — Don, ooff, bort, £)orf, 3 orn - ©ut, SBIume, Uf)r, ®uf), ©djule, rufen; — 9M, Summer, Gutter, £uft. INTRODUCTORY 1 5 SBaber, ferjdbiiefj, rodrjlen ; — ©attbe, 9(pfef, $(a£e, rjdtte. ©efjbn, tjoren, SBdget, ®bnig ; — format, SBolf e, ©etjbpfer. @rrm, tiben, (Sdjiiler, frrtjlen ; — burnt, funf, ©tfjliiffel. 3)ie, bienen, fjter, %kx, £teb ; — SDtot, ®atfer ; em, mem. 5Iuf, blau, braun, £au3, faufen, $aum, au3, aufgebaut. Sfteu, ueuu, tjeute, Sente, SBeute ; — |)dufer, ©ebdube, ^dunre, |)dute. Db, 2)ieb, £aub, ge'^aOt ; — (Steer o, Gtitmber, Accent, (Safar. £)anb, £anb, gejanbt ; — £ag, lag, Sftagb ; tdgltct) ; jemanb, Suit. Victim, fjalf, |)dlfte; — dual, Quelle, Outttung, quer, .Outtte. (Ste, fefjr, biefe3; — fpredjen, ftct)fen f ©tern; ®nofpe. Nation, (Station, 2(bbttion ; — £()ron, Sweater, %$tt, £t)eorie. better, better, Oerftetjen ; — Diommatto ; $afe, $tlla. $80, roa3, menn, £oroe — groei, gmangig, groar, §er^, ©erjatj. Set), mid), btdj, reicfj, buret) ; — acfj, brad), ftad), audj. Cd)3, 83ad)$ ; (SfjriftuS ; — (Srjef, Grjartte, Grjaife, dormant. Safe, gufr ©trafee, ®affe, SBaffer ; — «Pfcrb r ^funb ; ^itofopt). 18. Reading Exercise (fiefeu&mtg). The following sentences contain all the elementary sounds of the language with frequent repetitions, and if correctly pro- nounced and read until familiar there will be no further trouble with German pronunciation : i. 3d) r)abe eine merge gatvtte. -3d) fann (efen unb fcr)rerben. @uten Xag, roie get)t eg Qi)nm ? (B get)t mir gut, ier) battle, unb $fmen ? So tft Sofyann? -3d) rr>et§ nter)t, id) t)abe tt)n titer) t gefet)en. i. Ich habe eine weisse Fahne. Ich kann lesen und schreiben. Guten Tag, wie geht es Ihnen? Es geht mir gut, ich danke, und Ihnen ? Wo ist Johann ? Ich weiss nicht, ich habe ihn nicht gesehen. i. I have a white flag. I can read and write. Good day, how do you do ? I am well, I thank you, and you ? Where is John ? I do not know ; I have not seen him. 2. £)u bift rote eiue 33lume. 3)iefe gat)ne ift rot, roeit} unb blau. £iefe§ £)orf ift fd)on. £>er 9Jtotm fifct in einem lleinen 33oote. £)iefe Stpfet finb reif. ©refer §ut ift fdiroar^. Diefe (gdjute ift grot}. l6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. Du bist wie eine Blume. Diese Fahne ist rot, weiss und blau. Dieses Dorf ist schon. Der Mann sitzt in einem kleinen Boote. Diese Apfel sind reif. Dieser Hut ist schwarz. Diese Schule ist gross. 2. Thou art like a flower. This flag is red, white and blue. This village is beautiful. The man sits in a small boat. These apples are ripe. This hat is black. This school is large. 3. 3d) t)abe %\xm §anbe. Der $oget fingt. Die 23ogel fingen. (gbuarb ber ©iebente ift $onig Don (Sngtanb. Gormen @te bentfd) fprecfyen? $a, em toentg. <5pvtd)tn &k ba% Sort rttfjtig an3 ! 3. Ich habe zwei Hande. Der Vogel singt. Die Vogel singen. Eduard der Siebente ist Konig von England. Konnen Sie deutsch sprechen ? Ja, ein wenig. Sprechen Sie das Wort richtig aus ! 3. I have two hands. The bird sings. The birds sing. Edward the Seventh is king of England. Can you speak German ? Yes, a little. Pronounce the word correctly ! 4. Da3 ®ra3 ift grim. Die (Stfjiifer fittb fletftig. 2Inna fingt ein fd)one$ 8teb. SBUljelm ber ftmtitt ift $aifer Don Deutfdjtcmb. Der §imme( ift Man. Die gciufer finb groft nnb fcfyon. 4. Das Gras ist griin. Die Schiiler sind fleissig. Anna singt ein schones Lied. Wilhelm der Zweite ist Kaiser von Deutschland. Der Himmel ist blau. Diese Hauser sind gross und schon. 4. The grass is green. The pupils are industrious. Anna sings a beautiful song. William the Second is emperor of Germany. The sky is blue. These houses are large and beautiful. 5. Dtefe ^Pferbe faufen fefyr ftfjnetf. Dtefe £eute fprecfyen beutfdj nnb engttfdj. 2Ba$ fiir ein ©ebtiube ift ba$> ? (53 ift ein ©djutfjauS. (Safar mar ein rdmifdjer §etb. 5. Diese Pferde laufen sehr schnell. Diese Leute sprechen deutsch und english. Was fiir ein Gebaude ist das ? Es ist ein Schulhaus. Casar war ein romischer Held. 5. These horses run very fast. These people speak German and English. What kind of a building is that? It is a school-house. Caesar was a Roman hero. 6. $fy ijatte ba& $ncf) in ber retfjten §anb. -genre ift ber oierte 3uii. Die ^fafnten Don Dooib finb in ber 33tbel. Diefe Quelle ift fiifjl nnb erfrifcfyenb. ielletrf)t morgen. £)er £otoe ift ein fttonbtier. $)iefe s Dcauer ift t>on @tein. 7. Die Eisenbahn-Station ist in dieser Strasse. Mein Vater ist nicht zu Hause. Gehen Sie heute abend ins Theater ? Nein, nicht heute, aber vielleicht morgen. Der Lowe ist ein Raubtier. Diese Mauer ist von Stein. 7. The railroad station is in this street. My father is not at home. Are you going to the theatre this evening ? No, not to-day, but per- haps to-morrow. The lion is a beast of prey. This wall is of stone. 8. flatten (gie Don etttS bis fittif ! (SinS, ^toei, bret, trier, fiinf. .Jft btefer !3Jcann retcf) ober arm ? @r ift toeber retdj nod) arm. £a3 $ferb ift ein §an3tier. 1. Punctuation in German is nearly the same as in English. The only essential difference relates to the comma, which, in German, is used before every dependent clause ; e. g., 3)te3 tft ber §ut, ben id) in 9?ero g)orf gefauft fjaoe, 7^w w the hat which I boitght {have bought) in New York. Sdj f)offe, bafs er 6alb lommen ioerbe, / hope that he will soon come. 2. The pupil must guard against too long a pause, and espe- cially against letting the voice fall, at a comma when thus placed. The purpose of the comma in this case is not to indicate a pause, but to cut off the dependent from the principal clause. INTRODUCTORY 19 21. The Hyphen ($er Stitbeftridj), 1. The use of the hyphen in German differs somewhat from its use in English. It is not used to separate the parts of short compounds such as bte Stiirglotfe, the door-bell, yet it may be used in the case of several long words that would be unconnected in English, such as bte geuer^erfid)erung^@efeEf(^aft f the fire insur- ance company. 2. This compound might also be written as one word, thus : geuert)erftc^erung§gefeK|d)aft; and the language readily admits of even longer compounds ; e. g., ©tafylbrafytfetlftra^enbaftntoagett, which is only a cable street-car, although compounded of six words meaning steel-wire-rope-street-way-carriage (©tctf)l*£)raf)t= ©etl'@traJ3en^a^tt^agert). The student need not be alarmed at the sight of long compounds, as they are readily separated into their elements and are understood as separate words. 3. There is a use of the hyphen peculiar to the German in such compounds as bct<§ (Sin- unb 5lu3treten, the going in and out ; Dforb* tmb ©iibamertfa, North and South America ; ber ©d)ufy= unb £eber£)anbler, the shoe and leather dealer. 22. Syllabication ($ie (Stlfcetttrenmntg), 1. The division into syllables is determined mainly by the pro- nunciation and is such that in general each syllable after the first must commence with a consonant except in compound words ; e. g., te'jert, to read; Wb'kx, eagle ; SBct'ter, father ; %ox 'ten, garden ; fdj)ret / 6en, to write ; etn'tre-ten, to enter. 2. A single consonant between two vowels goes with the last one, and of two or more consonants thus placed the last one only goes with the second vowel, thus : Sa=ben, 5Ip-fe( f btimp^ert ; but & — ft, as in brucfen (briif-fen), and ft is never divided ; thus : er= fien§. 3. These rules need to be especially observed when dividing a word at the end of a line. Do not commence a new line with a 20 NEW GERMAN COURSE vowel, except in the case of a compound as : ^off-amt, post-office. Do not write 2Bot)rt=tmg f dwelling, but 2Sol)=ntmg ; not fpred^ett, but fyre-cfjen ; not (SHn'leit-nng,, but Qnn'Iekung,, etc. 23. Beginnings of Conversation (According to the objective method). For the better understanding of these conversations refer in advance to §§ 29-31 and 23, 10. 1. The Numerals from One to Twenty-one ($)te 9?nmeralien Don ein3 bi$ einunb^tnan^ig). 1 ein£ 8 afyt 15 fftnfeeljn 2 groet 9 newt 16 fecf^erjn 3 brei 10 getjn 17 ftebgetjn 4 t)ier 11 elf 18 actjtgefyn 5 ftof 12 gtoMf 19 neun^erjn 6 fedjg 13 breigefyn 20 atoanjig 7 fteben 14 rjtergetjn 21 etnunb^toanjtg 3af)(en @ie Don ein3 bi3 ^ef)n, Count from one to ten. 28ie oiele ©crjiiter finb in btejer How many pupils are there in Piaffe ? this class ? 3arjlen ©ie bie ®nctben, Count the boys. 3(if)len cmb, the hand ein S5ucr) r a book in ber §cmb, in the hand nen, /z ift \>a$ ? What is that ? £)ag ift ein ©lag, That is a glass. Sft bag ©lag t)oll ober leer ? Is the glass full or empty ? (£g ift leer, It is empty. £$a3iftbct3? What is that? 2)ag ift ein Stag, That is a pitcher. 3ft SSctffer in bem $ruge ? Is there water in the pitcher ? 3a, SSaffer ift in bem Stage, Yes, water is in the pitcher. Set) gtefee Staffer ang bem Stage I pour water out of the pitcher in bag ®(a§, into the glass. 5ft ba§ ©lag t)oH ober leer? Is the glass full or empty ? ©S ift tjalb OoE, It is half full. 4. £)ie ganb. — The Hand. eine §anb, a hand ein Singer, a finger roelctje §anb ? which hand ? rote m'ele, how many ? bk §anbe, the hands jatjle (&at)len ©te), count 22 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2Bag tfi bag ? $)a§ ift eine £>anb, 2£elrf)e£anb ift eg? (£g tft bte red)te §anb, ^elcrje £>anb ift bag ? £)a£ tft bte (tnfe «£)anb, 3£a3 tft ba§ ? 2)ag tft ein ginger, 2Bie oiele Singer t)a6en ©ie ? 3d) f)a6e jetjn ginger, Qatjlen ©ie bie ginger, (Sing, gtr-ei, brei, uier, fimf, fecf)g, fteben, ad)t, neun, gerjn, What is that ? That is a hand. Which hand is it ? It is the right hand. Which hand is that ? That is the left hand. What is that ? That is a finger. How many fingers have you ? I have ten fingers. Count the fingers. One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. 5. £)te gctfyne. bie gafyne, the flag etne gafyne, a flag ein Streifen, a stripe ■The Flag. ein ©tern, a star frag fitr eine, what kind of a fefyr fdjon, very beautiful amerifanifd), American. SBagiftbag? £)a3 ift eine gafyte, 2Sa3 fitr eine garjne tft eg ? (£g ift bte amerifanifcrje garjne, 2Bag tft bag ? QaZ tft ein ©treifen, 3af)(e (ftctrjlen @te) bie ©treifen, Sing, fttnei, brei .... bret^etjn, SBaStftbaS? £)ag ift ein ©tern. SSie t»ie£e ©rente ? ©ieben unb tiier^ig ©terne, 3ft bie gatjne fcrjon? 3a, fie ift fefyr fctjdn, What is that ? That is a flag. What kind of a flag is it ? It is the American flag. What is that ? That is a stripe. Count the stripes. One, two, three . What is that ? That is a star. How many stars ? Forty-seven stars. Is the flag beautiful ? Yes, it is very beautiful. thirteen. INTRODUCTORY 23 6. £)ct$ Sftedjnen. — The Reckoning. ein getjler, a mistake geljen, to go bie Xctfel, the blackboard fd^reiben, to write 2$ie tiiel ift atoet unb bret ? 3tt)et unb bret tft fed)3. 3ft "ba£ rtdjttg ? Dcein, ba£ ift ein gefyler. 28ie toiel tft gtnei unb brei ? 3tuei unb bret tft fitnf. 2)a3 ift ritf)tig. 2$ie Diet ift breimal bier ? £>reima( trier ift gtnolf. ©et)e (geljen SBitdj auf ba§ ^ult.(acc), / lay the book on the desk (motion to a place). For the better understanding of these examples see §103. 24 NEW GERMAN COURSE ftef)en, to stand id; ftetye, I stand gefjen, to go id) gelje, I go fatten, to hold itf) fjalte, I hold legen, to lay id) lege, I lay liegen, to lie z§> liegt, it lies fteUen, to place id) [telle, I place Ijangen, to hang e£ tjangt, it hangs Sc| ftefye an bent $)Mte, I stand by the desk. 3d) gefye an ba$ ^enfter, I go to the window. 3d) l)alte bie geber in ber §anb, I hold the pen in the hand. 3d) lege bie geber auf ba$ ^nlt, I lay the pen on the desk. ©ie liegt auf bem $)Mte, It lies on the desk. 3d) f)ange ba§ 33ilb an bie 2Banb, I hang the picture on the wall, (§& l)dngt an ber 2Banb, It hangs on the wall. 3d) gelje an bie %iix t I go to the door. 3d) ftel)e an ber £itr, I stand at the door. 8. 5luf and ju as Separable Prefixes. 5Iufmad)en, to open; ^u'madjen, to close (160). Scr) mad)e bie %\xx auf, I open the door. 3d) mad)e bie %m %u, I close the door. Stfj madje ba$ genfter auf, I open the window. 3d) mad)e ba$ genfter §u, I close the window. Set) tnad)e ba§ $udj auf, I open the book. 3d) mad)e ba3 33ud) §u, I close the book. 3ft bie £itr auf ober gu ? Is the door open or shut ? , the money bag gaug, the house ba^> Qad), the roof bag §0(5, the wood bag ttnb, the child ba?> 2Bort, the word bag £3rot, the bread INTRODUCTORY 27 ber Stpfel, the apple ber Dfett, the stove ber 33ater, the father ber 23ogef, the bird ber @e(b, the hero bie £tit, the time bte 9^acf)t, the night bie §anb, the hand bte 8uft, the air bie (gtabt, the city ber $nabe, the boy bte Sanb, the wall bag §aar, the hair bag $af)r, the year ba§ gteifct), the meat ba$ dimmer, the room ba§ Sfieffer, the knife bag Staffer, the water These nouns make a convenient spelling lesson, the letters being pronounced in German. The thorough learning of these words, so that on hearing the English the German can be given with the article and correctly pronounced, will be of great future value. 25. Some toetfj, white fd)toctr$, black rot, red Mem, blue grim, green cjeftj, yellow braim, brown grau, gray grog, large ftein, small fang, long Common Adjectives !ur§, short gut, good fd)lecf)t, bad retdj), rich arm, poor alt, old jurtg, y° un g neu, new fjeifj, hot fatt, cold tjodfj, high (®eMudjittf)e 2lbje¥tit>e). ntebrtg, low ftarf, strong fdjtoad), weak fdt}rr>er, heavy letdjt, light fdjarf, sharp ftumpf, dull ftetl, steep reif, ripe fdjon, beautiful rtwjlid), useful Exercise (It bung.) £)er §ut tft jdjtoara, 2)ie Q3tume tft fctjirn, £)a3 JQauZ tft gro^, £)er Slpfel tft reif, 2)te §anb tft ftarf, 2)a3 23ud) ift tteu, liefer (32, 4) ©tuf)( tft ntebrtg, SMefe 9?abet tft Hem, $iefeS 2Bort tft tang, The hat is black. The flower is beautiful. The house is large. The apple is ripe. The hand is strong. The book is new. This chair is low. This needle is small. This word is long. 28 NEW GERMAN COURSE 3ft ber «£mt fcl)tDar§? Is the hat black ? 3a, er (83, 1) ift fdjtoarj, Yes, it is black. 3ft btefe SBlume fcfjtm ? Is this flower beautiful ? Set, fie ift fdjon, Yes, it is beautiful. 3ft btefe3 £cm3 groft ? Is this house large ? 3a, e3 ift grofs, Yes, it is large. In the last sentences observe that the pronoun varies with the gender of the antecedent. Translate and Write: r. The table is new. 2. The wall is white. 3. The knife is sharp. 4. The hat is black. 5. The flag is red, white and blue. 6. The street is long. 7. The hair is brown. 8. The water is cold. 9. Money is useful. 10. This boy is poor. 11. This city is large. 12. This child is beautiful. 26. Some Verbs in Common Use (Gtebrdudjltdje SSerbcn). 1 . The principal parts of a German verb are the infinitive, the imperfect (or past) tense and the past participle. 2. Most verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary fjaben, to have, a few with feirt, to be (143). 3. At this early stage of the study it would be well to turn to the conjugations of the three auxiliaries, fjabert, fein and toerbert (145-6-7), making them familiar by daily reading and correct pronunciation ; then, in like manner, take up the model verbs lo6en (151) conjugated with I)a6en, and gefyert (156) conjugated with fein. This will greatly facilitate the understanding of the elementary reading and conversation that will occur before these verbs are reached in regular course. 4. The following are the principal parts of some of the more commonly used verbs. As they constitute an excellent exercise in spelling and pronunciation, as well as in learning their mean- ing and use, time may be profitably spent in making the pupil very familiar with them. The most of them will be of frequent occurrence in the exercises of this book. INTRODUCTORY 29 Principal Parts (§ a up t for men). INFINITIVE IMPERFECT PAST PART. Ijaben, to have f)atte gefjabt fetn, to be* mar getoefen Herbert, to become* tourbe getoorben loben, to praise lobte gelobt lieben, to love Itebte geltebt fcwfett, to buy faufte gelauft nerfctufert, to sell berfaufte berfauft fpielen, to play fptelte gefptelt gotten, to count gape ge^arjlt lefyren, to teach ler)rte geteljrt banlen, to thank banfte gebanlt terrteit, to learn lernte gelernt fagen, to say, to tell fagte gefagt fef)en, to see fat) gefe^en ftt^en, to sit w gefeffen getjen, to go* sm gegangen fommett, to come* tarn gefommen effen, to eat a6 gegeffen trinfen, to drink Iran! getrunfen lefen, to read Ia3 gelefen ftngen, to sing jang gefungen fpredjett, to speak jpract) gefprocfjen fcfjretben, to write fdjrteb gefcfjrieben geben, to give gab gegeben leifyen, to lend m 1 gettefyen nefjmen, to take natjm genommen Dertteren, to lose berlor nerloren finben, to find janb gefunben oerftefjen, to understand oerjtanb nerftanben benfen, to think baifytt gebacfjt roiffen, to know (a fact) rouble genmjit feimett, to know (a person) fannte gefannt 5. In the above list th e verbs marked with a star (*) are con- jugated with jetn (146), all the others with fyaben (145). 30 NEW GERMAN COURSE Exercise (U bung). 3d) f)abe, id) fyatte, id) f)abe getjabt, I have, I had, I have had. 3d) bin, id) roar, id) bin geroefen, I am, I was, I have been. 3d) lobe, id) fobte, id) \)abt gefobt, I praise, I praised, I have praised. 3d) faufe, id) faufte, id) fjabe ge= I buy, I bought, I have bought. fcmft, 3d) fptele, id) fipielte, id) t)ctbe ge- I play, I played, I have played. fyiett, 3d) fortune, id) lam, id) bin gefom- I come, I came, I have come. men, Translate and Write : i. I sell, I sold, I have sold. 2. I count, I counted, I have counted. 3. I say, I said, I have said. 4. I sing, I sang, I have sung. 5. I write, I wrote, I have written. 6. I give, I gave, I have given. 7. I find, I found, I have found. 8. I understand I understood, I have understood. 9. I learn, I learned, I have learned. 10. I take, I took, I have taken, n. I go, I went, I have gone. 6. Observe that in nearly all verbs the 1st person singular present is formed by dropping the final n of the infinitive, as : 3d) ijabe, / have ; 3d) lobe, I praise ; 3d) faufe, / buy. 7. The only exceptions to this rule in the verbs of the above list are fein (present, id) bin) and miffen (present, id) toeife). The student should also, at this early stage, learn the principal rules of German construction, or order of words, which differ consid- erably from the English (114). The Grammar. — 2)te $rcmtmattt The Parts of Speech (®te £Bo*tarten)* 27. There are ten parts of speech : £)er 9Irttfet ober ba$ ©e)d)(ed)t$toort, the article. 2)a£ ©ubftanttu ober ba3 <£)auphoort, the noun or substantive. S)a§ ^rortomert ober ba$ gitrtoort, the pronoun. 2)a3 Slbjectto ober ba3 ©tgeufdjaffcStoort, the adjective. 2)ct!3 Dcumerale ober bas Qarjlmort, tne numeral. £a3 95erb ober ba3 getttrjort, the verb. 2)a3 2lboerb ober ba§ UntftcmbStoort, the adverb. £te ^rdpofttton ober ba§> $Berf)d(tm3toort, the preposition. Xie ^onjunftton ober ba$ 53inberuort, the conjunction. £te Snterjeftioit ober ba$ 5Iu3ruftmg3- the interjection. toort, The article, the noun, the pronoun, the adjective and the nu- merals are declined. The verb is conjugated. The other parts of speech are uninflected. The Article (£er SUvtiUl). 28. The articles are used in general as in English, but are rendered difficult by their numerous forms of declension for case, gender and number. 29. The Definite Article ($er fccftimmte Slrtifel)- The definite article has a distinct form for each gender, thus, in the nominative : 9ft ct§ f uHtium ^cmininum 9£ e ii t r li m plural (masculine) (feminine) (neuter) (for all genders) ber, the bte, the bag, the 3i bte, the 32 NEW GERMAN COURSE 30. The Indefinite Article (3er unbcftimmtc s iirttfel). i. The indefinite article eitt, a or an, was originally the numeral ettt, one, and has no plural form. 2. The article, like the noun, is declined in four cases resem- bling the first four Latin cases. 3. To these declensions are added, for convenience of ref- erence, the forms of the personal pronouns of the 3d person (82), since the definite article is frequently used in connection with these forms, thus : ber — er ; bte — fie ; ba$ — e3 ; etc. / 31. Chart of Declensions. 1. The Definite Article (2)er bcfttmmtc Strtifel) : Singular. Plural. e(d)e3 which toefefye which folcfjer fo£ct)e foIct)e§ such foldje such manner manage manages many a manege many 4. Example (SBeiftriel) : Singular. Plural. 2Ka8f. gem. STient 9K. g. 9?. N. biefer btefe btefeS this btefe these G. biefer biefer bte|e§ of this biefer of these D. btefent biefer btefent to this btefen to these A. btefen btefe btefeS this btefe these 5. Like the indefinite article in the singular and like biefer in the plural are declined the possessive pronouns, meitt, my ; betn, thy ; fetn, his, its; unfer, our ; t\Xtx,your; ifyv,her, their, and also the indefinite numeral fetn, no, not any (87). * Compare the endings of biefer with those of the definite article. They are sometimes said to be alike, but in the nominative and accusative of the feminine and neuter singular, and in the plural, some differences will be observed (e instead of te and eg instead of as). 34 NEW GERMAN COURSE 6. Example (SBeifptel) : Singular. Plural. aw'dsi. gem. stfeut. 2K. ft. ft. Nom. mein meitte mein meitte my Gen. meineS metner mettteS meitter of my Dat. metnem meiner metnem meittett to my Ace. meinen meitte mettt meitte my Exercise (II bung). £)er $ut, the hat ; bie $arte, the card ; ba<§ 23ud), the book. (Sin §ut, a hat ; eine £ctrte, a card ; ein 33nrf), a book. S)ie £)ute, the hats ; bie Garten, the cards ; bie 23tttf)er, the books. 3d) fyabe ben £mt, bie Starte unb bag SBucfj, I have the hat, the card and the book. £)ie ^ctrte ift in bent 23urf)e, the card is in the book. 2)ie Garten finb in ben SSitdjern, the cards are in the books. 2Bo ift ber $ut ? |)ier ift er. 2Bo ift bie ®arte ? £ter ift fie. 2Bo ift ba$ «u^ ? §ier ift e3. SSer §at ben §ut ? 3d) [)abe if)n. SSer §at bie ®arte ? 3d) fja6e fie. 3Ser f)at ba$ SBudj ? 3d) fjabe e§. 2Ser f)at bie |mte ? 3d) £)a6e fie. Where is the hat ? Here it is. Where is the card ? Here it is. Where is the book ? Here it is. Who has the hat ? I have it. Who has the card ? I have it. Who has the book ? I have it. Who has the hats ? I have them. Observe that fyaben governs the accusative. Translate and Write : * i. The table and the chair. 2. This city and this village. 3. I have the pen and the letter. 4. The table is in the house. 5. Where is the apple? Here it is. 6. Where is the pen? * All words required for the translation exercises will be found in the examples imme- diately preceding, or in the vocabulary at the end of the book. Each preparatory exercise should be carefully studied before attempting the translation. For these nouns see § 24. THE ARTICLE 35 Here it is. 7. Where is the bread ? Here it is. 8. Who has the button ? I have it. 9. Who has the watch ? I have it. 10. Who has the cards? I have them. 11. My hat, my pen and my book. 7. The ending of an adjective after the indefinite article (or any word declined like the indefinite article) is the same as after the definite article, except where the indefinite article lacks the gender ending. In these cases the adjective takes the ending er in the masculine and t$ in the neuter. 8. Example (Setftriel) : MASC FEM. NEUT. Nom. em tteuer erne neue em netted Gen. eineS neuett etner tteuen eme3 rtettett Dat. etnem neuett etner neuett etnem neuett Ace. etnen neuett erne neue ein neueS Exercise (Ubung). £)er alte §ut ; bie tnet^e ®arte ; ba§ neue 23udj. The old hat ; the white card ; the new book. (Sin after §ut ; erne roetfte St'arte ; ein neueS ©udj.. An old hat ; a white card ; a new book. 3d) Ijabe etnen fdjtoarjen tgut, etne roetge Starte unb em netted 93utf). I have a black hat, a white card, and anew book. £)te toetfje $arte Itegt in bent neuen 23udj)e. The white card lies in the new book. £)te fletnen Garten jlnb in bm neuen SBitdjertL The small cards are in the new books. 2)a£ $cmb beg neuen $ute§ ift fd^toarg. The band of the new hat is black. 9. A predicate adjective is not declined but remains in its simple form (75) ; e. g., 2)te ®arte ift toetfc, the card is white ; bie 23M)er finb neu. the books are new. 36 NEW GERMAN COURSE Translate and Write : For the nouns and adjectives in this exercise see the preceding lists (24, 25). i. The ripe apple, the white card, and the beautiful picture. 2 A good father and a good brother. 3. I have a ripe apple and a sharp knife. 4. These white cards are in the large new books. 5. The roof of this new house is steep. 6. Is this card white or blue ? It is blue. 7. Is this knife sharp or dull ? It is dull. 8. Is this sentence long or short ? It is short. 10, The definite article is used : a. Before a noun taken in a general sense as referring to the whole of a substance ; e. g., $5a3 ©ifert ift etn detail, iron is a metal. b. Before an abstract noun ; e. g., $ie ^iinftltdjfeit ift cine ^ugenb, punctuality is a virtue. c. Before the name of a part of the body or things pertaining to the body, where we use, in English, a possessive pronoun (when the context plainly indicates the possessor) ; e. g., (£r fcl)iitteite ben $opf, He shook the head (instead of his head). (Sr fyctt ben %xm gebrodjen, He has broken his arm. %d) £)a6e mid) in bte §anb ge= I have cut my hand. fcfymtten, 3d) tjctbe fetn (Mb in ber Sctfcfje, I have no money in my pocket. d. Before the names of seasons, months, and days ; e. g., ^er3Stntertfteme!aIteSa^re^5ett r Winter is a cold season. $er 2(ugu[t tear jet)r roarm, August was very warm. (£r tarn am (an bent) 9J£orttag an, He arrived on Monday. e. Before the names of streets ; e. g., Sd) roofme in ber ^Dtetrtcfj- ©trafte, / live in Dietrich street. f. Before feminine names of countries, as : bte ©djroeig, Switzer- land ; e. g., 2$ir geljen narf) ber ©diroetg, we are going to Switzei'la7id. THE NOUN 37 g. Before a personal name used in a familiar or contemptuous manner ; e. g., 2)er Solemn fann e3 tun, y (Snbe, the end (the latter originally bd£ 2lng and ba§ Gmb). See also § 58, 3. 2. All words ending in -et, -t)eit, -kit, -fdjctft, -img, -in, are feminine ; thus : bte @ffat>eret f the slavery. bte greunbfdjctft, friendship, bte gretfjett, the freedom. bie SBofynung, the dwelling, bte 2Iufmerffamfett, attention. bte ^ontgtn, the queen. THE NOUN 43 Feminine nouns denoting persons may be formed from the masculine by means of the suffix -in. They form the plural in -rten, thus : £)er ^ijnig, the king ; bie knight, the queen; Plural : bte ®om* gmnett. £)er ©dumber, the tailor; bie 9D?ctbcf)en, the maiden, girl. bct£ §au3, the house. ba$ §aus>letn, the little house. bte gafjtte, the flag. ba§ galjnlein, the little flag. 6. These diminutives are often used playfully and in stories for children ; thus, em %t[d)lem instead of etrt fleiner Xt[cr), a little table. They belong to the third class of neuter nouns (55). 7. These endings may also be a mark of endearment, as : 9)ftttterd)ert, dear mother. 44 NEW GERMAN COURSE Exercise 2)te gretfjett tft beffer afe bte ©fta&eret, nitfjt tnafyr ? Mermen @te mir eintge ber ®oni= gtnnen Don (Sngtanb, $)te ©rafin t)on (SattSDitrt) ift feljr reirf), ntd)t toafjr ? SSaS ift ba§ 2)imumtto toon £)a3 ©tmtnuttt) oon „£tfd)" tft „£tfrf)(etn." 2Beld)eg ©efdj(ed)t (jaoen alle Sfe tmmtttoe nttt -djen unb — Icitt .? (Ste ftnb aHe fadjltdjen @eftf)(ed)te3, 5lnna ^)at em $ogeld)en or 35og= (em, 3)te Slinber ftrielen in einem 4>au§* lem, (ii bung). Freedom is better than slavery, is it not ? Name several of the queens of England. The countess of Salisbury is very rich, is she not ? What is the diminutive of „£ifd)?" The diminutive of , f £ifd)" is „2ifd)lem." Of what gender are all dimin- utives in -d)en and -lent ? They are all of the neuter gender. Anna has a little bird. The children are playing in a little house. 39. Infinitives, etc., Used as Nouns. i . Infinitives and words from other parts of speech when used as nouns are neuter; e. g., ba$ Sefen, the reading bct3 (Sffen, the eating, food ba$ ©rngen, the singing £)a£ Sefen ift fetjr nugftd), 2Btr (oben ba$ ©d)one unb ba£ ©ute, ba§ SRaucfjen, the smoking ba$ @ute, the good ba3 ©d)one, the beautiful Reading is very useful. We praise the beautiful and the good. 2. An adjective used as a noun and applied to a person takes the personal gender ; thus, ber $Itte, the old man bte 5Hte, the old woman ber ^rcmfe, the sick man bte toxnfe, the sick woman ber ^letne, the little boy bte $(eme, the little girl THE NOUN 45 £)tefer 9tfte ift fef)r lran! f This old man is very ill. 2)te Stletne ftttf auf bem (Stf)of$e The little girl is sitting on her itjrer Sautter, mother's lap. 40. The Gender of Compounds. i. Compound nouns take the gender of the last component and only the last part is declined ; e. g., Skr SBhmtengarren, the flower-garden (from bte SBlume and ber (SJarten) ; gen. beg 23(umeng,arten3, etc. SDte ^augtiir, the house-door, front door (ba$ $av& and bte Xiir). Xa§ %i\tf)tu&), the table-cloth, (ber Xtfcl) and ba$ $udj). Sn btefem SBlumengarten finb In this flower-garden are roses 9tofen unb SBetldjen, and violets. £)iefe |)au3titr ftefjt off en, This front-door stands open. SDicfeg ^tfdjfudj ift toetfe, This table-cloth is white. 2. But a few nouns with a prefix take a gender different from the noun itself ; e. g., ber Wut, courage bte 2lratut, poverty ba$ SSort, the word bte ^tnhnort, the answer ber Xetl, the part bag ©egentetl, the opposite 9(rmut ift letne ©rfjanbe, Poverty is no disgrace. £)ag (SJegentett Don toetfj iftftf)tt>ar5, The opposite of white is black. 41. Double Gender of Nouns. A few nouns have two genders with different meanings ; e. g., ber SDtenfdj, the man, mankind ' ba§ 9J2enfdj, the wench ber 23auer, the peasant ba§ Waiter, the cage ber $Qut, the hat bte §ut f guard, protection ber @ce, the lake bte ©ee, the sea, ocean ber 53anb, the volume bag 23anb, the ribbon ber (Srbe, the heir ba$ (Srbe, the inheritance ber <8tf)i(b, the shield ba§ ©cfjtlb, the sign-board £>er Superior @ee ift fetjr grofe, Lake Superior is very large. 2>te SBauern arbetten tm getbe, The peasants work in the field. 46 NEW GERMAN COURSE 42. Double Form of the Plural. Some nouns have two forms in the plural with different mean- ings, an example of which is found in English in the plurals of brother, viz. : brothers and brethren ; so in German : {bie SBtirtfe, banks (of earth), benches, bie SBartfert, banks for money. {bie SSorter, separate words, bie SSorte, words forming a context, connected sense. Thus the preacher says : bie j£e£te§trjorte, the words of the text (not £e£ttt)orter), but, 3Bterjtete ^Sorter finb in biefem ©a^e? How many words in this sentence? 43. Nouns Used in the Singular only. Nouns used in the singular only are names of metals and other substances and abstract terms : ba$ @o(b, gold ber Sfoggen, rye bct£ ©ilber, silver bie @er|te, barley ba$ (Stfert, iron ba$ SDM)(, flour ba^ SSlet, lead ber @d)laf, sleep ba$ Stupfer, copper ber hunger, hunger ber ©taf)(, steel ber $)urft, thirst ber Qinl, zinc bie Sugenb, youth It will be observed that all these nouns require the article. 44. Nouns Used in the Plural only. I. Some nouns occur only in the plural ; e. g., bie ©Item, the parents ; bie Seute, the people. bie ©ebriiber, the brothers (generally in a business firm). bie ©efdjtotfter, brothers and sisters (in a family). bie gerten, the holidays, vacation ; bie Qsmfimfte, the revenue. bie Unfoften, the costs, expenses. THE NOUN 47 £)te ©ebritber ©rtmrn fdjrtefcen Dtete fdjorte Wlaxfyen. The Grimm brothers wrote many beautiful fairy tales. Stf) fyctbe fiinf @eftf)ttri(ter, greet 23rttber tmb bret ©cfjfaeftern. I have five brothers-and-sisters, two brothers and three sisters. SDte gerten fommen 6ctlb, the holidays will come soon. 2. Seute, people, is used in forming the plural of some com- pounds ending in the singular in -marm. Such are : 2)er (Sfyemcmn, the husband ; bte (Stjcleute, the married couple. 2)er St'cmfmcutn, the tradesman ; bte Haufleute, the tradespeople. £)er Sctnbmcmn, the peasant ; bte ^cmblettte, the peasants. 2)er (Sbelmarm, the nobleman ; bte (Sbedeute, the nobility. 2)er .Jpofmcmn, the courtier ; bte §ofleute, the courtiers. Translate and Write : i. The finger, the hand and the hair. 2. The city and the village. 3. The speech and the voice. 4. The eating (food) was very good. 5. Victoria was queen of England. 6. The little girl has a little bird (dim.). 7. Reading and writing are useful. 8. This sick man is very unhappy. 9. In my flower- garden are many flowers. 10. The opposite of high is low. 1 1 . These people are very industrious. 1 2. The plural of Sanb- matm is Sanblettte. 13. This tradesman has bought a new house. 45. The Strong and Weak Declensions (2>te ftarfc mtb bte fdjttmdje ,S>efUttattott), 1. Nouns are usually classified, with regard to declension, as "strong" and "weak." Nouns having the genitive singular in -<3 or -e£ are called "strong," all others are " weak." Feminine nouns, which are invariable in the singular, are classified with regard to the nominative plural, according to which the first class feminine (51) is of the "weak" declension (the -rt ending) and the second class (52) of the " strong " (the -e ending). Various other exceptions also occur in regard to particular words. 48 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. Adjectives are also classified as " strong " and "weak." An adjective not preceded by the definite article (or a word like it), is "strong" (76); preceded by the definite article or a similar word it is "weak" (77); preceded by the indefinite article, or a similar word, it is of the "mixed" declension (78). 3. While these classifications will be here recognized and re- ferred to on account of their common use, a different, and it is believed a simpler and more practicable method, especially with regard to nouns, has been adopted and will now be explained.* 46. Classification of Nouns. 1. There are three classes of masculine nouns, two classes of feminine nouns, and three classes of neuter nouns. This includes all the nouns of the language except a few that are irregularly declined. 2. To decline a noun it is only necessary to know the class to which it belongs, and this is determined by the form of the nom- inative and genitive singular and of the nominative plural. These are given in every complete German dictionary. 47. The eight regular Forms of Declension. (For full declension of each class see §56). 48. The First Class Masculine ((grfte Piaffe mamtltdj). 1. Nouns of the first class masculine add <§ t or e3 in the geni- tive singular. In the plural they add e and modify the vowel a, 0, u, if there be one. In cm only the a takes the umlaut (53dume). * The observation that the terms " strong " and " weak " are of little practical value to the student and are often neglected by the teacher led to the new classification of nouns first presented in the author's Leitfaden and used with approval in many schools. It is therefore here reproduced. Whitney, in his excellent German grammar, says (page 29) : " The names strong and weak declension were introduced by Grimm, and, though destitute of any reasonable ground of application, have become too generally and firmly established to be gotten rid of." Some Grammarians however reject this classification and variously divide the nouns into four, five, six, and even eight classes. Otto well remarks : " While this arrangement (the " strong " and " weak ") suffices for Germans, who know from habit the inflection of each word, it is insufficient for foreigners." He therefore rejects it altogether and devises, "for the sake of simplicity," a peculiar classification of his own with five declensions and many exceptions. THE NOUN 49 Examples (SBetftnete) : Nom. ber Sifdj, the table, gen. be£ %tfd)t$ t plur. bie £ifdje. Norn, ber SBaum, the tree, gen. be3 5Baume3, plur. bie SB&ume. Other examples of this class are : ber 23erg, ber SBrief, ber gtujs * ber greunb, ber $uf$,* ber ©aft, ber «§>ut, ber ^amm, ber Slnopf, ber ®opf, ber SlMig, the mountain the letter the river the friend the foot the guest the hat the comb the button the head the king ber ®orb, ber 9^ocf, ber ©a^, ber ©teg, ber ©ofjn, ber ©tufjl, ber %mm, ber 3Betn, ber SStnb, ber Qatyxi, ber £ng, the basket the coat the sentence the victory the son the chair the tower the wine the wind the tooth the train Plural : bie 23erge, bie 23riefe, bie glitffe, bie greimbe, etc. 2. Some nouns of this class, although with a vowel liable to the umlaut, do not take it in the plural. these are : ber ten, the arm ber £cmt, ber £ag, the day ber $>unft, ber |mnb, the dog ber ©toff, ber ©cf)uf), the shoe ber SHiron, The commonest of the sound the point the stuff the throne Plural : bie Pirate, bie £age, bie £nnbe, bie ©cfjnlje, etc. Exercise 0i bttttg). SSo iff ber ®nopf ? £)ier ift er. Where is the button? Here it is. 2$erf)atben$rief? Stel Ijat tipt. Who has the letter? Charles has it. £)er §ut liegt cmf bem nenen Th e hat lies on the new table. Xifcrje. 2)er 9focf rjangt an ber tnei^en The coat hangs on the white SSanb. wall. * For declension of nouns ending in § or ft, see § 5, 5. 50 NEW GERMAN COURSE £)te ©afte ftnb tit bem fjofjen The guests are in the high £urme. tower. yjla£ fjctt fetnert 9tacf. Max has no coat. 3d) tjabe em ^aar ©djufye gefauft. I have bought a pair of shoes. Translate and Write : i. Have you my new hat ? No, I have it not. Who has it? Charles, has it. 2. Have you the button ? Yes, I have it. 3. Who has the letter ? Anna has it. 4. Has Max a large dog? No, he has no dog. 5. My friend is in the high tower. 6. The comb lies on the small chair. 7. The hat hangs on the white wall. 8. These sentences are very long. 9. I have one head, two hands and two feet. 10. These chairs are large and strong. 11. The rivers are long. 12. The teeth are white. 13. The king is on the throne. 14. The kings are on the thrones. 49. The Second Class Masculine (gtucitc SUaffe mamtltd)), 1. Nouns of the second class masculine add £ in the genitive singular. In the plural they modify the vowel a, o, it, if there be one. Examples (93etfpieie) : ber ginger, the finger ; gen. be£ ginger^ ; plur. bte ginger, ber SIpfel, the apple ; gen. be§ 5fyfe(§ ; plur. bte Spfel. 2. This class includes all masculine nouns ending in el, en or er. Other examples of this class are : ber 23oben, the ground, floor ber £aben, the shutter, store ber SBntber, the brother ber Sflffel, the spoon ber gaben, the thread ber Stage!, the nail ber (Garten, the garden ber Dfett, the stove ber ©rtffel, the slate-pencil ber ©djlitffel, the key ber jammer, the hammer ber Spiegel, the mirror ber §tmmel, the sky, heaven ber $ater, the father ber ®orper, the body ber $oge(, the bird Plural : bte SBoben, bte SBritber, bte gtxben, bte (Mrten, etc. THE NOUN 51 3. Some nouns of this class, although with a vowel liable to the umlaut, do not take it in the plural. The commonest of these are : ber Dnfel, the uncle ber 2lbler, the eagle bcr Slaften, the chest, box ber Scaler, the painter ber iBctgen, the carriage ber 2lmertfctner, the American Plural: bte Dnfel, bte £'aften, bte 2Bagen, bte 2lbler, etc. Exercise (U b U tt g). 3d) Ijabe einen grofjen jammer, 2)tefe £offel ftnb Don ©ilber, 2Ba3 toolkit ©te faufen ? 3cl) will einen $aften fanfen, 28a3 rjaben @te gefefjen ? S(i) fjabe einen 51bler gefefjen, SStr fjaben feme Stiff el, 2So liegt ber neue ©ptegel ? <£r liegt auf bem Xtfdje, 2So ftdjt ber ©tuljl ? (£r ftetjt anf bem gufjboben, 3ft bte (Seele fterbltd) ? 9fatn, bte ©eele ift nnfterblid), SBttte, geben <3ie mtr ben ©rtffel, I have a large hammer. These spoons are of silver. What will you buy ? I will buy a chest. What have you seen ? I have seen an eagle. We have no spoons. Where does the new mirror lie ? It lies on the table. Where does the chair stand ? It stands on the floor. Is the soul mortal ? No, the soul is immortal. Please give me the slate-pencil. Translate and Write: 1. I have a little mirror. 2. You have a beautiful bird. 3. He has a new book. 4. We have the silver spoons. 5. My uncle has two brothers. 6. We have no carriage. 7. What have you bought? I have bought two hammers. 8. Where does the hammer lie ? It lies on the chair. 9. Where does the stove stand ? It stands on the floor. 10. Where is Anna ? She is in the large garden. 11. The son of the American is a painter (artist). 12. The body is mortal, but the soul is immortal. 13. Please give me the key. 14. Where is your father? He is in the store. 15. He has sold his new house. 52 NEW GERMAN COURSE 50. The Third Class Masculine (Srittc Piaffe mamtlidj). i . Nouns of the third class masculine add n or en in all oblique cases. Examples (Seifpiele) : ber Slnabe, the boy; gen. be3 ^naben, plur. bie $naben. ber $elb, the hero; gen. be3 |)clbert, plur. bie £)e(ben. 2. Nearly all nouns of this class denote men or male animals. Other examples of this class are : ber 5Iffe, the ape, monkey ber 33ar, the bear ber ube, the Jew ber Surft, the prince ber £bir>e, the lion ber ©raf, the count ber Diiefe, the giant ber «*perr,* the master, Mr., lord ber ©flabe, the slave ber ©tubent, the student Plural : bie 5lffen, bie §eibcn, bie ^uben, etc. Exercise (fibltng). i. £)iefe Sfrtaben finb feljr glucfttdj. 2. 2)ie 5tffen leben in bem (im) SSalbe. 3. £)ie Subcn leben in alien Sanbern. 4. $>er £ott>e ift ein 9knbtier. 5. (Sin 9viefe ift ein fcfjr grower Wlann. 6. 2)ie 23aren fcfjlafcn im SSinter. 7. griebricf) ber ®ro£e raar ein bebentenber giirft. 8. Soljann ift ein ffciftiger ©tnbent. 9. Ultjffe^ raar ein beriirnnter §elb. 10. £)iefe ©flatten finb ferjr nngtiidlicfj. 11. liefer <"perr ift ein reidjer ©raf. 12. Stennen ©ie §errn ^rofeffor 9vingroalb? 3a, id) !enne irjit; er ift ein fetjr efjrticfjer 93?ann. 13. 28em geljbrt biefe geber ? ©ie gefjort mir. Translate and Write: 1. The wild apes. 2. The poor heathen. 3. The industrious Jews. 4. The strong giant. 5. The good Christian. 6. Is the ape a beast -of -prey ? No, he is not a beast-of-prey. 7. Is this student industrious ? Yes, he is very industrious. 8. Are these * In the oblique cases of the singular £err adds only n ; thus, ber £err, be§ £errn, bem )errn, ben £>errn. THE NOUN 53 slaves happy ? No, they are very unhappy. 9. Who is this gentleman? It is Mr. Ringwald. 10. To whom does this hat belong (170, 3) ? It belongs to the student. 51. The First Class Feminine (@rfte Piaffe tt>eiMidj> 1. Nouns of this class (like all feminine nouns) have but one form in the singular. In the plural they add n or en and under- go no vowel change. Examples (2ktfpte(e) : bte $htme, the flower ; plur. bie 23litmen bte $tbel, the bible ; plur. bte 23tbeftt bte geber, the pen ; plur. bte gebertt bte Uf)r, the watch or clock ; plur. bte U£)rett Other examples of this class are : e 23ritcfe, the bridge e 23itrfte, the brush e £)ame, the lady e (£rbe, the earth e gctr6e, the color e gafjne, the flag e ^ctrte, the card e Stcrge, the cat e &zttt, the chain e $trrf)e, the church e $Pflcm§e, the plant e ©djere, the pair of shears e <£>cf)ttte, the school e 2Sefte, the vest e ©prctdje, the language e <8ftmme, the voice e ©trafje, the street e Sttmbe, the hour e %afd)e, the pocket bte ($a6el, the fork bte Snfel, the island bte 9fatbei, the needle bte SRegel, the rule bte (Sdjaufet, the shovel bie Safe!, the table, tablet bte $vau, tne woman, wife bte Shifter, the oyster bte geber, the pen bte Setter, the ladder bte Waiter, the wall bte @cf)itlter, the shoulder bte ©ctjrnefter, the sister bte SBctfjrt, the way, path bte ©cf)lact)t, the battle bte ©rfjrtfr, the writing bte SSelt, the world bte fttite, the line bte Qdt, the time 54 NEW GERMAN COURSE bte Xaffe, the cup bte Qett, the time bte £au6e, the dove bte $(nftatt, the institution bte %ink t the ink bie 5(nttt)ort, the answer bte Qnnge, the tongue bte 5lr6ett, the work Plural : £)te S3ritcfen f bte SBttrften, bte £>amen, etc. 2. All nouns of two syllables ending in -e (not -ee), denoting inanimate objects, are of this class, such as bte 23(unte, the flower. This is a very numerous class. 3. All nouns ending in et, fjett, fett, fcfjaft, ung, or in are of this class. Those in -in form the plural in -nen, as : bte ®omgtn, the queen, plur. bte ®omgtnneu. Nouns in -ung of this class are numerous. They are formed from the infinitive of verbs ; thus : fdjreiben, to write bie te ®a|e tft etn |>au3tter. 4. $)te beutjcfje ©pracfye ift fdjroer. 5. £)te ^orma('@d)n(e (ba$ 2dy rer=©emtnar) ftefjt auf etnem fcfybnen §itgel. 6. Wlan ftfjreibt nttt geber unb £inte. 7. £>tefe §anbfcf)rift tft fefjr ftf)on. 8. SDtefer alte ©olbat toar in ber ©d)lacf)t bet ©eban. 9. 2£a3 fur etn ©e6aube tft ba$? (££ tft etne $Unbenanftalt. 10. 3d) Ijabe etne ftetne (Severe unb etne grofee ©djere. 1 1 . 2Bie oiele ©rfjuten ftnb in btefent £)orfe ? &$ finb (86, 2) oter. 12. 2)te §of(td)!ett tft etne Stugenb. 13- Vic- toria toar bie ^ontgtn oon (Sngtanb. 13. £)te3 tft etne fcf)dne SSofntung. Translate and Write : 1. Have you a pair-of -shears ? No, but I have a pair-of-scis- sors. 2. How many pockets have you in your coat? I have five pockets in my new coat. 3. Have you a watch ? Yes, I THE NOUN 55 have a beautiful new watch. 4. I have two brothers and one sister. 5. This work is very difficult, but also very useful. 6. How many churches are there in this city ? There are (86, 2) ten. 7. This railroad unites Albany and Buffalo. 8. What have you bought ? I have bought a gold watch and a gold chain. 9. Who is this old lady? It is (86, 5) Mrs. Weiss. 10. Mary Stuart was queen of Scotland. 52. The Second Class Feminine (3toette Piaffe toeifcttdj). This class includes 36 monosyllables having, like all feminine nouns, but one form in the singular, and in the plural taking the umlaut and e like the first class masculine. Example : bie §anb, the hand; plur. bie §anbe. The commonest of these nouns are : bie «jt, the axe bie Suft, the air bie 93anf, the bench bie SJtodjt, the power bie fQxaut* the bride bie 9ft agb, the maid-servant bie $rnft, the breast bie SftanS,* the mouse bie gauft,* the fist bie 9todjt, the night bie gturf)t, the fruit bie 9?uj3, the nut bie ©an3 f the goose bie ©dfjnur, the string bie Shaft, the strength bk <3tabt, the city bie $uf) f the cow bie 2Banb, the wall Plural : bie $£te, bie f&anh, bie SBraute, bie SBriifte, etc. Exercise (It bung). 1. £)iefe 9(£t ift neu r a6er fie ift tttdjt feljr fdjarf. 2. £)er alte 9ft ann fi^t auf einer 23anf in bent grofjat ^)3arl. 3. £>te gauft ift bie gebatfte §anb. 4. £)ie ®ufy ift ein fefyr niifclidjeS ^auStier. 5. 2So ift S^r $ruber? (£r ift in bie <&tabt gegangen (103). 6. 2)ie fdjdnen 23ilber tjangen an ber tneiften 2Sanb. 7. £)ie 9Jctiufe ftnb fefyr lafttg. 8. 2)ie gliegen ffiegen in ber Suft. 9. 2)a3 $8oot f the boat ba§ SjSfunb, the pound ba$ S3rct, the bread ba$ $ltid), the kingdom ba$ iQaax, the hair ba$ @ctt$ f the salt bctS Satyr, the year ba§ @djctf, the sheep ba§ Wlafy, the measure ba$ ©djiff, the ship ba§ Sfteer, the sea ba$ @tucf, the piece ba§ tyaax * the pair ba$ %m, the animal ba$ $|3ferb, the horse ba$ Qdt, the tent Plural : bie S3oote, bie Qkote, bie «£)aare, etc. *The adjective pctar means a few, as: ein paax Sage, a few days; but ein tyaax ©d)uf)e a pair of shoes. 58 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. All neuter nouns with the prefix ($e-, of which there are about 1 60, belong to this class, such as : ba§ (&tpa&, the baggage ba$ ©emdlbe, the painting ba§ ©etrtirtf, the drink ba$ ©ebirge, the mountain chain ba$ ©ebdrf)tni3, the memory bct3 ©etretbe, the grain ba§ ©efangnte, the prison ba$ ©etoolbe, the vault bag ($efcf)dft, the business ba§ ©ebdube, the building 3. Words of this class ending in e, do not add another e in the plural, thus : ba$ ©etreibe, plur. bie ©etrcibc. 4. To this class belong also a number of neuter nouns the signification of which admits of their use only in the singular. Such are the names of metals (43), as : ba$ ©olb, ba$ ©ilber, etc., and other abstract nouns, as : ba§ 23lut, blood ; bas> 3(etfd), meat, flesh; bag §eu, hay ; ba$ Qng, ice. Exercise (ilbung). 1. %o& $ult fteljt ctuf bem guftboben. 2. §err Stonig madjt ein guteg ©efdjaft. 3. iBttte, reirfjen ©ie mir bag 93rot. 4. SBte oiele donate Ijat bag Satyr? @8 ijat gtootf donate. 5. %8a$ foftet bag ©a(§? (£g foftet §efm pfennig bag $Pfunb. 6. Sft ber Some ein Diaubtier ? 3a, er ift ein Dvanbtier, aber ba§ ©djaf if t ein «!paugtter. 7. 2Bo ftnb bte Sfrmben ? .)pdn3tetn3 ; plur. bie ^du^letn. ba$ 9Mnien, the reckoning ; gen. be3 9^ed)nen3 ; (no plur.). Other examples of this class are : ba$ SBiinbel, the bundle ba§ gte6er, the fever ba$ ^ctpt'tel, the chapter ba$ £ager, the couch, camp ba$ SRdtfel, the puzzle ba$ 9J£effer, the knife ba§> ©egel, the sail ba$ Dauber, the oar ba§ ®iffen, the cushion ba$ Sfjea'ter, the theater ba£ genfter, the window baS Ufer, the bank ba§ geuer, the fire ba$ SSaffer, the water ba$ grdntetn, the young woman ba$ (Sffen, the eating (food) Plural : bte SBitnbel, bte Stapitd, bte Sftatfet, etc. Exercise (It bung). 1. (Sin ^du^letit ift em ftetne£ £>au3. 2. £)te £D^dbd6)ert ftnb in bent (Smpfang^immer. 3. SSo Itegt ba$ SBimbet ? (S3 ttcgt auf bent gufc boben. 4. ©in Sbpfftffen ift au3 gebern gemadjt ; e3 ift feljr mid). 5. £)arf id) (149, 1) ba$ genfter aufmad)en ? 3a f bn barf ft. 6. SBttte, leitjen ®te mtr Stjr ^fteffer. 7. £)er ^ranfe letbet an gteber ; er rul)t auf bent Sager. 8. £)a£ Ufer be3 gtuffeS ift nut @ra3 nnb tinmen bebectt. 9. ©efjen ©ie gem in§ £f)eater ? 3a, fet)r gern f tnenn ba$ 60 NEW GERMAN COURSE ©djaufpiel gut tft. 10. Potmen ©te Sftcttfel erraten? 9^ein r id) bin bavin gar nidjt (92, 20) ge)d)icft. n. 2Sa3 begeicfjnet bte Qnibimg -djert ober -tetrt ? <8ie bejetdjnet ettt)a3 ®lcine§ ober StmgeS. Translate and Write : I. This house has ten rooms. 2. The parlor is the most beau- tiful room in the house. 3. The ending -djcit or -kill denotes a small object ; e. g., em §au3lem, a small house. 4. How many girls are there (86, 6) in this class? There are ten. 5. How many chapters are there in this book ? 6. Would you like (149, 3) to go to the theater this evening ? 7. The fire is in the stove and the water is in the pitcher or the pail. 8. Where is the man lying (123, 1) ? He is lying on the couch. 9. Where are the soldiers ? They are in the camp. Review Exercise in Translation. 1. Where is the hat ? Here it is. 2. Where is the card ? Here it is. 3. Who has the button ? I have it. 4. Is this table large or small? It is small. 5. Have you anew coat? Yes, I have a new black coat. 6. Where are the little white cards ? They are in the little blue box. 7. Is this glass full or empty ? It is empty. 8. I open the door ; I shut the door. Is the door open or shut ? It is shut. 9. Do you understand ? Yes, I understand. No, I do not understand. 10. How does one say in German, " I have lost my book " ? One says : 3d) fyctbe mem 23ud) uerloren. 56. Table of the Eight Regular Forms of Declension. While studying the preceding lists of nouns the pupil should refer to the following complete table of the eight classes and should write out in full and recite the declension of a number of nouns of each class. Perfect familiarity with each form of declension as it is reached through- out the book should be insisted upon, for without it there can be no correct speaking. All the word-lists should also be so thoroughly learned that on hearing the English the German can be given and fully declined. THE xorx 6 1 i. Masculine (3ftaim[u$). Siugular. 1. Piaffe. 2. Piaffe. 3. italic Xom. bcr Q3aum bet Slpfel bcr tf nabe Gen. be§ 5Baum(e)3 be3 vlrfelo be§ tfnaben Dat. ban £ktuin e) ban ^pfd ban tfnaben Ace. bai £Baum bai &pfel bai viiuben Plural. Xom. Die SBaume bic ftpfel Die Stnaben Gen. ber £Baume bet ?tyfel bet Mne.ben Dat. bai Journal Den Spfeln Den >lnaben Ace. Die Canine Die gfyfel Die ^naben 2. Feminine ($&etbttdj). 1. Piaffe. 2. Hltiffe. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. Xom. Die Minnie Die tinmen Die gonb Die \\inDe Gen. bet SBbime bet £Btumen bet §anb ber \\inDe Dat. bet ©lunte Den ©lumen bet ,\>anD Den A>anDen Ace. Die SBtttme Die ©lumen Die £anb Die \\utDe 3. Neuter | ^adiltdV . Siugular. 1. ftteffe. 2. gteffc. 3. Staffc. Xom. Dae* 5*ucli ba3 ^ult bag ^tinnier Gen. be§ 9$ud)(e)3 Dec ^ult(e)3 Dee 3tnnnere Dat. Dem £htd)(e) bem^iilt(e) Dem gimmet Aec. Dae 93ud) ba€ N i>nlt ba€ gtmmet Plural. Xom. Die ^itcfier Die ^itite Die 3unmet Gen. bet SBudjet bet ^nlte bet 3i m met Dat. Den £Budjern ben Spuften Den 3immem Aec. Die ditcher Die $ulte Die Qtmmei 62 NEW GERMAN COURSE 57. Remarks on the Declensions. i. It will be seen that these models of the eight classes of nouns are all of the " strong " declension except the third class masculine and the first class feminine. They include nearly all the nouns in the language and are subject to less exceptions and require far less explanation than the usual scheme of "strong" and "weak" declension. 2. In all declensions, except in the third class masculine sin- gular, the nominative and accusative are alike. 3. The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are always alike and the dative plural always ends in n. 4. Where a noun adds g or eg in the genitive singular either form may be used ; thus : be3 $cmmg or be3 $ctumeg ; beg *)Mtg or be^ $)3ulte3, but with monosyllables, the ending eg is preferred. In the same words, the dative singular may take or omit the eupho- nic e, thus : bem 95aum or bent SBaume ; bem S)Mt or bem $)Mte, but here the e is usually retained. 58. Irregular Forms of Declension. A. Irregular forms (masculine) : 1. 2)er Matter, the peasant; beg SBauerg, bem Waiter, ben SBauer; plur. bie SSauern, etc. In like manner decline: ber Wladfiav, the neighbor ; ber @tadjet, the sting ; ber SDtoSfel, the muscle. 2. $)er @taat, the state, be§> (BtaateZ, bem &taate, ben 't&taat; plur. bie ©taaten, etc. In like manner decline : ber ©traf)I f the ray; ber @tf)mer§, the pain ; ber £>orn, the thorn ; ber ©ee, the lake (pi. bie @een); ber Sporn, the spur (pi. bie ©poren). 3. 2)er 9?ame(n), the name, bt§ ^ameng, bem Harnett, ben Dfamen; plur. bie Mermen, etc. In like manner decline : ber 93ittf)ftabe(n), the letter of the alphabet; ber gelf(en), the rock ; ber gimfe(n), the spark ; ber ($ebcmfe, the thought ; ber $aufe(n) f the heap ; ber ©a^ THE NOUN 63 men, the seed; and without plural, ber 3friebe(n), the peace ; ber ©lcmbe(n), the belief , faith ; ber 2BtHe(n), ^ W//. 4. £)er !>Dcann, ^ man, be§ 90?anne3, bem SJfanrte, ben Wann ; plur. bte banner, etc. In like manner decline: ber ©etft, the ghost, spirit; ber ©ott, /^ 6W; ber £etb, //^ &?<^// ber Ort, ^ place ; ber 9£cmb, ///emrttf)3 $8u&), Henry s book. 2. But family names ending in a sibilant (a hissing sound) as, f, £, 5, ft, take only an apostrophe in the genitive singular ; e. g., ^oJ3 T SBerfe, Vbss's works. 3. Masculine names ending in a sibilant take tn§ in the geni- tive ; e. g., 9Jccn;en3 SBiitfjer, Max's book. 4. Feminine nouns ending in c add n§ in the genitive ; e. g., SomfettS §ltt f Louisas hat; $aro(ttten3 SBogel, Carolines bird, though the n of the genitive may be omitted ; thus, £oui[e3 §ut, etc. 5. Names of persons and places when preceded by an adjec- tive take the article, thus : ber giite SSUfycIm, good William. bte fdjorte (Smtlte, beautiful Emily. bct§ fctlte $iu$lanb t cold Russia. 6. Names of countries are neuter except bte ©cfjtt)et§, Switzer- land, and bie Xiirfet, Turkey, which are declined with the article like a common noun ; e. g., bte <3tf)toet£, ber @cf)rrjei§, ber ©djtoetj, bte 8tf)toet£ ; e. g., SCftetn $ruber ifi nad) ber ©cfjtoet^ My brother has gone to Switzer- geaangen, land. @r ift in ber ©cf)tt)et§ f He is in Switzerland. 7. The preposition nctd) is also used in speaking of going to other countries and cities ; e. g., 3tf) gef)e nacfj Sonbon, nad) ^ax\§ t nacfj &eutfcf)[anb. / am going to London, to Paris, to Germany. THE NOUN 65 8. From in this connection is translated au£ ; e. g., (£r tft a u 3 •£)annoDer, //a3 Wnge nnb ba$ Df)r finb Xeile be3 $£'oxptx§. 9. StfajenS nnb fiouifenS J8itd)er (tegen auf bem ^ulte. 10. Sco, gefye nad) ber ©djtoeig. 1 1. SSohjn gefjen ®te? 3d) gefje iiber §annoDer nad) Berlin. 12. £)ie ©tra^en Don ^art3 finb fefyr rein, ntdjt toafyr ? D ja, fefjr rein. Translate and Write: 1. Every rose-bush has its thorns. 2. The director of this school is a good man. 3. The good mother loves her good daughters. 4. Decline the word §er^. 5. Have you read Voss's works ? No, I have not read triem. 6. Where are Max's books ? They are THE NOUN 67 in his desk. 7. Switzerland is a beautiful country. 8. The streets of Paris are broad and clean. 9. The parks of Berlin are very beautiful. 10. Where has your brother gone? He has gone to Switzerland. 1 1 . Which is the largest river of Germany ? The Rhine is the largest. 1 2. This man is from Hanover, is he not ? 60. Review of nouns selected from the preceding lists. The pupil should be able to give the nominative and genitive singular and nominative plural of each word in this list together with the article and the English meaning, thus : ber 23aum, the tree ; beg 23aume3 ; Plural : bte 35ctume ; also to decline in full ex- amples of each class (see lists § 48 to § 55). 23ctutn tnaoe Jtotf |jau3(em Xijtf) greunb ®amm $aube $uit ©ttmme (B&rifi §immel £ut mt meib £amm ©taat SWtebd Gutter Xod)ter $ab SDoftor ^apitel @$iff $rief gran 9Utfe( SRuber flatfer Robert £e*3 ©ebanfe Dfcn mt ©eget Sidjt glufc SBriicfe ftnopf Htfel ©abet §au3 fRegel gieber SRtefe Snfel gitrft Sager Dfoget $ruber Silb Sube £>aar SBatet ©djaf W*w ©coulter ton Stoftert 8a$n 61. Geographical Names and their Derivatives. Country or City Inhabitant Adjective ^Ime'rtfa ber Slmerifancr amertfanifd) Suro'pa ber (Suropder curopatfdj aftcn ber 2(ftate aftattfd) «frtfa ber 5lfrtfaner afrifamfd) Sluftra'tten ber $luftratier Quftra(tfd) (Srtglcmb ber (Sttgldnbei engltfc^ Sr'lanb ber Srldnber ir(dnbifd) (Sdjott'tcmb ber ©djottc fdjotttfd) SDeutfdj'tattb ber SDeutfdt)e betttfd) sRufe'lcmb ber muffe rufftfd) ^ollattb ber §o((dnber l)ol(dnbtfd) @rte'cfjenlanb ber ©riccrjc grted)t|d) granf'retd) ber $ran$ofc • fran^oftjd) £/ft(cr)rcidft ber D[t(er)reicl)er oft(er)retd)i)d) Sta'ltett ber Staltener ttaltentfd) ©pa'rttett ber <5pamer fpantfd; ^reit'ftett ber ^reujge preu^tfc^ @d)tr>Ybeit ber ©d)tr>ebe fcrjtoebtfd) £)d'rtemarf ber £)drte bdntfd) (£a'naba ber Qtanabter cartabtfd) (Sgfc^'teit ber (£gt$ter egtyrtifdj eutfcrje, the German woman. 2. The vowel of the masculine (a, 0, u) is not generally modi- fied for the feminine, bte ^ron^oftn being the only instance of it in the above list. 3. With the indefinite article the form designating an inhabi- tant is the same, throughout this list, as with the definite article ; e.g., ber 9(mertfaner and etn 2(mertfaner ; except ber £)eutfd)e, etn 3)eutfdjer. 62. The Seasons ($te gafjre^etten)* ber grueling, spring ber §erbft, autumn ber ©otmner, summer ber ©inter, winter 63. The Months ($ie donate), San'uar, January Su'ti, July ge'6ructr, February 2lngnft', August yjlaxfa March ©extern' ber, September %pxiV, April Dfto'fcer, October SDccri, May ' Sfonent'ber, November Sit'ni, June SJe^ent'ber, December 64. The Days of the Week ($ie 2Bod)entage). ©onn'tag, Sunday £)on'ner3tag, Thursday 9Jcon'tag, Monday 3 re t'* a 9r Friday S)ien3'tag, Tuesday ©onn'ct6enb ) ^DHtt'tDOcr), Wednesday or (SamS'tag, $ ay 7o NEW GERMAN COURSE The Numerals (Sie Qahltvottet). 65. The numerals are, as in English, classed as Cardinals and Ordinals (^arbtnatten or ©runb^afyten and Drbtnalten or Drbnung3- jaljlen). 66. The cardinals (®rimb§ctl)(ert) : i etn (etn3) 22 gtoetunb^toanstg 2 gtuet 30 bret&tg 3 bret 31 etntmbbretJ3tg 4 bier 32 5tt>etunbbrei§tg 5 fiirtf 40 mer^tg 6 fetf)3 5o funfaig 7 ftefcen 60 fec^ig 8 acljt 70 fieb^tg 9 neun 80 arf^tg io §el)n 90 neunjig ii elf 100 fyunbert 12 gfoolf 10 1 l)unbertunbein£ 13 bret^eljn 102 Ijunbertunb^tnet 14 meruit 125 f)unbertfunfunb§lDan§ig 15 funfjeljn 200 §tuei()imbert 16 fed^efyn 300 brettjunbert 17 ftebge^n 1,000 taufenb 18 adjoint 2,000 gtnettaufenb 19 neun^n 1,000,000 etne 9MIton 20 stuanatg 2,000,000 gtoet TOlltonen 21 eimmbatpcmjig 1,000,000,000,000 etne Stilton Examples (33 eif p tele). SSte t)tel tft fecl)3 unb fteben ? ®ecl)3 unb fteben tft brei^n, SSte tuel tft fitnfmal neun ? gitnfmal neun tft funfunbtnergtg, 3dt)le bte 3 e ^ ner ^ 3el)n, gtnanaig, bretf$tg, :c., How many are six and seven ? Six and seven are thirteen. How many are five times nine ? Five times nine are forty-five. Name the tens. Ten, twenty, thirty, etc. THE NUMERALS 71 67. Declension of the Cardinals. 1. Only em has a full declension. It is declined like the indef- inite article (etn, etrte, etn), when used adjectlvely, and like btefer (etner, erne, em<3, etc.), when used substantively. It has also an adjective form with the definite article (the "weak" adjective declension), thus : ber eine, be3 etnen, bem etnen, ben etnen, etc. (77). In counting, the form etn£ (contraction of etne3) is used, thus : etn£, gtoei, bret, etc. 2. Qtnet and bret have genitive and dative forms : gen. §tt)eier t and breter, dat. graeien and breien; e. g., 2)er $dmg groeter Scinber, The king of two countries. (5r rjctt eg nur 3roeien gefctgt, He said it to only two. 3. Some other numerals have plural forms of occasional use, as : cmf alien $ieren, on all fours ; fjunberte unb taufenbe, hundreds and thousands ; but in general the cardinals after ein are not declined. 68. Numeral Compounds. 1. With the ending er and the suffix (et are formed indeclin- able numeral adjectives: etnerlet, of one kind; ^toeterlet, of two kinds ; breterlet, of three kinds ; tnelerlet, of many kinds, etc. Also with mat the compounds: etnmal, once; gtoetmal, twice; breunal, three times, etc. 2. With fact) or faltig are formed etnfacfj or etnfalttg, simple ; §tt>etfacr) f twofold, etc. i 69. Expressions of Time. 1 . In telling the time of day the even hours are expressed by the cardinals and Uf)r, clock, thus : SSie btel Ufjr ift e3 ? What time (how much o'clock) is it ? @& ift ein Ut)r f ^tnet Ufjr, etc., It is one o'clock, two o'clock, etc. 72 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. For the fractional parts of the hour : (££ ift em SStertel nad) em3 (or It is a quarter after one. better) em SBiertel (auf) groei, (£§ ift r)atb groet, It is half past one (half of two). (£§ ift em SSiertef bor gluet (or It is a quarter of two. better) bret SBtertel (auf) jloet, 3. For the minutes : @3 ift gefjn 3fttnuten nad) brei f groangtg SOftnuten toor bier, etc. It is ten minutes after three, twenty minutes of four, etc. 4. At any particular time is rendered by the preposition urn; e.g., 3d) gelje urn gefyn Ufjr §u 2ktt unb ftefje um fecf)^ Ufyr auf. I go to bed at ten o'clock and arise at six o'clock. Um tote Dtel Ut)r gefjt ber Qug nad) Berlin ? Um jeljn Ufyr ffinf* unbgtuan^ig. At what time does the train go to Berlin ? At twenty-five minutes after ten. 5. When it is but a little after the half -hour a German will often say, for example, @£ ift bret SUftnuten nad) ()a(6 fiinf, it is three minutes after half-past four (three minutes after half of five). Translate and Write : 1. How many are (ift) eight and nine? Eight and nine are seventeen. 2. How many are eight times ten? Eight times ten are eighty. 3. What time is it? It is seven o'clock, — five minutes past eight, — a quarter past nine, — half past ten, — a quarter before eleven, — five minutes before twelve, — twelve o'clock, — two minutes after half past seven. 70. The Ordinals (£>te Orbnung^a^cn). The ordinal numerals are derived from the cardinals by adding t from 2 to 19 inclusive, and to the others ft. They are de- THE NUMERALS clined like adjectives, usually with the definite article, irregularities will be observed in erft, brttt and ati)t. n Some I St ber, bie, ba$ crfte 20th ber r bie, ba$ jtoangigftc 2d 11 u a groeite 2 1 st " " a einunb- 3d " a a brttte atoanjigftc 4th " a " tnerte 30th a breifjiajte 5th 11 " " fttnfte 40th " " a mer^tgfte 6th u " " fect)fte 50th " fftnfeififtc 7th II " a fteOente 60th a W9fte 8th it a a adjte 70th a Wgfte 9th it n " neunte 80th 11 a^tjigftc ioth it u a gefjnte 1 ooth u a t)imbertfte 17th " " " fieb^e^nte 1 oooth " a taufenbfte 19th 11 n a neim§e()nte 71. Declension of Ordinals. £)er erfte SJcann, The first man. Singular. Plural. Nom. ber erfte dJlann bie erften banner Gen. be3 erften SDfanneS ber erften Scanner Dat. bem erften Sftanne ben erften SDcannern Ace. ben erften Warm bie erften banner Examples (33eifpte(e). 3Bo toofjitt £err 2lbter ? (£r motmt in bem gmetten §aufe, jenfeit ber ®ird)e. Where does Mr. Adler live ? f He lives in the second house beyond the church. ?(nna ift bie erfte nnb Start ber groeite in btefer Piaffe. Anna is the first and Charles the second in this class. @en. ©rant ftarb am (an bem) 23ften Suit 1885. Gen. Grant died on the 23d of July, 1885. 1. It is common, especially in dating letters, to write only a period after the date; e. g. Berlin, 12. $luguft 1904. The date 74 NEW GERMAN COURSE stands in the accusative and is read : Berlin, ben 12tcn $Titgitft nenn§el)nf)itnbcrmtcr. 2. From the ordinals are formed also the adverbs: erf tens, firstly ; grnettens, secondly ; brittens, thirdly, etc. 72. The Day of the Month. i. From nnebtcl, how many, how much, is formed the interroga- tive ordinal ber, bte, bets totCDtcItc ? which is also declined like an adjective, ber toietuclte, bes nnctuctten, etc. It is used in asking the date and is then put in the accusative ; e. g., 2)en ftrieutettert Ijaben rotr fjeute ? What day of the month have we to-day ? SStr fjctben ben fiinften Mannar. We have the fifth of January. One may also say : SBelcfjes £)cttum rjctbett rotr rjeute ? What date have we to-day? 73. Weight, Measure and Quantity. In expressions of weight, measure and quantity the noun is used in the singular after a numeral, except feminine nouns in -e; e. g., jroet $Pfunb f two pounds ; bret $teter, three meters ; but bier &\im,four ells (from bte (SITe, the ell, which equals five-eighths of a meter and is often used in measuring cloth). Examples (33etf pief e). 3d) fjctbe fiinf ^3fnnb 3 l *der ge- I have bought five pounds of femft, sugar. 2)tefes 3^ mmer tft h^) n SO^^ter fang, This room is ten meters long. @eben ©te mtr fiir bret Waxt Give me three marks' worth of £kot, bread. £)tefe leaner tft gefjn gnJ3 f)ocr), This wall is ten feet high. 3d) f)ctbe bret 23ud) ©crjretbparner I have bought three quires of gefemft, writing-paper. THE ADJECTIVE 75 A partitive genitive preceded by a noun denoting number, weight or measure takes the form of simple apposition (not, as formerly, the genitive) ; e. g., id) bttte urn em @Ict3 SSaffer, but if the partitive noun is modified by a declinable word either the genitive or the appositional form is admissible ; e. g., em ($lct3 fatten SBafferS (gen.), or em @fa3 fafog SBaffer (ace). 74. Fractions ($rud)ietfe). Fractional numbers are formed from the ordinals by adding tel (from &etl, /#r/) ; thus, ba$ ^tertel is contracted from ber tnerte ^etl, the fourth part ; e. g., Ill 3 1 3 I ^ ~5 2 ©in 2)rtttel nnb em <3etf)ftel iff bret ©edjftel, ober em Ijalb. One third and one sixth are three sixths or one half. I +•# = 11 = 1A 2)rei 95iertel nnb fimf (Sedjftel ift nenn§ef)n Qrootftel, ober etn (nnb) fteben groolftel Translate and Write : i. Where do you live ? I live in the third house beyond (lOO) the church. 2. Henry is the third and I am the fourth in this class. 3. Washington died on the 14th of December, 1799. 4. What day of the month is it ? It is the first day of July, 1904. 5. I have bought ten pounds of sugar and three ells of black cloth (ace). 6. This hall is forty meters long and thirty meters wide. 7. Three-fifths and seven-tenths are one and three-tenths. Adjectives ((gtftettfdjaftSttidrte*)* 75. The Declension of Adjectives. 1. An adjective used in the predicate, in apposition, or as an adverb, is not declined, thus : 2)a§ ©rag ift grim, The grass is green. £>err 23rcuin nnrb retdj, Mr. Braun is getting rich. (Sin Wp\d reif nnb miirbe, An apple ripe and mellow. 3>iefe Stinber finb ffeifu'g, These children are industrious. 5(nna fdjreifit fefjr frf)on, Anna writes very beautifully. 7 6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. For an adjective used attributively before a noun there are three modes of declension, called the "strong," the "weak" and the "mixed." 76. The Strong Adjective Declension. The strong declension is used when the adjective stands alone before the noun. It has here the gender endings of btefer (32, 4) except in the genitive singular of the masculine and neuter, where -e£ changes to -en for the sake of euphony. Examples of the strong declension : ©uter SBcin, good wine; gute ©pctfe, good food ; cjutcS ®e(b, good money. Singular. gent. 9£eut. gute ©peife gute£ (Mb cutter ©petfe guten (Mbe3 guter ©peife gutem ©e(be gute ©petfe gitteS (Mb Plural. ©petfen, ©elber ® pet) en, (Mbcr ©petfen, (Mbern ©petfen, (Mber 77. The Weak Adjective Declension. The weak declension is used when the adjective is pre- ceded by the definite article or some other "gender-ending" word, such as btefer (32, 4). Examples of the weak declension : £)er gute SJcann, the good man ; bte gute gran, tlie good woman ; ba3 (jute ®tnb, the good child. Singular. WlaZl gem. 9?eut. Nom.ber gute Warm bie gute grew ba$ gute ®inb Gen. be3 guten 9)£anne3 ber guten grau be§ guten $inbe3 Dat. bent gnten 9)tann ber guten gran bem guten Sltnbe Ace. ben guten Warm bte gute grew ba$ gute &tnb ma§t. Norn guter SSein Gen. guten 2Betne3 Dat. gutem 3Setne Ace. guten 2$etn Nom. gute 2Betne, Gen. guter SSetttc, Dat. guten SSeinen, Ace. gute SSetne, THE ADJECTIVE Plural. Nom. bte guten Scanner, grauen, ®inber Gen. ber guten ^tinner, grauen, ffinber Dat. ben guten SDMnnern, grauen, ®tnberrt Ace. bte guten banner, grauen, ®inber 77 78. The Mixed Adjective Declension. i . The mixed declension is used when the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article or by some word declined like it (mem, bem, etc., 32, 6). This is called the "mixed" declension because the adjective endings are partly " strong" and partly " weak." They are strong only where the indefinite article lacks the gender ending, namely, in the masculine nom. sing, and in the neuter nom. and ace. singular. Examples of the mixed declension : @in gnter SJfann, a good man ; eine gute grew, a good woman ; em gutee Sltnb, a good child. Nom. ein guter Warm eine gute gran ein gute£ ®mb Gen. eineS guten 9ftanne3 einer guten grew eine£ guten Sltnbe*3 Dat. etnem guten SQfanne einer guten grau einem guten SCinbe Ace. etnen guten Wann eine gute grau ein gute3 ®tnb 2. Rules for the weak and mixed declensions of adjectives have already been given and illustrated in connection with the article (28-32). Remarks on Adjective Endings. 1. Several adjectives standing together have the same endings as a single one, thus : ein gropes? neue3 $>au§, a large new house. 2. An adjective ending in el (as ebel, noble) is irregular in its endings of declension ; e. g., Nom. ber eble (not ebele) §er^og f the noble duke. Gen. be<3 ebeln ^er^ogS, of the noble duke. Dat. bent ebeln ^er^oge, to the noble duke. Ace. ben ebeln .Jper^og, the noble duke. 78 NEW GERMAN COURSE Plural : bte ebeln .Jper^oge, etc. With indefinite article: etn ebler ©raf, a noble count; etne eMe £)ame, a noble lady ; em eb(e3 $o(f, a noble people. 79. Adjectives used as Substantives. i. An adjective used as a substantive retains its proper declen- sion as an adjective of either the strong or weak declension; thus from gut, good, we have ber ©nte, the good (man), bie ($htte, the good (woman), ba$ @Htte, the good thing, or that which is good in general. 2. Examples of declension : Singular. Plural. 3Ra§f. Sent. SReut. 3K. ft. 9?. Norn, ber ©ute bte ©ute ba§ Quite bte ©nten Gen. beg ©nten ber (Stolen be£ ©nten ber ©uten Dat. bem ©uten ber ©uten bem ®uten ben @uten Ace. ben ©uten bte @ute ba$ @ute bte ©uten With the indefinite article : em ©liter, eme£ ©uten, etc. 3. An adjective used as a noun and referring to a person takes the personal gender ; e. g., $er SCttc ift ferjr fcrjrnact), 2)te 2Ute fifct in etnem (Sdjaufet* ftufji, SDtefer tote ift gan^ f)tifio3, The old (man) is very weak. The old (woman) sits in a rocking-chair. This poor (man) is entirely help- less. The good have nothing to fear. A blind man should not go on the street without a guide. £)te ©uten rjctben mcrjt3 «ut furdjten, (Sin Q3(mber barf (149, 1) ntcfjt ofme etnen gitrjrer anf ber (Strafje gefyen, 4. An adjective used as a noun and not referring to a person is of the neuter gender ; e. g., dJlan bettmnbert ba§ (£bfe nnb ba§ ©crjime, one admires the noble and the beautiful (i. e., things that are noble and beautiful). THE ADJECTIVE 79 Exercise (It bung). i. @uter, alter SBettt tft teuer. 2. ©ute Spetfe ift narjrfjaft. 3. ©utes ©elb tft mifcltd). 4. @utc SBiidjer ftnb foftbar. 5. §)er gute 3J?amt unb bie gute grew mofjnen glitcflicf) beifammen. 6. 2)a3 gitte Sltnb tft licbreicr) itnb fCetgtg. 7. $)err Sen§ ift eitt guter unb peifjtger Mann. 8. S)iefc grauen ftnb fefjr mof/ltatig ; fie fjelfen ben Strmen unb pflegen bie Stranfen. 9. SDie Sltnber ft^ert unlet bent SBaume. 10. £ie QJogel fi^en auf bm bofyen SBaumen. it. 3d) Ijafc fiinf neue 95itct)er. 12. 2Retn guter 33ruber rjat mir eine golbene Ui)r gege6en. 13. liefer 3t(te tft fetjr arm. „ltnb bie ^leine ftuftert (eife, Setfe ntit gebdmpftem Saut ; SDfancr)e3 roidjtige ®ef)etmnt3 §at fie mir jcfjon anDertraut." — £eine. " And the little one (little girl) whispers softly, Softly with suppressed voice ; Many a weighty secret Has she already confided to me." Translate and Write : r. They drink only good, old, red wine. 2. Good, fresh milk is nourishing. 3. Cool, clear water is refreshing. 4. This old (man) is weak, he limps. 5. These large pictures are beautiful. 6. My good father has given me a beautiful new book. 7. A good child loves its parents. 8. My dear friend lives in a large, white house. 9. This house is small, that house is large (89, 6). 1 o. The scholars are in the large, new school-house. 1 1 . They live in those new houses. 12. The good are not always rich and the rich are not always good. 13. The poor admire the beauti- ful and the good (i. e., things beautiful and good). 80. Comparison of Adjectives (Stetgerung ber 2lbj|eftit>e)- 1. There are three degrees of comparison, the positive, the comparative and the superlative, with the same endings as in 80 NEW GERMAN COURSE English, viz., er for the comparative and eft for the superlative ; but some euphonic irregularities will be observed, as in the fre- quent omission of the e in the superlative ending -eft ; e. g., Positive Comparative Superlative retdj, rich retdjer ber, bie, ba$ retdjfte or am retdjften arm, poor drmer ber, bie, ba$ cirmfte or am drmften alt, old alter ber, bie, ba$ altefte or am dfteften &o% large grd&er ber, bie, ba$ grofete or am groftten 8"t, good beffer ber, bie, ba$ befte or am beften i)OCf), high Ijotjer ber, bie, ba§ tjbdjfte or am I)6cf)ften ftdfr proud ftolger ber, bie, ba3 ftolgefte or am ftol^eften bunfel dark bunfler ber, bie, ba$ bunfetfte or am bunfetften Plural : bie reidjften, bie drmften, bie dlteften, etc. 2. In the comparative of adjectives ending in el the e is dropped, as bunfel, comp. bunfler. 3. In the comparative and superlative of monosyllables the vowels a, 0, u, are sometimes, but not always, modified. 4. The comparative and superlative are declined like the posi- tive, thus : Comp. : ber reidjere, be3 reidjeren, bem reidjeren, ben reidjeren, Plur. bie reidjeren, etc. Superl. • ber retdjfte, be3 reidjften, bem reidjften, ben reidjften, Plur. bie reidjften, etc. 5. The form of comparison with am (an bem) as, am retdjften, is the dative of the superlative. It stands at the end of the phrase and generally after the neuter verb fetn. Examples (33 e t f p te le). £err %. ift reidj, ^err 23. ift retdjer, §err (£. ift ber retctjfte (or am retdjften). Mr. A. is rich, Mr. B. is richer, Mr. C. is the richest. ©eorg ift alter a(3 Sofjann. George is older than John. THE ADJECTIVE 8 I 6. An adverbial form of the superlative is formed with auf and the article; e.g., auf ba§ befte (or auf3 befte), in the best manner. The superlative with am is used in direct comparison where one thing is exalted above another (superlative relative) ; that with auf ba$ (aufS) is used where eminence in general is expressed (superlative absolute). 7. A superlative is sometimes intensified by the prefix after, all ; e. g., t>er (bte, ba$) afterfcfjonfte, the most beautiful of all ; e. g., „(Xiu ttetneS 9#abd)en namcnS Caroline liattc cm after! tcbftc3 ®a- narientitfgelcljen." "A little girl named Caroline had a very dear little canary bird!' S)er ©uperlatit) uon alt ift ber (bie f ba£) altefte. The superlative of alt is ber (bte, bo&) altefte. Translate and Write : 1 Are vou rich ? No, I am not rich. 2. Mr. Brown is richer than I, but he is not happier. 3. We are neither rich nor poor. 4. Mrs. Lenz is very old, she is the oldest woman in the village (gen.). 5. This house is larger than that (89, 6). 6. The Eiffel tower is the highest tower in-the world (gen.). 7. The com- parative of rich is richer. 8. Caroline's bird (59, 4) was the prettiest of all. 81. Syntax of Adjectives. 1. Adjectives Governing the Genitive. About thirty adjectives govern the genitive, which they generally follow. Examples in common use are : bar; devoid of ' miibe, tired of beburfttg, in want of fdjulbtg, guilty of betuufct, conscious of unftfjulbtg, innocent of etngebenf, mindful of itberbriifftg, tired of fafjtg,, capable of uerbtidjtig, suspicious of geuufj, certain of tuert, worthy of tebtg, free from ttmrbio,, worthy of madjttg, master of unttmrbtg, unworthy of 82 NEW GERMAN COURSE Examples (33 liefer SJtatm ift ber Unterftiitmng bebiirftig. „3cfj bin mir fetrter ©d)road)f)eit mefjr betturpt." 3ft er einer fofd^ert %at farjig ? 3d) bin biefer ©ac^e gemift, 233tr finb biefer 2lrbeit mi'tbe, @r ift biefe3 $erbred)en£ ftfjulbig, liefer Sftann ift eineS 2)iebftat)b§ fcerbctcrjtig, 3Str foaren befferer SBefyanbtnng ttmrbig, eifpiele). This man is in need of assist- ance. I am conscious of no more weakness (in myself). Is he capable of such a deed ? I am sure of this thing. We are tired of this work. He is guilty of this crime. This man is suspected of a theft. We were worthy of better treat- ment. 2. Adjectives Governing the Dative. Many adjectives govern the dative ; examples in common use are atjnlid), similar, like cmgeneljm, agreeable begreiflid), intelligible befcmnt, known bcmfbctr, thankful fremb, strange gleicf), like giinftig, favorable moglid), possible notig, necessary nihjticfj, useful fcfjulbig, indebted fcerbunbert, obliged ttritlfommen, welcome Examples (423 etfptele). £)er ©olm ift feinem better dfmttcfj, The son is like his -father. (&§ ift mir fefyr cmgenetjm, Scrj bin Sfynen fetjr bcmfbctr, ©§ mar mir nnmoglirf) §n form men, &§ ift ifvm aKe£ gteitf), ©ie finb mir §ef)n Wlaxt fcfjulbig, ©ie finb nn£ fjerglid) mitffommen, to It is very agreeable to me. I am very grateful to you. It was impossible for me come. It is all the same to him. You owe me ten marks. You are heartily welcome (to us). THE ADJECTIVE 83 3. Adjectives Used with Prepositions. Adjectives are often connected with prepositions governing an object ; examples are : atf)tfctm auf, careful of bange Dor, afraid of begtertg nacf), eager for befrett Don, free from ettel auf, proud of frofi iiber, glad of graufam gegen, cruel to rjofltd) gegen, polite to nadfjldfftg in, careless of reictj an, rich in fto% auf, proud of iibergeugt Don, sure of befannt mit, acquainted with Derfcfjmenbertfd) mit, prodigal of Examples (33eif ptete). Wlix tft Dor bem 2togang btefe§ ®ampfe3 bange, 2)er (&ti$aU tft begierig nacf) ^etcrjtum, liefer gelbfjerr tft graufam gegen feme ©otbaten, 2Str ftnb Don einer grojgen ($e= fafjr befrett, 2)te Gutter tft ftot§ auf trjren @ofm, (£r tft fjofttcrj gegen feme S8orgefe|* ten, 3d} bin befannt mit tfmt, (£r tft Derfcrjmenberifcfj mit fetnem (Mbe, ( Translate and Write : 1. Are they in need of money? 2. I do not believe that he is capable of such a deed (81, 1). 3. Is the son like the father ? 4. I owe you twenty marks. 5. Is this teacher cruel to his pu- pils ? No, on the contrary he is very polite to them. 6. Are you acquainted with this family ? No, I know them only by name (bem tauten nacf)). 7. One should never be tired of his work. I fear the result of this battle. The miser is eager for wealth. This commander is cruel to his soldiers. We are freed from a great danger. The mother is proud of her son. He is polite towards his supe- riors. I am acquainted with him. He is prodigal with his money. 84 NEW GERMAN COURSE The Pronoun. — ©a3 Jyimtiort 82. i. Personal Pronouns (^erfonal ^rottomuta). The Personal Pronouns are : First Person ((£rfte $erfon). Singular. Plural. Nom. id), I tDir r we Gen. metner (mem), of me uufer, of us Dat. mir, to me um§, to us Ace. mid), me urn us Second Person (gtoette ^erfon). Nom. bit, thou ifyr, ye Gen. beiner (betrt), of thee euer, of you Dat. bir to thee cud), to you Ace. bid), thee cud), you Nom. er, he Gen. f enter (fetn), of him Dat. ifym, to him Ace. tf)tt, him Third Person (Critic $erfon). Singular. Sent, fie, she ifyrer, of her U)r, to her fie, her 9?eut. e3, it f enter (fetn), of it tf)m, to it eg, it Third Person. Plural. Nom. fie, they Gen. ifyrer, of them Dat. u)nen, to them Ace. fie, them THE PRONOUN 85 2. The Reflexive Pronoun fid}. The reflexive pronoun fid), himself, herself, itself themselves, is of the third person for all genders, and is both singular and plural. It is invariable in form and is used only in the dative and accusative ; e. g., (Sr gibt fid) (dat.) bide s Dcu()e, He gives himself much trouble (takes much pains). (£r rjctt fid) (ace.) fdnoer eeriest, He has hurt himself badly. 8te tjaben fid) (ace.) gut ctmitfiert, They amused themselves well. 3. The Emphatic Pronoun felbft. The emphatic pronoun felbft (or fe(ber) is sometimes added to a personal pronoun for emphasis. It is invariable in form; e. g., 3d) farm e3 felbft tun, I can do it myself. (£r rjctt feinen llntergcmg fid) felbft He has prepared (or caused) his bereitet, own ruin. ©dbft is also used adverbially meaning even. 83. Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 1. A personal pronoun agrees with the noun to which it refers, in person, number and gender ; e. g., 2So ift ber §ut ? §ier iff er, Where is the hat ? Here it is. SSo ift bie Sl'orte ? §ier ift fie, Where is the card ? Here it is. 2Ber rjctt ben §ut ? 3d) tjabe irjn, Who has the hat ? I have it. 2Ber rjat bte gebern ? ^ar( rjctt Who has the pens ? Charles has fie, ' them. 2. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons are often repeated after the relative ber (bte, ba$) ; e. g., 3d), ber id) antuefenb tear, I who was present. . 2>u, ber bu cmroefenb ttarft, You who were present. 28tr, bte roir anrnefenb roaren unb W T e who were present and saw ctlle£ aefetjen fyaben, fonnen aHeg all can relate all. er^dtjlen, 86 NEW GERMAN COURSE 3. The genitive of the personal pronoun (merrier, beiner, etc.), is seldom used except as the object of a verb, as : $ergcffen ©te meiner nicfjt, forget me not, or as the second object of a reflexive verb, thus : Qmmtern ©ie fid) meiner, remember me. 4. These genitives are, in poetical style, sometimes contracted to mem, betn, fein, etc., thus : ^ergtft mem mtifi, forget me not. Exercise (U b U n (j). 3ft biefe3 SBilb fur mid) ? Sftein, e£ ift nicrjt fur bid). §at betn SBruber un£ geferjen ? Sftem, er rjat un£ nicfjt gefetjen. |jaben ©ie bie gafjtten ? 9?ein, 3(nna f;at fie. 3Ba3 tjat betn $ater btr gegeben ? (Sr I;at mtr erne Ul)r gegeben. 2Ba3 molten ©ie mtr geben ? 3d) mill btr nid)t3 geben. 28a£ rotUft bu grcm§ geben ? 3d) mill ttjm etnen 9(pfel geben. 28er bjat un3 geferjen ? S^temanb rjat un3 gefe!)en. feat @eorg ftcf) Derle^t ? 3a, er f)at fid) in bie §anb ge^ fdjnttten. Translate and Write : 1. What have you there ? I have a beautiful new book. 2. Is it for me ? Yes, it is for you. 3. Has Henry seen us ? Yes. he has seen us. 4. What will you give me ? I will give you a gold watch. 5. Where is the American flag? Here it is. 6. Have you my letters ? Yes, I have them. 7. Who has the buttons ? I have them ; here they are. 8. Has Frederick hurt himself? Yes, he has cut his foot (32, 10, c). 9. Please give me these ripe apples. No, I will not give them to you (170, 4). 10. I who was present and saw all can relate all. 1 1. What has Hedwig ? She has a beautiful little mirror. Who gave it to her ? (118, 5,<:). Her good teacher (fern.) gave it (has given it) to her. 84. The Pronouns in Personal Address. 1. The second person singular bu f)aft, bu bift, etc., is used in conversation, and in writing, between near relatives and in address- ing all children (up to the age of about 14 years). It is, also, THE PRONOUN 87 as in English, the style of the Bible, of prayer, and often of poe- try. The plural of this form, ttjr fyabt, tr)r feib, was formerly used in common conversation, as we use the corresponding forms in English, you have, you are, etc., but there has arisen in Germany the singular custom of employing the third person plural in place of the second and indicating it by a capital initial ; thus the Ger- man says to a member of his own family or to one child : §aft bit gefd)rie6ert ? hast thou written ? and in the plural : tf) bin bamtt ^ufrieben. In it, bavin : There is nothing in it, @3 ift mdjtS bartn. Of it, from it, bauon : I know nothing of it, of them, 3d) toetft tttdjtg bauon. About it, concerning it, baritber : We shall speak about it, SStr merben baritber fpredjen. From it, of it, barau3 : There will nothing good come of it, 3)aran§ rturb ntcfjt$ ©nte3 fommen. For it, bafiir : How much did you pay for it ? SStetnel rjaben ©ie bafitr be§a()(t? Translate and Write : 1. What have you written? I have written a long letter. 2. Where were you this morning? I was at home. 3. Where is your book ? It lies on my desk. 4. I will give you this little boat. I thank you. 5. Where is the servant -girl ? She is in the kitchen. 6. Is Mr. Lenz at home ? I am he. 7. Once there were three kings. 8. There are old and young people. 9. What is that? It is an orange. 10. What is that? It is a shovel. 1 1. There are ten boys and fifteen girls in this class. 12. There were many children present. 13. He is not satisfied with it. 14. We know nothing of it. 15. What is there in this box? There are matches in it. 16. Has he spoken to you about it ? No, he said nothing about it. THE PRONOUN 91 87. Possessive Pronouns (SBeftijattjetgettbe &iirtt)tirter). 1. Like the indefinite article in the singular and like btefer (32, 4) in the plural are declined the following possessive pro- nouns (called also possessive adjectives) together with the indef- inite numeral fetrt. Singular. Plural. 3JU§f. 3- e m. $1 e u t. m. & 9t. mein metne mein metne my betn beine betn beine thy feut feinc jet it feme his, its i(,r ujre u> tljre her unfer unjere unfer unfere our euer eure ener enre your ifyr if)re t(ir ifjre their Sf)r 3f)re S^r 3%e your 2. These possessives are derived from the genitives of the per- sonal pronouns metner, betner, etc. (82). 3. It will be observed that tf)r has three meanings, viz. : her, their, and your. When it means your it is distinguished in writ- ing or printing by a capital initial (5r)r) ; in other cases the meaning must be inferred from the context ; thus if one is speaking of a girl and says : 23o tft tf)r 2htrf) ? the meaning is, where is her book ? where in another connection it might mean, where is their book ? but in the formal style of address 28o tft \Si)X $3ud) ? means, where is your book? 2£o ftnb tfjre 2Utd)er ? may mean either where are her books ? or where are their books ? 4. For the declension of the possessive pronouns see, as model, mein, § 32, 6. ' 5. Declension with an Attributive Adjective and Noun: mein nener JQVit, my new hat. Singular. Plural. Nom. mein nener §ut metne neuen §ute Gen. metneg neuen §ute£ metner neuen ^)itte Dat. meinem neuen §ute metnen neuen §ttten Ace. metnen neuen §ut metne neuen £mte 9 2 NEW GERMAN COURSE 6. With the Definite Article : ber, bie, ba§ meine, mine ber, bie, ba£ nnfere, ours ber, bie, bas> beine, thine ber, bie, ba3 euere, yours ber, bie, ba§ feine, his, its ber, bie, ba§> itjre, theirs ber, bie, ba$ Si)re, yours. Plural : bie meinen, bie beinen, bie feinen, etc. The adjective here follows the definite article. Model of Declension : weak " declension with the Singular. Plural. Wla§l $em. Went. 2R. g. «R. Norn. ber meine bie meine ba$ meine bie meinen Gen. be3 meinen ber meinen be3 meinen ber meinen Dat. bem meinen ber meinen bem meinen ben meinen Ace. ben meinen bie meine ba$ meine bie meinen 8. A form of recent origin, but more used and of the same meaning, adds ig to the above, thus : ber, bie, ba$ meinige, mine ber, bie, ba$ nnfrige, ours ber, bie, ba$ beinige, thine ba, bie, ba$ eurige, yours ber, bie, ba§ feinige, his, its ber, bie, ba$ tr^rtge, theirs ber, bie, ba$ Sfyrige, yours The declensional endings are the same as with meine, etc. Nom. ber meinige Gen. be£ meinigen Dat. bem meinigen Ace. ben meinigen 9. Model of Declension : Singular. Plural. bie meinige ba$ meinige bk meinigen ber meinigen be3 meinigen ber meinigen ber meinigen bem meinigen ben meinigen bie meinige ba§ meinige bie meinigen 88. The Possessives used Substantively. 1 . The possessive pronouns used substantively, that is, repre- senting a noun understood, are declined like biefer (32, 4). These forms are, in the nominative : THE PRONOUN 93 Singular. Plural. ma§t. % e m. fteut. m. %. w. meiuer metne metne3 metne mine betner betne betneg betne thine feiner feme fetneg feme his it)rer it)re tf)re3 ujre hers unferer unfere unfere^ unfere ours 3f)rer eurer 3t)re eure 5f)re3 eure3 S^re eure [ yours ifjrer ttjre tf)re§ it)re theirs 2. Model of Declension: Singular. Plural. ma§t $em. fteut. 2K. ft. Ti. Nom. metner metne metner metne mine Gen. meme$ metner metne3 metner of mine Dat. metnem metner meinem metnen to mine Ace. metnen metne metne3 metne mine Examples (33etfpte(e). SSeffen £ut tft bte£ ? &$ tft metner. Whose hat is this ? It is mine. Swollen @te mtr 31)ren ©djtrm lettjen ? Set) Ijctbe metnen oerloren. Will y oil lend me your umbrella ? I have lost mine. 3. The pronominal forms ending in -tg (ber metntge, etc.) are more often used than these substantive forms ; thus in the above examples instead of e<§ tft metner, we may say, e£ tft ber metntge, and instead of id) fyabe metnen oerloren, say, id) fjctbe ben metnigen oertoren. Exercise (ft b u tt g). 1. SD^eirt neuer §ut tft ftfjroar^. 2. 28o ift Sfjr netted £md)? (S3 tft in metnem ^ulte. 3. 3Ste m'el (Mb tjaben ©ie? 3d) fyabe letn @eib. 4. 5Inna3 SBilb tft fct)ort, aber betne<§ (bag betne, or ba§ bet* tttge), ift nod) fdjoner. 5. 2M(en @te mtr Sfyr SJceffer lettjen? 3d) 94 NEW GERMAN COURSE t)abe ba§ metntge berloren. 6. Stjr £>au§ ift grij^er ctl3 ba3 unfrtgc. 7. 3d) tDttl meine SBtlber berfaufen ; ina3 Pollen ©te mtt ben Sfyrigen tun ? 3d) tottl fie and) fcerfaufen. Translate and Write : 1. Where is my new hat ? It lies on your desk. 2. Where is his new hat ? It lies on the table. 3. His good friends are very rich. 4. My brother's house (the house of my brother) is larger than yours. 5. Will you lend me your pens ? I have lost mine. 6. He will sell his pictures ; what will you do with yours ? I will not sell them. 7. How much money has he ? He has no money. 8. My books are old ; yours are new. 9. Are your pictures more beautiful than mine ? No, they are not more beautiful. 89. Demonstrative Pronouns. 1. A demonstrative pronoun is one that distinctly designates that to which it refers, as btefer £mt, this hat, jetted .•pans*, that house, Sofjaint, bcr fann t§> tun r John, he can do it. The demon- strative pronouns are : he, that one this that such ber- bte- baSjemge, he, that one ; plur. btejenigen, those. ber- bte-, ba3fe(6e; plur. biefelben, the same. ebenber- bte-, ba^fefbe ; plur. ebenbtefetben, the very same. ber, bte, ba3 ttamlidje ; plur. bte namltcfjen, the same. ber, bte, ba§ anbere, the other ; plur. bte anberen, the others. Examples (35eif ptele). 28eltf)er ©pteget ift ber fief fere ? £)er erne ift eben fo gut tote ber anbere. Which mirror is the better ? One is just as good as the other. Singular. gjtast. $em. Kent. ber bte ba§> btefer btefe btefe3 jener jene jene3 folder foltfje foldjee Plural. 9». g. Sfc. bte those biefe these jene those foldje such THE PRONOUN 95 $)ie§ tft berfelbe SJfann, ben fair geftern fjter gefefyen t)a6en. This is the same man whom we saw here yesterday. 2Bem gefyoren (170, 3) btefe 33iid£)er ? S)tefeS gef)ort mtr unb jetted gefyort metnent 23ruber. To whom do these books belong ? This (one) belongs to me and that (one) belongs to my brother. 2. ber f bte, ha§ as a demonstrative used before a noun is de- clined like the definite article ; not followed by a noun it is declined as follows : 2Ka§f. $em. fteut. 9». ft. ft. ber bte ba$ bte beffert beren beffen beren (berer) bent ber bent benen ben bte ba$ bte ff $er ©ott, ber @tfen toadjfen liefj, $er tooEte feme $ned)te." arndt. " That God w^^> made iron to grow, he wished no serfs." 3. In the above, quoted from „2)er gretfjett ®tf)lad)truf," ber occurs first as a demonstrative before a noun, then as a relative pronoun, and lastly as a demonstrative not followed by a noun. „2Sen ber §err fteb Ijctt, ben pcf)ttgt er." Whom the Lord loveth he chasteneth (him chasteneth he). 4. When the demonstrative ber is used as the antecedent of a relative pronoun, the genitive plural is berer instead of beren ; e. g., %vt ®tnber berer, trefdje gut finb/finb gliicf(tcl). The children of those who are good are fortunate. 5. The demonstrative ber (bte, ba$) followed by a noun in the genitive often corresponds to the English possessive, thus : SSeffen geber tft \)a$ ? @3 tft bte metner ©djtoefter. Whose pen is that ? It is my sister's (that of my sister). For the declension of biefer, jener and folder, see § 32, 4. 9 6 NEW GERMAN COURSE 6. SDtefer means both this and that except where this and that are contrasted, where biefer means this and jcncr that. Salter is also used to point out an object at a distance ; e. g., ^tefe^ ,£)cm3 ift grower al£ jene3. 7%w ^iz&rc is larger than that. 3ene 23erge finb ferjr rjod). Those (yonder) mountains are very high. 7. $)erjemge, berfetbe, ber ntimttcfje and ber anbere are declined like the definite article with an adjective (the weak adjective de- clension). 8. Example of Declension : Norn, berjentge Gen. benjentgen Dat. bemjemgen Ace. benjentgen Singular. biejentge berjentgen berjenigen biejentge SReut. ba^jentge berjentgen bemjemgen ba^jentge Plural. btejentgen berjentgen benjentgen btejentgen 9. £)erjemge when used in conjunction with a relative pronoun is called a correlative, thus : £)erjemge (or ber), meldjer, he who ; biejentge (or bte), lueldje, she who; S)a3jemge (or ba§), rocld)e3, that which ; btejentgen (or bte), toeld)e, those who. 2)erjenige, raetdjer fleifetg ift, roirb rettfi roerben, aber btejentgen, roeldjje faiil finb, roerben arm bletben. He who is industrious will become rich, but those who are in- dolent will remain poor. 3Ser (or berjenige, toetdjer) feme ©efunbfyett pflegt, ber ttrirb langc leben. He who cares for his health will live long. btejentgen, raeldje arm finb, finb ntdjt tmmer imgliitfttd). Those who are poor are not always unhappy. 9ftan Itebt benjentgen nirfjt, ber fetn SBort md)t ^alt. One does not love him who does not keep his word. 3>d) t)abe foldje Sente mtf)t gent.* I do not like such people. * @ern fcaben, lit. to have willingly, means to like, to be fond of. THE PRONOUN 97 io. Whenever a demonstrative pronoun is separated from its subject by the neuter verb fein it takes the neuter singular form regardless of the gender or number of the noun ; e. g., S)iefe3 ift metne geber ; jene3 tft bte Sfjrige. This is my pen ; that (one) is yours. 1 1 . In like manner are used the shorter forms bte3, bct3, and e3 ; e. g., 2)aS ftnb biefelben Sfrtaben, bte loir geftern t)ter gefefjen f)aben. Those are the same boys whom we saw (have seen) here yes- terday. , 3)te3 tft metn 23ndj, itnb bct£ ift ba§ 3f)rige. This is my book and that is yours. 2£a3 tft ba$ ? 2)a3 (e$) tft cin «§>ut. What is that ? That (it) is a hat. 12. The demonstrative ber (bte-, ba$-) felbe sometimes replaces the third personal pronoun (er, fie, e§, etc.), thus : 3d) fyabe metne (Sintrttt^farte berloren, unb ofyne fie (or ofjne btefe(be) fann id) ntdjt etntreten. I have lost my card of admission and without it I cannot enter. 13. This construction is often employed for the sake of euphony ; thus : $at @eorg ben 33rief? 3a, id) fyahe tfmt benfelben (or iljn tfjm) gegeben. Has George the letter ? Yes, I have given it to him. i 14. Observe in the last example that the dative (it)tn) pre- cedes the demonstrative (benfelben) while it follows the personal pronoun (tfm) (118, 5, d). Translate and Write : 1. This hat is new; that (one) is old. 2. These pens are better than those. 3. John is lazy, but William he is industrious. 98 NEW GERMAN COURSE 4. Such people are not agreeable, I do not like them. 5. Those who are not industrious will not become rich. 6. Those who are not careful of their health will not live long. 7. Those who are indolent are always poor. 8. Those are the same men whom you saw here this morning. 9. I have brought your books and those of your brother. 10. Whose (90, 1) pens are these? This one is mine and that one (89, 6) is my sister's (that of my sister). 90. Interrogative Pronouns. 1. The interrogative pronouns are lue(d)cr, which, what ; toer, who ; and \va§, ivhat. They are declined as follows : l singular. Plural. SWog!. gem. 5ft e it t. 3R. %. W. Nom meldjer tteldje toe(d)e£ tueldje Gen. lueldjeg toeltfjer tt)e(d)e3 uie(d)er Dat. luetdjem lue(d)er toeldjem toeldjen Ace. iDcldjen toeldje toeld)e3 toekf)e Nom toer who toaS what Gen. lueffer t whose toeffen. of what Dat. toem to whom Ace. iDen whom tva$ what 2. 2Ber and \va$ have no plural forms. 2Ber relates to persons only, \va§> to things only, and toe(tf)cr to both persons and things. Examples (33 e if pie (e). 28er ift bag? Who is that? SSeffen SBudj ift bag ? Whose book is that ? SBem fjaften ©te. bte llfjr gege^ To whom have you given the 6 en ? watch ? SBett fyabett @te gefefjen ? Whom have you seen ? 2Ba§. ift bag ? What is that ? 2Ba§ t)aben ©ie gefauft ? What have you bought? 2Betd)er Slnabe ift ber fletfjigfte ? Which boy is the most indus- trious ? THE PRONOUN 99 fiemrtcf) tft ber ffetfjtgfte. Henry is the most industrious. IBeldjen |)itt molten 3te faufen ? Which hat will you buy ? 3d) ttnil biejen fcfjiuargen £ut I will buy this black hat. faufen. SScIdjeS tft bie fdjonfte SBlume ? Which is the prettiest flower ? Nad) meiner Sttetnung tft bie Dtofe bic fcfjonfte. In my opinion (according to my opinion) the rose is the most beautiful. SBeldjeio 06ft §tefjert @te Oor? Which fruit do you prefer? 3d) gtefye ben 9lpfc( bor (164). I prefer the apple. 3. SBa3 is often used in the sense of Id arum, why ? as in the following example from Schiller's Sungfrau Don Orleans, line 46 : „ma$ fatlt @udj em? 2Sa3 fd)e(tet Sfjr bie £od)ter?" What are you thinking of ? Why do you reproach your daugh- ter ? 4. 9Ser followed by and] or tmmer is to be rendered by who- ever ; e. g., SKer cr and) fern mag, id) uriH t()n ntd)t etnlaffen. Whoever he may be, I will not admit him. %\\ roeldjem |jaufe ? Sn iDe(d)er ©trafje ? 3n toetd)en SBttdjern ? In which house ? In (or on) which street ? In which book ? 5. 3Sa3 with the preposition ]ixx,for, is used in the sense of what kind of ; e.g., 3Sa3 fur etn £)au3 tft ba3 ? What kind of a house is that ? 2£a3 tft bag fur etn (Memetjr ? What kind of a weapon is that ? 3Sa3 fur etnen SSagcn rjaben ©te gelauft ? What kind of a car- riage have you bought ? Translate and Write : 1. Which man? Which lady? Which girl ? 2. Which pen will you buy? 3. Which apples are the best, these or those? (89, 1) In my opinion those are the best. 4. Which house will IOO NEW GERMAN COURSE he buy ? He will buy that large white house. 5. Which wine do you prefer ? I prefer Rhine-wine. 6. In which state ? In which city? In which village ? 7. Who is that gentleman ? It is Mr. Green. 8. Whose gloves are these? They are mine (87, 9). 9. To whom will you give the pictures ? I will give them to the best children. 91. Relative Pronouns (guriitfitJeifenbe giirtnorter). 1. The relative pronouns are roe(cr)er or ber, who, which, that ; toer, who, and toa3, what. 2. The relative roetdjer is declined like the interrogative toe(d)er (90, 1), except that it lacks the genitive, these forms being sup- plied by those of the demonstrative ber, not followed by a noun ; viz. : beffen, beren, beffert, plural berert (89, 2). 3. Declension of the Relative toeldjer, who, which, that. Singular. Plural. 2fta§f. gem. fteut. m. g. 9? Norn. toetrfjer toeldje toetcfjeS toelrf)e Gen. beffen beren beffen beren Dat. toeldjem toeldjer to element toekf)en Ace. toetdjen toeltf)e toelcf)e3 toeldje 4. £>er, bte f ba$ f as relative is declined like the demonstrative ber, when used without a substantive (89, 2). 5. SSer and toa3 as relatives are declined the same as when used as interrogatives (90, 1). 6. In the nominative and accusative toe(cf)er and ber are used according to the taste of the speaker, thus : 2)er SCftcmn, toeltfjer (or ber) biefe£ !gau3 ge6cmt fjett, tfi fefyr reicr). The man who built this house is very rich. £)te 2ttlber, toeldje (or bte) ©te gefauft fyaben, finb ferjr fdjort. The pictures which you have bought are very beautiful. THE PRONOUN IOI Set) rjabe etrttge %Rim%m t berett SSert id) nicf)t lenne. I have several coins whose worth I do not know. 2)a3 Jltnb, bem (or toetdjem) er ben ^3ret^ gegeben f)at, ift fetjr Hug. The child to whom he gave (has given) the prize is very intel- ligent. 2)ie £)ame, toon tt>eld)er (or ber) ©ie ba3 |)au3 gefouft rjaben, ift fefyr rrjorjltdttg. The lady from whom you bought the house is very benevolent. 7. SSer as a relative introduces a sentence, but tt)d3 may either commence the sentence or be placed after its antecedent. 8. 2Ser as a relative is equivalent to the " correlative pronoun " consisting of the demonstrative berjemge (89, 9) with the relative toelcfjer; e. g., 28er (or berjemge, toeldjer) m'cfjt fjoren ttrill, mu§ fiirjlen, or SBer nict)t fjoren totH, ber tnuf} fittjlen. He who will not hear must feel. 3$a3 ttf) gefagt rjabe ift toar)r. What I have said is true. Set) f)ctbe Sfjnen alle^ ergafytt, toa3 er mir fagte. I have related to you everything that he told me. (£3 ift ntcrjt alle£ ©olb, tva$ glcmgt. Not all that shines is gold. Translate and Write: 1. The man who wrote (has written) this letter is illiterate. 2. The pupils who wrote these exercises are very diligent. 3. The houses which they have sold are very comfortable. 4. The child to whom I gave the money is very thankful. 5 . The scholar who won the prize is very happy. 6. I have a diamond the worth of which (89, 2) I do not know. 7. He who (89, 9) will not work must go hungry (suffer hunger). 8. What he said is not true. 9. I have related to you all that they said to me. 92. Indefinites (Pronouns, Numerals, etc.). The following words are, for the most part, too indefinite in character to be distinctly classified. They are therefore grouped together as indefinites without classification. 102 NEW GERMAN COURSE 1. yjl an occurs only in the nominative singular and is followed by a verb in the third person singular. It is translated one, they, or people ; also you in an indefinite sense, but it is often better rendered by a passive form : thus, man [agt, literally one says, but better they say, or it is said ; e. g., Man fagt, baj] bic ^sapancr eincn grofien Sieg gemonnen ijabm, It is said that the Japanese have won a great victory, ffllatt thus corresponds exactly to the French on (on dit, it is said), but for which the English lacks an exact equivalent. 2. Sebcrmmtn, everybody, every one ; jemanb, somebody, some one, and niemanb, nobody, not any one, have no plural forms and no declension except that jcbermamt takes 3 and the others cs in the genitive, though jemanb and rtiemcmb may take also cm in the dative ; e. g., Scbermann liebt fctn 2>atcrlanb. Every one loves his native land. 3ft jemanb fjier geraefen ? Dietn, cs mar niemanb ba. Has any one been here ? No, no one has been here.* (£r tremt niemanb (or memanbem). He trusts no one. 3. Scber, -€, -e§, each, every, is used only in the singular ; e. g., Seber $oge( liedt fctn 9?eft. Every bird loves its nest. 4. 9J?and)er, -e, -e3, many a ; plural, mand)e, many, is declined like biefer, but before an adjective it may omit the case ending ; e.g., „3)n (te6e<3 Sttnb, fomm, gel)' mit mir. %ax fefjone ©ptele fptei' id) mit bir ; Wand] (utnte 23inmen finb an bem Stranb. Petite Stutter rjal raand) gitlben ®emanb." (%n $ b e m „(£ r 1 t n t g"). „2Benn bod) manner s itrme ba§ i)atk,\va$ mand)er9xetd)eraegmirft.'' If only many a poor (man) had what many a rich (man) throws away I * While bet means literally there, it is often used in the sense of here, as in this example. THE PRONOUN IO3 5. iSfimtitdjer, -e, -eS, plural, famtltdje, all, entire, complete ; e. g., 3d) IjaOe 3dji((ers famtltdje SSerle, I have Schillers complete works. 6. Sebtoeber, -e, -e£, and jcglirfjer, -e, -e3, ^wj, «k-^, are anti- quated and poetical forms of jcber and are without plural ; e. g., „3ebroeber Oct gilt gletdj, roo id) bem v £aupf)ht nidjt begegne." (© d) 1 11 e r 3 „3 u ng f r a it"). Every place is the same where I do not meet the Dauphin. 7. $ein, feine, fein, ;/0, not any, is the negative of em and is declined like ein in the singular, and like biefer in the plural. It has also a pronominal form fctncr, -e, -e3, declined like btefer (32, 4) ; e. g., 3d) fyabe feinen Q31eiftift unb feine geber. I have no lead-pencil and no pen. Reiner non btefen £naben fann beutfd) fpredjen. Neither of these boys can speak German. 8. 2)er etne — ber anbere, the one — the other; e. g., S)er etne farm e£ eben fo gut tun, rate ber anbere. The one can do it just as well as the other. 9. (Siner, etne, eine3, tf//^, .sw/^ 0;/*, is the pronominal form of ein; e. g., (£iner tft eben fo ftarf rate ber anbere. One is just as strong as the other. 10. OTer, -e, -e3, all, has the strong adjective declension (like btefer) when it directly precedes the noun which it qualifies ; e. g., 5CI(er 51nfang tft fctjraer. All beginning is difficult. 9(11 followed by a possessive pronoun in the masculine or neuter singular is not declined; e. g., ail fein ©eib, all of his money, but in the feminine and in the plural it is declined ; e. g., atfe ntetne 33ttc£)er, all of my books. 104 NEW GERMAN COURSE The English word all when it means the whole is rendered into German with gan§; e. g., all the world, bte gan§e SSelt; all day, ben garden Sag (accusative of time). W.t§> may mean everything or everybody ; e. g., 9ltte3 ift tier- (oren, everything is lost ; Wlc$ freut ftd), everybody is happy. 9I[l in the plural is sometimes used in the sense of every ; as, die Sage, every day ; alk acf)t Sage, every week; alle brei SBocfjen, ^w/j //z/r^ weeks. ii. SBetbe, &?//z, may be used either with or without the article ; e. g., betbe Slnaben, or bte betben Sfrtaben, both the boys ; id) rjabe ntetne betben 23M)er fcertoren, / have lost both my books. Neither of the two is translated fetrter uort betben. 12. ©member, each other, one another ; e. g., £)tefe ©djtoeftern Ueben etnanber, These sisters love each other. 13. (&t\va$, some, something, anything ; e. g., .Jpctben ©te erroa3 gelauft ? 9?etn, tcf) fjabe ntd)t3 gefauft. Did you buy anything ? No, I bought nothing. Some (etttfCtg) before a noun in the singular is usually not trans- lated ; e. g., Will you have some bread? SSollen @ie 23rot fjctben ? But before a noun in the plural, some is translated by eintge : Will you have some pens ? Gotten ©te eintge gebern t)ctben ? When, in reply to a question, some refers to a preceding noun in the singular it may be translated by tt)eld)er in the accusative (roelcfjen, tnelcfje, tt)elcrje3) ; e. g., Have you any wine ? Yes, I have some. betben ©te 3Sein ? Set, tcf) rjctbe toeldjen. Have you any bread ? Yes, I have some. §aben ©te $rot ? 3a, id) fjabe toelcfje3. 14. ($ang, #//, whole, entire ; e. g., 2)te gan^e 2$od)e, the whole week ; ba§ gan^e 3afjr, ^ m^/U£erjrere, several, has the same meaning as eitttgc. 18. 9}Mn\ more, is indeclinable. When used with allegation it follows the noun ; e. g., 3d) f)a6e !eitt (Mb nterjr. I have no more money. 19. 9?td)t3, nothing ; e. g., 2Ba3 fjabett ©ie gefagt ? 3d) £)abe ntd)t3 gefagt. What did you say ? I did not say anything. 20. ©ar, ^#/V*, z^/j, entirely, at all. It only adds force to other words ; e. g., ©ar ntdjt, »$tt»o?t)» 94. The adverb in German is of the same nature as in English. It modifies a verb, an adjective or another adverb. It is often an uninflected adjective from which it is distinguished only by the context ; e. g., £)te SBIumc tft fdjon, The flower is beautiful. 5(nna fdjrctbt )d)on, Anna writes beautifully. 95. Comparison of Adverbs. 1. The comparison of an adverb is usually that of an adjective used adverbially. Adverbs, as such, seldom admit of comparison. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. jdjon, beautifully fdjoncr am fdjonftcn fdjnefl, rapidly fdmeller am fdjneHften mo()(, well beffcr am beften 2. An adverb of time or of manner always follows the verb, although in English it may precede it ; e. g., Set) ftfjretbe oft an metnert SBntb'cr, I often write to my brother, 3d) gefje gent tit bie (Seattle, I like to go to school. 96. Adverbs from other Parts of Speech. Adverbs may be formed from other parts of speech in a variety of ways ; e. g., io8 NEW GERMAN COURSE morgert3, in the morning, tet(3, partly, rerf)t£>, to the right, ftudfoetfe, by pieces, gUMicfjertDeife, fortunately, from ber 9#orgen, the morning, from ber Xetl, the part, from ba§ 9ied)t, the right, from \)a$ @tuc£, the piece, from ba$ ©Ittcf, the fortune. 97. Adjectives from Adverbs. i. Some adverbs of time and place are changed to adjectives by the suffix -ig, thus : From fyeute, to day, we have, From geftern, yesterday, we have, From bamate, at that time, we have, From fjter, here, we have, From je£t, now, we have, From balb, soon, we have, fyeittig, of to-day. gcftrtg, of yesterday, bctmctlig, of that time, fjtefig, of this place, jetjig, present, at present, balbtg, early, prompt. Examples (SBeif pie(e). §aben @ie bte fjettttge 3 e ^ung ? Have you to-day's newspaper ? 3d) fjoffe cmf etne balbige Sfattuort. I hope for an immediate answer. 2Bo fcmn id) bte geffrige 3 e ^ un 9 befommen ? Where can I obtain yesterday's newspaper ? 2)te fjieftgen SBudjfjanbler terfaufen atterfet 23itd)er. The booksellers of this place sell all kinds of books. 2. An exceptional form is the adjective tttorgettb, of to-morrow, from morgett, to-morrow ; e. g., SDtefe 5fmtonce tturb in ber morgettben 3 e ^ung erfdjetttett. This announcement will appear in the newspaper of to- morrow. THE ADVERB 109 98. A List of Adverbs. Adverbs in commom use and to be well learned are often, above, upstairs u n ten, below, downstairs loo ? where ? loann? when? rote ? how ? toarum ? why ? toeit, far bort, yonder jufammen, together jettf, now nun, now fcfjon, already nod), yet ttrieber, again bctlb, soon felten, seldom oft, often gutoetlen, sometimes getoflfynlidj, usually immer, always ftet3, continually nte, niemalJ, never je, jemal£, ever fritf), early fpat, late geroi^, certainly ttorjl, well rjeute, to-day morgen, to-morrow iibermorgen, day after to-morrow geftern, yesterday borgeftern, day before yesterday bielleicrjt, perhaps gent, willingly jet, yes netn, no nttf)t, not fefjr, very gu, to, too ritf)ttg, correct lanm, scarcely imgefarjr, about gerabe, straight, even betnarje, nearly nur, only fo, so, thus ebenfo, just as gteidjfaH§, likewise fetbft, even gang, whole, entire befonber§, especially perfonltcf), personally rjoffentltcf), as is to be hoped fdjneft, quickly, rapidly toorjer, whence tooln'n, whither tooftu, to which or what barcmf, upon that, thereupon barum, therefore ba§u, thereto, to it IIO NEW GERMAN COURSE toomit, with which or what fjerab, down (this way) luoritber, concerning what fjinab, down (that way) baim, thereby toodjeutltd), weekly bainit, with this, therewith utouat(id), monthly (jtnaitf, up crftenS, firstly f)tnetn r in, into $toeiten3, secondly uorunirtS, forwards t)bd)ftcn3, at the most ritdU)art3, backwards wenigftcnS, at the least Exercise (11 bung). 1. 5(nna jdjreibt fdjon, SJtorie fdjrei&t fdjoner itnb §ebnrig fcrjretbt am jdjonftcn. 2. £)er (Sine geljt recf)t^, ber 5Inbere linfS. 3. 28ot)in getjen @ic? 3d) ge()c inbie Stabt. 4. 28aren @ie in Sparfe? 9£ein, mentals. 5. SGBomtt fdjreiben ©ie ? 3d) fdjretbe mit einer Jitttfeber. 6. SSarum fjaben @ie nidjt gejctjrteben ? 2Bcil id) fetne Qctt ba^it t)atte. 7. Sefcu Sic adc jufammen: 8. (M)eu @te oft tn3 Sweater ? 3d) gel)c jutoetten, after nidjt oft. 9. (Jjctjcn 8ie fjeute Sfbenb in3 ^on^ert ? 3a, bieHeidjt 10. ©e()t 3()r ©ruber aud) ? 2)a3 toetjj id) nidjt. 11. SBir lefen afte jufammen. Translate and Write : i. Who writes the most beautifully? Anna writes the most beautifully. 2. We go to-the-left, you go to-the-right. 3. When are you going home ? To-day or to-morrow. 4. With what does one write ? With a pen (dat.) or with a pencil. 5. Do you go* to the city (ace.) often ? No, not very often. 6. Why did you not learn the lesson ? Because I was ill. 7. Read this page all together. 8. How often do you go to the theater (ace.) ? I go very seldom. 9. Are your friends going this evening ? That I do not know. *£tm (do) is not an auxiliary in German. Do you go? is translated: ©cfyen ©ie? {go you ?) THE PREPOSITION I II The Preposition (&a3 %$evf)iiltm$tQOtt). 99. The preposition in German is of the same nature as in English. Prepositions govern the genitive, the dative or the accusative. lOO. Prepositions with the Genitive. ttKitjrenb, during : 2£til)renb bey 2Sinter3, roegen, on account of: SSegett beS Diegeng, ftatt, an)tatt, instead of : ©tatt feine^ alten §ute§, umerrjalb, inside of, within : Snnei1)a(6 ber neuen geftung, aufeerrjatti, outside, without : s 3(atJ3erlialb ber gro^en ©tabt, o6erf)a(6, above: Cberrjalb ber $ritcre, itnterfjalb, below : Unterfja(6 be3 2)orfe3, biesjett, on this side of: Ste^ett be3 gluffeS, jeitfett, on the other side, beyond: Senfett beg 23erge£, During the winter. On account of the rain. Instead of his old hat. Inside of the new fortifications. Outside of the large city. Above the bridge (e. i. higher up the stream). Below the village (i. e. further down the stream, hill, etc). On this side of the river. On the other side of the ' mountain, mtttelft, tiermuMft, tiermoge, by means of: SSermttteift ernes' 9ftefjere\ By means of a knife, fdngs, alongside of: StingS be3 Q3acfjes\ Alongside of the brook. troi3, in spite of: %ro| beg fel)r fatten 2$etrers\ In spite of the very cold weather. 112 NEW GERMAN COURSE gnfolge, in accordance with: ^ufolge SrjreS ©efep, ttnroett (imfern), not far from : Unmeit be<5 2Balbe3, ungeacrjtet, notwithstanding : Ungeadjtet btefeg ©efetjeS (or btefe3 ©efe£e<§ ungeatf)tet), urn . . .rottlen, for the sake of: Urn feitte^ ©ofynes roillen, In accordance with your com- mand. Not far from the forest. Notwithstanding this law. For the sake of his son. Remark. — £ang£, trotj and gufolge may also govern the dative ; e. g., £ctng3 be3 93ad)e§ or tang3 bem £ktrf)e; tro£ be3 fatten 2Better3 or trofc bem fallen ^Better. Prepositions with the genitive less used are fraft, by virtue of; laut, according to, and fjalfrer, on account of; e. g., fraft fetner $lu- torttat, by virtue of his authority ; laut btefer ©djrift, according to this document ; fetner ©efunbtjett rjalder, on account of his health. 101. Prepositions with the Dative au$, out of: 9lu3 bem £au|e, bet, by, at the house of: S5et metnem $ater, mit, with : SDut metnen alien grennben, nad|, to, after: 2£tr gefjen nadfj Sonbon, @3 tft em $tertel nadj bret, fett, since: (Sett brei SSocfjen, &on, of from, by: liefer £tfdj tft Don £ofer 3d) gerje §u metnem SBrnber, • Out of the house. At my father's house. With my old friends. We are going to London. It is a quarter after three. Since (or for) three weeks. This table is of (made of) wood. §err SBrann tft ntcfjt $u |>anfe, I am going to my brother's (house). Mr. Brown is not at home. THE PREPOSITION 113 btnnen, within : SBtmten fed)^ Wlonatm, nebft, faint, together with : Dcebft or famt fetner gamtlie, mid)ft, next to : 3d) motme nadjft ber fttrdje, QCindft, according to : Sfyrem SBunftfje gemaft Ijabe icrj bie SSaren nerfauft, gegenitber, opposite to: SBtr luormen ber &trd)e gegen* fiber fargegeniiber ber Slirdje). entgegett, against: Stem Q3efc()ie feine^ SSater^ entgegen ging er in bie &tabt ^UlDlber, against : SLtfetnem SSunfcrje gimriber ging fie auf ben ©all, Within six months. Together with his family. I live next to the church. According to your wish I have sold the goods (wares). We live opposite the church. Against the command of his father he went to the city. Against my wish she went to the ball. Exercise (Ubuttg). 1. 9Saf)renb be3 2$inter3 roofmen roir in ber ©tabt. 2. tuf)l neben ben I place the chair by the side of Sifdj, the table. (£r ftefjt neben bem £ifdje, It stands by the side of the table, fjtnter, behind: , (£r gerjt Winter ben Kif($, He goes behind the table. (£r ftef)t tjinter bem £ifdje, He stands behind the table. oor, before: 3d) ftelle ben @tuf)l t>or ba$ I place the chair before the genfter, window. $)er or Sfyrem 23efd)te §ufolge f according to your command. 2. The noun governed by um — tDtHen always stands between these two words. 3. ©egeniiber may follow or precede its object ; entgegen always follows it. 4. Motion to a place (as to a city or country) is indicated by natf), motion to the dwelling of some person by 511, and motion towards an object by an. Stf) gef)e nacf) SBofton, I am going to Boston. 3d) gefje gu metnem Dnfel, lam goingto my uncle's (house). 3cf) gefye an ba§ genfter, I go (or am going) to the window. 5. But to go home is nacf) §anfe gefjen, and at home is ^n §anfe. Set) gefje nacf) §anfe, I am going home. 3ft «£>err SBraun §u §aufe ? Is Mr. Braun at home ? Il8 NEW GERMAN COURSE 6. In the passive voice the English preposition by is translated bon, thus : 2)er gute @d)u(er ift t>on fetnem Sefyrer gelobt roorben (133). The good scholar has been praised by his teacher. 7. Um is often used when some loss is referred to, thus : $et btefem 23rcmbe jtnb bret banner um3 Seben gefommen. At this fire three men lost their lives. 8. Um has the sense of for when politely asking for some- thing, especially at the table, thus : 3d) bttte um eine %a\\t £f)ee. Please give me (I ask for) a cup of tea. 105. Contraction of Prepositions with the Definite Article. The following contractions are of very common occurrence : kim bet bem, at the town t)on bem, from the 511m git bem, to the jur 5U ber, to the burd)3 burd) ba$, through the fitrS fur ba$, for the box$ t)or bctS, before the Examples (SBeif p te te). SBetm (Sintreten in ba$ |jcmg, On entering the house. $om SSaffer Ijerauf, Up from the water. 3d) fagte §um $ater, I said to the father. SSir ftnb im ghrnner, We are in the room. (£r roctrf ba$ papier in3 geuer, He threw the paper into the fire. 106. Omission of the Preposition. Between two nouns in apposition the preposition is not used ; e. g., bie &tabt Berlin, the city of Berlin ; em %\o& Staffer, a glass itberS itber ba$, over the itm£ um ba$ f around the am an bem, at the an§ an ba$, to the auf£ auf ba$, on the im in bem, in the in3 in ba£, in the THE PREPOSITION II 9 of water ; bret SD^eter Xud), three meters of cloth; but when the second noun is qualified the preposition t)Ott is used ; e. g., brct Stfeter Don btefem fcfjtoarjen Zvufye, three meters of this black cloth. Translate and Write : 1. For the sake of (100) his child he went home. 2. Where has your father gone ? He has gone to Mr. Wolf's. 3. Go to the blackboard (103) and write a German sentence. 4. In (bet) this shipwreck five hundred people lost their lives. 5 . On enter- ing he spoke to me. 6. We are in the garden. 7. The naughty boy threw the new book into the water. 8. Please give me a glass of milk. 107. Idiomatic Phrases with Prepositions. Observe the following idiomatic expressions in common use : 2£of)in gefyen ©ie ? 3d) gefye cmf bie *poft, 2Btr gefjen auf bert SDtarft, SSie fjetfet bag auf beutfcf) ? $3ir tDotjnetj gern auf bem £anbe, 2ln toem tftbic SReifye? ©ie ift on mir. 3d) gel)c an bie £afe(. 3d) ftefje an ber £afel. SBarum ge()ft bu in bie @d)ule ? 3d) gefye nm $u lernen. SSir gefjenmorgen auf3 £anb, (£r ftubierte auf ber Umoerfitat 3ena f SSoran ftarb biefer %Ram ? (£r ftarfc an ber ©d)tt>mbfud)t — an ber Cholera — an einem giefcer, Where are you going ? I am going to the post-office. We are going to the market. How is that in German ? We like to live in the country. Whose turn is it ? It is mine (my turn). I go to the blackboard. I stand by the blackboard. Why do you go to school ? I go in order to learn. We are going to the country to-morrow. He studied at the university of Jena. Of what did this man die ? He died of consumption — of cholera — of a fever. 120 NEW GERMAN COURSE %8a$ macljert ©ie ha ? 3d) fcfjreibe eine ^oftfarte an meiuen ©ruber, S3itte f geben ©ie mir fur fiinf Wlaxt ©rot, 3ft §err Proton gu fprecfjcu ? 9tein, tr ift nadj $aufe gegangen, ©eit tuamt fjaben ©ic JyrtU nictjt gefefyen ? Set) fjabe ifjn Dor brei SBodjen gefefjen, 2Bir fafyren mtt ber 23arjn, 3d) fjabe fetn ©e(b bet mir, 3d) bitte urn bte tartoffeln, Urn roieoiet Ufjr fcingt bte ©djtde an (164) ? ©ie fcingt urn neun Ufjr an, 3d) gefje f)eute Hbenb gu meinem ©ruber, Victoria toar bte Slonigin Don (Snglcmb, 28aft)ington ftarb tm filter oon 67 Safjrert, ©ein Monument ift bon ©tein, unb e£ ift 555 gufe l)od), 2Seld)er bon biefen groei SRanneru ift ber Cltere ? §err 9)?. ift ber TOere, gitrcfjteft bu bid) Dor biefem 9Jfanne ? 3a, id) fitrcfjte mid) fefjr oor ifjm (159), ©eben ©ie ju guf$ ober retten ©ie? ®eine3 Don betben, id) fatjre, What are you doing there ? I am writing a postal card to my brother. Please give me five marks' worth of bread. Is Mr. Brown to be seen ? No, he has gone home. When did you last see Fritz ? I saw him three weeks ago. We go by railroad. I have no money with me. Please pass (I ask for) the po- tatoes. At what time does the school begin ? It begins at nine o'clock. I am going to my brother's this evening. Victoria was the queen of England. Washington died at the age of 67 years. His monument is of stone and is 555 feet high. Which of these two men is the older ? Mr. M. is the older. Are you afraid of this man ? Yes, I am much afraid of him. Are you going on foot or on horse-back ? Neither of the two, I shall go in a carriage. THE CONJUNCTION 121 2>te Suft reid) gu merben f)ctt The desire to become rich has mcmd)en ung (Mitel) gemctcfjt, made many a one unhappy. 9iei|ert @ie bet £ag ober bet 9?acfjt ? Will you travel by day or by 3d) reife bet Xctg, night ? I am going by day. 3d) ntod)te ©ie um 9^at fragen, I should like to ask your ad- vice. 3d) mbd)te etnen .Split loitfen, I should like to buy a hat. (Soften 3te ait bte Xafel itnb Go to the blackboard and write jdjretbcn ©tc etnen bentjd)en a German sentence. Translate and Write : i. Where are you going ? I am going to market. 2. What is " type-writer " in German ? It is ,,®d)retbma)d)tne.'' 3. Do you like to go to school ? Yes, I like very much to go. 4. Are you fond of pears ? Yes, I am very fond of them. 5. Are you fond of w 7 ine ? No, I am not fond of it. 6. Where are you going to-morrow ? I am going to the country. 7. What are you doing ? I am writing a letter to my father. 8. Please give me ten marks' worth of cheese. For how much ? For ten marks. 9. Please pass the bread. 1 o. Where are you going this evening ? I am going to my uncle's. 1 1. Are you afraid of this dog ? No, I am not afraid of him. 1 2 . What will you buy ? I should like to buy a pair of gloves. The Conjunction (Sa3 £$tn&ett>o*t)* 108. The conjunctions are classed as : 1. General connectives (betorbnenbe S3tnberaorter). 2. Adverbial conjunctions (abnerbtale 23tnbett)brter). 3. Subordinating conjunctions (unterorbnenbe Stnbetnorter). 109. General Connectives. 1 . The general connectives are : nnb, and aber, but, however ober, or atletn, but, yet benn f for, since fonbern, but 122 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. These conjunctions have no influence on the order of the words in the sentence. They simply link words or prepositions together ; e. g., 3d) farm lefen unb fcrjretben, I can read and write. $ctrl farm lefen, aber er farm rticfyt Charles can read, but he cannot fdjreiben, write. 3d) farm rticrjt an^gerjen, benn e3 I cannot go out, for it rains. regnet, 3. 9(ber is sometimes placed after the subject, or even after the predicate, and is then best translated however. 3d) gelje in bie ©tabt, id) roift aber baib ^uriidferjren. I am going to the city, I will, however, soon return. 4. ©onbern is used instead of after after a negative phrase which it contradicts ; e. g., 3d) rottl md)t bjingefjen, fonbern ju «£)aufe bletben. I will not go there, but remain at home. 110. Adverbial Conjunctions. 1. There are about forty adverbial conjunctions, some of the commonest of which are • alfo, therefore, so ferner, further and), also, too nidjt nur — fonbern and), not ba, bann, then, when only — but also bagegen, on the contrary bod), jebod), however, yet barum, be3f)alb, therefore iibrigeng, moreover md)t£beftorDemger, nevertheless roeber — nod), neither — nor enbltd), at last, finally groar, indeed, it is true erft, guerft, at first entroeber — ober, either — or nadjfjer, afterwards au^erbem, besides uberbie3, besides balb — balb, now — now 2. An adverbial conjunction when placed at the beginning of a phrase causes the personal verb to be placed before the subject : THE CONJUNCTION 123 (S3 regnet, be3t)a(b mug id) §u §aufe 61ei6en (116). It rains, therefore I must remain at home. 111. Subordinating Conjunctions. 1. There are about thirty subordinating conjunctions of which the following are the commonest : Ctl3, when, as ob, whether, if bettor, efye, before obgleid), although bi3, until fett, feitbem, since ba, as, since fo oft, whenever bamtt, in order that fobalb, as soon as baf$, that folange, as long as fctHg, in case that ungeadjtet, notwithstanding inbem, while, as toeil, because nad)bem, after toenn, if, when 2. A subordinating conjunction introduces a dependent clause at the end of which stands the personal verb (the transposed order (117). $IU id) in ber <5tabt toofynte, gtng id) oft m£ Sweater. When I lived in the city I went often to the theater. ©obalb id) ^urudfam, fdjrieb id) an metnen $ruber. As soon as I returned I wrote to my brother. (§r fdjrteb mir, bag er tjeute anlommen ttmrbe. He wrote me that he would arrive to-day. $>a id) fein (Mb fyahe, fo mufe id) gu §aufe bfetben. As I have no money I must remain at home. 2Sarum fdjreiben ©ie nicr)t ? SSeil id) feme geber fjabe. Why do you not write ? Because I have no pen. 112. Use of menu, uwmt and aU. A careful distinction must be made between these three words. All mean when. 124 NEW GERMAN COURSE i. 28emt, when, if, whenever, begins a conditional clause ; e. g., SBcnn id) Qeit ijabz, will id) ba§ 23nd) lefen. When I have time I will read the book. 2. SBamt, when, is generally interrogative ; e.g., 2$amt lucrbcn <3ic ftiiriicffommen ? When will you return . 3. 2U3, when, as, relates to a single event in past time ; e. g., 2((3 id) nad) §aufe fain, begeguete id) SOrem SBruber. As I was coming home I met your brother. 9HS id) Jung mar, ging id) regelmaftig in bie ©d)ule. When I was young I went regularly to school. The Interjection ($a$ $tu$vuftmQ§tvott). 113. The interjections are used as in English to express sudden emotions. Some of the commonest are : ?(d) ! ah ! alas ! 3ud)f)e ! hurrah ! furred) ! hurrah ! D toefy ! O dear ! alas ! §cil ! hail ! Spfut ! fie ! fudge ! fyolla ! hallo ! ^o§ taufenb ! zounds ! Exercise (ii b u n g). 1. Warn fyat etn neueg $nd) nnb 2(nna etnen neuen §ut. 2. 3)er Ketne 9St(f)elm lann gefjen, a6er er lann tridjt lefen. 3. SDiefe Seute finb nid)t reid), fonbern arm. 4. Qt$ regnet fefjr ftarf, begfyalb mnfc idj (116) etnen Sftegenfdjtrm borgen. 5. s 2t(3 rair ^uriidfamen, begeg= neten tnir nnfern Qsltern. 6. 2Btr fd)rteben tljnen, baf$ fair morgen friil) anfommen nmrben. 7. 3Benn ic§ etne geber I)dtte (117), toiirbe id) etnen SBrief fd)reiben. 8. SSann toerben ©te biefe SRedjnung beaten ? 9. TO id) in ber ©tabt toofynte, ging id) oft tn3 Sweater. Translate and Write : 1. I have the old book and you have the new one. 2. The weather is cold outside, but this room is warm. 3. This card is THE SENTENCE 1 25 not black but white. 4. The boy is ill, therefore he cannot (116) write his lesson. 5. You must either work or pay. 6. Do you think that he will arrive to-day ? 7. If we were rich we would build a new house. 8. When will you come ? To-morrow or the day after to-morrow. 9. When I was in Washington I saw the president. 10. Hurrah ! We have won the victory. Construction of Sentences (SSottfoIge)* 114. In the construction of the German sentence there are three principal orders of arrangement, each depending upon the position of the personal or finite verb and called respectively the Normal, the Inverted and the Transposed order, of which the following are examples : 115. The Normal or Regular Order ($egelmc£tgc SBortfolge). In this order the personal verb follows the subject ; e. g., 3d) Ijabe rjettte etnen 53rief gefcfjrteben. I have written a letter to-day. «g)einrtcr) tmrb ntorgen in bte <8tabt gefjen. Henry will go to the city to morrow. 116. The Inverted Order (SBerattberte SBortfofge. — Stttoerfton). In this order the personal verb stands before the subject. This order occurs when the subject is preceded by some modifier of the verb, often an adverb or 'adverbial phrase, or it may be a dependent clause ; e. g., §eute i)abt id) etnen 2ktef gejrfjrteben. To-day I wrote a letter. Stftorgen nrirb «§eutrid) in bte ©tctbt gefjen. To-morrow Henry will go to the city. $or bret SBodjen toar id) in Berlin. Three weeks ago I was in Berlin. 126 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2Benn tdj (Mb genug tjatte, toiirbe td) btefe3 £>au3 faufen. If I had money enough I would buy this house. 117. The Transposed Order (SBortfotgc be3 9te&ettfaetnrid) morgen in bte @tabt gefyen ttnrb* I hope that Henry will go to the city to-morrow. 3d) toeift md)t f ob fie e3 tun liJuncn. I do not know whether they can do it. 2. Observe in the above examples that in the compound tenses the complement of the auxiliary, whether a past participle or an infinitive, stands immediately before the auxiliary. The German constructs his sentences thus : I have written. I have a letter written. To-day have I a letter written. To-morrow will I a letter write. This is the letter, which I yesterday written have. If I a pen had, would I a letter write. 3. Let the pupil now translate and commit to memory these examples ; thus : 3d) §Q&z gefd)rteben, etc. 118. General Rules. 1. The above are the leading principles of construction. For the arrangement of the minor elements of the sentence there are numerous rules, too many and with too many exceptions to be borne in mind. As in every language, they will be acquired mainly by practice. The following points, however, should be mastered at the outset, as they are essential to correct speaking. THE SENTENCE J27 2. Outline of the Normal Order. The main outline of the normal order is : i st. The subject. 2d. The personal verb. 3d. The various modifiers of the verb, as adverb, object, etc. 4th. The non-personal part of the verb, namely prefix, par- ticiple or infinitive, so far as they exist in the sentence, and if more than one be found they will stand in the order here named. 3. Examples of the Normal Order : (a) SUBJECT VERB ADVERB OBJECT PAST PART. Set) I (b) SUBJECT We (c) SUBJECT He v)abt have fyoffen hope VERB gef)t goes fyeate to-day ADV. TIME morgett to-morrow ein netted $ud) a new book ADV. PLACE in bte (BtaU to the city gefauft bought INFINITIVE 3U gefjen to go (d) SUBJECT VERB ADVERBIAL PHRASE PREFIX jeben SDforgett um 10 \lv)x cms every morning at 10 o'clock out OBJECT PAST. PART. INFINITIVE gefauft bought fjctuen have ^>d) tuiirbe ba$ £)au3 I would 'the house 4. The order of the inverted and of the transposed sentence is the same as the normal order except for the place of the personal verb. Translate and Write.: 1. I have a new book. 2. Who wrote (has written) this let- ter ? I wrote it myself. 3. Who will go to the city to-day? I will not go, but John (will go). 4. We wrote (have written) three letters yesterday. 5 . To-morrow we shall write many letters. 6. Two years ago we were in Paris. 7. If I had much money I would buy this house and garden. 8. This is the book which I 128 NEW GERMAN COURSE bought (have bought) yesterday in Boston. 9. Will Henry go to the city to-morrow ? No, he will not go. 10. I do not know whether we can buy the house (or not). 11. We have bought three new books to-day. 12. We hope to go home soon. 13. At what time do you go out every morning (beg S0iorgen3) ? I go out at eight o'clock. 5. The following rules of construction apply alike to all the three orders. a. A general connective does not influence the construction in any way ; e. g., ©3 regnet, aber id) muft natf) §aufe gefyen. It rains, but I must go home. Set) femn bteje U()r nidjt faufen, bernt id) fjabe fan ©etb bet mir. I cannot buy this watch, for I have no money with me. b. When a verb has two objects, a person and a thing, the person stands first ; e. g., £)er SBater t)at feiucm So^nc etne gotbene llfjr gegeben. The father has given his son a gold watch. 2Btflft bit mir jeijn Wlaxt letfjen ? Will you lend me ten marks ? c. When there are two personal pronouns as objects of a verb the one in the accusative generally stands first ; e. g., 3d) rotft fie Sftnen tettjen. I will lend them to you. d. But if for the personal pronoun in the accusative is sub- stituted the demonstrative berfelGe (89, i),the dative will precede the accusative object ; e. g., 3d) rotfl %\ew\ \)Q&YShz letfjen. I will lend it (the same) to you. e. An object with a preposition follows a simple object ; e.g., (St l)at btefen 23rtef an mid) gefd)rie6en. He wrote (has written) this letter to me. f. An adverb of time precedes one of place ; e. g., 3d) roar bortge 2$od)e in ber &tabt I was in the city last week. THE SENTENCE 1 29 g. Imperative and interrogative sentences are arranged in the inverted order ; e. g., ®el)en Ste fort ! Go away ! 28cmn ftmtmctt Sie %uxM ? When will you return ? A. The negation tttdjt follows a direct object, but precedes an object governed by a preposition. 3d) fyabt bm Wlaxrn nicr)t gefefyen. I have not seen the man. 3d) fpredje ntdjt uon btefem SJccmne. I do not speak of this man. i. When, in a dependent clause, two infinitives stand together, the auxiliary is placed immediately before them and the governing infinitive last ; e. g., SKerben fie e3 tun fonnen ? Will they be able to do it ? Dfotn, tdj gtaube ntdjt, bctfj fie eg toerben tun fonnen. No, I do not believe that they will be able to do it. J. At the end of a dependent clause the auxiliary is often omitted, especially in a literary style ; e. g., 9todjbem er ba§ gefcrgt (rjatte), ging er trotu'g fort. After he had said that he went angrily away. „3f)r SKtefen, bte id) toafferte ! tf)r SBftume, 3)te id) gepf langet (fyofot), griinet frotjttcfj fort." — (3d) tiler. " You meadows that I have watered, you trees that I have planted, preserve your joyous green." Translate and Write: 1 . Does it rain ? Yes, it rains, but we must go to the city to- day. 2. What has your brother given you ? He has given me a hundred marks. 3. Will you give me this pen ? Yes, I will give it to you. 4. I shall write a letter to him. 5. When were you in the city ? We were in the city to-day. 6. When will your friends return ? That I do not know. 7. Have you I30 NEW GERMAN COURSE seen your brother to-day ? No, I have not seen him. 8. Do you believe that he will be able to do the work ? No, I do not believe that he will be able to do it. 9. Having said that, she went hastily away. The Verb ($<*3 ^ettttiotrt). 119. Verbs are classified as transitive, and intransitive, but only verbs that take an object in the accusative are regarded as transitive. A verb that takes a direct object in English may, in German, govern a genitive or a dative, and hence be classed as intransitive ; e. g., (Sr fcebctrf bes> ($e(bes>, He needs money. Stf) begegnete tf)m, I met him. (£r fyat mir gut gebient, He has served me well. SBtllft bu mtr fjelfert ? Will you help me ? 120. The Principal Parts of a Verb ($te §ou^tformctt). 1. The principal parts of a verb, from which all the other tenses may be derived, are the present infinitive, the imperfect or past, and the past participle. 2. The infinitive always ends in tt, and generally in en. The root is the infinitive without this ending ; e. g., lobert, to praise, root, Io& gef)en, to go, root, gdj tocmbeln, to wander, root, toanbcl 121. The "Weak" and the "Strong" Verbs. 1 . There are two classes of verbs called by most German gram- marians "weak" and "strong," but to these terms the same objections have been made as when applied to the declensions (45). They correspond to " regular " and " irregular " in English grammar, and many teachers prefer the latter terms (regelmd^tg and urtregelmtifctg). THE VERB 131 2. A weak or regular verb forms its past tense by adding te or ete to the root, and the past participle by adding t or et ; e. g., loben, to praise, Mte, geloBt Icmben, to land, fonbete, gefattbet 3. Whether the imperfect shall end in te or ete is a matter of euphony and can be determined by pronouncing the word. The same applies to the t or et of the past participle and to other endings. The euphonic e is required whenever the final con- sonant of the root would otherwise be indistinct ; e. g., reben, to talk, rebete, gerebet : present, id) rebe, bu rebeft, er rebel, etc. acfyten, to respect, act)tete r geacr)tet ; id) acf)te, bu acf)teft, er afytet 4. A " strong " or irregular verb is characterized by a change of the radical vowel in the imperfect tense and sometimes in the past participle, also by the ending of the past participle in en ; e. g., gefyert, to go, gtng, gegcmgert ; fatten, to hold, fytelt, ge^atten. 5. Verbs have generally the prefix ge in the past participle. Exceptions are (1) verbs beginning with an unaccented syllable, as the inseparable prefixes fee, ettty, ent, er, ge, tier, jer ; (2) verbs ending in -terett, as marjdjterert to march; abbteren, to add; (3) toerben as auxiliary of the passive voice, which drops the prefix ge- in the compound past tenses ; e. g., begotten, to pay, be$cu)lte, begat)(t. abbteren, to add, abbterte, abbiert. 3d) bin gelobt tuorben (instead of getoorbett), I have been praised. 122. Names of the Modes and Tenses. A German verb is conjugated throughout the following modes and tenses : — $rafen3.— Present SnbilattD. — Indicative ®onjimftit>. — Subjunctive ^ntperfeltttttt. — Imperfect Sttbtf ctttt). — Indicative Sonjunftto. — Subj unctive 132 NEW GERMAN COURSE ^Serfeftum. — Perfect Srtbtf cttit). — Indicative ®on junf tit). — Subj unctive $tu3qttamt>erfeftum. —Pluperfect Snbtf atit). — Indicative ^onjtmf ttO . — Subj unctive $uturum. — Future 3nbtfatit>. — Indicative ® on junf ttt>. — Subj un ctive gfuturum factum. — Future Perfect Snbtf atit). — Indicative $onjunfttt>. — Subjunctive $OttbtttonttK3 $rafen3. — Conditional Present $OttbttiottaU3 $erfeftum. — Conditional Perfect 123. Use of the Tenses. i. The Present Tense corresponds to the English present, but it has only one form where the English has three ; e. g., 3d) lobe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise (see toben, § 151). 2. The present may be used to express a past action or event continuing into the present ; e. g., 3d) tootjne t)ier fett bret 3ctt)ren, I have lived here for three years (since three years). 3. The present may also be used with reference to an event that is to take place in the near future, especially when the time is indicated by an adverbial expression ; e. g., 3n bret £agen lomme id) gurucf. In three days I shall return. 4. The Imperfect tense is that of narrative or history. Like the present it has but one form where the English has three ; e. g., 3d) lobte, I praised, I did praise, I was praising. 5. The Perfect Tense expresses an action or event completed without reference to any other action or event. It is often used where the English uses the imperfect ; e. g., THE VERB 133 2Bo fjabert ©ie biefen §ut gefanft ? Where did you buy (have you bought) this hat. 3d) fysbe u)n in Sfteto 3)or! gefanft. I bought it in New York. 6. The Pluperfect Tense is used as in English ; e. g., 3d) fjcttte tfjn lange md)t gefefyen. I had not seen him for a long time. 7. The Future Tense is used as in English and also sometimes to denote a probability that is expressed in English by the present ; e. g., SSo ift ba$ 23nd) ? ®§ totrb in bem cmberett 3tiwner fctn. Where is the book ? It is (will be) probably in the other room. 8. The present conditional expresses what would happen under conditions afterwards stated, the dependent clause being put in the imperfect subjunctive ; e. g., 3d) to itrbe f)tnget)en, toenn id) bte Qtit bagu fyixttz. I would go there if I had the time for it. 9. The perfect conditional denotes that a certain thing would have happened under certain conditions, the dependent clause being put in the pluperfect subjunctive ; e. g., 3d) tonrbe ba§> §cm£ gelauft fjabett, toenn id) ba§ nifttge (Mb baju getjabt rjdtte. I would have bought the house if I had had the necessary money for it. ' 10. The conditionals are often replaced, the first by the im- perfect subjunctive and the second by the pluperfect subjunctive ; thus, in the above examples, td) gtttge fyirt in place of id) toitrbe fyingefjen, and id) f)titte ba§ «!pan3 gefanft in the place of td) toitrbe ba$ «§au3 gefauft tjaben. 2Btr toitrben tfjrt getroffen fjaben, toentt totr bortfyin gegangen toaren, or 23tr fatten tf)tt getroffen, toentt totr bortrjtn gegangen todren. We would have met him if we had gone there. 134 NEW GERMAN COURSE ri. Such expressions as / am to are rendered into German either by the future or by id) foil ; e. g., I am to speak at the meeting this evening. 3d) merbe (or id) foil) f)eute 2lbenb in ber SSerjammfung fyredjen. 12. Such expressions as I was about to, I was just going to, are translated by id) rooflte eben, or idj mar eben im ^Begriff ; e. g., I was just going to write to him, 3d) roollte eben an trjn fc£)ret6en. I was just going out, 3d) roar eben im $eariff an^ugetjen. Translate and Write : i . Where did you meet them ? I met them at church. 2. Please help me to lift this trunk. 3. What are the principal parts of loben ? 4. We have lived in this house for ten years. 5. Where did you buy these gloves ? I bought them in Paris. 6. When did you see Mr. Lang ? I have not seen him for three weeks. 7. Where is my hat ? It must be in your room. 8. I would buy this house if I were rich. 9. I would have bought the farm if I had had money enough. 10. I was just going out as he entered (160, 2). 11. Are we to ride in this carriage ? 124. The Indicative and Subjunctive Modes. 1. The indicative is the mode of reality and of certainty; the subjunctive is the mode of possibility and of uncertainty. 2. The indicative tells what actually exists, as, er lebt, he lives ; the subjunctive tells what is only thought of, believed, hoped for, etc. ; e. g., man glanbt, er (ebe nod), it is thought or believed that he still lives. 3. The subjunctive is often employed in a dependent clause introduced by a subordinating conjunction, as roenn, if; bamit, in order that ; aU oh, as if; baft, that ; e. g., 2Benn id) retd) mare, roiirbe id) bte( If I were rich I would travel reifen. much, ©eben (Ste eg tf)tn, bamit er md)t Give it to him so that he may roetne. not cry. THE VERB 135 (£r fjcmbeite, al§ oh er ^ornig mare. He acted as if he were angry. (£r bertft, bctfc er balb fommert He thinks that he will come tuerbe. soon. 125. Peculiar uses of the Subjunctive. 1. The imperative subjunctive is usually translated by let. It occurs in the first and third person ; e. g., (5r jet gelobt, let him be praised. 2. The optative subjunctive expresses a wish ; e. g., SBdre er mtr \)vtx,+if he were only here. 3. The potential subjunctive expresses some possibility. It is translated by may, might, could or would ; e. g., (£§ toctre mcfjt ffttg, jo 5U rjcmbeftt, it would not be wise to act so. 4. The subjunctive of indirect statement (£)te tnbtrelte s J?ebe- ttetje). This peculiar form of speech occurs when some one relates or quotes indirectly something that has been said or thought, hoped for, or the like. The indirect statement then takes the form of a dependent substantive clause, the verb of which is in the subjunctive mode and usually in the tense employed in the statement thus quoted. For example, a man says : DJcetn 23ruber ijt Iran!, my brother is ill, and is quoted thus : (£r jctgt, baj; jein SBritber Iran! fei, he says that his brother is ill. Again, in the sen- tence : 3d) jragte ifjlt, 06 er (Mb rjabe, / asked him whether he had any money, the verb fjctbe is put in the present subjunctive because the original question was in the present, viz. : §afcen ©ie (Mb ? But where the present subjunctive does not differ from the present indicative the imperfect subjunctive is used, e. g. : They said that they had lost all their money, <£>te jagtett, baJ3 .^k ail irjr (Mb Serlorert fatten. Further examples are : (£r cmfroortete, bctjs er mtr ^erjn SJcctrf fjabe. He answered that he had only ten marks. @te bacfjtert, baj$ jte rjeute nidjt fommen lonntert. They thought they could not come to-day. 136 NEW GERMAN COURSE 3d) bad)te, ba$ er trie! (Mb f)dtte. I thought that he had much money. @ie er§d(j(ten mir, ba$ fie tfjr ganged SBermflgen oerloren fatten. They related to me that they had lost their entire fortune. Wan fctgt, bctfe ber ^rdftbent bettte cmfommen toerbe. It is said that the president will arrive to-day. 3d) fragte irjn, toarum er jo [pat attgefommen jet. I asked him why he had arrived so late. (Sr cmttoortete, baJ3 er ben 3ttg oerferjlt r)abe. He answered that he had missed the train. (Sr fcrjrteb mir, baft er mcr)i ttorjl jet. He wrote me that he was not well. 5. The conjunction that introduces the dependent clause may be omitted and then this clause assumes the normal order. For example the last sentence might be : (£r fcfyrteb mir, er fet nitf)t roof)!. 126. The Imperative Mode (2>er Smperaiifc). 1. The Imperative Mode corresponds in meaning to the English, but it has peculiarities of form that require attention. 2. In the formal style of personal address the 3d person plural is used (in place of the 2d plural) in addressing one or more than one person, the pronoun being then written with a capital initial ; e. g., Soben ©te, praise {you). @ef)ert ©ie, go (you). 3. The 3d person singular and the 1st and 3d plural of the present subjunctive are also used in an imperative sense ; thus we have, taking toben (151) as an example : Imperative Forms : Singular. Plural. i. lobett totr, let us praise 2. lobe, praise (obet or lobt, praise 3. lobe er, let him praise lobert fie, let them praise The formal style : Sobert ©te, praise (you). THE VERB 137 Translate and Write: 1 . If we were rich we would build a beautiful house. 2 . They acted as if they were crazy. 3. I hope they will go soon. 4. I wrote that I would arrive the day after to-morrow. 5. He said that his brother was dead. 6. Praise this good boy. 7. I have praised him, because he has helped me so well (170, 3). 127. The Infinitive Mode (Ser SttfmittD). All Infinitives end in n and nearly all in en* They may be used as nouns and are then of the neuter gender, and used, with rare exceptions, in the singular number only. They are then declined like nouns, of the 3d class neuter (55), and are usually translated by the verbal noun in ing ; e. g., 3)cr£ @ef)en tft fet)r fd)(edjt. The going is very bad. Sefen unb ©d)ret6en ftnb nii^tttfje ®itnfte. Reading and writing are useful arts. 128. The Infinitive Preceded by ju, 1. The Infinitive is used with the preposition 511 in a great variety of cases and especially where to would be used in render- ing it into English ; e. g., Gsr fing an (160, 1) gu arbetten, He began to work. 3d) fyoffe ©te ttneber git fefjen, I hope to see you again. Gsrlauben ©ie mir fjter §u ftf)retben, 1 Permit me to write here. £)tefe SKaren ftnb 5U berfaufen, These goods are for sale. 2Btr fjctben fyeute triel §u tun, We have much to do to-day. 3d) frette mid) (159) ba§ §u tjoren, I am glad to hear that. §a6en ©ie £uft tn3 Sweater gu Have you a mind to go to the ge^en ? theater ? ©obctlb id) anlam (160, 2), f)or* As soon as I arrived they ten fie auf gu reben, stopped talking, ©agen ©te tfmt, roa3 er gu tun Ijat, Tell him what he has to do. 138 NEW GERMAN COURSE £)iefe3 (SretgmS ift fefjr gu bellow This occurrence is much to be gen, regretted. 3cfj fyabe fjeute brei 2ktcfe 511 I have three letters to write frf)retben, to-day. 2)a3 Gsffen ift gum Seben notig, Eating is necessary to life. 2. The preposition 511 when used with a separable verb stands between the prefix and the infinitive ; e. g., 3d) f)abe meine 2hifgabe ab^u- I have to copy my task. fdjretben, £)ie timber roiinfctjen au^ugefyen, The children wish to go out. SBttte, tjelfen ©te mtr btefen SLifcf) Please help me to lift this aufgufjeben, table. 129. The Prepositions ftatt, ofjne and urn with the Infinitive. Three prepositions only, viz. : ftcttt or artftatt, instead of ; ofjne, without ; and urn, in order, directly govern the infinitive with ©tatt §u lernen rjat er nur gefotett. Instead of studying he only played. (£r ging fort ofute em SSort §u fagen. He went away without saying a word. 3d) bin geformnen, urn biefe DMjtmng 511 beaten. I have come in order to pay this bill. Translate and Write: 1. Eating and drinking are necessary to life. 2. We began to eat at seven o'clock. 3. We hope to see them again soon. 4. This house is for sale. 5 . Have you much to do to-day ? 6. We are glad to hear that. 7. Do you wish to go to the concert? 8. We have many letters to write to-day and to- morrow. 9. I wish to go out. 10. Instead of working they only laughed and danced. 11. They went home without paying the bill. 12. I came here in order to work. THE VERB 139 130. The Infinitive without $u. Without 5U the infinitive is used : 1 . As the subject of a sentence ; e. g., @einen gembett uergetijen ift ebel To forgive one's enemies is noble. Unrest fetbert ift beffer ctl£ Unrest tun. To suffer wrong is better than to do wrong. 2. After the auxiliaries of mode (148) ; e. g., 3d) ten fd)reiben, I can write ; !£Ba3 rooGen elfen ttrirb tnir erlaubt, / am allowed ; (£$ ttmrbe mir erlaubt, / was allowed; (£3 ttmrbe gefungen unb getan^t, there was singing and 6. The student must be careful to distinguish between the use of fern and of merben. SSerben, as the auxiliary of the passive voice, relates to an action in progress ; as, ba$ Qau§ ttrirb gebaut, the house is being built (some one is building the house) ; while fettt relates to a state or condition resulting from a previous action ; as, ba§> $QdU$ if! gebcmt, the house is built (the work is completed). Remember that there can be no passive voice in German without some form of roerben. 134. The English Passive rendered into the German Active. 1 . The passive voice is much less employed in German than in English. In place of the passive the German often employs the active with the indefinite pronoun mart : thus, it is said, man f agt ; or with a reflexive form : as, it is understood, es> rjerfterjt fid}. 2. The German, in general, prefers the active form of any verb ; thus, instead of bieje3 §au3 ttmrbe rjon metnem $ater gebant, this house was built by my father, he would say, mettt $ater baute biefeS §an3 (or Ijat btefeS §au3 gebaut). Translate and Write : 1. To pay one's debt is honest. 2. I can read, but I cannot write. 3. What will he do ? He will do nothing. 4. Please 142 NEW GERMAN COURSE help me carry this trunk. 5. We taught them to read. 6. We heard them laughing. 7. We remained standing. 8. Let him go begging if he is poor. 9. I knew them to be good people. 10. We wish them to go to school. 11. I am being praised. 12. The good child was loved. 13. The lost key has been found. 14. The good children had been praised. 15. By whom was this bridge built ? It was built by the Romans. 135. The Participles ($te ^artijtyten). The participles are verbal adjectives with the meaning of verbs and the grammatical construction and inflection of adjectives. There are two participles, viz., the present and the past ; e. g., Soften, to praise ; participles, to6enb, praising ; getobt, praised. 136. The Present Participle. 1. The present participle is used as an attributive adjective as in English ; e. g., em tad}enbes> $tnb, a laughing child. It may also be used appositively in connection with another verb ; as, „£ad)enb fefyrte er mir ben SRitcfen." Laughing he turned his back on me. 2. In other respects the use of the present participle differs from the English. We cannot say, for example, bct3 $inb ift fctdjenb, the child is laughing. We must say, bct£ ®inb (cttf)t. 3. But when the present participle expresses not an action, but an attribute of the noun, it may be used predicatively ; thus, ba§> ®tnb ift reigenb, the child is charming. 4. The present participle may be used as a noun with the definite or the indefinite article, and is then declined like an adjective ; e. g., S^eifen, to travel ; ber SRetfenbe, the traveller ; em SRetfenber, a traveller. Declension : ber Sfaifenbe, be3 SKetfenbeit; bent Dletfenben, ben Sftetfenben. Plural : bie ^etfenben, etc. THE VERB 143 With indefinite article: (gin Sfatfenber, eme£ Dfotfenben, etrtem SRetfenben, einert D^etfenben. liefer ^Hetfenbe fjctt fetn @epacf This traveller has lost his bag- rjerloren. gage (luggage). 137. The Past Participle. 1. In addition to its use in the formation of the compound tenses the past participle may be used as an adjective, both pred- icatively and attributively ; e. g., £)er ©djlitffel tft fcerloren, the key is lost ; etrt fcerlorener ©crjlitffel, a lost key. 2. The past participle may be used as a noun and is then declined with the article like an adjective. Examples are : ber @3e(erjrte, the learned man em ®efer)rter, a learned man ber ©efcmbte, the ambassador etrt ©efcmbter, an ambassador ber SBerlorene, the lost one em SBerlorener, a lost one ber 53efrette, the liberated one etrt SBefretter, a liberated one Declension : ber (Merjrte, be§ (Merjrten, bent (Mefyrten, etc. G£trt ©elerjrter, etne3 (Merjrten, euterrt (Met)rten, etnen (Merjrten. 138. Adjectives with the Form of Participles. 1 . There are many words used as adjectives that have the form of the past participle, but which cannot be referred to any known infinitive. Such are gefdjicft, skillful ; befannt, known; gefttrrtt, starry ; bejafjrt, aged. Many of these take the negative prefix mt, as, nngefcfjtcft, unskillful ; unbefcmnt, unknown; e. g., liefer 2lrbetter tft fetjr gefcrjicft, aber jener tft nngefcrjtcft. This workman is very skillful, but that one is unskillful. £)tefer «!perr tft mtr nnbefcmnt. This gentleman is unknown to me. 144 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2. A verb of motion, as ktnfen, to run ; fafjren, to ride, used in connection with fonunen, to come, takes the form of the past par- ticiple (instead of the present), to express the mode of motion ; e- g., Gsr fommt gelcmfen, He comes running. (£r fam gefrocfjen, He came creeping, ©te fctmen gefafyxn, They came riding. 3. A like form is fcerloren geljen, to be lost ; e. g., SJcetn SBud) ift bertoren gegcmgen. My book is lost (gone lost). 4. The past participle combined with a negation is often used in place of the imperative ; e. g., „9ctd)t lang gefeiert ! grtfd) ! $)te Stftanerfteine ^erbet! £)en Stalf, ben Nortel §ugefa()ren !" ©djiUerS „2BU!)etm$eU." Do not delay long ! Quick! Bring the wall-stones here. Bring the lime, the mortar. 139. The Future Passive Participle. By placing §u before the present participle of a transitive verb there is formed a future passive participle (the Latin gerundive) which is used in some idiomatic phrases ; e. g., etn %\x lobenber ©olbat, a to be praised soldier, i. e. a soldier who may be or should be praised ; etn me gn rjergeffenber UnfctH, a never-to-be-forgotten accident. 140. Comparison of Participles. Both participles admit of comparison, but only when used as adjectives ; e.g., bebeutenb, important ; bebentenber, more important ; ber (bte, ba$) bebeutenbfte, the most important. @elef)rt, learned; gelefyrter, more learned ; ber (bte, ba§) gelefjr* tefte, the most learned. THE VERB 145 $trtf)ott) tuar em fe^r ge(ef)rter Wlann ; er toar euter ber gelefyrteften trgte $eutftf)lanbg. Virchow was a very learned man ; he was one of the most learned physicians of Germany. Translate and Write: 1. The boy is crying. 2. This girl is charming. 3. These travelers have lost their trunks. 4. The diamond is lost ; I have found the lost diamond. 5. William is skillful, but Thomas is unskillful. 6. How did he come ? He came running. 7. My watch is lost. 8. A child to be loved. 9. This is an important business. 10. Noah Webster was a learned man ; he was the most learned philologist of his time. 141. The Uses of Ijafcett, fcin and taerbett. «ctcf)fen, to grow ttmcp getoacrjfen 147 144. Verbs Conjugated with Jjafcen or fettu There are a few verbs that are conjugated with rjctben when they relate to motion in the abstract, but with fetn when reference is had to motion from or to a designated point ; e. g., £)er Slnabe rjat gefdjtoommert, £er £nabe tfi an3 lifer gefcrjtoont' men, SDtefer DJcann fjat btel geretft, ©r tft nacfj Dinfelanb geretft, The boy has swum. The boy has swum to the bank. This man has travelled much. He has gone to Russia. Translate and Write: 1. I shall write to him 1 to-morrow. 2. This boy will not learn his lesson. 3. I met 3 your brother yesterday. 4. What has happened ? A child has fallen into the water. 5. Is your father at home ? No, he has gone the city. 3 6. Where did 4 these plants grow. They grew4 in our garden. 7. Our friends arrived 5 this morning. The following conjugations and exercises will involve a useful review of the preceding lessons and the pupil should always turn to the sections indicated. 1. an tljn. 2. Perfect tense and with dative. 3. £51* bie ort) l)aft bu meinen §ut ? Sftein, id) f)abe iljn nid)t. 28er f)at i^rt ? 2)a^ toeift id) nid)t. §a6ert ort b a b en im ^nbtfattb. I50 NEW GERMAN COURSE 146. The Auxiliary Verb (^tlfsscttroort) fettt, to be. Principal Parts (£)auUtformen) : feut, Wax, getucfciu $rafeu3. Smperfeftum. Snbifattt). ^onjunltib. 3nbi!.ati». ®onjunftiu. I am I may be I was I might be id) bin id) fei id) luctr id) toftre bu bift bu feieft bu tnarft bn ludreft er (fie, t§) ift er fei er wax er to arc Xoix finb fair feien tnir waxen wix tuaren i\)x feib h)x feiet \i)x toaret ifjr tndret fie finb fie feien fie tuaren fie todreu ^Scrfeftitm. Snb. : id) bin (bu bift, etc.) getuefen, I have been. S!onj. : id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) getuefen, I may have been. $Iu3quamperfeftum. £>nb. : id) Wax (bu toarft, etc.) gewefen, I had been. ®onj. : id) tudre (bn tudreft, etc.) getuefen, I might have been. $utimtm. %nb.: id) tuerbe (bu ttrirft, etc.) fein, I shall be. $onj. : id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) fein, I shall be. $uturum @jaftum. ^nb.: id) tuerbe (bu toirft, etc.) getuefen fein, I shall have been. Stonj. : id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) getuefen fein, I shall have been. ^ottbitionaltS $rafen3. id) iuitrbe (bu tuiirbeft, etc.) fein, I should or would be. ^onbittonaU^ $erfeftum. id) tuiirbe (bu iuitrbeft, etc.) gettefen fein, I should or would have been. Smjjeratto: ©in g. fei, be (thou); Spiur. feib, be (ye). Sttftttitto: sprdf. fein, to be; ^perf. getuefen fein, to have been. ^artistyien: ^raf. feienb, being; ^erf. genjefen, been. THE VERB 151 Rati, too bift bu ? §ter bin id). S3ift bu franl ? Sftein, id) bin gan§ tool)!. 3So ift @corg ? (Sr ift in ber ©djule. SSarft bn rjettte in ber ©ctjule ? 3a, rjeute morgen. 28o toarft bu Ijeute 9tad)mittag ? 3d) blieb $u §au|e. 2£arum bliebft bu gu ^aufe ? Urn §u fpieten. 3$o toarft bu gcftern ? ©eftern toar id) in ber ©tabt. 28o toirft bu morgen fein ? Sftorgen toerbe id) 511 §aufe fein. 2Sa3 tottrbeft bu tun, menu bu SKenn id) reicfj mare, tottrbe id) t>tet reid) toctreft? reifen. „3>u bift tote eine 2Mume, fo rjolb unb fctjdn unb rein ; 3d) fd)au' bid) an, unb SBefymut fd)(eid)t ntir in§ §erj I)inein. SD^tr ift, a(3 ob id) bie §anbe auf£ §aupt bir tegen folCIt', SBetenb, baf$ ©ott bid) errjalte fo rein unb fd)on unb rjotb." 2 e I) r e r. Sernen £>ie biefe3 ©ebicfjt fitr morgen au^toenbig. — @ dj it I e r. 3d) f)a6e e3 fcrjon geternt. 2. ©eijen ©ie an bie £afel unb fdjreiben ©ie e3. — . I became id) ttmrbe bit ttmrbeft er nmrbe urir ttmrben if)r nntrbet fie nwrben I might become id) nntrbe bit luurbcft er tour be toir toitrben i()r toi'trbet fie luiirben The imp. ind. has also the singular id) toarb, bu toarbft, er toarb ^crfcftum. id) bin (bu bift, etc.) getoorben, I have become. id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) getoorben, I (may) have become. ^fa^quamperfeftum, id) toar (bu toarft, etc.) getoorben, I had become. id) toare (bu tocireft, etc.) getoorben, I (might) have become Sfntimtm. id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) toerben, I shall become, id) toerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) toerben, I shall become. ftutnrum cjaftum. id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) getoorben fein, I shall have become, id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) getoorben fein, I shall have become. $ottbtttonaU3 $rofen3. id) toiirbe (bu toiirbeft, etc.) luerben, I should or would become. $0ttbitiottaU3 $erfeftum. id) toiirbe etc. getoorben fein, I should or would have become. $mp. : @ing. toerbe, become (thou) ; $p( ur. toerbet, become (ye). 3nf. : ^raf. toerben, to become ; ^erf. getoorben fein, to have become. tyavt.: ^rdf. toerbenb, becoming; ^erf. getoorben, become. Snb. ®onj Snb. ®onj Snb. flonj. Snb. tonj THE VERB 153 ^ont»etfatiott» 23ie ift ba§ better fjeute ? &$ ffingt an (160) fait gu merben. SSurbe §err 91 in Sonbon reid) ? 8a, er tourbe fet)r retcf). 3ft 3t)r ©ruber retct) geraorben ? 9tan, er ift arm geraorben. 2£er mirb reid) tuerben ? £)ie gteiftigen merben retct) merben. 2£ie mirb man retct) ? SDton mirb im ©efdjafte reict). s Berben alle ©efd)aft3(eute reict) ? 9can, nid)t ade, nur bie fleiSigften unb ftitgften. «g)offen ©ie retd) gu merben ? 3a, ba$ tjoffe id). (Stub bie ^Heidjen immer glitdlid) ? 9?ein, fie finb ntct)t immer gtudtid). 2Ber ift ber gtudlid)fte Wann ? $er SBcfte ift ber ©Oicfltdjfie. 3m Safyre 1848 ging §err Sang nad) Qtatifornien unb mar in jenem £anbe ferjr gtiidtid). (£r entbedte eine ©olbmine unb raurbe baburd) fet)r retctj, aber am Gsnbe oerlor er atte3 unb rourbe arm. (£r ging ^u ®runbe, meit er $u Diet unternatjm. 2 e t) r e r. 2Ber ging nad) (Sattf ornien ? — © d) it t e r. §err Sang ging nad) (Satifornien. 2. Sn me(d)em 3at)re ging er t)in ? — ©d). (£3 mar im 3at)re 1848. £. SKurbe er in biefem Sanbe retct) ? — Set). 3a, fet)r retct). £. $ertor er am Gmbe fein $ermogen ? — @ d). 3a, er oertor aEe^ unb rourbe arm* £. 3n toetdjer 2Beife certor er fein $ermogen ? — © d). (£r Dertor e£ baburd), bafj er gu Diet unternatjm. & SSetct)e^ finb bie §auptf ormen dou ro e r b e n. — © dj. SSerben, murbe, geroorben. & (Men ©often means both shall and ought. It relates both to duty (which was its original signification) and to authority ; thus, ma3 foil ttf) tun ? what shall I do ? ®te fatten fritter tommen follen, you ought to have come sooner. In the imperfect subjunctive after menn it relates to an event that may happen, but is not certain ; thus, menn z§> regnen follte, fo lonnten mir mtf)t au^farjren, if it should rain, we could not ride out. It is also used in referring to a thing that has been said or reported as a fact, but which the THE VERB 157 speaker does not vouch for ; thus, 5llejartber Hamilton foil biefe QMmne gepflanjt tjaben, Alexander Hamilton is said to have planted these trees. 6. g&ottat. 3SoIIen signifies will, choice or desire ; as, id) \v\U 0,ef)en, / will go ; xva§ tvolim @ie, what do you wish f In the imperfect tense it means would or wished; thus, id) too lite f)ing,ef)en,aber tcf) burfte ntdjt, / wished to go there, but I was not permitted. Sometimes it refers to an event that is about to happen, etrt Sftcmrt, ber nad) (Sncjlanb gef]en roollte, « man who was just about to start for England. It has also a peculiar use in such assertive phrases as, er ftntf biefe ©d)u(b be§at)It fyaben, he claims to have paid this debt. 150. The Causative Auxiliary, laffen, to Jet, permit, to cause a thing to be done. Principal Parts : laffen, ltef$, gelaffen. Aux., fjaben. 1. This verb, in addition to its independent uses, may be joined to the infinitive of another verb in a manner similar to the aux- iliaries of mode, and is sometimes classed with them ; e. g., Saffert ®ie mid) etntreten. Let me enter. 2So laffen ©ie Sljre ^letber Where do you have your cloth- mad)en ? ing made ? Scf) laffe fie bet bent ©cfynetber I have it made by the tailor 5lbter matfjen. Adler. 9?ad)ften ©omnter toerbe id) em Next summer I shall have a ,£)au£ bauen laffen. house built. 1 Translate and Write: 1 . May I open the window ? Yes, if it is too warm here. 2. Have you translated the sentence ? No, I was not able to translate it. 3. Is this news true ? It may indeed be true. 4. Were you at school to-day ? No, I wished to go, but I was obliged to remain at home. 5. What can I do for you ? (how can I serve you ?) I should like to buy some (several) handkerchiefs. 158 NEW GERMAN COURSE 151. gobett, to praise, Pri?icipal Parts : lo&Ctt, lobte, gclo&t. A Vei'b of the Weak {regular) Conjugation. Aux. : fjafieit. $rafen§. Sm^erfeltum. Snbifatib. tonjunfttb. Snbtfatib, ^onjunftiD. I praise I may praise I praised I might praise id) lobe id) lobe id) lobte id) lob(e)te bu lobft bit lobeft bn lobteft bit lob(e)teft er Io6t er lobe er lobte er lob(e)te totr loben ruir loben loir lobten toir lob(e)ten tl)r lobt i()r lobet il)r lobtet tfjr lob(e)tet fie loben fie loben fie lobten fie lob(e)ten ^crfeftum. 5 n b. : id) Ijctbe (bn l)dft, er l)at, etc.) gelobt, I have praised. 6 n j. : id) l)abe (bn l)abeft f er t)abc, etc.) gelobt, I may have praised. $hi3quam}> erf ef turn. 3 n b. : id) l)atte (bu l)atteft f er l)attc, etc.) gelobt, I had praised. SI n j. : id) Ijcttte (bu Ijcitteft, etc.) gelobt, I might have praised. $uturum. 3 u b. : id) loerbe (bu nnrft, etc.) loben, I shall praise. St n j. : id) loerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) loben, I shall praise. gfutttrum egaftum. Sub.: id) toerbe (bu loirft, etc.) gelobt tjaben, I shall have praised. St n j. : id) toerbe (bu nierbefl, etc.) gelobt t)ctben, I shall have praised. ®onbttiottaU3 $rafen3, id) toiirbe, etc. (bu toitrbeft, etc.) loben, I should or would praise. ®0ttbtttmtali3 $erfeftum. id) toitrbe(butourbeft, etc.) gelobt l)aben, I should or would have praised. Smperath): (Sing, lobe, praise (thou); ^lur. lob(e)t, praise (you). Sitfittitfo: ^3raf. loben, praise; ^erf. gelobt ^aben, have praised. ^arttstytett : ^rcif. lobenb, praising; ^erf. gelobt, praised. THE VERB 159 Stout) e?f a tion* 2 e vj r e r. 2Sa3 fiir etn $erb ift (often ? — © d) ft I e r. S b e n ift etn 8$er& ber )d)tuact)en (regelmdfcigeu) Conjugation. 5. ©e6en ©ie mir bie ©tynopfig oon 1 b e n im Snbifatio. — © clj. 3d) lobe, id) lobte, id) l)abt gelobt, id) l)atte gelobt, id) roerbe loben, tc^ merbe gelobt rjaben. 2. Conjugieren ©ie loben im ^lu^quamperfeltum Conjunftib. — ©d). 3d) fjatte gelobt, bu fjatteft gelobt, er tjdtte gelobt,- etc. 2. Hftennen ©ie mir etnige anbere 5Ber6en ber fdjtoadjen Conjuga- tion. — © dj. ©oil tcf) bie §auptformen geben ober blo3 bie Snfinitioe ? & (Men ©ie mir nur bie §auptformen. ^nfinitit). 3mp erf ef him. 2. %att adjten, to respect a&jtett geadjtet abbieren, to add abbierte abbiert (121, 5) bauen, to build baute ^baut erfldren, to explain erfldrte erfldrt (121, 5) glauben, to believe glaubte geglaubt 2Ser lobt ben guten ©crjftler ? £>er £et)rer tobt tfm. SSarum lobt er itjn ? @r lobt ttjtt, loeil er f)oflid) unb fletfeig tft. 5(d)teft bu beine (Sttern ? D ja, id) act)te fie fet)r. SSer l)at btefe^ grofce fQau$ gebaut ? 3d] tuetft nid)t, roer e3 ^baut v)at, aber ^err Sen^ v)at e3 bauen laffen. Glauben ©ie atfeS, mag ©ie f)oren ? -jftem, id) glaube nur, \va§ bemiefen ift. Translate and Write : 1 1 . What kind of a verb is glauben ? It is a verb of the weak conjugation. 2. Conjugate abbieren in the perfect indicative. 3. Does the teacher praise the naughty scholars ? No, he does not praise them. 4. Who built that new house ? I do not know, but Mr. Wollman had it built. 5 . Can you explain this sentence ? No, I cannot explain it, for I do not understand it. 6. Go to the blackboard (156) and write the principal parts of Oermieten and galjlen. 7. Translate and write this sentence. i6o NEW GERMAN COURSE 152. Sofcett, to praise, Passive Voice (133) : Aux. tuerbeit. $rafett§. $mtoerfeftum. Snbifattb: ®ottjunfttto. ^rtbtfatit). Sonjunftib. I am I may be I was I might be praised praised praised praised id) tuerbe id) tuerbe id) tuurbe id) tuurbe bu totrft bu tuerbeft bu tuurbeft bu tuiirbeft er tuirb %, er tuerbe ^ er rourbe *§, er tuurbe luir tuerben g? rotr tuerben s: iuir tunrben S: rutr tuiirben il)r roerbet ttjr roerbet il)r tuurbet itjr tuiirbet fie tuerben fie Herbert _ fie tunrben fie roiirben ^crfcftum. 3 n b. : id) Bin (bu frift, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I have been praised. $ n j. : id) f et (bu feieft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I may have been praised. $ht3quamberfeftum. ^nb. : id) toar (bu tuarft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I had been praised. $ n j. : id) tuare (bu tuareft, etc.) gelobt tuorben, I might have been Sutimtm. [praised. id) tuerbe (bu tuirft, etc.) getotit roerben, I shall be praised. id) tuerbe (bu tuerbeft, etc.) gelobt tuerben, I shall be praised. ftuhmtm esaftum. [praised, id) tuerbe (bu tuirft, etc.) gelobt tuorben fein, I shall have been id) tuerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) gelobt tuorben fein, I shall have been ^onbittonattS ^rfifenS. [praised, id) toiirbe (bu iuitrbeft, etc.) gelobt tuerben, I should be praised. $frmtuti0ttatt3 ^erfeftum. id) tuiirbe, etc., gelobt tuorben fein, I should have been praised. ^mtoerath) : © i n g. : tuerbe gelobt, be (thou) praised ; ^ t u r. : toerbet gelobt, be (ye) praised. Snfimtit) : $)3 r a f. : gelobt tuerben, to be praised ; ^ e r f. : gelobt tuorben fein, to have been praised. ^arttatbteit : ^5 r a f. : gelobt tuerbenb, being praised ; ^ e r f. : gelobt tuorben, been praised. Sub. ®onj Snb. ®onj THE VERB l6l Stonfcetfattom Sefjrer. 28a3 fur erne gorm be3 $erb3 tjabett toir t)ier ? — <© d) ii 1 e r. 28tr f)aben bie paffioe gorm. £. 2Sa3 fiir $erben roerben in ber paffioen gorm f onjugiert ? — @d). 9Ute tranfitioen $erben tjaben biefe gortn. 2. 9tennen ©ie mir eintge atibere tranfitioe $erben. © d). t)ofen, to fetch t)dren, to hear fpietcn, to play lieben, to love madjen, to make (efjren, to teach 2. <8inb btefe £krben gebrductjltcr) ? — <3cij. 3a, fetjr gebraud)tid). 2. ©ef)en <3te an bte Xafel itnb fctjreiOert ©te bte @t)nopft3 Oon lieben im s $affioum, SnbifattO unb SlonjunfttO (ber (Skitter get)t nnb fcfyretbt : id) roerbe geliebt, n. f . to.). 3)te gute Gutter liebt unb lobt if)r gute£ $inb. (Ste liebt e3, roeit fie eine gute Gutter ift ; unb fie lobt e$, toeit e£ fleifu'g unb lieben^- toltrbig ift. ©3 ift iinmer fo ; bie guten ®inber toerben t)on alien guten 9Jtenfd]en geliebt unb gelobt. $ergif$ ba$ nidjt, mein Stinb ; toenn bu immer gut unb liebretd) bleibft, fo toirft bit Oon jebermann, ber bid) fennt f geliebt unb gelobt toerben. 2 e I) r e r. SDefltnieren ©te ba3 3Sort Gutter. — © cij. 2)ie Gutter, ber Gutter, ber Gutter, bie Gutter; plural, bie Gutter, u.f.to. £. 28efd)e3 finb bie §auptformen Oon lieben? — erfeftmm Snbtfattb. ®onjunftit>. ^ttbifatit). ®ottjunfttt>. I give I may give I gave I might give id) gebe id) gebe id) gab id) gabe bu gibft bu gebeft bn gabft bn gtibeft er gtbt er gebe er gab er gabe ftnr geben nn'r geben ftir gaben fair gaben ifyr gebt ifyr gebet ifyr gabt ifyr gabet fie geben fie geben fie gaben fie gaben ^erfeftum. Snb. : id) fyahz (bn l)aft f er fyat, etc.) gegeben, I have given. $ o n j. : id) fyabe (bn fyabeft, er fyabc, etc.) gegeben, I may have given. $ltt3quam$)erfeftttm. Snb. : id) §atk (bu fyatteft, er fyatte, etc.) gegeben, I had given. $ o n j. : id) fydtte (bn fyatteft, er fjtitte, etc.) gegeben, I might have given. §uturtttn, S n b. : id) toerbe (bn nrirft, er toirb, etc.) geben, I shall give. ®on j. : id) tnerbe (bn toerbeft, er toerbe, etc.) geben, I shall give. $utuntm cgaltum* Snb. : id) inerbe (On toirft, etc.) gegeben fyaben, I shall have given. ® o n j. : id) toerbe (bu merbeft, etc.) gegeben fyaben, I shall have given. ®onbtttotialt3 ^rfifett^ id) toiirbe (bn toiirbeft, etc.) geben, I should or would give. ®0ttbttumati3 $erfeftum. id) toiirbe, etc., gegeben fyaben, I should or would have given. 3m*)erati& : ©ing. gib, give (thou); ^lur. geb(e)t, give (you). Sttfmttiti : ^3rdf. geben, give ; ^erf. gegeben fyaben, have given. *partisi|jictt : ^rdf. gebenb, giving; g$erf. gegeben, given. THE VERB 165 Stent) etfattotu 2$a3 [)aft bu ba ? 3d) fjabe ein fdjflneS SBtlb. SBtllft bu ey mtr gebeu ? Dcein, id) tt)iU e3 bir uicfjt gebeu. SSarum uidjt ? SBeil e3 mir uicfjt gefjort (170, 3). 2£em gefjort e3 ? ©3 gefjort meiuem 23ruber. 2Sa3 tottfft bu mtr gebeu ? 3d) mill btr biefe fcfjbue $afe gebeu. 3Sa3 fjaft bu ^ebtutg gegebeu ? 3d) fjabe ifjr eiue Ufjr gegebeu. SBerftefjft bu bte beutfdje ©rammattf ? 3d) lerue fie efieu. @ib mir bie ©t)uopfi3 t»ou geBeit im Snbtfarto. 3d) gebe, id) gab, id) fjabe gegebeu, id) tjatte gegebeu, icf) merbe geben, id) raerbe gegebeu t)aben. Su toeldjem galle ftef»t ba<3 2Sort mir ? @g ftefjt im £)atto. 9lt)o gebeu regiert beu $)arto. @ebeu regiert eiue ^erfon im £)atit) unb eiue ©acfje im 5Iccufatio. 9tenue mir einige ber gebraucfjlicfjfteu $erbeu, tuelcfje eiue ^erfou im 3)atto uub eiue ©adje im ^ccufarto regiereu. ©efjr gebrductjltct) finb : aubieten, to offer fagen, to say, tell briugen, to bring fctjicfen, to send ergafjlen, to relate fcfjeufen, to present gebeu, to give oorfefeu, to read (to one) leifyeu, to lend getgert, to show SSoHen ®ie mir germ Wlavf Iett)en ? 3a, mit Skrguitgen. SBttte, fcfjideu ©ie mir ba§ $8u&) §uriid, rrjelct)e^ ©ie oorige 2Socfje geborgt tjabert. 3d) raill e3 gleicfj guriidfefjideu (160, 1). 1 Translate and Write : 1. What have you there? I have a fountain-pen. 2. To whom does it belong ? It belongs to me. 3. Will you give it to me ? No, I will not give it to you, but I will lend it to you. 4. Please send me the books that belong to me. 5. Who related this story to you ? My mother related it to me. 6. Please show me your collection of photographs. You have a fine col* lection. 166 NEW GERMAN COURSE A Strong Verb with the Auxiliary fettt* 156. (Bel)en, to go. Principal Parts : gcfjen, ghtg, gegangen. $rafett3. ^mperfeftam. Snbilattto. flonjuttftib. Snbifatito. &onjunfttt>. I go I may go I went I might go id) ger)e id) gefje id) ging id) ginge bu QC^ft bu gerjeft bu gingft bu gingcft er gerjt er gelje er ging er ginge rotr gerjen tm'r gef)en fair gin gen lutr gtngcn Hjr gef)t itjr ge()et i()r gingt ifyr ginget fie gefyen fie gef)en fie gingeu fie gin gen y ^erfeftum. 3 n b. : id) bin (bu bift, er tft, etc.) gegangen, I have gone. ^ o n j. : id) fei (bu feieft, er fei r etc.) gegangen, I may have gone. 3n b. : id) roar (bn toarft, er tr>ar, etc.) gegangen f I had gone. $ o n j. : id) tntire (bu tncireft, etc.) gegangen, I might have gone. gfitturum. Sub. : id) toerbe (bu inirft, er toirb, etc.) gefjcn, I shall go. ^on j. : id) tnerbe (bu roerbeft, etc.) gefjcn, I shall go. ftuturum cjaftum. Sub.: id) toerbe (bu toirft, etc.) gegctngen fetn, I shall have gone. $ o n j. : id) toerbe (bu tnerbeft, etc.) gegangen fetn, I shall have gone. $onMttottaii3 $rafen3. id) roitrbe (bu ttmrbeft, er ttmrbe, etc.) gerjen, I should or would go. $0ttbittimali3 ^erfeftum. id) toiirbe (bu roitrbeft, etc.) gegangen fetn, I should or would have gone. 3mjjerath»: 'Sing. ger)(e) f go (thou); ?$L gerjt (gef)en ©ie) go (you). Sttfinitto : ^rdf. gerjen, go ; ^ er f. : gegangen fetn, to have gone. ^artistyien : ^rtif. gerjenb, going; ^erf. gegangen, gone. THE VERB 167 ^unt»crfatiott» ©uten SDforgen, $)la£, roof)in gerjft bit ? 3d) getje in bie ©dude. 2So ift bein SSater ? Gr ift in bie (Btabt gegangen. 2£o roarft bu geftern ? 3d) mar bet meinem Dnlel in 9ttbanrj. SBann toirft bu nad) 3)eutfd)lanb gefyen ? 3d) fjoffe nad)fte3 3af)r mit meinem better fyin^ugefjen. 9Jat roeldjem «g)t(f^t>er£> mirb geljen lonjugiert ? Wit feiiu SScrben ade QSerben mit fein lonjugiert? D nein, nur gemiffe intranfitiue $crben roerben mit fein lonjugiert. D^enne mir einige ber gebriind)lid)ften SSerben, raelcfje mit fein fonju- giert merben. golgenbe finb fe()r gebrdud)lid) : SBegegncn, bleiben, fallen, fliegen, gerjen, lommen, gefdjerjen, finlen, ffcerben, roadmen (143, 2). Saben Sie §errn Ctto neu(id) gefeljen ? 3a, id) begegnete tfjm fjeute SDcorgen auf ber ©trafje (or id) bin ir)m begegnet). 3So ift 5f)r 33ud) ? 3d) roetfj e3 nid)t ; eS ift oerloren gegangen. Sft 3t)r S3ruber ju «*paufe ? 3a, er ift eben angelommen. 2Sa3 ift gefcrjerjen ? ©in £inb ift in3 SBaffer gefaffen. 5ft ber arme SDcann nod) am £eben ? Dcein, er ift rjeute SDforgen geftorbcn. 3So finb biefe ^3f(an§en getoacrjfen ? ©ie finb in unferem ©arten gemad)fcn. Stonjugieren 3. 3d) bcgcgne, bu begegneft, *c. Translate and Write : 1 . Where are you going ? We are going to the post-office. 2. Is your uncle at home ? ( No, he has gone to Switzerland. 3. Have you met Mr. Stein recently? Yes, I met him at the bank yesterday. 4. What has happened ? Two children have fallen into the river. 5. When did Mr. Lenz die ? He died on the 10th of July. 6. Did these apples grow in your orchard? No, they grew in Mr. Smith's garden. 7. Give the synopsis cf bleiben in the indicative (the pupil will write the required synop- sis). 8. Conjugate lommen in the perfect indicative (write the conjugation). i68 NEW GERMAN COURSE 157. The Mixed Conjugation (bie gemtf d)te Conjugation). I. Nine verbs have in the imperfect and past participle the endings of the weak conjugation while undergoing the vowel change that characterizes the strong. This constitutes a separate conjugation called "mixed." These verbs are : INFINITIVE. IMPERFECT. PAST PART. brennen, to burn brannte gebrannt fennen, to know fannte gefannt nennen f to name, call narntte genannt rennen, to run rannte geranut fenben, to send fanbte gejanbt toenben, to turn toanbte getoanbt bringen, to bring bradjte gebracrjt benfen, to think badjte gebacrjt toiffen, to know toujjte getonfet 2. Of these verbs only rennen is conjugated with fein, the others with tjctben. In the imperfect subjunctive they all follow the weak conjugation, thus, brermte, fennte, nennte, etc., except the last three, which are brad)te, bad)te, and toiiJ3te. 3. The conjugation is otherwise regular except the present of toiffen which is, Indie, id) toetfc, bu toetfjt, er toetfj; Plur., toir rotffen, etc. ; Subj., id) toiffe, bu totffeft, er toiffe, etc. 4. Bennett, means to know (a person), to be acquainted with ; as, Rennen @te §errn SBolf ? Do you know Mr. Wolff Stiffen means to know in general, as SStffen ©te too ^)err 32Solf tootjnt ? Zto jf/0^ know where Mr. Wolf lives ? They correspond to connaitre and savoir in French. 158. Model verb, benfen, to *A//i/r. $raf. S n b. : id) benfe, bu benfft, er benft, toir benfen, 2c. ^ottj.: id) benfe, bu benfeft, er benfe, toir benfen, 2c. 3mto. S n b. : id) bact)te r bu bacfjteft, er bacfjte, toir batten, 2c. $ n j. : id) bdcr)te, bu badjteft, er bdct)te f toir batten, 2c. THE VERB 169 $erf. Snb. : id) fja&e (bu §aft f er f)at, 2c.) gebacrjt. $ n j. : id) f)abe (bu §a6eft f er f)abe, 2c.) gebac^t. $fo£q. Snb.: id) fjatte (bu fjatteft, er t)atte, 2c.) gebacfjt. SI n j. : icf) fettle (bu fjatteft, er fjfttte, 2c.) gebacfjt. %ut. Sub.: id) tnerbe (bu toirft, er rotrb, 2c.) benfen. $onj. : id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, er toerbe, 2c.) benfen. ftnt'ts. Snb. : icf) toerbe (bu totrft, er ttrirb, 2c.) gebactjt f)abeu. $onj. : idj toerbe (bu ruerbeft, er tuerbe, 2c.) gebadjt f)aben. tfonb. $raf. : id) toitrbe (bu ftmrbeft, er trjitrbe, 2c.) benfen. tonb. *perf. : id) toiirbe (bu toitrbeft, 2C.f gebacfjt rjaben. ^mpcratio : (Sing, benfe ; ^lur. benf(e)t (benfen ©te). Snfimtto : ^5 r a f . benfen ; ^ e r f. gebacfjt f)a6en. ^ttrtist^tctt : ^ r a f. benfenb ; ^ e r f. gebadjt. $lont> erf atum* 2Ba£ benfen ©ie Don btefem Jeanne ? 3d) betracfjte tfjn aU geftfjicft unb gufcerfdffig. ^ennen ©ie §errn 5(ftmann ? Sa, id) fenne ifjn fefyr gut, er iff ein 9tad)6ar t»on mir. 2Ba3 iff ein SSettrennen ? (Sin SSettrennen iff ein SKennen , f um bie %&?tte," b. f). fur einen $prei3, ober, 6ei bem bk Qu)&jaua 2Betten madjen. SSiffen . Sonjunftib. Snbifatib. $oujunftib. I rejoice I may rejoice I rejoiced I might rejoice id) freue mid) id) freue mid) id) freute micf) id) freute mid) bu freuft bid) bu freueft bid) bit freuteft bid) bit freuteft bid) er freut fid) er freue fief) er freute fid) er freute fid) loir freueu un£ loir freueu un3 loir freuten un3 roir freuten un§ if)r freut eud) if)r freuet eucf) if)r freutet end) if)r freutet eud) fie freuen fid) fie freuen fid) fie freuten fid) fie freuten fid) $erfeftum. Sub.: id) fjabe mid) (bu r)aft bid), etc.) gefreut, I have rejoiced. $ n j. : id) ()ct6e mid) (bu fyabeft bid), etc.) gefreut, I may have rejoiced. ^Slu^uantberfeftimu 3nb. : id) rjatte mid) (bu fyatttft bid), etc.) gefreut, I had rejoiced. ^ n j. : id) fjtitte mid) (bu fjcttteft bid), etc.) gefreut, I might have Suturum. [rejoiced. 3 n b. : icf) roerbe mid) (bu totrft bid), etc.) freuen, I shall rejoice. $ on j. : id) toerbe mid) (bu loerbeft bid), etc.) freuen, I shall rejoice. $utimtm Galium. Sub.: id) loerbe mid) gefreut I)a6en, I shall have rejoiced. $ it j. : id) roerbe mid) gefreut fjctben, I shall have rejoiced. tonbitimtaftS $rafeu3. icf) roitrbe micf) freuen, I should or would rejoice. $onbtttonali§ $e?feftum. icf) roitrbe mid) gefreut tjaben, I should or would have rejoiced. $mb. : (Sing, freue bid), rejoice ; ^3(ur. freut eud), rejoice (you). 3«f. : ^rcif. fief) freuen, to rejoice; ^ erf.: fid) gefreut rjaoen. $art : ^3 r df. fief) freueub, rejoicing; ^erf. ficfj gefreut, rejoiced. THE VERB 171 greuen @ie fid) ii6er btefe3 (5reigni3 ? Stein, id) freue mid) baruber ntdjt, tm ©egenteil, id) bebaure e3 fefjr. SSiirben errn As I arrived I met Mr. Alt- Stttmann. mann. ?(nfommen, to arrive, is separable in the first example, being in a simple tense and in a principal clause ; but inseparable in the second because it is in a dependent clause (al$ icfj anfam). 161. The Inseparable Prefixes. An inseparable verb has an unaccented prefix. The prefixes that are always inseparable are : fie, tmp, ent, er, ge, tier, $er. These prefixes are not words, but only syllables the significa- tion of which depends upon their connection with verbs. 162. The Prefixes mift and t»oH TOf; is almost always inseparable as in mtfjitngen, to fail, and mijsbraucrjen, to misuse. With Doll are formed a few inseparable compounds such as Dollbringen, to accomplish, and OoHenben, to finish, also several separables such as Ooftgiefjen, to pour full. THE VERB 173 163. Separable and Inseparable Verbs Contrasted. There are several contrasts between the separable and insepa- rable verbs, namely : A separable verb has a sepa- rable prefix. The prefix is accented. The past participle takes ge. An inseparable verb has an in- separable prefix. The prefix is unaccented. The past part, does not take ge. 164. A Separable Verb : auS'gefyett, to go out. Principal Parts : auS'gefjen, gtng — au3, au^gegangen. (see gefjen, 156). $rafett§. Snb.: id) gefje (bu geoft, er gefjt, etc.) au3, I go out. $onj. : id) gefje (bu gefjeft, er gefje, etc.) au3, I may go out. ^mperfeftum. 5 n b. : idj ging (bu gtngft, er ging, etc.) au§, I went out. ®on j. : id) gtnge (bu gingeft, er gtnge, etc.) ctu3, I might go out. ^erfeftum. Sub. : id) bin (bu btft, er tft, etc.) au<8gegangen, I have gone out. ®onj. : id) fei (bu feieft, etc.) att^gegcmgen, I may have gone out. $ut3quamj>erfeftttttt. Snb. : id) toar (bu rnarft, er tear, 1 etc.) auSgegangen, I had gone out. $on j. : id) roare (bu to&rejr, etc.) ctu3gegcmgen, I might have gone out. gfutimtm. Snb. : id) roerbe (bu rotrft, er unrb, etc.) au3gefjen, I shall go out. $onj. : id) toerbe (bu toerbeft, etc.) cut3gel)en, I shall go out. ^ttturum ejaftum. ^nh.: id) toerbe au3gegcmgen fetn, I shall have gone out. $onj. : id) tnerbe ctu^gegctngen fetn, I shall have gone out. 174 NEW GERMAN COURSE ftonbttiomittS $rafen3, id) ttmrbe (bit toitrbeft, etc.) cmSgeljen, I should or would go out. ^onbtttoitalte ^erfeftum. id) nn'trbe ansgegangen fern, I should or would have gone out. 3m^ : (5 in 9. get) au§, go (thou) out; ^3(ur. gel)t ctu$, go (you) out. 3nf. : ^prtif. auSgerjen, go out ; ^erf. auggegangen fein, to have gone [out. $art. : ^rdf. anSge()enb, going out\ *)3erf. an^gegangen, gone out. 165. An Inseparable Verb, bdofjncn, to reward. Principal Parts : belofjnen, beloljnte, be(of)nt. The conjugation of an inseparable verb has no peculiarity except that the unaccented and inseparable prefix replaces the characteristic ge in the past participle, thus avoiding the pres- ence of two unaccented syllables at the beginning of a word; thus the synopsis of belotjnen in the indicative is : 3d) bclotjne, id) beloljnte, id) fjabe belofynt, id) (jatte belotjnt, id) toerbe belofnten, id) loerbe beloljnt Ijaben. ® onto erf ation. ©uten £ag, ^f)iu>p, tft 3ftr $ater %\\ §aufe ? Sftetn, er tft eben au^gegangen. SSann fommt er §nrM ? £)a3 rrjei§ id) nid)t. Urn rrj»iet»tel lUjr gefyen ©ie morgen3 au§ ? 3d) ge^e getnbfynrtd) gegen ad)t Ufyr au£. 2Ba$ fur ein $erb ift a u 3 g e f) e n ? (S3 ift ein trenn6are3 $erb. Slommt bie Xrennung in alien gettformen Dor ? ^ e * n r f* e fommt nur in ben einfadjen geitformen nnb gtoar nur in ^)anptfdgen Dor. ©tbt e3 Diele tremtbare SBerben ? Set, febr triete. ($tbtn tnabfteigen, to descend; ftteg — fn'nab, f)tnabgefttegen< v THE VERB 177 Exercise (It bung)* Set) fenue bie @tf)toet§ fetjr gut. 3d) burdjrei'fte ba$ gauge £aub. 9Str fanbert greuube, bie im£ jefyr gut uutertjiefteu. Sd) §abt meiue 2Iufgabe iiberjetrt' unb gefdjrieben. ©te()e aufred)t uub gib ad)t tote ein guter ©olbat. 2Sir gingeu beu 2terg tjinauf uub fabeu bie ©onne aufgei)en. ©pater ftiegen tutr bett 33erg f)iuab uub fetjrten iu bte <&tabt guriid. A Verb both Separable and Reflexive. 168. Sid) afcttJcnben, to turn away from. Principal Parts : fid) abroeuben, tocmbte fid) ab, fid) ab^tvanbt $rafen3. Sub. : id) roenbe mid) (bu raeubeft bid), etc.) ab, I turn away. $ u j. : id) tuenbe mid) (bu raeubeft bid), etc.) ab, I may turn away. Smjjerfeftuttt. 3 n b. : id) raanbte mid) (bu roanbteft bid), etc.) ab, I turned away. $ u j. : id) rocmbte mid) (bu manbteft bid), etc.) a^ f I might turn away. ^erfeftum. [away. Sub.: id) f)abe mid) (bu ()aft bid), etc.) abgemanbt, I have turned ® n j. : id) fyabz mid) (bu ()abeft bid), etc.) abgeraaubt, I may have [turned away. ^Jtt^qttctnt^crfcftnm. Sub.: id) fyattt mid) (bu fyatiz\t bid), etc.) abgemanbt, I had turned [away. 9t u j. : id) f)dtte mid) (bu fjatteft bic§, etc.) abgetuaubt, I might have [turned away. $uturum. Sub.: id) raerbe mid) (bu rotrft bid), etc.) abraenbeu, I shall turn [away. ton j. : id) raerbe mid) (bu raerbeft bid), etc.) abraenbeu, I shall turn [away. 178 NEW GERMAN COURSE ftttturum cgaftum. £5 tt b. : tcf) ttJerbe mid) abgemcmbt l)aben, I shall have turned away. $ n j. : idj raerbe mid) abgetranbt fyaben, I shall have turned away. ®mtbttionaU§ ^rafe«§. id) tDiirbe mid) (bu raitrbeft bid), etc.) abraertben, I should turn away. ^onbitionoli^ $erfeftum. id) roiirbe mid) ctbgerocmbt l)aben, I should have turned away. Smjjeratiti: ©in 9. raenbe bid) ab; ^(ur. mertbet eud) (or raenben <3te [fid)) ab. Sitftttitto: ^rcif. fid) abraenben; ^erf. fid) abgeracmbt fyabett. ^aritstyien : S^raf. fief) abmenbenb ; ^erf. fid) abgemembt. On this model write the full conjugation of fid) umfeftren, to turn around. Principal parts : fid) umferjren, fefyrte fid) urn, fid) umgefefyrt. Auxiliary : rjabett. 169. Impersonal Verbs (Uityerfimltdje 95crbcn)* 1. An impersonal verb has, as in English, besides the infini- tive, only the third person singular with the impersonal subject eg, it. These impersonal forms are much more extensively used in German than in English. Those that relate to the phenomena of nature are conjugated with rjct6en. They are as follows: ^ttftntttD. $rafeit3. 3tttJ> erf ef turn. regttett, to rain eg regnet e^ regnete fdjneiett, to snow eg fdmeit eg fdjnette fjageln, to hail eg fyagelt eg rjagelte botmern, to thunder eg bomtert eg bonnerte blifcen, to lighten eg Mtgt eg Mtgte frierett, to freeze eg friert eg fror tauen, to thaw eg taut eg taute tctgert, to dawn eg tagt eg tagte THE VERB 179 <£erf. : e£ rjat geregnet, gefcfjneit, ge^agett, gebonnert, 2c. Pu3g. : e£ rjatte geregnet, gefcf)nett r gerjagelt, gebonnert, 2c. $ut. : e£ rotrb regrten, fcfjneien, rjageln, bonnern, 2c. $ut. e$. : e3 tutrb geregnet rjaben, ge[crjneit rjaben, 2c. tfonb. ^rdf. : e3 toiirbe regrten, fcfjneten, rjageln, bonnern, 2c. £onb. ^erf. : e3 roitrbe geregnet rjaben, gefdmeit rjaben, etc. 2. Many other verbs are used impersonally in idiomatic phrases of which the following are examples : ($e6ett, to give : e3 gi6t, there is, there are. greuen, to gladden, to give pleasure : z§> frent mid), I am glad. ^(opfen, to knock : e3 flopft, some otie is knocking (at the door). Serb tnn, to cause pain or sorrow : e£ tut mtr leib, I am sorry. 23unbern, to wonder, be surprised: e3 rounbert mtcrj, / am sur- prised. eein, to be : e£ ftltb, there are ; e§ roar, there was. Sciuren, to ring : e<§ lautet, the bell rings, is ringing. ©cfjetnen, to seem, appear: e3 jcrjeint mtr, it seems to me. $erfterjen, to understand: eg Oerfterjt ficfj, of course. 170. Government of Verbs ( SSem gefyort btefe Dietfetafc^e ? To whom does this valise be- @te geljort mir, long? It belongs to me. 4. Some verbs take a person in the dative and a thing in the accusative. Such are : anbteten, to offer geben, to give fd)enfen, to present bringen, to bring leifyen, to lend fd)iden, to send erg&fjlen, to relate Itefern, to deliver r^ergeifjen, to pardon 3d) bot if)m ^fyxWaxt an, I offered him ten marks. Gn^dfylc mir erne ©efdjjtdjte, Tell me a story. 3d) mill btr btefe3 93t(b geben, I will give you this picture. 5. All transitive verbs govern the accusative ; e. g., id) fd)reibe etnen SBrief, / am writing a letter. No German verb is regarded as transitive unless it governs its object in the accusative, THE VERB l8l 28ie famen ©te ttber ben glufj ? £er gdrjrmann fefete un3 iiber. SSer f)at „@:oange(ine" aug bem (Sngtifdjen in3 2)eutfdje uberfe|t ? 3)er beutfd)e 2>id)ter grei(igratf) rjat e3 iiberfegt. |>aben @te fid) im Concert gut unterrjalten ? 3a, pemfidj; bie SD^uftf mar gut, aber ba3 ©ingen tear uur mtttetmdBtg. 9Sa3 fur em SSerb ift „abroenben"? (£3 tft em ^er6 ber „g,emtfdj* ten" Conjugation, unb tft §ugteid) trennbar unb refterjo. @eben ©ie mir eine e>rjnopfi3 oon „ftd) abmenben" im Snbifafio. 3d) menbe mid) ab, id) roanbte mid) ab, :c. S3t(ben @ie einen ©a§, in bem ba3 SSerb „fid) abferjren" oorlommt. Set) faun St)nen ein Qitat au£ „2)er SBtrtttt £odjtertein" geben, in bem btefeS $erb Oorlommt. ©ut ; fagen ©ie e3 nur §er. „2)er ftweitt bedte ben ©djteier ^u Unb febjrte fid) ab unb meinte ba^u." SSie ift ba$ SSetter ? (£3 tft fetjr fdjledjt ; geftern fdjneite e3, t)eute morgen tyat e3 geregnet, unb \t%t tjagelt e£ ; fetjen ©ie bie $agelf5r- ner. 2Sa3 finb ^agettorner ? ©3 finb gefrorene 9iegentropfen. yjlan fann fid) bei fokrjem ^Better leid)t erfdtten. 3(6er menu man gefunb tft, fid) toarm anfleibet unb ©ummtftfjutje trdgt, rjat man nid)t£ §u fiirdjten. £)a t)aben ®ie red)t. 2)er ©efunbe fitrdjtet fid) nid)t oor bem fd)led)ten SSetter. TRANSLATk AND WRITE : i. Stand erect and speak slowly and distinctly. 2. Who trans- lated this poem ? I do not know who translated it ; it must have been a good poet, for the translation is very beautiful. 3. At what time does the sun rise and at what time does it set ? At this season it rises at six o'clock and sets at half past five. 4. There are good and bad books, just as there are good and bad people. 5. What are you rejoicing about (moriiber) ? I rejoice over (iiber) the arrival of my father. 6. Who is knocking ? go to 182 NEW GERMAN COURSE the door and see ; it is our neighbor, Mr. Miiller. 7. There are (86, 5) ten new books on this desk. 8. They turned away and wept. 171. The Strong or Irregular Verbs. 1. A so called irregular verb is irregular only in certain tenses. In the following list (§ 173) the principal parts, together with all irregularities, are given and the pupil who has well learned the regular conjugations will require nothing more in order to the complete mastery of these verbs. Note the following review of principles : 2. The present indicative is regular except in the second and third singular, where the vowel is sometimes changed or modified (almost always if it is a, 0, or «) ; as id) befetjle, Oil befieljlft, er befteljlt, ttrir befetjlen, etc. ; ictj rjalte, bit t)ti(tft, er rjalt, fair tjaltert, etc. 3. The present subjunctive is always regular ; as, ict) befeijle, bit befetjleft, er befeljle ; rotr beferjlen, iljr befeljlet, fie beferjlen. 4. The imperative is regularly formed from the root of the verb by adding e for the singular and et or t for the plural ; as, rjalten, hold ; root rjalt ; imper. sing, fjafte ; plur. rjaltet. The im- perative singular is often irregular, but the plural is always regular, being the same as the second plural of the present indicative. Whether the plural ends in et or t is a matter of euphony and requires no rule ; e. g., gefjert : Imperative g,er)(e) plural g,ef)(e)t. 5. The imperfect indicative always changes the root vowel of the infinitive without adding, in the first person, any termination ; thus, icf) befcttjl, bit befctrjleft, er befatjl ; toir befarjlen, ttjr befatjlet, fie befallen. 6. The imperfect subjunctive adds e to the indicative, at the same time modifying the vowel a, 0, u, if there be one ; but the vowel may be changed, as in the imperfect subjunctive of beferjlen, which is icf) before, bit befotjleft, er beforjle ; fair befofjlen, iljr befotjlet, THE VERB 183 fie beforjlen. Observe that in the imperfect (both indicative and subjunctive) the third person singular is always like the first. 7. The compound tenses will present no difficulties to those acquainted with the regular conjugations. 172. Orthography of the Strong Verbs. 1. German spelling is nearly phonetic, but between the sounds of f, ff, and |3 there is so little difference that the learner is liable to error in spelling. Observe the following examples of spelling in the principal parts of verbs. Sefen, to read (a3 gelefen 3)ceffeu, to measure mafc gemeffeu ^eifteu, to call rjte£ gerjetfeen ©etfeen, to bite btfe gebtffen 2. The general rule is that the sibilant (f, ff, g) of the imper- fect and of the past participle accords with that of the infinitive. It deviates from it in the imperfect of such words as meffert where ff necessarily changes to $ and in the past participle wherever the vowel differs from that of the infinitive as in the past participle of beifteu. 3. In accordance with this rule let the pupil write the principal parts of bfajen, to blow ; effen, to eat ; ftofjett, to push, thrust and flteften, to flow. For these words see the list § 173. This rule applies to all verbs having f, ff, or fj in the infinitive. 4. The use or omission of e after a sibilant or dental (ff, t, b) in the personal endings is a matter of euphony ; thus, in the present tense : beifeen, to bite gtexten, to glide letben, to suffer PRESENT. PRESENT. PRESENT. id) bei^e icfj gtette idj letbe bu bet&eft bu gleiteft bit letbeft er beiftt er glettet er leibet 5. But with most verbs the word admits of pronunciation without this euphonic c ; as id) gebe, bu gtbft, er gibt ; id) greife, bu gretfft, er gretft, etc. 184 NEW GERMAN COURSE 173. A List of Strong Verbs. Classified with Reference to the Vowels of the Imperfect Tense and the Past Participle. For models of the full conjugation of strong verbs see gebcn (155), and gefyen (156). In this list the imperative singular is the last form with each verb and is indicated by an exclamation point. Instead of reciting the principal parts in the usual manner, e. g., beif^en, bi\], gebtffcn, it is recommended that the pronoun and the auxiliary verb be em- ployed ; e. g., Teacher : iBeifteu. Pupil: SBeiften, to bite ; id) beifte, id) bifj, id) I)abe gebiffett. Teacher: SBletben. Pupil: 351eiben, to remain ; id) bletbe, id) blieb, id) bin gebliebett. This method of recitation greatly facilitates the acquisition and practical use of these verbs and fixes in memory the correct auxiliary. The vowel indications of the several classes are as follows : Examples. betjieu, bifc, gebiffett bleibett, btteb, gebliebett biegeit, bog, gebogeu bittbett, banb, gebiutbeti gebcirett, gebar, geboren effett, 0,% gege[[en bacfett, buf, gebacfett bfafett, blieS, geblafett Also eight verbs not classified. The verbs in most common use (about 90 in the list of 160) are marked with an asterisk (*) and should be particularly well learned. Being marked in the same manner in the alphabetical list following, they may there be used as a review lesson. First Class. Vowel of imperfect and past part. \. i. 23ei$en,* to bite; Sm)). id) big; ty erf. idj Ijabe gebiffen. $rafeu3. ^mperfeftum. Sfttbifatito. ®onjunftib. ^nbifatito. ®onjunftib. id) beige id) beige id) big xcfj biffe bu beig(ef)t bu beigeft bu biffeft bu biffeft er beigt er betge er big er biffe Imperf. Past Part 1st Class i i 2nd Class tc ic 3rd Class 4th Class a u 5th Class a 6th Class a c 7th Class it a 8th Class ie a . THE VERB 185 ttnr 6etf$ert ftrir fcetjjen linr Biff en toir biff en ifjr beijst * ' il)r beiftet ifyr biffet if)r biffet fie v bei^en fie beifjen fie biffen fie biffen Snipercttit): bei^(e)! bei^(e)t! beif3en ©ie! Thus also : ctbbeijjen, to bite off; jerbeiften, to bite in pieces. Ex. : 2)er £unb f)at ben $naben gebiffen. 2. (£rblcid)en, to turn pale ; id) erb(id); id) bin erblid)en. S^raf. : id) erb(eid)e, bit erb(eid)ft, er erb(eid)t; erb(eid)(e)! Ex. : 2>er 2)ieb erblid), ate er ben ^olijiften \&\ This verb is also used figuratively meaning to die. 3. ®fctd)en, to resemble ; id) g(id); id) Ijctbe gegtidjen. ^rdf. id) gletdje, bit gteidjft, er g(eid)t; gkid)(e)! Thus also : uerg{etd)en, to compare. Ex. : ®cr ©obit gleidjt fetnem 2>ater. 4. (S5Ieitcn f to glide ; id) glitt, id) bin geglitten. ^rdf. : id) glette, bit gletteft, er gleitet; glett(e) ! Ex. : S)er @d)litten gleitet itber ba8 (§i§. 5. ®retfen,* to grasp ; id) griff; id) Ijabe gegriffen. ^ r a f. : id) gretfe, bit gretfft ; er greift ; gretf (e) ! Thus also : ergretfen, to seize. Ex. : S)a§ $inb greift nacb bent 2Jioitbe. 6. $netfen, to pinch; id) fntff ; id) f)abe gefniffen. ^rdf. : id) fneife, bn fneifft, er fneift; fneif(e) ! Ex. : 2>er l^nabe frtiff feinen $amaraben in ben s tar. 7. Seibcn,* to suffer; id) Kit; id) Ijabe gelitten. ^rdf. : id) kibe, bn (eibeft, er tetbet; leib(e) ! Ex. : 3)er $ranfe teibet an einem ^ieber. 8. ^fetfeit, to whistle ; id) pfiff ; id) I)abe gepfiffen. $ r f . : id) pfetfe, bn pfeifft, er Jpfetft ; pfeif (e) ! Ex. : 2Ber fann biefe SJMobie pfeifen ? 9. Ofet^en, to tear; id) rift ; id) rjabe geriffen. ^rdf. : id) reijje, bu retfteft, er rei&t; reifj(e) ! Thus also : ^erreiftett, to tear in pieces. Ex. : 3)er SBotf jerrif! bct§ &umn. 1 SBetjjt or beiftet, and thus also with many other verbs in the second person plural of the indicative present, and consequently in the plural of the imperative, t^e two having the same form 1 86 NEW GERMAN COURSE 10. Sftettett, to ride (on horseback) ; id) rttt ; id) bin geritten. ^3 r d f . : id) reite, bit retteft, er reitet; reit(e) ! This verb may also be used transitively ; e. g., id) Ijabe bag ^ferb geritten. Ex. : „2Ber reitet fo fefit burdj 9foxd)t uub SBinb? (§g ift ber $ater mit feinem $inb." — G. 1 ii. Scfjfetdjen, to sneak ; id) fd)(id) ; id) Bin gefd)(id)en. *Praf. : id) fd)leid)e, bu fd)(eid)ft, er fd)(eid)t ; fcf)leidj(e) ! Thus also: ($:tn'fd)(eid)en, to steal into {a place). Ex. : S)er 2)ieb fd)Ud) in bag §ang ein. 12. 6d)Ieifeit,* to sharpen; id) fdjliff ; id) fya&e gefcpffen. ^rdf. : id) fdjletfe, bu fdjtetfft, er [crjleift; fd)letf(e) ! Ex. : 3d) roUt mein Sfteffer fd)tetfen taffen. 13. Sdjmetgen, to fling: id) fdjnufe ; id) Ijabe gefd)mif|en. s $rdf. : id) jdjmeifse, bu fdjmeifeeft, er fdnneifet; fdjmetJ3(e) ! Ex. : (£r fcrnnift bag papier tng geuer. 14. ©djneiben,* to cut ; id) fd^nttt ; id) fjabe gejdjnitten. ^rdf. : id) [duteibe, bu |d)neibe|t, er fdjneibet; fd)neib(e) ! Ex. : 3)er ©djneiber fcftneibet bag Xuti). 15. Sdjreiten, to stride ; id) fdjritt; id) bin gefdjritten. ^ r a f . : id) fd)reite r bu fdjretteft, er f djreitet ; fd)reit(e) ! Ex. : S)er 3ager fdjreitet (ebbaft burdj bie SBiefe. 16. Streidjen, /aben ©ie fief) in ben gufs gefd)nitten ? §)er 2lnftreid)er ftrtdt) ba§ §au3 grim an. SSeffen £)au3 fyat er angeftrid)en ? SSir finb ntc^t berfetben 9#eimtng, aber roir raerben ntcrjt barum ftreiten. 2)ie 23ritde raid) bem £)rang be3 (StfeS unb ging iiber ben SSafferfaE. SMdjengatl? r 2tu§'glettert, *o j/z)>, as on the ice. i88 NEW GERMAN COURSE Translate and Write : i. Whom (90, 1) did the dog bite (123, 5) ? 2. Why did the man turn-pale ? 3. Whom do you resemble ? 4. Did you slip on the ice? 5. Did the child grasp after the moon (123, 5). 6. The sick man has (suffers with 1 ) consumption. 7. Can you whistle? 8. Into which store did the thief sneak? 9. What color 2 did he paint the house ? 10. Did (123, 5) the bridge yield to the ice ? Yes, it yielded and was carried over the falls. 3 1 Seibet an. 2 9ttit roelcfjer $arbe. 3 i'tber bie gafte gerifjen. Second Class. Vowel of imperfect and past part, te» 19. f8Uibtn* to remain ; 3 m p. : id) blteb; ^5 erf. : id) bin geblteben. $rafett£. $mperfeftum. ^nbifattrj. ®onjunftit>. ^nbifatib. ®ortjunftit>. id) bletbe id) bletbe idj blteb id) bliebe bu bteibft bn bleibeft bn bltebft bn bltebeft er bletbt er bletbe er blteb er bliebe loir bletben loir bleiben loir blteben loir blieben tt)r bletbt if)r bletbet iljr bliebt tt)r bltebet fie bletben fie bletben fie blteben fie blieben 3mperatiD: bletb(e) ! bleibt! bletben @ie! Ex. : 2Bir finb fange in ber @tabt gebtieben. 20. @tebetf)en, to thrive ; id) gebtef); id) bin gebteljen. $Prftf. : \6) gebetbe, bu gebetl)ft, er gebeiljt; gebeicj(e) ! Ex. : ®ie ©rate ift biefe§ 3ahr gut gebiefyen. 2 1 . Seiljen, * to lend; id) lief) ; id) t)abe geliefjen. $raf. : id) teilje, bu leil)ft, er leU)t; leif)(e) ! Ex. : 33itte, lei^en @ie mix stnan^ig 2Warf. 22. SO?eibcn f to shun, avoid ; id) mteb ; id) fjabe gemieben. ^rctf. : id) nteibe, bu metbeft, er nteibet; meibe! Thus also : rjermetbert, to shun, avoid. Ex. : 2Ba8 tud)t 3U meiben ift, mitf? man erbuiben. THE VERB 189 23. ^retfett,* to praise ; id) prie3; id) rjabe geprtefert. 9$ r ft |. : id) pretfe, bit pretfeft, er pretft ; preif (e) ! Ex. : S)te yiatnx pveift ben (Stopfer. 24. Stfetbett, to rub, grate ; id) rte6 ; id) fjabe gerieben. ^rdf. : id) retbe, bu reibft, er retbt; reib(e) ! Thus also : gerreibett, fo reduce to powder. Ex. : (gr rteb fid) Me §anbe oor SBergniigett. 25. Sdjeiben, to depart, separate ; id) fdjieb ; idj bin gejd)ieben. ^raf. : id) fcrjetbe, bu fdjeibeft, er fdjeibet ; fd)eibc! Thus also : entfdjeiben, to decide (with baben). Ex. : 2)te beften greunbe miiffeti am (Snbe fcbetben. Also trans, with baben : „©ott fdjieb bie ginfternis oon bem 2id)t." 26. Sdjeinett,* to shine, seem; id) fd)ien ; id) fyabe gefdjtenen. ^3 r a f . : id) fcfjeine, bit fdjeinft, er fd)eint; fd)ein(e) ! Ex. : S)ie ©onne fcfieirtt am Sage unb ber 9ftonb bet Sftadjt. 27. Sdjret&ert,* to write ; id) fdjrieb ; id) t)a6e gefdjrteben. $ra|. : id) fdjreibe, bu fcrjreibft, er fcfjreibt; fd)reib(e) ! Thus also : abfdjreiben, to copy. Ex. : 3d) Ijaht bie Slufgabe abgefcbrieben. 28. ©djreien, to cry, scream; id) fdjrie; id) rjabe gefdjrieeu. ^rd|. : id) jdjreie, bu fd)rei[t, er fdjreit ; fd)rei(e) ! Ex. : 2)a§ $inb jcbrie bie gan^e s J?ad)t biuburd). 29. 6d)it)etgett, to &? silent ; id) jd)ft)ieg ; id) fyabe ge)d)tt)iegen. $)3 r a f . : id) fdjmeige, bit fdjroeigft, er fdjtueigt ; f d)roetg(e) ! Thus also ; fttflfcbroetgen, to be still, silent. Ex.: ©eftter fagt ju 3tubeu^, „3br fdjroetgt big man end) aufruft." — Sch. 30. Speien, to spit, to vomit; 'id) fpie; td) rjabe gefpieen. $rSf. : id) fpete, bu fpetft, er fpeit ; fpei(e) ! Ex. : S)er SMfan tyeit fteuer unb 2tfd>e. 3 1 . ©tetgen,* to ascend ; id) ftieg ; id) bin geftiegen. $Praf. : id) fteige, bu fteigft, er fteigt ; fteig(e) ! Thus also : hinauf'fteigen, to ascend. Ex. : Sir ftiegen ben 33erg binauf. 32. Sretfcett,* to drive, do ; id) trieb ; id) tyabt getrieben. $P r a f . : id) treibe, bu treibft, er treibt ; treib(e) ! Ex. : 2)er ©chafer treibt bie ©djafe. 19° NEW GERMAN COURSE 33. $erseU)en,* to pardon; id) t>ergiel) ; id) fya&e oergiefyen. $Prcif. : id) i)ergetl;c r bu bergcitjft, er t)er^ett)t ; oergett)(e) ! Ex. : SBergei^en ©ie mir = (Sntfdjulbigen @ie mid). 34. SSetfen, ^ j^w; id) mie£; id) fyabe gemiefen. ^rtij. : id) meife, bu mcifeft, er meift; toeif(e) ! Ex. : 0?r mieS mir ben 2Beg sum 2)orfc. 35. Stifyn, to accuse ; id) §ie() ; id) tjabe gegtefjen. ^3 r a f . : id) geifye, bu gett)ft f er 5ei£)t ; gei()(e)! Ex. : SHefer 9ftann ift eine§ 2krbred)en§ gejiehert morben. ftonfccrfatioit. SSie lange finb ©ie in ber ©tabt geblieben ? 3d) btieb nur brei %age bort. £>ie Gmtte ift gut gebiefyen, unb bie SBauern freuen [id) fefjr bartiber. SBttte, letrjen ©te mir ge£)n 9Jtarf. Seiber fyabe id) nttfjt fo Diet (Mb bei mir. (Sin outer 90?cmn Dermeibet bofe ©efeflfdjaft. „@3 ift beftimmt in @otte£ $lat, baf$ man 00m liebften, toa3 man £)at r mug fdjeiben." — von F. 3d) bitte ©ie gu entfcfjeiben. 2)ie Sonne fdjetnt buret) bie 3?egentro|)fen unb t)erurfact)t einen 9?egen= bogen. 2Benn id) eine gute geber t)dtte, raitrbe id) einen 23rief an meinen SBruber fct)retben. 28arum fd)rie ba$ ®inb bie gauge S^actjt t)inburd) ? Sfabeau fagte gum ©otbaten : „©tetg auf bie 2Barte bort unb fag' un3, mie bie ©d)lad)t fid) roenbet." — Sch. 2Ba§ treiben ©ie jegt? 1 3d) bin @efd)&ft3reifenber. 2Ba3 fur ein ©efd)aft<§marm ftnb ©ie ? $ergeit)en ©ie mir, menu icf) ©ie Oerte|t fjabe. 2)a3 ift fetjr Oergeitjlid). 1 treiben, to drive is also used in the sense of do ; e. g., toct§ treiben ©ie jetjt ? what is your employment at present ? THE VERB 191 Translate and Write: 1. How long' will you remain here? 2. How much money did you lend him (123, 5) ? 2 3. Good children avoid the company of the bad (39,2). 4. We praise God for all his goodness. 5. The sun shines by day and the moon and stars by night. 6. The poor orphans cry for bread. 3 7. Do you speak German ? 8. The soldier ascended the watch-tower 4 to see the battle. 5 9. The shepherd drives the sheep into the field. I 2Sie lange. 2 Seifjen governs a person in the dative (170, 4). 3 „2)ie armert 2£aijen id)reten nati) Srot." — Sch. 4-©tteg auf bte 2Sarte. sum bit @d)lad)t ju befe&en. Third Class. Vowel of imperfect and past part, o, 36. SBtegert,* to bend; Sntp. : id) bog; ^erf. : id) fyctbe gebogen. $rafen3. $mperfeftum. Snbtfatiu. £ortjurtf ttt>. grtbtfatit). ®onj'unfttb. id) biege 3d) biege 3d) bog id) boge bu btegft bu biegeft bu bogft bu bogeft er biegt er biege er bog er boge toir btegen totr btegen totr bogen loir bogen ifyr biegt tf)r bieget if)r bogt tt)r bbget fie btegen fie biegen fie bogen fie bogen 3 m \) er at ib: tueg(e)! biegt! biegen ©ie! Ex. : £>er 33ogen biegt ftd), aber er bridjt nicht. 37. SSieten,* to offer; id) bot; tcf) tjabe geboten. $praf. : id) btete, bu bieteft, er bietet; biet(e)! Thus also : art'btetett, to offer. ( Ex. : 3d) bot ibm jebrt Wlaxl art. 38. gltegett,* to fly ; id) flog ; id) bin geflogen. ^rcif. : iti) fliege, bu fltegft, er fliegt; flieg(e)! Thus also : fortfftegett, to fly away. Ex. : 3rrt §erbft ftiegert bie $oget fiibrccirtg. 39. glteijett, to flee ; id) ffoh,; id) bin geflofien. ^rctf. : id) ffiefje, bu fltegft, er fltel)t; flief)(e) ! Thus also : erttfliefjert, to escape, to run away. Ex. : 3)ie $erbrecber firtb erttflobert. 192 NEW GERMAN COURSE 40. glieffen,* to flow; tdjftofc; id) bin gef (of fen. ^raf.: id) fltejse, bit fltefscft, er fltcfet; flte^(c) ! Ex. : £)a§ 53ad)iein ffiefst in ben glufe. 41. griercn,* to freeze; id) fror; id) (jabc gefroren. ^rcif. : id) friere, bn frterft, er fricrt; friere! Ex. : ©eftern §at e§ gefroren. Thus also : erfrieren, to freeze to death (with feut). Ex. : 2)er SReifenbe ift in bent ©tnrnte erfroren. 42. (SJente^cn, to enjoy, eat; id) gertofs; id) rjabe genoffen. ^riif. : id) getttefje, bit gemefjeft, er geniefjt; genicf3(c) r . Ex.: „©ie genoffen ihr einfad)e§ Slbenbmaljf." 43. ©tegett,* to pour; icrjgofj; id) rjabe gegoffen. ^rctf. : id) giefee, bit gicfteft, er gtefet; gtefj(e)! Thus also : au3'gteJ3en, to pour out. Ex. : 9ftcm gieftt bag SSaffer au§ bem tag in ba§ ©lag. 44. Slriedjen,* to creep ; id) frod) ; id) bin gefrodjen. y$xa). : icf) friedje, bn frtecrjft, er lried)t; lricd)(e)! Ex. : 2)ie $a£e ift unter ba% §an§ gefroren. 45. Ditcdjen,* &? smell ; id) rod); id) rjabe gerodjen. Praf. : id) riecfje, bu tteefjft, er riecrjt; rtedj(e)! Ex. : SSet^e 23tunte ried)t am beften ? 46. ©djieBen,* fe j/wz'*, ///*// ; id) fdjob ; id) fjabe gefcrjoben ^rctf. : id) fdjtcbe, bn fdjtebft, er fd)iebt; fd)ieb(e) ! Ex. : 23itte, betfen ©ie ntir biefen £tfd) an bie SBattb fdjiebett. 47. Sdjte^en,* to shoot ; id) fcfjofj, icf) rjabe gefd)offen. ^rdf. : id) fdjtejse, bn fcrjiefjeft, er fdjtefet; fd)ie^(e) ! Ex. : Ser SHpenjager fd)ie§t ba% SBilbpret. 48. Stfjttcften,* to shut; id) fcfjlofe ; id) l)abe gefd)loffen. ^rdf. : id) fcrjtiege, bn fd)lief3eft, er fd)(ie^t; fd)(te^(e)! Thus also: gnfehtieften, to lock. Ex. : ©djUefcen ©ie bie Siir $u. 49. ©ieben, to boil; id) fott ; id) rjabe gefotten. ^5raf. : id) ftebe, bn fiebeft, er fiebet; fieb(e) ! Ex, ; §)a§ 2Baffer ift fiebenb heift. THE VERB 193 50. Sjmegen, to sprout ; id) fprofe ; id) Bin gefproffen. ^Srctf.: id) fyrte&e, bit fpriefeeft, er fprte^t ; fprie^(e)! Ex. : 3m griibltng tyrteften bie ^fXanjeit. 51. Qtitbtn, to fly off (as sparks) ; id) ftob ; id) bin geftoben. $r&f.: id) ftiebe, bn ftiebft, er ftiebt; ftieb(e)! Ex. : £)a§ ^Pferb lief jo jdjnett, baft bie ^unfen ftoben. 52. £riefeu, A? ^n/; id) troff ; id) bin getroffen. $Praf. : id) triefe, bn triefft, er trieft; trief(e)! Ex. : 3)er Sftegen trieft t>on bent 2)ad)e. 53. $erbrie$en, to z>#r; id) Derbro^; id) l)abe berbroffen. ^rdf. : id) toerbrtefje, bn berbriefjeft, er Derbriefet; DerbrieJ3(e) ! Rarely used except reflexively in the 3d singular: e§ oerbrieft mid), I am vexed. 54. $erlieren,* to lose ; id) tierlor; id) l)abe berlorcn. spraf. : id) berliere, bn berlterft, er berliert; t)erlier(e) ! Ex. : 3d) fiabe bog rteue 23ud) beriorert. 55. SBtegen, to weigh; id) tnog; id) l)abe getnogen. ?fi r a f . : id) rotege, bn nriegft, er toiegt ; nriege ! SSdgen (t»og, geroogen) has the same meaning. Ex. : SEBie trie! toiegt biefe§ $adet ? 56. $itf)tn* to draw; id) §og ; id) t)abe gegogen. $r&f. : id) 5ie()e f bn giet)ft r er §iet)t ; 5iel)(e) ! Thus also : erjieben, to bring tip (a child) ; oorjieben, to prefer. Ex. •. 2)a§ $ferb giebt ben 2Bagen. 57. 23etoegen, to induce ; id) betoog; id) l)abe betoogen. ^p r a f . : id) betoege, bn betnegft, er betoegt; betoege! Ex. : 3d) fonnte tbn ntcfrt beroegen, longer bier ju bletben. 23etrjegen, to move, is weak. 58. gedjten, to fight ; id) fod)t; id) Ijcrbe gefod)ten. ^rcif. : id) fed)te, bn fidjtft, er ftd)t; fid)t! Ex. : S)er ged)tmei[ter tebrt bct§ ^ed)ten. 59. gledjtett, to braid ; id) \lod)t; id) I)abe gef!od)ten. ^3 raj. : id) fledjte, bn fltdjtft, er fitd)t; flidjt! Ex. : SDem ©ieger roarb ein $ranj gef(od)ten. 194 NEW GERMAN COURSE 60. «§eBeit,* to lift ; id) l)ob; id) fyct&e gefyoben. ^JSraf. : id) fjebe, bu f>ebft r er l)ebt; f)eb(e) ! Thus also : anfheben, to pick up. Ex. : SHefer Coffer ift fdjroer ; id) fann tbn uid)t aufheben. 61. SJklfett, to *#*/£; id) moff ; id) tjabe gemolfen (gemetft). *Pra). : id) metfe, bu melfft, er melft; metfe! Ex. : Sftan melft bie $iihe morgenS unb abenb§. 62. *Pffegett, to consult, take counsel; id) pftog ; id) f)abe gepflogen. *P r ci f. : id) pflege, bit pfiegft, er pflegt ; pflege ! ^3[tegen is weak when it means to nurse or to be accustomed (to do a thing). Ex. : 2BiIbetm Sett pflog 9tot mit feitten (Sibgenoffen. 63. Clitetten, to spring, gush forth; id) quoll; id) bin gequotten. $P r a | . : id) quelle, bu quittft, er quittt ; quill ! Ex. : 2)a3 Staffer quittt au§ bem SBruimen. 64. ©cfjerett, to shear ; id) fdjor ; id) rjabe gefd)oren. ^P r a f. : id) fdjere, bu fdjerft, er fdjert ; fd)er(e) ! Ex.: S)er 23auer fdjert bie ©d)afe. 65. Sdjmeisctt, to melt ; id) fdjmotj; id) bin gefdjmot^en. ^P r a ). : id) fdjmelge, bu fdjmtlgeft, er fdjmit^t ; fdjmttj ! ©djmetjen when transitive is weak. Ex. : S)og (Sis fcbmiigt in ber @onne. 66. ©djtoeflen, to swell ; id) fdjfooH ; id) bin ge|d)tt)olten. ^P r a \. : id) fdjmelte, bu fdjttuffft, er fdjtoiHt ; fdjnnH ! Ex. : 2)er glufe fcfcttrittt iiber feine Ufer. 67. SBektt, to weave ; id) mob ; id) f)abe gemoben. ^P r a f. : id) roebe, bu mebft, er roebt ; roeb(e) ! Ex. : 3)er 2Beber tnebt bo§ £nd). 68. ©limmen, to glow ; id) glomm; idj fyabe gegtommen. $Pr&). : id) glimme, bu gtimmft, er glintmt; glimm! Ex. : 2)a§ ^ener gitmmt in bem Ofen. This verb has also weak forms. 69. SHimmen, to climb ; id) ftomm ; id) bin geftommen. ^P r a f. : id) fftmme, bu fltmmft, er f limmt ; f timm(e) ! Ex. : §)er SUpenjciger ftimmt bie fteite ^e(§roanb binauf. THE VERB 195 70. (grfdjaffen, to resound; id) erfcfjoll ; tdj bin erfdjolteu. ^rdf. : id) erfcfjalle, bu erfcfjallft, er erfdjaHt; erfcfjall(e)! Ex.: 2)a§ 3agbborn erfdjaflt burd) ben $3alb. 71. Saufett, A? dh#£ (said of animals); ify f off ; id) tjCtbe gefoffeu. ^rdf. : tdj faufe, bu faufft, er fauft; fauf(e)! Ex. : 2)er 2fienj«f» trinft; bas Xiex fauft. 72. ©augett, &? j«^; id) fog; id) fjabe gefogeu. ^rdf. : id) faugc, bu faugft, er faugt; faug(e)! Ex. : S)ie 3ungen faugen bie 9JJifcf> ber Gutter. 73. ©djnaufcett, to snort, pant ; icf) fdjuob ; id) rjabe gefd)noben. ^rtif. : id) ftfjnauoe, bu fdjnaubft, er fdntaubt; fd)uaub(e)! 74. ©iirett, to ferment ; e3 gor; e3 ift gegoreu. ^raf. : e£ gdrt; gdre! Ex. : 2)a§ 33ier gctrt in bent g-afte. 75. (£rliifd)en, #? become extinct ; id) erlofcf) ; \6) biu erlofdjeu. ^rdf. : id) erldfdje, bu erlijcrjeft, er erlifdjt ; erlif dC) ! Thus also : cm§tofd)en, to extinguish, erase. Ex : £)a§ Sic^t ift ertofdjen. As transitives these verbs are weak. 76. ©djtnb'rett, to swear; id) fc^toor ; id) tjabe ge|d)tt)orett. *J$r&f. : ic^ fcfjtoore, bu fcfjtoorft, er fdjtotfrt; fd)toor(e)! Ex. : 3He @otbaten fiaben ouf bie gafine gefc&tttoren. 77. Sktriigett,* to cheat; id) betrog ; id) fyaht betrogen. ^rdf. : id) betriige, bu betritgft; er betriigt; betriig(e)! The simple verb tritgen, to chedt, deceive, is not common except in some proverbial expressions, as'ber <2>tf)ein triigt, appearances deceive. >]%. (grftefett, to choose ; id) erfor; \§ fyabt erforeu. ^rdf. : id) erfiefe, bu erfiefeft, er erfieft; erliefe! (Srfiiren (erfor, erforen), to choose, is antiquated. Ex. : „3dj erfor fie, d8 fie niebrig roar." — Sch. 79. Sitgen,* to tell a lie ; id) log ; id) rjabe getogeu. $Prdf.: ifi) luge, bu (iigft, er lugt; luge! Ex. : ftatf) meiner Sfteimmg. 4 2)er SBetfte (39, 2). THE VERB 197 Fourth Class. Vowel of imperfect a J past part. u» 80. SBhtben, to bind; Snip. : id) banb ; ^erf. : id) rjab gebunben. ^nbifatib. ®onjunftit>. Snbitatito. ®onjunfti&. id) binbe id) binbe id) banb id) bdnbe bu binbeft uu binbeft bu banb(e)ft bu banbeft er binbet er binbe er banb er bdnbe fair binben nrir binben roir banben fair banben i£)r btnbet irjr binbet if)r banbd it)r biinbd fie btnben fie binben fie banben fie banben Smperatibe: binbe! binbet! binben ©ie! Thus also : einbittben, to bind (as a book) ; rjerbinben, to bind up (as a wound); e. g., btefe§ 23ud) ift febr ftarf eingebunben; bie SSunben rourben tterbunben. 81. 2)itt(jett, to hire (a servant) ; id) bang (®. bingte) ; id) fyabe ge- bungen. ^raf. : id) binge, bu bingft, er bingt; binge! Originally and now often weak. 82. $ringen, to press forward ; id) brang ; id) Ijabe gebrungen. ^3rdf. : id) bringe, bu bringft r er bringt; bring(e)! Thus also : etn'brtngen, to press into (a place). Ex.: S)er 3ciger brang burcb ba% ©eftriipp. 83. ginben,* to find; id) fanb ; id) l)abe gefunben. ^rdf. : id) finbe, bu finbeft, ( er finbet; finbe! Thus also : fid) ein'finben, to be (at a certain place). Ex.: S)a§ SBertorene ift gefurtben ruorben. 3d) fyabe &ertyrod)en mid) in ber @tabt um gebn Ubr ein;mftnben. 84. @elingen(impers.), to succeed ; e3 gelang ntir ; e3 ift mir gelungen. $)3rdf. : e3 gelingt ntir, itmt, irjr, 2c. Ex. : 2Mne Unternebmung ift mtr gut gelungen. 85. ^ftngen, to sound; id) Hang; id) fyabe geftungen. ^rdf. : id) Hinge, bu flingft, er ftingt; fringe! Ex. : £) am (Snbe eine§ SBorteS ftingt ttrie t. I9« NEW GERMAN COURSE 86. Sfthtgen, to struggle, strive for ; id) rang ; id) t)abe gerungen. $)3ra). : id) ringe, bu ringft, er ringt; rtng(e)! Ex.: „93orroart3 ! SSortt)drt§! 3m ©efange ringe tnit bent @d)mer$ ber 2Be(t." — Geibel. 87. Sdjlutgett, to wind, entwine ; id) fcfjtang ; id) tjabe gejd)(ungen. Thus also : t>erfd)ttngen, to devour. Ex. : £>a§ $inb fd)lang bic 5(rme urn ben £a(6 feiner Sautter. 2)er 2Bolf serrtfj bo« £amm unb Derfd)lang e$. 88. (Sc^tt»inbctt f to vanish; id) fd)tr>cmb ; id) bin gefcfjttmnben. 9$ r a f. ; id) fdjnnnbe, bu fd)U)inbeft, er fdjnrinbet ; fd)tt>inb(e) ! Thus also : fcerfdjnrinben, to disappear. Ex. : Senn bag atte 3abr fcfottuubet, trttt bo8 neue 3abr an. 89. Sdjtoingen, to swing; id) fdnnang, id) rjabe gefd)tr>ungen. *P x a f. : id) fd)tt)inge, bu fdjroingft, er fcfjtrjingt ; jd)tt)ing(e) ! Ex. : 2)ie $tnber fcbnungeu fid) auf bent ©cbaufefbrett. 90. Stngen,* to sing ; id) fang ; id) t)abe gefungen. Ex. : 2)a8 2ftabd)en bat ein fcbbneS £ieb gefungen. 91. 8infen,* to sink ; id) fan!, id) bin gefunfen. ^ r a |. : id) finfe, bu finfft, er finft ; ftnf(e) ! Ex. : 2)ie @onne ftnft Winter bie SBerge. 92. (gtyrittgen,* to spring ; id) fprang; id) bin gefprungen. ^rdf. : id) fpringe, bu ftmngft, er fpringt; fpring(e)! Ex. : ZtU fprang &om SBoote an bag lifer. 93. £rittfen,* to drink ; id) tran!; id) fyaht getrunfen. ^raf. : id) trinfe, bu trinfft, er trtnft; trinl(e)! Ex. : 2)ie Sentperanjter trinfen nur SBaffer. 94. SBinben, to wind, twist, wreathe ; id) tuanb ; id) fyaht gettmnben. ^P r a f . : id) roinbe, bu toinbeft, er hrinbet; ttrinb(e)! Ex. : „Unb urn bie @aufe minbet fid) ber tran^." — Sch. 95. 3^i«9cn f to compel; id) gtoang ; id) rjabe gegttmngen. $raf. : id) fringe, bu sttringft, er ^niingt; 5trjing(e)! Ex. : S)er geinb nmrbe gefungen fid) juriicfjusieben. THE VERB 199 ^otttietfattott* 2)er $)ieb tt)urbe gefangen, gebunben unb \n§ ©efangni3 getoorfen. S)ie SSunben be3 (Satbaten ttmrben erfi berbunbeu ; er ttmrbe barnt in3 |)ofpttal getragen. Urn ben £>ieb gu oerfjaften, mufcte bie ^otigei in ba$ §au£ einbrin^ gen. 2Ba» fjaft bu gefunben? 3d) (jabe etn 3ef)nmatr>©tucf gefunben; fjaben @ie etn foldfyejo (Mbftucf Derloren ? ©etne Unternefymungen finb ifjm fefjr gut gelungen, unb er ift reicf) geroorben. 2)ie golbene ®ugel fiel auf bie Gsrbe, roOte bann in£ SSaffer unb berfdjmanb. „£)ie Sorelei" totrb ii6eraH in Steutfdjtanb gefungen. 9?enne mtr einige anbere beliebte beurfcfye Steber. „§eibenr63leui," . . . u. f. to. 2Ser fjat „bie Sorelei" gefcfyrieben ? 3Sarum ftnft etn (Stein, menu man it)n in3 Staffer ttrirft ? @r ftnft, rceit er fd)tnerer al3 ba<§ SBaffer ift. 2Ba3 trinlen ©ie am (tebften ? Translate and Write: 1 . Why was the thief bound ? He was bound to keep him from running away. 1 2. Did the police-officer force his way into the house? 2 3. A traveler found a bag of diamonds in the desert, but he could neither 3 eat them nor 3 sell them, therefore he died of hunger. 4 4. The' golden ball disappeared into the water. 5. Why did the stone sink into the water? 6. I drink beer sometimes, but I prefer wine. 5 7. Who compelled the lazy boy to go to school ? 6 1 urn ifjn abjufjatten fortjulaufen. 2 ift . . . eingebrungen. 3 toeber . I . nod;. 4 ftarb Dor hunger. s id) jietje SEein toor. 6 in bie ©$ule ju getyen. 200 NEW GERMAN COURSE Fifth Class. Vowel of imperfect a, past part. o. 96. (SJeMren,* to bear; Smp.: id) gebar (£'. gebdre); $erf. : id) Ijabe geboren. $rafen3. ^m^erfeftum. ^nbifatirj. Sonjunftito. ^nbifatiu. lonjnnftiu. id) gebdre id) gebdre id) gebar id) gebdre bit gebierft bit gebdreft bit gebarft bn gebdreft er ge6iert er ge6dre er gebar cr gcbdrc tt)ir ge6dren ttrir gebdren toir gebaren toir gebdren ifyr gebdrt irjr gebdret ifjr gebart ifyr gebdret fie gebdren fie gebdren fie gebaren fie gebdren 3 m per a tin: gebier! gebdret! gebdren ©ie ! Ex. : 2Bafl)ington ttmrbe int Sabre 1732 geboren. 97. SSefeJjfcti, to command; id) 6efar)l (®. before); id) \)elfett,* to help ; id) §alf ($. plfe) ; id) l)abe gefyotfen. $raf. : id) t)e(fe, bu Ijtlfft, er t)ilft; t)t(f ! Ex. -. @ei bilfreid), jo roirb man bir ijeifen. 105. 9fceJjmen,* ft? &*£erbergen" tm ^erfeftum be3 ®onjunttit)3. S)iefer 9ftann fiel auf bem (Sife unb brad) fief) ben 91rm. 2$er ftel auf bem (£ife? : if$ ! effet ! effen ©ie ! Ex. : 2BaS effen @ie $u 9Jttttag ? 123. greffeit, to eat, devour (said of animals); id) fraft ; idj rjctbe gefreffen. % r d f. : id) freffe, bu friffeft (frifet), er frtfet ; frtfc ! Ex. : S)er SSoIf jerri^ ba§ &mm unb fraft e3. 124. ($tekn,* to give ; id) gau ; id) rjabe gegeoen. ^rdf.: id) ge6e, bu gi6ft, er gibt; gib! Thus also : ju'geben, to admit. Ex. : 3d) gebe ba% nicfrt 311, benrt eg ift ntc&t roabr. 125. ©enefen, /ou gelaufeu (has run away). 2Bie laug unb trie breit ift bie)e3 ^hunter ? 33? effeu . 2 roenn ©ie mid) barum gebeten fatten. 3|'inbatle genefen. 4ein -Keufunb; lanbet Ijat e3 gerettet. s barf id) (149, 1). Seventh Class. Vowel of imperfect it, past part. a. 135. 23atfen,* to bake ; Snip. : bul; $J3erf. : id) rjabe gebacfen. $rafett3. ^m^crfcltttm. Snbifattb. ®onjurtftit>. ^nbifattb. £onjunftit>. id) bade id) bade id) buf id) biife bu bdcfft bu bacfeft bu bufft bu biifeft er bticft er badt er buf er biife toir bacfen rotr bacfen rotr bufen tnir bufen ifjr badt ifjr bacfet tfyr buft iijx biifet fie bacfen fie bacfen fie bufen fie bufen 3mperatib: bacf(e)! bacf(e)t! bacfen @ie! When intransitive, weak. Ex. : S)er Sbddtx bacft SBrot unb £udjett. THE VERB 207 136. gafjren,* to ride, drive ; id) fubjr; id) bin gefafjren. ^raf. : id) fafjre, bit fct^rft, er fdfprt; fa£)re! Transitive with baben, intr. with feirt. Ex. : 3d) bin beute aufs 2anb gefafiren. 137. ©ra&en,* to dftgv ictj grub ; id) fya&e gegraben. Spraj. : id) grabe, bu grdbft, er grdbt; grabe! Thus also : begraben, to £«rj. Ex. : ®ie Seic^en roerben in bent $trd)bof begraben. 138. £abett,* to load; id) fab; id) tja6e gelaben. ^raf.: id) labe, bit Idbft, er Ictbt ; lab(e)! Thus also : ein'Iaben, to invite. Ex. : 2)a§ @cf)iff ift fertig gelaben roorben. 139. ©d)affen, to create ; id) jdjitf : id) fja6e gefct)affen. ^rct f. : id) fdjaffe, bit fcfjaffft, er ftfjafft; fc^affe! Ex. : 5lm SInfang fdjuf ©ott §unmet unb @rbe. 140. ©djfogen,* & &ratf, strike; id) fd)fag ; id) tjabe ge|d)lagen. ^rdj. : id) fd)(age f bit fdjldgft, er fcl;£dgt ; fd)(ag(e)! Ex.: 2)er ^einb ift gestagen roorben. 141. £ragett,* to carry, wear; id) tntg ; id) Ijabe getragen. Spraf. : id) trage, bu trdgft, er trdgt; trag(e)! Thus also •. hinauftragen, to carry up. Ex. : „@ie trug ben grofd) fiinauf unb fefcte ibn in bte ©cfe." 142. 2Sarf)feit,* to grow ; id) ttm'dj3; id) bin getoadjfen. ^rdf. : id) toadjje, bu nmd)(|e)[t, er ttmd)ft; itmrf)f(e)! Ex.: 3So ftnb btefe *J3fIan$en geioacbfen? 143. SBafdjcn,* to wash; id) mufd) ; id) l)abe getoafrfjen. ^rdf. : id) mafdje, bu trjd)d)(e)[t, er todfdjt; toafdj(e)! Ex. : 9ftan rodfcbt mit Staffer unb @cifc. Stotm erf atiotu £)er SBdder, ft)e(cf)er gute3 unb ge[unbe. Snbifattt). ® onjunftit). id) blafe id) blafe id) blie3 id) 6 lief e bn blafeft bu blafeft bn b lief eft bn bliefeft er blaft er blafe er blie3 er btiefe ttir blafen fair blafen toir 6 lief en toir bliefen irjr blaft it)r blafet il)r bltefet iljr btiefet fie blafen fie blafen fie bliefen fie bliefen ^mperatit )': blaf(e)! blaf(e)t! blafen ®ie! Thus also : auS'rjtafen, to blow out, Ex. : Sarum rjabert @ie ba& SHcfjt auggeMafen? THE VERB 209 145. SBraten,* to roast ; id) briet; idj rjabe gebraten. ipr&f. : id) brate, bu bratft, er brat; brat(e)! Ex. : 2)a§ $(eifd) ttrirb in betn Ofen gebraten. 146. gatten,* to fall; id) pel; id) bin gefallen. «PrSf. : id) falle, bu fftUft, er fallt; f all(e) ! Thus also : ein'fatlen, to occtir to one's mind. Ex. : 3)a§ 23ud) ift auf ben gjwpoben gefallen. 147. gangcn,* to catch ; icf) prig; id) rjabe gefangen. ^JSrctf. : id) fange, bu fangft, er fangt; fang(e)! Thus also: etnpfan'gen, to receive ; otl'fongen, to begin. Ex. : SQtan fangt ^tfcbe mit ber 2lngel. 148. fatten,* ta /^/^; id) i)ie(t; id) fjabe getjalten. Sprftf. : id) i)afte, bu ^attft, er tjalt; f)att(e)! Thus also : bebalten, to &?anb. 149. ^angen,* to hang; id) tying; id) tjabe getjangen. ^rcif.: idj l)dnge, bu Ijangft, er rjtingt; l)dng(e)! Ex. : 2)ie Ubr bangt an ber SBanb. 150. Saffen,* to let, leave ; tct) liejg, id) fjabe gelaffen. *Praf. : id) laffe, bu laffeft (Icijjt), er lafet; laft! Thus also : oerlaffen, to leave. Ex.: 2Bo laffen @ie 3bre ©cbittje madjen (150)? 151. $aten,* to advise ; id) riet ; id) fjabe geraten. $Prti|. : id) rate, bu ratft, er rat; rat(e)! Thus also: oerraten, to betray ; errateit, to guess. Ex. : 3d) toiirbe 3bnen raten gWid) nad) §au|e p geben. 152. Sdjlafen,* to sleep ; idj fdjlief; id) tyabe gefctylafen. Sprftf.: id) fdjlafe, bu fdjfttfft, er fdjtfift; fd)laf(e)! Ex. : 3Sie tange fdjtafen ©ie getnbbrtUd) ? 2)er 2Sinb bldft ; e3 friert ; man mufe pd) to arm anlteiben. (MrateneS SHinbfleifd) rjeifet „9i oft brat en". 3n bent ©djaufaiet „2Si(i)eim Sell" Ijeifjt e3: „2)er Styfet ift gefallen, ber S^nabe lebt." 2IO NEW GERMAN COURSE ©8 fd((t mtr e6en etn, bctJ3 id) urn gebn llljr bet bent Qatmar^t fein muf3. 2)ie ^onk^tocrjter roarf bie Slugel tit bie §o()e unb fing fie ttneber. 3()ren roerten 23rief Dom 8. biefeS Wlonat$ f)abe id) empfangcn (erf)a(tert). SSa§ fjalten @te in ber recrjten |)anb ? SSemt efttmeren 8te „eut §ut," „eine ®arte," „em SBudj" (34, 6). SMdje ©nbungen be^eic^nen ba£ roet61icrje (Stefcrjiecrjt? (38, 2). SSetctje Qntbungen be§etcfjnen ba§ jcicfjltcrje ©efcrjlecrjt? (38, 4). 3)eftmteren @ie bte acrjt SD^uftertDdrter anf ©eite 61. 2Bte fjeifjen bte Dter 3af)re3§etten ? (62). SBte t)eifecn bte donate? (63). 2Bte Ijei&en bte %age ber SSorf)e? (64). ,3at)ten ©ie Don ein§ 6i§ gtoan^tg (66). 3at)len @ie bte ^efyner : §e()n, gtDcm^tg, n. f. id. (66). 2)eftinieren @te: „ber erfte 9#ann" ; „bte gtoeite gran"; „ba$ brttte ftinb" (71). £ejen ©ie fotgenbe SBrutfjtetle : 1 3 7 9 1191Q1 2< 4» ¥' TO' -"-Sf *3> °2' 2)eflinieren unbe. I0 3c*) ^ht e§ feljr notig. "See § 150. 12 see § 32, 10 <\ ^©^ajieten geben. * abficfjtlicfi. or mit ftletft. *s ba% 2Bilbptet. PART SECOND. Reading and Conversation. (Sefe= nub ©preftyitfmngen.) 1* £ie g>ant>t. £)ie\ganb, bie recite &cmb, bie Utile §attb; ber ginger, ber S^W' finger, ber £Qcitte(finger, ber Dftngfinger, ber Heine ginger, ber £)anmen ; — ^afyle, gafykn ^ie ; — einS, gtt>ei brei, t>ier, fitnf, fed)8, fieben, adjt, nenn, gel)n. Setjrer. 2Ba3 ift ba§ ? ©filler. Xa§> ift eine |>anb. 2Be(cf)e £attb ift e§ ? ©3 ift bie recite £anb. SBeldje £anb ift ba3 ? ®a§ ift bie ttalc £anb. 2Ba§ ift ba§ ? ®a§ ift em ginger. SBelc^er ginger ift ba§ ? ®a§ ift ber 3^ig^finger f — ber SKittelfittger, — ber Dtingfinger, — ber Heine ginger, — ber Sattmen. 3ft ber Saumen ein ginger ? 3a, ber ®aumen ift eiu ginger. SBie biete ginger finb ba§ ? ®a§ finb fitnf ginger. Style (jaljlen ©ie) bie ginger. (£tn3, jtoei, brei, bier, fitnf, fed)3, fieben, ad}t, nenn, jeljn. 2* 3>te Garten. £>ie $arte, bit garbe, bie @d)ad)reC; — toeifs, bfan, grim, gelb; — l'a\)k, gafjfen @ie. 23a§ ift haZ ? <£)a§ ift eine Harte. SBetdje garbe Ijat fie ? ©ie ift toeifj. SBetc^e garbe fjat biefe Sarte ? ©ie ift Mau. 2Betd)e garbe Ijat btefe SJarte ? ©ie ift gritn. 2Betd)e garbe ijat biefe Sfarte ? ©ie ift gelb. 218 READING AND CONVERSATION 219 23etd)e garBe fyat biefe ®arte ? ©ie ift rot S'afyk (jaljlen ©ie) bte Garten. ©in§, gtoei, brei, bier fftnf. 3d) lege bte Garten in bie ©cfyadjtet. 2So liegen bie ffiar^ ten ? ©ie liegen in ber ©djadjtet (103). £)er Sfyfef, ber 33annt; — bte garbe, bie gorm, bte §anb, bte recfjte gattb; — grim, gefb, rot, runb; — fatten, toad) Jen, gem effen. 2Ba§ f)alte id) i)kx in ber £>anb ? ©ie fjattett einen Stpfel in ber $cmb. 3n metcfyer §anb Ijatte id) ben Sfyfel? ©ie fatten ii)n in ber redjten £>anb. 98a§ fiir etne $orm f;at er? ©r ift runb. 28eld)e garbe fjat er ? @r ift griin (gclb, rot). 9Bo toad)fen bie 2(pfel? ©ie roadmen auf ben SBaumen. 3f3t bu (effen ©ie) gern Sfyfel ? 3a, id) effe fie fetjr gem. 3)ie geber, bte @taf)(feber, bie Suite, bie $reibe, bie (^ct)tefertafe(, bie 2Banbtafe( ; ber ©egenftanb, ber geberljatter. £)er ©rtffef ; ba% papier; — befeftigen, bienen, fdjreiben, brandjen. 2Ba§ fiir ein ©egenftanb ift ( ba§ ? £)a§ ift eine geber. 3®a§ fur eine geber ift e§ ? (B ift eine ©taf)lfeber. 233o Befefttgt man bie geber ? 9Kan befeftigt fie an bent geber^alter. SBo^u bient bie geber ? ©ie bient pm ©djreiben. 28a§ braud)t man aufter ber geber pm ©d)reiben ? 9Kan braud)t S^inte unb papier. ©d)reibt man mit ber geber auf bie ©d)iefertafet ? 9iein, auf bie ©cfyiefertafet fdjreibt man mit einem ©riffet. SBomit fdjreibt man an bie SSanbtafel ? Sin bie 2Banb= tafet fdtjreibt man mit ®reibe. 220 NEW GERMAN COURSE £)er gut, ber gutmadjer, ber $opf, ber §err, ber Ifrtabe ; bte §cmb, bte £)ame ; ba$ TOabrfjen ; — btenen, bebecfen, tragen, ab'nefymen. 3Ba§ ift ba§ ? £)a§ ift ein £ut. 28a§ filr ein |mt ift e£ ? (B ift ein gtf^nt (ein ©trof)- l)nt, ein £t)Unberf)itt). SBeldjc gar&e tjat er? (£r ift Braun (gran, ftfytoarj, toetjj). 9B05U bient ber |ntt? ©r bient jum 93ebeden be§ So{)fe3. 28er madjt £ute? ®er ^utmadjer madjt |mte. 2Ber trctgt cinen §ut? £>erren nnb Snaben tragen §nte. Stragen bie ®amen nnb SDJabdjen and) ^itte? 3a, bie ®amen nnb SDJabdjcn tragen and) £nite. £ragt man ben |>ut im 3irower? S^eitt, man tragt ifyn getootjnlid) nnr im greien. SBamt nimmt man ben |htt anf ber Strafe ab? 2JJan nimmt i^n ab, toenn man griifst 6. Sie XXf)t. £)te Ufyr, bte £afd)emtf)r, bte SEBcmbuljr, bte vgtanbufjr, bte £urmutjr, bte 2BeJtfferMatt, ^ %&wt ba£ ©eftaufe, ba8 ©otb, ba$ ©Uber, ba£ SCReffittg ; ber 3eiger ; — geben, btetten, befteljen, madjen, cm^etgen. 2Ba3 filr ein ©egenftanb ift ba3 ? ®a3 ift eine Uljr. 28a§ fiir eine Uf)r ift e§ ? (B ift eine Xafdjenufjr. 2Ba§ gibt e§ fonft nod) fiir Utjren ? @§ gibt 28anbnf)ren, ©tanbnfjren, Xnrmnljren nnb SBecfutjren. 3ft bie Ut)r niifclidf) ? 3a, fie ift feljr nitfctid). 3n tt)eld)em Stvt&t biettt bie Uljr ? ©ie getgt nn§ bie ©tnnben an. 2Boran§ Befteljt bie Ufyx ? @ie fiefteljt an§ bem ©eljaufe, bem 23erf, bem Qtffcrbfatt nnb b^n 3eigem. 2Borau§ toirb ba3 ©eljaufe einer £afd)emtf)r gemad)t? (£§ toirb au§ ©olb, ©itber ober S^idet gemad)t READING AND CONVERSATION 221 £)ctg Bud), bag £el)rbud), bag Sefebud), bag Sorterbud), bag 9?ed)en= bud), bag vgdjreibbutf), bad (Sefangjmtf) ; tie ^pradje, bie ©ette, bie ednile, bie 2lrt ; — fatten, eutfyalteu, gefyoren, tegen, liegeu, nentten, braudjeu, giif)Ien. 2Sa3 ift bag ? ®a§ ift em SSud). 2Ba3 fitr em 23ud) ift e§ ? ©3 ift em Sejjrlmdj ber beut= fctjeu ©pradje. SBte tuete ©etten entfjalt e§ ? ©3 entplt — ©etten. 3$em geprt e3 ? (B geprt S^nen (mir, bit). 3n toetdjer |)anb Ijalte id) ba§ 25ud) ? ©ie [jalten (bit f)d(tft) e§ in ber redjten §anb. 3it toetdjer §anb Ijalte id) je|t ba§ 93ud) ? ©ie fatten (bit fjaltft) e* jefct in ber (infen $cmb. 3d) (ege ba3 23nd) aitf ben SCifd). 3Bo liegt ba§ 35ud) ? S3 liegt auf bent £ifd)e. 9Zenne (nennen ©ie) mir nod) anbere Slrten bott 99itc^ern r bte man in ber ©d)itfe braudjt. — 9Jtan 6raud)t 28orterbitd)er, fiefebitdjer, 3ted)ett6ucf)er, ©d>reibMd)er, @efangbitd)er unb nod) triele anbere. Qafyt (ja^len ©ie) bie 93iid)er, toetdje auf biefem S£ifd)e liegen. — (£in§, jtuet, brei, bier, fiinf, fedj§. £)er §of, ^ er ^Brctterjaun, ber ©artett ; bie (Strafte, bte ®iidje, bie $iuberftube, bie 5Jlauer, bie gamifie; bag fiub, bag 2Bobut)aug, bag Saubfyaug, bag (gtafet, bag 3* mmer r bad 33efud)g$immer, bag 2Bof)tt= gttmtter, bag (gpeifqtmmer, bag edjlaf^immer; — fodjett, brateu, bad'en, toafdjen, trettnen, fyeifeu, fdjlafett, fpteten, fid) befmbeu, fid) auf Ijalten. 28ie nennt man ein betooljn6are§ £>au§ ? 9Kan nennt e§ ein 2Bof)nf)au§. 9^emte mir bie t>erfd)iebenen Simmer eine§ 3BoljnIjaufe§. — ©ie Ijeifjen : 35cfud)3gtmmer, SBoIjn^immer, ©petfejimmer unb ©djlaf^immer. 222 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2Be(d)e3 ift gefobtjntid) ba% fc^bnfte Simmer im §aufc? ®a§ 93efud)§jimmer ift getoofjnlid) ba§ fdjihtfte. 28o pit fid) bie gamilie getootjntid) auf ? 3m 28oljn= dimmer. 3n toeitfjem 3tmmcr totrb getyeift ? 3m ©petfejimmer. 28a§ toirb in ber Sitdje getan ? 3tt ber $itd)e mirb ge= fod)t, gebraten, gebaden unb getoafdjen. 2So fc^Iafen unb tyielen bie Sinber ? 3n ber ^inberftube. 28a3 befinbct fid) neben einem Sanbtjaufe ? 9Zeben einem Sanbljaufe befinben fid) meift ein §of unb ein ©arten. SBoburd) ttnrb ber £of toon ber ©traf^e getrennt ? £)er £of ttrirb turn ber ©trafce enttoeber burd) eine 5Di cuter, eincn 93ret= terjcum ober ein ©tafet getrennt £)er ©arten, ber Dbftbcmm, ber 2tyfe(baum, ber 33intbaum, ber $trfd)bcmm, ber $fir|id)baum, ber @traud), ber $ofyI, ber ©parcel, ber iSatat; bie 33of)tte, bie (£rbfe, bie $artoffef, bie 23(ume, bie SRofe, bie ^ttte, bie 9te(fe, bie Xufpe; ba$ (SJemiife, ba3 SBeiftfjen, ba§ (Stiefmitrter* cfyen, ba$ $ergij3tneimtidjt, ba& ©dnteegtocfdjen; — gebett, ttemten, ttadtfen, fittben, fid) befinben. . 9Beld)e Slrten turn ©arten gibt e§? @§ gibt Dbftgarten, ©emiifegdrten unb 33htmengarten. 3Sa§ befinbet fid) in bem Dbftgarten ? Stt bem Dbftgarten befinben fict) Dbftbdume unb ©trdudjer. 9fenne mir einige Slrten bon Obftbdumen. — ®er SXpfcl= baum, ber SBirnbaum, ber ®irfd)baum, ber SPftrficpaunu 3Ba§ toadjft im ©emitfegarten ? 3m ©emitfegarten toacfyfen alle Slrten toon ©emitfe, tote : 23of)nen, ©rbfen, ^artoffeln, ®ot)l, ©parget, ©atat 2C. 28a§ finbet man im Slumengarten ? 3m 93lumengarten finbet man fcfybne 95(umen, toie : Sftofen, 23eitd)en, Silien, 9Mfen, SCnfyen, ©tiefmittterdjen, SSergifcmeinnidjt, ©d)nee; glbcfdjen unb nod) biele anbere. READING AND CONVERSATION 223 10. 5)a3 %af)t. 2)er grilling, ber eommer, ber ©erbft, ber Sinter; Me ^aljreSgeit, Me SBocfye; ba3 3aljr, ba3 ©djaltjaljr; — i)eij3en. 2Ste ^etfeen bie bier Qafjre^^etten ? ©ie Ijeifjen : grueling, Sommer, ^erbft nub SBinter. 2Betcf)e Saljre^eit fjaben tutr }e§t? 2Bir Ijjaben jetjt — . SSie Dielc Sage Ijat ba§ 3aljr? 2)a§ 3aljr Ijat 365 Sage. £>aben alle Saljre 365 Sage? Stein, ba§ ©djaltjaljr Ijat 366 Sage. 2Sie mete donate Ijat ba3 Saljr ? $a8 3aljr Ijat jtoolf donate. 3Bie Ijeifcen biefelbeu ? ©ie Ijeifsen : Sanuar, gebrnar, SRarj, 2tyrtl, 9Kat, Sunt, 3uti, 2(ngnft, September, Dftober, 9Jo^ Dember, Member. 2Sie f)etBen bie Sage ber 28ocf)e ? ©ie Ijetften : ©onntag, iUontag, S>ien3tag, 5D?ittir>orf), S)rmner§tag, fjreitag, 8onn= abenb (©amStag). 2Beld)e§ ©atutn (ben ttnet)ie(ten) Ijaben toil Ijeute? 2Bir fjaben Ijente ben — . 11* £)ie (Steografjljie* £)er (5rbtet(, ber (Smtoofjtter, ber glufo bie §cutptftabt, bie 2Mt, bie itfepuMif ; ba$ ?cmb, ba§ ^cmigreicf), ba% ^aiferreid). 2Sie Ijeiften bie fiinf ©rbteile ? ©ie tjeiftett : ©nropa, 2Ifien, 9lfrifa, SImerifa nnb SCuftraltcn. 9Be(c£)e§ finb bie totdjtigften Scinber @nrr>pa§ ? Snglanb, S)entfd)lanb, 9htf$lanb, granfreid), Dfterreid), Stalien nnb ©panien finb bie toicijtigften. 88etd)e3 ift bie £anptftabt toon granfreid) ? ®ie £aiipt= ftabt tnm granfreid) ift $ari& 38e[dje§ ift bie grofete ©tabt ber SBett? Smtbon ift bie groBte ©tabt ber 3Beti 224 NEW GERMAN COURSE 3Bte tuele Sintooljner Ijat Sonbon? Sonbon ^at itber fed)§ TOillionen ©intooljner. 2Beld)e3 ift bie groftte ©tabt 2lmerifa3? 9tet)^orf ift bie groftte ©tabt 3lmertfa§. 28ie biele (Sintootjner l)at SReto^orf? *fteto=g)orf Ijat 4,500,000 ©itttooljtter. 2Beld)e§ ift bie ^auptftabt ber SSereinigten ©taaten? SBafljington ift bie ^auptftabt ber SSereinigterx ©taaten. SSelcfye 9iegteruug§form Ijafien bie brei Canber ©nglanb, ®eutfd)lanb Hub granfreid)? ©ngtanb ift em ^imigreid), £)eutfd)Ianb eitt $aiferreid) unb granfreid) eine ^iepublif. 2Beld)e§ ftnb bie grofjten Sftitffe 35eutfd)lanb§ ? 2)ie grBjjten glitffe ®eutfd)tanb3 finb ber dtytin, bie Kibe, bie Dber unb bie ®onau. 12. £)te Grille imfc bit SJmeife* £)er Winter, ber (Sommer; bie grille, bie 2lmeife, bie ^cilte, bie Speife, \>k 3eit, bie Slnttoort; — fommett, fingen, cmttoorten, erttribent, tangett, arbeitett; — ©unger fyaben. (£ine ©ride lam Bet ftrenger SMlte #x ifjrer IJiadjbarin, ber 2lmeife. „grau9iacparin,'' fagte fie, „leif)t tnir bod) ettoa§ ©£eife, benn id) f)abe hunger unb nid)t§ ju effett." „$aft bu nicfyt ©^etfe fiir ben SBinter gefammelt?" fragte bie Slmeife. „3d) ljatte ja leine Qtit ba^u," toar bie Stnttoort. „$eine 3eit, Sfrau ©rille ? 28a§ E)aft bu benn im ©ommer 5U tun geljafct?" „3>d) Ijafie gefungen unb mufi^iert," antftortete bie ©rilte. „9htn gut," erttriberte bie Slmeife, „ttenn bu im ©ommer muftjiert Ijaft, fo magft bu im 2Binter tauten. 28er nidjt arbeitet, foil and) tiidjt effen!" READING AND CONVERSATION 22 5 13. 3£a$ id) Kefce. 3d) liebe bie Stumcn, 3d) ItcBc ba§ 93ad)lein, 3d) IteBe ba§ ©piet, ®en glu£ unb ben ©ee, 3d) liebe bie ©cfynte, ®te btiitjenben 93aume, 3d) liebe gar Diet. ®ert gtit^ernben ©djnee. 3d) liebe bie 3SogeI, ®ie ©rbe, ben pummel, ©ie fingen fo fcfybn, ®ie ©onne, ben ©tern, 3d) liebe bie SBiefeu, 3d) liebe ba§ alleS, 2)ie griinenben §o^it 3d) f)ab r e§ jo gem. 3d) liebe bie SDtotfcfyeu, ®en froljlidjen Tint, 3d) liebe ^er^innig, 28a§ fcpn iff nnb gut 14. 5>te fleitte SESofjftaterut. £)er §of, ber er$ fyinein- SD?ir ift, al§ ob id) bie §dnbe 9tuf§ §aupt bir legen follt r , 93etenb, bafj ©ott bid) erljatte ©o rein unb fcfyon unb ijolb. £ c i tt e. 16* £>a$ ^anarienfeogetdjetu £)er @ame, ber 3 U( ^ er r & er ^ a f*9r ber £ob; bie £rcme, bie Gutter; ba$ §aubd)en, ba% <&tMd)tn, baS $raut, ba$ geq; — trauern, (egen, tun, toetnen, rcecfen, brtngen, l)tn'ge()en, unrest tyanbeln, an'fangen. ©in l(eine§ Wab&jen, namen§ Caroline, fyatte ein altera tiebfte£ Sfanarienoogelcfyen. 2)a§ £ierd)en fang fo frbfytid) ben ganjen £ag unb toar fefyr fdjott, gotbgelb mit fdjtoaraem ^aufidjen. Caroline gab ifym ©anten ^u effen unb fitf)lenbe3 $raut, and) mandjmal ein ©titddjen $uder unb taglid) frtfd)e§, f(are§ 8Baffer. Slber plo^ttdj fing ba§ 93ogetd)en an gu trauern, unb eine3 9Korgen§, ate Caroline ifynt SBaffer bringen tnollte, lag e£ tot im ®aftg. READING AND CONVERSATION 227 ®ct toetnte bie SHeine fef)r urn ifjr liefte£ 2Sogeld)en unb ttagte tljren SScrluft ber 3Ruttcr. ®ie SKutter after gtttg f)in unb faufte eiti anbere§, ba§ nod) fdjoner tuar ate ba£ erfte unb eften fo frofjlid) fang, unb tat e§ in ben ®afig. Stllein baS Heine SJiabdjen freute fid) ttic^t, fonbern toeinte nod) mefjr, ate e§ ba§ neue 9Sogeld)en falj. Sa ttutnberte fid) bie Gutter unb fagte: „9Kein liefte§ SHnb, toarunt toeinft bit nod)? Seine Sranen ineden ba£ tote 2Soge(d)en nid)t tuieber auf, unb Ijter fjaft bu ja ein neueS." ®a antioortete Caroline : „9Id), (iefte SDhttter, id) Ijafte unredjt gegen bay Sierdjen ge^anbett : id) J)afte nod) fur j tor feinem Xobe em @titdd)en B^der, tt)e[d)e3 bu mir fitr ba^felfte gaftft, if)m tttdjt geftradjt, fonbern felftft gegeffen. ©o tyrad) ba§ Sftagblein utit red)t Bctriifitem ^erjen. ®ie Gutter after tadjette nid)t lifter bie SHage be§ 9Kabd)en3, benn fie erfannte unb berefjrte bie Ijeilige ©timnte be£ ©etiriffen3 in bent £erjen be3 Sinbe3. « r „ m m a $ c r. 17* £>te SMene unb bie £aufce» Sin 93iend)en fiet in einen 23ad). 35ie§ faf) ton often eine faufte ©ie ftrad) ein 93lattd)en bon, ber Saufte Unb toarf 3 iljr jtt. ®a§ 93iend)en fd)tnamm banad) Unb f)alf fid) g(itdlid) au§ bent 23ad). — 9?ad) f ur jer 3^it biefetfte Xaufte ®af* toieber frieblid) auf ber faufte. ®a fd)Ud) ein Sager teif Ijeran Unb tegte fd)on bie glinte an. 1 Sdjon Ijatte er ben £al)n getyamtt 2 : Sfteut 93iend)en !am unb ftad) if)n in bie «£anb. $uff ! ging ber ©djnft baneften. 3 ®te Saufte flog baton. — 2Sent banfte fie tljr Seften ? 1 took aim. 2 had cocked the gun, 3 the shot missed. 228 NEW GERMAN COURSE 18, 5)er 28olf uttb ba$ Saturn. £)er Sotf, ber 33atf), ber £)urft, ber $fan, bcr SDfamat; bie Unterfjaf* tuna,, bte (Strafe; ba% ^amm, baS gammdjen, ba$ Sort; — trtnfen, faffen, t>erfcf)(mgen, triiben, fltegen, ertoibern, ftfjhnpfett, reben, gerreigett, an'fangen. ©in 2Bolf lam an emeu 2Sad), urn feinen T)nrft ju tofdjen. SBeiter unten am 33ad)e kmerlte er em Sammdjen, toe(d)e3 e6enfatl£ gelommen ioar, um ^n trtnlen. (£r fafjte fofort ben bofen $Ian, ba§ nnfdjnlbige Slier ju berfdjtingen, nnb ftng bafjer folgenbe Unterljattnng mit bem= f elfien an : „2)u triifift mir ba§> SBaffer, I)etmtMifd)e§ Xter!" „28ie tft ba§ moglid), ba bod) ba3 SBaffer t>on btr $n mir fliefct ?" ertoiberte ba§ Samm. „9Bie, bn fdjtmpfft tooljl nod) auf mid)?" „3cfj fdjtmpfe mdjt." , f 2t6er box fedj§ SJconaten rjaft bn 93i3fe3 rjon mir gerebet!" „95or fed)3 Sftonaten faar id) nod) gar nidjt gefioren." „©o tft e§> betn SBruber getoefen !" „$tf) §abe gar leinen Srnber." „9cnn, fo toar'3 bein SSater, nnb ba§ berbient ©trafe!" 9Kit biefen SBorten ftet ber SBolf itber ba§ Samm Ijer nnb aerrift e§. 19. 3)ie ^djUjalfcett. 50httter, SKntter ! nnfere ©djtoalfien, ©ielj bod) felfier, Sftntter fielj ! gnnge r)a6en fie Belommen l Unb bie SITten fitttern fie. 3lfe bie lieBett Iteinen ©djtoatten SBnnberrjoll irjr 9ieft gefiant, £a6 r id) ftnnbenlang am genfter |>eimlid) itjtten jngefd)ant READING AND CONVERSATION 229 Unb nacfybem fie eingericfytet 2 Unb Betooljnt ba3 fleine £an3, (Stouten fie mit feugen 2Ingen ©ar berftanbig nadj mir au§. 3 Set, e§> fciitert, fie fatten geme 4 Wand)t§> gtcttfc^erttb mir erjaljtt Unb t§> IjaBe fie BetritBet 2Ba3 jur 9febe nod) gefeljtt. 5 Sin3 nm§ anbre brie ein Sleinob ie ?Pftefidje» £)er ^Pfirfidj, ber 33aum, ber @ol)n, ber gimmel, ber 33ruber, ber Jhtabe, ber 9?ad)bar, ber ganbmatm ; bie S8adt, bie grutfjt, bie ^ug, bie Gutter ; bag IHttb, bag 33ett, bag 2Iuge, bag @d)[aflammer(ein ; — er= fatten, fcfymedett, rufen, fcr)iittetn r nefymen, mtt'bringeti, auf beioafyren, aufeffen, forf toerfen, auf'ffopfen, fid) tmmbent, fief) freuen, ftitPfcfytoei- gen, jerfdjmetgetu ©in Sanbmann Bradjte an£ ber ©tabt fihtf ^firfidje ttttt, bie fdpnften, bie man fefjen fonnte* Seine StHnber aBer fallen biefe gmd)t jum erftenmaL 2)e§^alB bmnberten nnb frenten fie fid) feljr iifier bie fcpnen 9lpfel mit ben rotlidjen 95acfen nnb bem ^arten glaum. ®aranf berteilte fie ber SSater nnter feine bier ^naBen nnb einen erfjielt bie SKntter. 230 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2lm 2T6enb, aU bie $inber in ba§ ©cfytaffammertein gingen, fragte ber SSater: „9l\m, toie tjaben eud) bte fc^onen SIpfel gefcfymecft?" „|jerrlid), (ieber SSater," fagte ber altefte; „e3 ift erne fcfyone grud)t 3d) fjabe mtr ben ©tein auf 6etoaI)rt unb tottt mir barau§ eitten 23aum erjtefjen." „23rat) !" fagte ber 95ater r „bu toirft ein guter Sanbmann toerben." „3d) tjabe ben meinigen fogtetd) aufgegeff en, " rief ber jitngfte, „tmb ben ©tein fortgemorfcn, unb bte Gutter Ijat mtr bte ^atfte t>on bem ttjrigen gegeben. £), ba§ fdjmedt fo fiife unb jerfd)mifjt etnem im SJiunbe!" „9hnt," fagte ber SSater, „bu t)aft getan, tote alle Itetnen Jfinber tun." ®a begann ber ^meite ©o!)n : „3d) Ijafie ben ©tein, ben ber Heine SBrubcr fortoarf, aufge^oben nub aufgeftopft. ©§ tear ein S?ern barm, fo fittf mie eine Sftufj. 2I6er meinen ^firfid) f)dbt id) tjerfauft unb fo met ©etb bafitr erljatten, baf$ id), menu id) nad) ber ©tabt fomme, jtootf bafitr fanfen faun." ®er SSatcr fdjiittelte ben §top] unb fagte: „$tug ift ba§ tool)!, aber finbltd) unb natitrlid) ift e§ ntdjt. SBetoafjre bid) ber $immel, ba§ bu tein ©ei^ate toerbeft!" „Unb bu, ©buarb?" fragte ber SSater ben lettfen ©o^n, „toa§ Ijaft bu getan?" „3d) Ijabe," cmttoortete Sbuarb, „meinen $firfid) bem ©o^ne unfere§ 9?acpar§, bem franfen ©eorg, ber ba3 gieber I)at, gebradjt. ®r toollte tljn nid)t ne^men ; ba fyabe id) xi)n ii)m auf ba§ SBett getegt unb bin fortgetaufen." „9fttn," fagte ber SSater, „mer I)at tooljt ben beften ©ebraud) t)on feinem $firftdj gemadjt?" ®a riefen alle brei: „®a§ §at 99ruber ©buarb getan!" ©buarb aber fdjtoieg [till, unb bie Gutter xtmarmte ilju mit einer £rane im Singe. « r u m m a $ e r. I READING AND CONVERSATION 23 1 ©in Saftg Dor bem fjcnfter tiittg, Sarin eirt SSBglcttt fafj ; ©ar tranrtg tear ba§ arme 3)ing — geljlt tljm bcnit tool)! ettoaS? 1 ©in anbre§ SSoglein flog bafjer, £ing an ba§ ©titer fid) : „(£t, tt>a§ BctruBt bid) benn fo feljr Unb ttmrum gramft bu btdt) ? „®u mirft jo forgfam l)ier geljegt, $aft ettte SBojjmtttg fd)5n, SBtrft retd) gefiittert unb ge^flegt; — 3d) lann bid) nicfyt t>erftel)n!" $)a§ SSoglein in bem Safig fprad) : „D fount' id} jteljn ntit bir! 2Bo^( l)ab' id) alle§, aber — ad), SDie greiljeit feljlet mir !" 2 (5 n e ( i n. 1 Did anything ail him ? 2 I am denied my freedom. 22* &a$ trierfpatmifte $uber Sttafjna&eltt* £)er ©utsbefifcer, ber £)ampffeffe(, ber Ihtedjt, ber £afttoagen, ber 28eg, ber (Styegatte ; bte ^afynabel, bte £)refd)tnafd)tne ; ba$ guber, ba$ gufyrtoerf, ba$ gerrettljauS, ba$ £or ; — benfett, ber jprecfyen, beftetgett, beloben, frtegett, cmf tragen, ab'ljolen, fcor'fafyren, etn'fattett, etn'fefyarfen, mifbrmgett, ab'ftetgen, att'ftopfett, fytt^u'fiigen. ©in SRecflenlmrger ©ut§befi|er ^atte in ber ©tabt einen ncucn ©ampffeffel fiir feine ®refd)mafd)ine gefauft unb trug einem feiner Sfttedjte anf, bier ^Pferbe t)or einen Saftmagen 5U fpannen unb ben Seffel abjuljotett. £)er $ned)t fpannte an unb fuljr Bet feinem £erm bor. 232 NEW GERMAN COURSE 3)ct ftel e§ ber gran be§ ©nt36efi£er3 ein, baft fie feme Sftaljnabeln nteljr Ijiitte, nnb fie Bat ijjren SKamt, bcm Sfrtecfyt anf^ntragen, etttett S3rtef babon mitpBringen. ®er @nt3Befi|er toar ein fel)r jartlidjer (Hjegatte, imb toeif er tonfjte, bafs feitt Sned)t fel)r bergefclid) ttmr, fc^drfte er ijfjm ttrieberljolt ein, ja an bie 9Za^nabe(n fitr bie gnabige gran $n benlen. 3)er Shtedjt bertyrad), biennial nidjt, tt>te getootjnlid), £er- gefclid) ^n feitt, Beftieg feitt ©attefyferb nnb macule fid) mit feinem fcfytoeren gnljrtoerle anf ben 2Beg. „9^nn foil ttticf) bod) tonnbern, 1 06 griebrid) bie ^a^nabefn nid)t t)ergtfet!" fagte ber ©ut§6efiijer ^n feiner gran, afe er ben Shted)t au§> bent £ore fallen falj. Qu gepriger $tit 2 lam griebrid) guriid!, aBer ttttt leerem SBagen, (£r fuljr Beint ^errenljaufe box, ftieg bom ^ferbe aB nnb ftopfte Bei ber gnabtgen gran an, ^n 93rief Wa^na? beln, ben er it)r mitBringen follte, gierlidt) gtotfd^en jtoei gin- gem Ijaltenb. 2)ic gnabige gran fiffnetc fetter bie £iir nnb BeloBte btn Sfrtecfyt einmal iiBer ba§ anbere barii6er,3 baf$ er nidjt t>er= geffen £>atte r bie 9Jal)nabe[n mitpBringen, ' S)er ©nt^Befi^er lam and) Ijinju nnb fagte : „9la, griebrid), ba§ ift fd)i3n t)on bir, baft bn and) an bie 9Zaf)nabeln gebad)t Ijaft SIBer toa§ ift benn mit bem 4 ©ampffeffet ? §aft bn ifyn nid)t Meg en lonnen ?" „9Kit bem S)am^fleffel ?" fragte griebrid) Befrembet, nnb tt)ie an£ einem £ranme ermadjenb fiigte er nad) einer $anfe Ijittju: „3a, e§ toar mir 5 bod) bie gan^e $eit, ate 06 id) ttma% bergeff en Ijatte ! " ? t n b r m e. 1 1 wonder whether. 2 At the proper time. 3 Praised the servant again and again. * How about the steam boiler ? s It seemed to me. READING AND CONVERSATION 233 33et einem SBirte ■ ftmnbermitb, ®a tear id) jitngft <$u ©afte ; 2 gin golbner Stpfel tear feitt ©d)i(b 9In einem tangen Slfte. 6§ toar ber gute Styfetbaum, 33ei bem id) eingefe^ret, 3 SDKt fitter Sioft unb frifdjem ©djaum £at er ntidjt toofjfgenafjret. ©3 famen in fern grimed §au3 SSiel leufytfcefdjttmtgte ©afte; @ie fprangen frei unb fyielten @d)mau§* Unb fangen auf ba§ befte, 3d) fanb eitt Sett ju fitter 9htf) r SCuf tteidjen griinen fatten ; ®er 2Btrt r er becfte felbft mid) $x 3Kit feinem luljlen ©fatten, Uiun fragf id) nad) ber ©djulbigfeit, 6 ©a fdjuttelf er btn SBtyfet. ©efegnet fei er altegeit SBwt ber SBurjel U§ sum ©ipfet. Ufjtaitb. 1 At the house of. 2 I was a guest. 3 With whom I stopped. 4 Made a feast, s He himself covered me up. 6 1 asked for the bill. 24* 9Hdjt su $anfe* Seffing tarn eine§ 9Ibenb§ nad) §aufe unb Bfopfte an feine Xiir* ®er Sebiente falj au3 bem f5enfter f erlannte feinen |>errn im ®unleln nid)t unb rief : „3)er ^rofeffor tft tttd^t 5U £aufe!" „@djabet ttidjts," anttoortete Seffing, „id) toerbe ein anbermal tirieber borfommen," unb ging ntljtg fort 234 NEW GERMAN COURSE 25. 28et3!)eit. 5lfe man Spates fragte, ttm§ ba§ fdjftrierigftc nub toa§ ba3 leidjtefte ®ing itt ber SBett fei, 1 antoartctc cr : „2)a§ fdjtoie* rigfte ift, fid) fc(6ft fenneu ju lernen, unb ba$ (eidjtefte, an ben ^anbhtngen cmberer 2abe( §u finbett." 2 1 See §125. 2 To find fault. 20. <3feid)ed mit ©letdjetm 3It§ Sorb ©[jcfterfiefb eine§ Xage3 feinen greunb, ben Sorb ©trafforb, Befucfyte, bifc if)n ber Siebling§[)unb be3fefben in§ »ciiu „3ritrd)ten ©ie nidjtV fcigte Sorb ©trafforb, „mein Heitter $unb Betftt mentals." Sorb Sljefterfielb ftrectte ben «£ntnb mit feinem ©pajierftocfe 511 93oben unb ertoiberte in betnfelBeu Xone: „gurd)ten ©ie mdjtg, SDtylorb, id) fdjlage ntcmafe Heine £hmbe." 27. £>a$ ^etbenro^Ieht. ©al) ein $naB' ein 9io§lein fteljn, 3tMem auf ber ^eiben, 28ar fo jung unb morgenfdjon, Sief er fdjnell, e3 nal/ 5U feljn, ©af) r 3 mit tuelen greuben. 3io3tein, SftoSletn, DtoSlem rot, 9fio£tein auf ber ^eiben. SnaBe f^rac^ : id) Bred)e bid), $to§tein auf ber §eiben ! IRMem tyrad) : id) ftecfye bid), S)a^ bu etoig benlft an mid)/ Unb id) toilFs nic^t letben. StBSleut,. 3?Mein, $o3lein rot, StMeitt auf ber ^etben. READING AND CONVERSATION 235 Unb ber mtlbe SfttaBe brad) 2 r § Dio»lein auf ber |>etben ; 3?5§tetn toefjrte fid) unb ftad), §alf ifjttt bod) fein 2M) unb 9Id),3 9Jhi£t T e* efien teibcn. 4 9?Mein, 9?5§letn, 9io^fetn rot, 3io§(ein auf ber Seibcn. _ _ 1 * ® e t J) e. 1 So that you will remember me forever. 2 Srad) ba3 SftoSteitt. 3 It did not help it (the rose) to say " Oh ! Ah ! " 4 Just had to permit it. 28* Dtafcert SBruce unb bie Spume* SDer 23a(fen, ber 3toetf, ber © e *b, ber 5 e ntb, ber luSgang; bie epitme, bie ©d)latf)t, bit 2lufmerffamfett, bie Uttabfjangigfett, bie ilber- mad)t ; baS yit%, ba§ ©efedjt, ba$ SBaterfonb ; — fcfjfafert, ertDadjett, erreidjen, geltncjen, rufen, berufyen, unterltegett, fid) bemitfyett, fid) be? ftcirigen, () era b' fa ((en. Robert Srucc fd)(ief einft, nad) ciner berloreuen ©d)lad)t, in ber ©djeune eine§ Saubmanns. ?Im nddjften 9Jiorgen, afe cr erttmdjte, fal) er erne ©{mute, bie i()r 91e£ an einem 33a If en beg ®a(^e§ befeftigen tootfte. 1 Sie lounte iljren Qtved \cboi) nid)t erreidjen, fonbern fiel immer toieber Ijerafr 2)ie3 erregte bie Slufmerffamfeit be* §elben. Sr faf) bie ©pinne fid) gmolfmal t>ergeben3 bcmitfjen, aber ba% brei^eljnte 9)M gelang e3 if)r, 2 ben fallen 511 erreidjen. Xa fprang ber Jtbnig t)on feinem Sager auf unb rief: „Unter(ag id) nid)t and) ^nolfmal 3 ber Ubermad)t meiner getnbe? 3 -9luf einem ®efed)te fierufjt trielleicfyt 4 bie Unab= f)dngig!ett be§ 33aterfanbe§!" Sinige Sage barauf beftatigte fid) biefe ^offnung burd) ben fiir ©djottlanb glorreid)en 9lu3gang ber ©c^Ia^t bet 33annocf= burn. 1 Was trying to fasten. 2 She succeeded. 3 Was I not overcome twelve times by the superior power of my enemies ? * Depends perhaps. 236 NEW GERMAN COURSE 29. Scheiden. Es ist bestimmt in Gottes Rat, DaB man vom Liebsten, was man hat, Mu$ scheiden ; Wiewohl doch nichts im Lauf der Welt Dem Herzen, ach ! so sauer fallt Als scheiden. 1 So dir geschenkt ein Knosplein was, 2 So thu' es in ein Wasserglas ; Doch wisse : Bliiht morgen dir ein Roslein auf,3 Es welkt wohl schon die Nacht darauf ; Das wisse ! Und hat Gott Liebes dir beschert, Und haltst du es recht innig wert, Das Deine ; Es wird wohl wenig Zeit noch sein, Da lafit es dich so gar allein ; 4 Dann weine ! Nur muBt du mich auch recht versteh'n : Wenn Menschen auseinander geh'n, So sagen sie : „Auf Wiederseh'n !" s Von Feuchtersleben. 1 There is nothing so hard as parting. 2 If some one presents you a little bud. 3 If a rose blooms on the morrow. 4 It will leave you alone, s Till we meet again. 30* %\t goretet* 3d) toeift nitfjt, tva% foil e3 bebeuten, 1 3)ctf$ id) fo trcmrig bin; @tn Wlaxtym cm3 alien 3etten, ®a§ iommt mix md)t au§ bent ©inn. 3 READING AND CONVERSATION 237 $ie Suft tft ttyl mtb e3 bmtfelt, Unb rttljtg flteftt ber Stljetn ; ®cr ©tyfel be§ Sergei funfett 3m 3l6ettbfMtnenfdjetn. 2)ie fdjihtfte Sungfrctu ft|et ®ort oben ftmnberbar, 3I)r golb'neS ©efdjmetbe b(i|et, ©ie fammt iljr golbene§ |>aar. ©ie fammt e3 mit gotbettem $amme, Unb fingt em Steb babei ; ®a§ t)at eine totmberfame, ©etoaltige 9KeIobei ®en ©differ im fleinen ©cfyiffe ©rgreift e§ mtt toilbem 28et) 3 ; (£r fdjaut tttcfyt bte gelfenrtffe, @r fdjaut mtr Ijittauf in bte §ty\ 3d) glaube, bte SBellen berfcfylingen 4 9lm Gmbe ©differ nnb Jfaljtt; Unb ba§ £>at mtt intern ©tngen ®te Corelet getan. $ e i tt e. 1 What it means. 2 It is always in my mind. 3 It fills the boatman with terror (because he fears the Lorelei). 4 The waves will swallow up. 31. Der Froschkonig-. (Aus Grimms Marchen. — Abgekiirzt).. Der Konig, der Frosch, der Wald, der Brunnen, der Rand ; die Tochter, die Linde, die Kugel, die Stimme; das SchloB, das Tischlein ; — trinken, werfen, schieben, befehlen, versprechen, hinaus'gehen, hinab'fallen, her- auf'holen, ein'lassen, an'fangen. In alten Zeiten lebte ein Konig, dessen Tochter waren alle schon, aber die jiingste war die schonste von alien. Nahe bei dem Schlosse des Konigs lag ein grower, dunkler Wald und in 238 NEW GERMAN COURSE dem Walde unter einer alten Linde war ein Brunnen. Wenn nun der Tag recht heiB war, 1 so ging das Konigskind hinaus in den Wald und setzte sich an den Rand des kuhlen Brunnens, und wenn sie Langeweile hatte, so nahm sie eine goldene Kugel, warf sie in die Hohe 2 und fing sie wieder. Einmal aber fiel die Kugel nicht in ihr Handchen, sondern auf die Erde und rollte dann ins Wasser und verschwand. Da fing das Madchen an zu weinen und weinte immer lauter und lauter, und als sie so weinte, horte sie eine Stimme, welche rief : ,,Was hast du,3 Konigstochter? Warum schreist du so sehr?" Sie sah sich urn 4 und erblickte einen Frosch, der seinen dicken, haBlichen Kopf aus dem Wasser streckte. „Ach, du bist es, alter Wasserpatscher," sagte sie, „ich weine iiber meine goldene Kugel, die mir in den Brunnen hinabgefallen ist." Da sagte der Frosch : „Wenn du mich lieb haben willst,s und ich soil dein Spielkamerad sein, an deinem Tischlein neben dir sitzen, von deinem goldenen Tellerlein essen, aus deinem Becher- lein trinken, wenn du mir das versprichst, so will' ich hinunter- steigen und dir die goldene Kugel wieder heraufholen." Die Konigstochter versprach es, und der Frosch tauchte sei- nen Kopf unter, sank hinab und kam wieder herauf, hatte die Kugel im Maule und warf sie ins Gras. Die Konigstochter war voll Freude. Sie hob die Kugel auf und lief nach Hause. „Warte, warte," rief der Frosch, „nimm mich mit, nimm mich mit ; ich kann nicht so laufen wie du !" Aber sie horte nicht darauf 6 und hatte den armen Frosch bald vergessen. Am nach- sten Tage aber, als sie mit ihrem Vater und alien Hofleuten bei Tafel saf>, da kam der Frosch, klopfte an die Tiir und rief : „K6nigstochter, jiingste, mach mir auf 7 ; weiBt du nicht, was gestern du zu mir gesagt bei dem kuhlen Brunnen wasser ? Konigstochter, jiingste, mach mir auf." 7 READING AND CONVERSATION 239 Sie wollte ihn nicht einlassen, aber der Konig sagte : „Meine Tochter, was du versprochen hast, das mufit du auch halten." Sie ging und machte die Tiir auf, und der Frosch folgte ihr an den Tisch und rief : ,,Heb mich herauf zu dir." Sie wollte das nicht tun, aber der Konig befahl es ihr, und sie nahm den Frosch und setzte ihn auf ihren Stuhl neben sich. Der Frosch sprang von dem Stuhle auf den Tisch und sagte : „Nun schieb mir dein goldenes Tellerlein naher, damit wir zu- sammen essen." s Das muBte sie tun, und als der Frosch genug gegessen hatte, sagte er : „Ich bin miide und will schlafen ; trage mich hinauf in dein Kammerlein." Sie trng ihn hinauf und setzte ihn in die Ecke. Da kam er zu ihr gekrochen und sagte : ,,Heb mich herauf, oder ich sag's deinem Vater." Da wurde sie bitterbose, hob ihn auf und warf ihn mit aller "Kraft gegen die Wand. ,,Nun wirst du Ruhe haben, du gar- stiger Frosch," sagte sie. Als er aber herabfiel, da war er kein Frosch mehr, sondern 9 ein Konigssohn mit schonen und freund- lichen Augen. Da erzahlte er ihr, er sei von einer bosen Hexe verwiinscht worden, 10 und niemand hatte IO ihn aus dem Brunnen erlosen konnen als sie allein. Der Konigssohn war nun nach ihres Vaters Willen ihr lieber Geselle und Gemahl, und am anderen Morgen fuhren sie zu- sammen in einem schonen Wagen mit acht weiBen Pferden in sein Reich und lebten gliicklich zusammen bis an ihr seliges Ende. 1 When the weather was very warm. 2 tossed it up. 3 What is the matter? 4 She looked around 5 If you will love me. 6 She did not piy attention. 7 Open the door. 8 So that we may eat together. 9 See §109, 4. 10 He related to her that he had been bewitched by a wicked sorceress, and that no dne had been able, etc. See §125, 4. Model of Conversation, Wann lebte dieser Konig ? Waren seine Tochter alle schon ? Welche Tochter war die schonste ? Was lag bei dem Schlosse des Konigs ? Was befand sich in dem Walde ? 24O NEW GERMAN COURSE Wohin ging das Konigskind ? Wohin setzte sie sich ? Was tat sie mit der goldenen Kugel ? Wohin fiel einmal die Kugel ? Was tat darauf das Madchen ? Was horte sie, als sie weinte ? Was rief die Stimme ? Was erblickte sie, als sie sich umsah ? Was sagte sie zu dem Frosch ? Was versprach ihr der Frosch ? Warum war die Konigstochter voll Freude ? Was tat sie darauf ? Was rief der Frosch ? Let these questions with suitable answers be continued to the end of the piece. It would be an excellent exercise for the pupil to compose and write the questions and answers to this and other pieces. 32. Auf dem Harze. Auf dem Berge steht die Hutte, Wo der alte Bergmann wohnt ; Dorten rauscht die grime Tanne, Und erglanzt der gold'ne Mond. In der Hutte steht ein Lehnstuhl, Reich geschnitzt und wunderlich ; Der darauf sitzt, der ist gliicklich, Und der Gliickliche bin ich ! Auf dem Schemel sitzt die Kleine, Stiitzt den Arm auf meinen SchoB ; Augleih wie zwei kleine Sterne, Miindlein wie die Purpurros'. Und die lieben blauen Sterne Schau'n mich an so himmelgrofS, Und sie legt den Lilienfinger Schalkhaft auf die Purpurros*. READING AND CONVERSATION 241 Nein, es sieht uns nicht die Mutter, 1 Denn sie spinnt mit grcxBem Flei£, Und der Vater spielt die Zither Und er singt die alte Weis'. 2 Und die Kleine fliistert leise, Leise mit gedampftem Laut ; Manches wichtige Geheimnis Hat sie mir schon anvertraut. „Aber seit die Muhme tot ist, Konnen wir ja nicht mehr gehn Nach dem Schutzenhof zu Goslar, Und dort ist es gar zu schon. „Hier dagegen ist es einsam Auf der kalten Bergeshoh', Und des Winters sind wir ganzlich Wie vergraben in dem Schnee. „Und ich bin ein banges Madchen, Und ich fiircht' mich wie. ein Kind Vor den bosen Bergesgeistern, Die des Nachts geschaftig sind." 3 Plotzlich schweigt die liebe Kleine, Wie vom eigneu Wort erschreckt, Und sie hat mit beiden Handchen Ihre Augelein bedeckt. Lauter rauscht die Tanne draufien, Und das Spinnrad scnnarrt und brummt, Und die Zither klingt dazwischen, Und die alte Weise summt : ,, Fiircht' dich nicht, 4 du liebes Kindchen, Vor 4 der bosen Geister Macht ; Tag und Nacht, du liebes Kindchen, Halt en Eng'lein bei dir Wacht." Heine. 1 The mother does not see us. 2 The old melody. 3 Who come out at night. 4 Do not be afraid of. 242 NEW GERMAN COURSE 33. Deutsche Sprichworter. i. Armut ist kerne Schande. 2. Morgenstunde hat Gold im Munde. 3. Morgen, morgen, nur nicht heute, sprechen alle tragen Leute. 4. Lesen und nicht verstehen ist halb miiiMg gehen. 5. Williges Herz macht leichte FiiJBe. 6. Wo man Liebe saet, da wachst Freude. 7. Ein frohes Herz, gesundes Blut Ist besser, als viel Geld und Gut. 8. Schweigen bis zur rechten Zeit Ubertrifft Beredsamkeit. 9. Es ist auf Erden keine bessere List, Als wer seiner Zunge Meister ist. 10. Wer auf jede Feder acht't, Nie das Bette fertig macht. 11. Herr Gutgenug, der bequeme Knecht, Macht seine Sachen nur halb und schlecht. 12. Wer im Sommer nicht mag schneiden, MuB im Winter Hunger leiden. 13. Wer den Schaden nicht weiB zu meiden, Der muB ihn leiden. 14. Geh treu und redlich durch die Welt, Das ist das beste Reisegeld. 15. Gute Spriiche, weise Lehren Mufi man iiben, nicht bloB horen. 34. Epigramme unci Stammbuch-Verse. 1 Im Gliicke niemals stolz, Im Ungliick edelmutig, Den Freunden stets getreu, Und gegen Feinde giitig. READING AND CONVERSATION 243 II Sanft entfliehe dir das Leben An der Tugend Hand ; Freundschaft, Lieb' .und Treue weben Dir ein Rosenband. in Die reine Freundschaft reiner Herzen Geht Hand in Hand in Freud' und Schmerzen, Kein Gliick, kein MiSgeschick trennt sie. IV Der Mensch hat ein zweites Herz, eine zweite Seele, — seinen Freund. Heiter wie der Tag im Lenze FlieSe dir dein Leben hin, Unschuld sei's, die dich umkranze, Tugend deine Fuhrerin. VI Dem kleinen Veilchen gleich, Das im Verborg'nen bluht, Sei immer fromm und gut, Auch wenn dich niemand sieht. VII Die Blumen fallen ab, Die Rosen wie die Nelken, Doch unsre Freundschaft soil Zu keiner Zeit verwelken. 1 35. Die Hoffnung. Es reden und traumen die Menschen viel Von bessern kiinftigen Tagen ; Nach einem gliicklichen, goldenen Ziel Sieht man sie rennen und jagcn. Die Welt wird alt und wird wieder jung, Doch der Mensch hofft immer Verbesserung. 244 NEW GERMAN COURSE Die Hoffnung fiihrt ihn ins Leben ein, Sie umflattert den frohlichen Knaben ; Den Jiingling locket ihr Zauberschein, Sie wird mit dem Greis nicht begraben ; Denn beschliejSt er im Gra.be den miiden Lauf, Noch am Grabe pflanzt er — die Hoffnung auf. Es ist kein leerer, schmeichelnder Wahn, Erzeugt im Gehirne des Toren ; Im Herzen kiindet es laut sich an : Zu was Besserm sind wird geboren. Und was die innere Stimme spricht, Das tauscht die hoffende Seele nicht. Schiller. 36. Das Scliloss am Meere. Hast du das SchloB gesehen, Das hohe SchloB am Meer ? Golden und rosig wehen Die Wolken driiber her. Es mochte sich niederneigen In die spiegelklare Flut ; Es mochte streben und steigen In der Abendwolken Glut. „Wohl nab' ich es gesehen, Das hohe SchloJB am Meer, Und den Mond dariiber stehen Und Nebel weit umher." Der Wind und des Meeres Wallen, Gaben sie frischen Klang ? Vernahmst du aus hohen Hallen Saiten und Festgesang ? „Die Winde, die Wogen alle Lagen in tiefer Ruh : ; Einem Klagelied aus der Halle Hort' ich mit Tranen zu." READING AND CONVERSATION 245 Sahest du oben gehen Den Konig und sein Gemahl ? Der roten Mantel Wehen, Der goldnen Kronen Strahl ? Fiihrten sie nicht mit Wonne Eine schone Jungfrau dar, Herrlich wie eine Sonne, Strahlend im goldnen Haar ? „Wohl sah ich die Eltern beide, Ohne der Kronen Licht, Im schwarzen Trauerkleide ; Die Jungfrau sah ich nicht." Uhland. 37. Das Veilchen. Ein Veilchen auf der Wiese stand, Gebuckt in sich und unbekannt ; Es war ein herzigs Veilchen. Da kam die junge Schaferin Mit leichtem Schritt und munterm Sinn Daher, daher, Die Wiese her, und sang. Ach ! denkt das Veilchen, war' ich nur Die schonste Blume der Natur, Ach, nur ein kleines Weilchen, Bis mich das Liebchen abgepfliickt Und an dem Busen matt gedriickt ! Ach nur, ach nur Ein Viertelstiindchen lang ! Ach ! aber ach ! das Madchen kam Und nicht in acht das Veilchen nahm ; Zertrat das arme Veilchen. Es sank und starb und freut sich noch : Und sterb' ich derm, so sterb' ich doch Durch sie, durch sie, Zu ihren FiiBsen doch. Goethe. 246 NEW GERMAN COURSE 38. Gefunden. Ich ging im Walde So fur mich hin, Und nichts zu suchen, Das war mein Sinn. Im Schatten sah ich Ein Blumchen stehn, Wie Sterne leuchtend, Wie Auglein schon. Ich wollt' es brechen, Da sagt' es fein : Soil ich zum Welken Gebrochen sein ? Ich grub's mit alien Den Wiirzlein aus, Zum Garten trug ich's Am hiibschen Haus. Und pflanzt' es wieder Am stillen Ort ; Nun zweigt es immer Und bluht so fort. Goethe. 39. I>er Wirtin Tochterlein. Es zogen drei Bursche wohl uber den Rhein, Bei einer Frau Wirtin, da kehrten sie ein : „Frau Wirtin, hat Sie gut Bier und Wein? Wo hat Sie Ihr schones Tochterlein ? " „Mein Bier und Wein ist frisch und klar, Mein Tochterlein liegt auf der Totenbahr." Und als sie traten zur Kammer hinein, Da lag sie in einem schwarzen Schrein. READING AND CONVERSATION 247 Der erste, der schlug den Schleier zuriick Und schaute sie an mit traurigem Blick : „Ach, lebtest du noch, du schone Maid ! Ich wiirde dich lieben von dieser Zeit." Der zweite deckte den Schleier zu Und kehrte sich ab und weinte dazu : „Ach, daft du liegst auf der Totenbahr ! Ich hab' dich geliebet so manches Jahr." Der dritte hub ihn wieder sogleich Und kiifite sie auf den Mund so bleich : „Dich liebt' ich immer, dich lieb' ich noch heut Und werde dich lieben in Ewigkeit." Uhland. 40. Die Grenadiere. Nach Frankreich zogen zwei Grenadier', Die waren in Rutland gefangen. Und als sie kamen ins deutsche Quartier, Sie liefien die Kopfe hangen. Da horten sie beide die traurige Mar : Dafi Frankreich verloren gegangen, Besiegt und zerschlagen das groBe Heer — Und der Kaiser, der Kaiser gefangen. Da weinten zusammen ( die Grenadier' Wohl ob der klaglichen Kunde. Der eine sprach : „Wie weh wird mir, Wie brennt meine alte Wunde ! " Der andre sprach: „Das Lied ist aus, Auch ich mocht' mit dir sterben, Doch hab' ich Weib und Kind zu Haus, Die ohne mich verderben." 248 NEW GERMAN COURSE „Was schert mich Weib, was schert mich Kind, Ich trage weit bess'res Verlangen ; LaB sie betteln gehn, wenn sie hungrig sind — Mein Kaiser, mein Kaiser gefangen ! „Gewahr' mir, Bruder, eine Bitt' : Wenn ich jetzt sterben werde, So nimm meine Leiche nach Frankreich mit, Begrab' mich in Frankreichs Erde. „Das Ehrenkreuz am rot en Band Sollst du aufs Herz mir legen ; Die Flinte gieb mir in die Hand, Und giirt mir urn den Degen. „So will ich liegen und horchen still, Wie eine Schildwach' im Grabe, Bis einst ich hore Kanonengebriill Und wiehernder Rosse Getrabe. ,,Dann reitet mein Kaiser wohl uber mein Grab, Viel Schwerter klirren und blitzen ; Dann steig' ich gewaffnet hervor aus dem Grab, Den Kaiser, den Kaiser zu schiitzen." Heine. 41. Wandrers Nachtlied. Uber alien Gipfeln 1st Ruh' ; In alien Wipfeln Spiirest du Kaum einen Hauch ; Die Voglein schweigen im Walde. Warte nur, balde Ruhest du auch. Goethe. READING AND CONVERSATION 249 42. Verg'issmeiimiclit. Es bliiht ein schones Bliimchen Auf unsrer griinen Au'; Sein Aug' ist wie der Himmel, So heiter und so blau. Es weiB nicht viel zu reden, Und alles, was es spricht, Ist immer nur dasselbe, Ist nur : VergiBmeinnicht. J'on Fallersleben. 43. Erlkonig". Wer reitet so spat durch Nacht und Wind ? Es ist der Vater mit seinem Kind ; Er hat den Knaben wohl in dem Arm, Er fa£t ihn sicher, er halt ihn warm. „Mein Sohn, was birgst du so bang dein Gesicht ?" — „Siehst, Vater, du den Erlkonig nicht ? Den Erlenkonig mit Kron' und Schweif ?" — „Mein Sohn, es ist ein Nebelstreif." „Du liebes Kind, komm, geh' mit mir ? Gar schone Spiele spiel' ich mit dir ; Manch' bunte Blumen sind an dem Strand ! Meine Mutter hat manch' gulden Gewand." „Mein Vater, mein Vater, und horest du nicht, Was Erlenkonig mir leise verspricht ?" — „Sei ruhig, bleibe ruhig, mein Kind; In diirren Blattern sauselt der Wind." „Willst, feiner Knabe, du mit mir gehn? Meine Tochter sollen dich warten schon ; Meine Tochter fiihren den nachtlichen Reihn, Und wiegen und tanzen und singen dich ein." 250 NEW GERMAN COURSE „Mein Vater, mein Vater, und siehst du nicht dort Erlkonigs Tochter am diistern Ort ?" — „Mein Sohn, mein Sohn, ich sen' es genau ; Es scheinen die alten Weiden so grau." „Ich Hebe dich, mich reizt deine schone Gestalt ; Und bist du nicht willig, so brauch' ich Gewalt." „Mein Vater, mein Vater, jetzt fafit er mich an ! Erlkonig hat mir ein Leids getan !" Dem Vater grauset's, er reitet geschwind, Er halt in den Armen das achzende Kind, Erreicht den Hof mit Miih' und Not ; In seinen Armen das Kind war tot. Goethe. 44. Gluckwiinsche. I. „Angenehme Feiertage ! " 11. „Frohliche Weihnachten ! " in. „Prosit Neujahr !" IV. „Viel Gliick zum neuen Jahre !" v. „Die besten Wiinsche zum neuen Jahre !" VI. „Die herzlichsten Gluckwiinsche zum Jahreswechsel !" VII. Karl Schubert und Frau gratulieren herzlich zum neuen Jahre. READING AND CONVERSATION 25 I 45. Zur Jahreswende. Durch des Lebens wilde Stiirme vorwarts stets mit frischem Mut! Ob sich hoch die Welle tiirme, dich besiege nicht die Flut. Was dir auch der Sturm genommen, halte fest am Hoffnungs- griin, Andre Zeiten werden kommen, andre Blumen werden bliihn. Beug' das Haupt nicht traurig nieder, weil dir eine Bliite fallt, Was vergangen, kehrt nicht wieder, doch viel Bliiten hat die Welt. Drum zuriick schau nicht vergebens, immer vorwarts hei^t es hier, Denn ein Abschnitt deines Lebens liegt auf ewig hinter dir. War er lieblich, war er heiter, wein' ihm eine Trane nach, Aber dann auch rastlos weiter durch Gefahr und Ungemach ! Sicher fiihrt ein Weg ins Klare, ob auch Sturm und Wetter droht, Nur den Mut, o Herz, bewahre : hilf dir selbst, so hilft dir Gott ! H. von Engelhardt. 46. O Strassburg". Strafiburg, o Strafiburg, du wunderschone Stadt, Darinnen liegt begraben so mannicher Soldat. So mancher und schoner, auch tapferer Soldat, Der Vater und lieb' Mutter boslich verlassen hat. Verlassen, verlassen, es kann nicht anders sein ! Zu Strafiburg, ja zu Stra^burg Soldaten miissen sein. Der Vater, die Mutter, die ging'n vors Hauptmanns Haus : ,,Ach Hauptmann, lieber Herr Hauptmann, gebt mir mein' Sohn heraus." Euren Sohn kann ich nicht geben fur noch so vieles Geld ; Euer Sohn, und der muS sterben im weit und breiten Feld. Was 1 lauft ihr, was 1 rennt ihr nach fremden Dienst und Land ? Es hat's euch niemand geheiBen ; dient ihr dem Vaterland ! Volkslied. 1 Was often equals warum, " why," as here. 252 NEW GERMAN COURSE 47. Barbarossa. Der alte Barbarossa, Der Kaiser Friederich, Im unterird'schen Schlosse Halt er verzaubert sich. Er ist niemals gestorben, Er lebt darin noch jetzt ; Er hat im SchloB verborgen Zum Schlaf sich hingesetzt. Er hat hinabgenommen Des Reiches Herrlichkeit Und wird einst wiederkommen Mit ihr zu seiner Zeit. Der Stuhl ist elfenbeinern, Darauf der Kaiser sitzt ; Der Tisch ist marmelsteinern, Worauf sein Haupt er stiitzt. Sein Bart ist nicht von Flachse, Er ist von Feuersglut, Ist durch den Tisch gewachsen, Worauf sein Kinn ausruht. Er nickt als wie im Traume, Sein Aug' halb offen zwinkt ; Und je nach langem Raume Er einem Knaben winkt. 1 Er spricht im Schlaf zum Knaben : „Geh hin vors Schlofi, o Zwerg, Und sieh, ob noch die Raben Herfliegen um den Berg. Und wenn die alten Raben Noch fliegen immerdar, So mufi ich auch noch schlafen Verzaubert hundert Jahr." Ruckert. 1 At long intervals (of time) he beckons to a boy. READING AND CONVERSATION 253 48. Wunsch. Etwas wiinschen und verlangen, Etwas hoffen mufi das Herz, Etwas zu verlieren bangen Und um etwas fiihlen Schmerz. Deine Lust und deine Wonne Mufit du an was immer sehn, Soil vergeblich Mond und Sonne Nicht an dir vorubergehn. Gleich von unbegrenztem Sehnen Wie entfernt von trager Ruh', 1 Miisse sich mein Leben dehnen Wie ein Strom dem Meere zu. Ruckert. Free alike from unbounded longing and from indolent repose. 49. Mignon. Kennst du das Land, wo die Citronen bliihn, Im dunkeln Laub die Gold-Orangen gluhn, Ein sanfter Wind vora blauen Himmel weht, Die Myrte still und hoch der Lorbeer stent, Kennst du es wohl ? Dahin ! dahin Mocht' ich mit dir, o mein Geliebter, ziehn ! Kennst du das Haus ? Auf Saulen ruht sein Dach, Es glanzt der Saal, es schimmert das Gemach, Und Marmorbilder stehn und sehn mich an : Was hat man dir, du armes Kind, getan? Kennst du es wohl ? 1 Dahin ! dahin Mocht' ich mit dir, o mein Beschiitzer, ziehn ! Kennst du den Berg und seinen Wolkensteg ? Das Maultier sucht im Nebel seinen Weg, In Hohlen wohnt der Drachen alte Brut ; Es stiirzt der Fels und liber ihn die Flut. Kennst du ihn wohl ? Dahin! dahin Geht unser Weg ! Vater, laB uns ziehn ! Goethe. 254 NEW GERMAN COURSE 50. Reiters Morgengesang. Morgenrot, 1 Leuchtest mir zum friihen Tod ? Bald wird die Trompete blasen, Dann mufi ich mein Leben lassen, Ich und mancher Kamerad ! Kaum gedacht, War der Lust ein End' gemacht. 2 Gestern noch auf stolzen Rossen, Heute durch die Brust geschossen, Morgen in das kiihle Grab ! Ach, wie bald Schwindet Schonheit und Gestalt ! Tust du stolz mit deinen Wangen,3 Die wie Milch und Purpur prangen ? Ach, die Rosen welken all' ! Darum still Fug' ich mich, wie Gott es will. Nun so will ich wacker streiten, Und sollt' ich den Tod erleiden, Stirbt ein braver Reitersmann. Hauff. * In reading this piece repeat the first line of each stanza, thus : „Morgenrot, Morgen- rot." 2 There was an end of the pleasure. 3 You look proudly. 51. Hans im Gliick. (Nach dem Englischen, von Dr. Lindorme.) Hans Steinkopf, ein Bauernknecht ; Baumgarten, Inspektor auf einem Rittergut ; Bauern. {Scene : eine Wiese ; man sieht Hans Steinkopf, sich auf eine Harke stiitzend.) Hans. Ach, arbeiten, arbeiten, arbeiten den ganzen Tag lang, und wenn man sich einen Augenblick ausruht, hat's der In- spektor in seinem Buche, und dann sind zwei Groschen hin. (Kommt nach vorn.) Ich hasse den alten Patron ! Na, wenn ich Herr dieses Gutes ware, so wiirde ich eins zur Regel machen 1 — READING AND CONVERSATION 255 so etwas 2 wie Arbeit gabe es nicht mehr. Das ganze Jahr hin- clurch Sollte Feiertag Sein. (Baumgarten tritt ein, sich untertanig ver- i eugend.) Hans. Ich bin sehr miide, Herr Inspektor, und da habe ich ein biBchen innegehalten, urn auszuruhen ; 3 ich hoffe, Ihr werdet es entschuldigen. Baumgarten (sich verbeugend). Entschuldigen ? Ich hoffe, daB Euer Gnaden 4 Euern sehr untertanigen und ehrerbietigen Die- ner 5 Wilhelm Baumgarten entschuldigen werden, der sich in Euer Gnaden Gegenwart verfugt hat, 6 urn Euer Gnaden zu benachrichtigen — Hans. Gnaden ! Es beliebt Euch zu scherzen, 7 Herr In- spektor. Baumgarten. Nein, Euer Gnaden, ich kenne meine Pflicht besser ; ich wiirde nie daran denken, mit einem hohen Herrn zu scherzen. Hans. Was — hoher Herr ? Ach, Ihr meint wahrscheinlich den alten Baron. Nein, mit dem diirft Ihr nicht allzuviel Scherz treiben. 8 Baumgarten. Ich sage, ich wiirde nie daran denken, mit einer Personlichkeit von Euer Gnaden hohem Range Scherz zu treiben. Hans. Hohem was ? — hohem Range ? Ach, jetzt merke ich erst, was los ist.9 Ihr seid verriickt ! Baumgarten. Euer Gnaden belieben zu scherzen, aber wenn Euer Gnaden so giitig sein wollen, diesen Brief zu lesen, so werden Euer Gnaden sich uberzeugen. Werden Euer Gnaden sich herablassen ? IO Hans. I nun, 11 ich wiirde mich schon herablassen, hinderten mich daran nicht verschiedene Griinde, von denen einer ist, daB ich nicht lesen kann. Baumgarten. Euer Gnaden haben vollkommen recht, denn dergleichen Kiinste sind fur jemand von Euer Gnaden Adel viel zu gering. Hans. Gnaden und immer wieder Gnaden ! Ich will Euch was sagen, Herr Inspektor, lafit es nun des Spaces genug sein, 1 - 256 NEW GERMAN COURSE denn mogt Ihr auch hier Inspektor sein, soviel Ihr wollt, ich lasse es mir nicht langer gefallen. 13 Mein Name ist Hans Steinkopf, und wenn Ihr mich nicht bei dem Namen nennen wollt, so werde ich Euch nicht antworten, und dam it Punktum ! *4 Baumgarten. Nun denn, Herr Steinkopf, seid so gut und hort zu, wahrend ich diesen Brief lese. (Liest.) Geehrter Herr ! Dieses diene Ihnen zur Nachricht, daB Baron Ohnewitz heute morgen nach sehr kurzer Krankheit gestorben ist. Wahrend derselben erklarte er, daf$ er ver- heiratet gewesen sei l s und einen Erben habe. Die Frau, mit der er verheiratet war, wurde gewohnlich Steinkopf genannt. Sie war arm unci ungebildet, und Seine Gnaden erkannte sie aus Griinden falscher Scham nie als seine Gemahlin an. 16 Sie starb vor einiger 17 Zeit und hinterliei einen Sohn namens Hans Steinkopf. Dieser besagte Hans Steinkopf ist der Erbe des Titels und des Grundbesitzes. Ich habe daher die notigen Schriftstiicke an Sie abgesandt, um ihn in Gemafiheit des letzten Willens und Testaments Seiner Gnaden 18 sofort in den Besitz zu setzen. Zu Ihren Diensten. Ihr R. von der Heide, Rechtsanwalt. Hans. Was? — alles mein? Die Hauser, die Baume, die Felder, die Pferde, die Kiihe, die Hunde, die Katzen und die Schweine ! — was ? Sind die alle mein ? Und ich, Hans Stein- kopf, bin jetzt Baron und Herr dieses ganzen Rittergutes ? — Sagt mir, ist es so ? Baumgarten. Ich wiederhole, das ganze Rittergut ist Euer. Hans. Hurra! LaB die Glocken lauten, — laB das Bier laufen, — laB — geh, rufe das ganze Dorf zusammen ! Baumgarten. Werden Euer Gnaden heute im Schlosse speisen ? Hans. Ja. Baumgarten. Was befehlen Euer Gnaden zu Mittag ? Hans. Beefsteak mit Zwiebeln, und zwar recht viel. Baumgarten (fiir sich). Beefsteak mit Zwiebeln! Was fur ein Gericht fiir einen Baron ! READING AND CONVERSATION 257 Hans. Was murmelst du da ? Geh schnell. Ich werde sie alle gliicklich machen, und dann gehe ich zu Kathchen. Baumgarten. Mit Euer Gnaden giitiger Erlaubnis, wer ist Kathchen ? Hans. I nun, Kathchen wird meine Frau und Eure Herrin sein, wenn ich Euch ehrlich genug finde, um Euch in meinem Dienste zu behalten. Baumgatten. Mit Euer Gnaden Erlaubnis, ich habe eine wunderschone Tochter. Hans. Schwatzt mir nicht von Eurer Tochter ; setzt Euch in Bewegung ! Baumgarten. Ich bin Euer Gnaden alleruntertanigster Diener. (Ab mit Verbeugung.) Hans. Ha, ha, ha, was fur Spektakel werde ich im Dorfe machen ! (Rennt hin und her.) Wo soil ich zuerst hingehen ? Ich will nach — nein, da will ich nicht hin ; ich will zu Pachter Schmidt gehen — nein, da will ich auch nicht — ich will vor allem zu Kathchen gehen ; — wie froh wird sie sein — (Die Bauern stiirzen jauchzend herein.) Hans. He ! Johann ! Thomas ! Philipp ! Wilhelm ! Wie geht's euch ? Hier giebt's etwas Neues fur euch ! Kommt, stellt euch im Kreise auf, ich will euch eine kleine Rede halten. (Sie scharen sich alle um ihn.) Das erste von allem hat euch der Inspek- tor wahrscheinlich schon gesagt, namlich, daB ich euer Baron und Gutsherr bin. Bauern. Hurra ! Hurra ! Baron Hans lebe hoch und noch- mals hoch und zum drittenmal hoch ! Hans. Ich werde jedem sein Pachtgeld heruntersetzen ! Bauern. Hurra! Hurra! Hoch! Hoch! Hans. Ihr sollt gar keine Pacht mehr bezahlen ! Bauern. Hurra ! Hurra ! Hans. Ich werde keine armen Leute im Dorfe haben, ich werde sie alle reich machen ! Bauern. Hurra ! Baron Hans lebe hoch ! Hans. Ich werde keine Waisenkinder haben, ich werde ihnen alien selber Vater sein ! 258 NEW GERMAN COURSE Bauem. Hurra ! Hurra ! Hans. Ich werde keine Witwen haben, ich werde sie alle heiraten ! Bauem. Hurra ! Hurra ! Baumgartcn (tritt ein). Euer Gnaden, das Essen ist fertig. Hans. Nun kommt alle mit mir auf das SchloB. Ihr seid heute meine Gaste. (Geht ab, alle folgen ihm jauchzend). 1 1 would make one rule. 2 such a thing. 3 I stopped a little while to rest. *• your grace (or highness). s your most humble and obedient servant. 6 who has come into your grace's presence? 7 you are pleased to joke. 8 you dare not joke too much, gl see now what is the matter. IO will your grace condescend ? n well now. I2 let there be an end of this joking. I3 I will not submit to it any longer, uand that is all about it. IS see §125, 4. J 6 an'erkennen, to recognize. '7a little while ago. I8 according to the last will of his grace. 52. Eine Tasse Kaffee. Lustspiel fur Madchen, von Wilhelm Pailler. (Fur die Zwecke der Schule gekiirzt.) Personen. Frau Mathilde von Langen. Frau Rosa von Bangen. Lisette, Mathildes Stub enniadc hen. Eine Kramerin. Eine Schustersfrau. Eine Dame. Zwei Kinder. Scene : ein Wohnzimmer in Mathildes Haus. (Die Verwickelung des Stiickes wird durch die Ahnlichkeit der Namen der Frau von Langen und der Frau von Bangen herbeigefuhrt, von denen die erstere im ersten, die letztere im zweiten Stock wohnt.) Erste Scene. Lisette, bald darauf Mathilde. Lisette (tritt ein, eine Schachtel und einen Brief in den Handen tragend; sie liest die Adresse der Schachtel, munter). Also „ZU eigenen Handen der gnadigen Frau Mathilde" soil diese Schachtel iibergeben werden ; — „die gnadige Frau Mathilde" ist aber im Augenblick nicht zu Hause. Horch ! mir scheint . . . ! ja, das ist Frau Mathilde; ich will ihr gleich entgegenkommen mit der Schachtel „zu eigenen Handen" ! READING AND CONVERSATION ' 259 Mathllde (tritt ein in eleganter StraBen -Toilette mit Hut und Umhangtuch). Lisette (halt die Schachtel entgegen mit Verbeugung). Gnadige Frau, diese Schachtel . . . Mathilde. Laft mich doch erst Hut und Tuch ablegen ! (Legt beides auf einen Stuhl rechts ) Nun laft sehen ! (Tritt an den Tisch links.) Lisette (stellt die Schachtel auf den Tisch und iiberreicht den Brief). Auch dieser Brief . . . Mathilde. Kam mit der Sendung ? (dffnet den Brief.) Das ist ja die Hand von Freundin Antonia ! Ei, ei, — Lisette, hore nur ! Lisette. Bin ganz Ohr, 1 gnadige Frau. Mathilde (liest). „Soeben erhielt ich von meinem Vetter in Kairo eine Sendung allerechtesten, trefflichen Mokkakaffees und beeile mich, Dir eine Probe davon zu baldigem Versuch vorzu- iegen. Es wiinscht Dir recht guten Appetit Deine Freundin Antonia " — O, die Hebe, gute Seele ! Lisette. Also Kaffee ist in der Schachtel ? Mathilde. Freilich, Lisette, echte, duftende, siifie Mokka- bohnen . . . Ich will sie gleich versuchen. Nimm den Schatz mit dir und bereite mir gleich eine Tasse guten Kaffees. Lisette (nimmt die Schachtel zu sich). Ganz wohl, gnadige Frau. Sonst befehlen Sie nichts? Mathilde. Nein, nichts, als daft du recht flink den Kaffee bereitest. Lisette. Sie sollen zufrieden sein, gnadige Frau. Mathilde (deckt den Tisch und nimmt eine Zeitung). Ei, die Muster- zeitung ist angekommen. Nun wollen wir sehen, was Frau Mode ZU sagen hat. (Setzt sich hin und liegt.) Zweite Scene. Lisette. Mathilde. Kramerin. Lisette (bringt eine Kanne Kaffee mit einer Tasse, Zucker und Zwieback auf einem Prasentierteller und stellt diesen auf den Tisch). (Ab.) Mathilde. Jetzt will ich ganz meinem Kaffee angehoren. 2 (Es wird an die Tiir gepocht.) Nun, wer soil jetzt kommen ? (Es klopft wieder.) Herein ! 260 NEW GERMAN COURSE Kramerin (tritt schleichend und lachelnd ein und stellt ihr Biindel oder ihren Kasten gleich auf den nachsten Stuhl und beginnt auszukramen). Gllten Abend, untertanigste Dienerin, Frau Baronin, kaufen viel- leicht . . . Mathilde. Bin keine Baronin und kaufe nichts. Kramerin. O Madam, schone Madam — nur anschau'n, nui anschau'n. Mathilde. Ich danke, ich will gar nichts ansehen ; ich bedarf nichts, ich kaufe nichts. Kramerin. Da Sehen Sie nur! (Die Kramerin zeigtnach und nach 3 all das Genannte vor.) Diese schonen, weiBen, echten Taschen- tiicher ! Mathilde. Ja, ja — schon gut. Haben Sie nicht gehort, daft ich nichts — gar nichts kaufe ? Kramerin. Aber vielleicht doch ein solches Burstchen ? Mathilde. Nein, gar nichts ! Kramerin. Oder einen Kamm ? Mathilde. Nein, nein ! Kramerin. Oder ein Nadelbiichslein ? Mathilde. Nun ja ! Reichen Sie das Nadelbiichslein her ! Was kostet's ? Kramerin. Der nachste Preis,* gnadige Frau, der aller- nachste . . . Mathilde (ungeduldig). Was kostet das Buchslein ? Kramerin. Gnadige Frau ! Zwanzig Kreuzer. Mathilde (das Geld darreichend). Hier, Frau, ist das Geld. Leben Sie wohl ! Kramerin. Tausend Dank. Aber gnadige Frau, haben Sie doch auch gute Nadeln ? — Da sehen Sie ! Mathilde (erhebt sich und greift nach der Klingel, unmutig). Wollen Sie, daB ich die Dienerschaft rufe ? Gehen Sie doch. Kramerin (zusammenpackend). O, bitte, bitte, — ich gehe ja schon. Mathilde. Also, leben Sie wohl ! Kramerin. Empfehle mich, schone Madam I. (Ab.) READING AND CONVERSATION 26 1 Mathilde (setzt sich nieder). Gottlob, daB diese schreckliche Kramerin aus dem Hause ist. Mein armer Kaff ee ! (Nimmt die Kanne.) Kramerin (wieder hereinguckend). Kaufen Sie auch kerne Hand- schuhe ? Mathilde (etwas erschreckt, die Kanne niedersetzend). Was gibt's ? Nein, nein ! Kramerin. Oder Strumpf bander ? Mathilde (erhebt sich). Gehen Sie augenblicklich ! Kramerin. Auch keine Tabaksdose ? Empfehle mich Ma- dame. (Ab.) Dritte Scene. Mathilde. Lisette. Eine Dame. Mathilde. Wie mich diese Person aufgeregt hat ! Aber ein Schluck von diesem Kaffee wird mich beruhigen. (Setzt sich und hebt den Deckel von der Kanne.) Wie lieblich er duftet ! (Will ein- schenken ; Lisette tritt rasch ein.) Lisette. Gnadige Frau ! Mathilde. Nun, was bringst du fur Neuigkeiten ? Lisette. Eine Dame will unsere Wohnung besehen ; sie hat gehort, daB wir nachstes Vierteljahr ausziehen. Mathilde. Nicht moglich ! Grade jetzt . . . , es sind ja noch zwei Monate Zeit. Entschuldige mich, Lisette. 5 Lisette. Es wird zu spat sein, die Hausfrau wies die Dame bereits an unsere Tiir. (Ab). (Die Dame ist dunkel gekleidet, von steif er, strenger Haltung, spricht auch stets mit soldatischer Kiirze, und in knappem, befehlendem Tone.) Mathilde (verbeugt sich stumm). Dame (ebenfalls). Mathilde. Sie wollen mein Quartier . . . Dame. O, verstehe, daB mein Besuch nicht angenehm sein kann. Mathilde (artig). Ich bitte sehr 6 . . . 262 NEW GERMAN COURSE Dame. Kenne das. (Sich umsehend.) Das Zimmer ist hiibsch, die anderen werden es auch sein. Brauche nichts weiter zu sehen, will nur noch einiges horen. Haben Sie die Giite, mir ganz kurz einige Fragen zu beantworten. Mathilde. Ich bin bereit, Madame. Ganz kurz. Dame. Sie brauchen nur zu sagen : ja ! oder nein ! Mathilde. Ich bitte zu beginnen. Dame. Ist eine Holzlage bei der Wohnung ? Mathilde. Ja. Dame. Im Hofraum ? Mathilde. Nein. Dame. Im Keller. Mathilde. Ja. Dame. Heizt sich die Wohnung gut ? Mathilde. J a. Dame. Trocken ? Mathilde Ja. Dame. Nachbarschaft angenehm ? Mathilde. So ziemlich. Dame. Steht auf dem Dachboden eine Waschmange ? Mathilde. Nein. Dame: Also im Keller? Mathilde. Nein. Dame. Auch nicht ? ! Also im Hausflur ? Mathilde. Ja. Dame (sich zum Abgehen wendend). Empfehle mich. Mathilde (in Gedanken). Ja. (Dann sich verbessernd und die Dame fortgeleitend.) Ach, entschuldigen Sie ! . . . Hat mich sehr ge- freut, Sie kennen zu lernen . . . Dame (ab.) Vierte Scene. Mathilde. Zwei Kinder. Lisette. Mathilde (blickt ihr kopfschuttelnd nach). Was f iir sonderbare Leute doch auf dieser Welt herumspazieren ! Aber mein Kaffe ! Jetzt soil mich nichts mehr Storen ! (Sie legt Zucker in die Tasse und setzt sich). READING AND CONVERSATION 263 [Es offnet sich rasch die Tiir, und zwei Kinder, iibertrieben aufgeputzt, von verschiedenem Alter, BlumenstrauBe in der Hand, treten ein und leiern, ohne sich unterbrechen zu lassen, in eintoniger Weise ihien Gluckwunsch ab. Das groBere Madchen tragt einen geschriebenen „Wunsch" zusammengerollt in der Hand.] Die Kinder (beginnen den Vers. Mathilde sieht erschreckt auf und sucht sie zu unterbrechen, gibt aber den Versuch bald auf und hort, sich darein er- gebend, zu). An dem schonen Namensfeste Leitet treuer Liebe Sinn Unsre Schritte wieder, beste, Teure Patin zu Euch hin. Dank sei Gott, der Euch am Leben Uns zum Segen noch erhielt, Frohlich wollen wir ergeben, Folgsam tun, was er befiehlt. Er erhalte Euch noch lange, 7 Mehre Eures Lebens Gliick, Und es triibe keine bange, Schwere Sorge Euren Blick. 8 Mathilde (freundlich). Nun, Kinder, wer seid ihr denn ? Was wollt ihr denn ? — Ich kenne euch ja gar nicht. (Das groBere Madchen iiberreicht stumm die Rolle.) Mathilde. Was soil ich mit dieser Rolle anfangen ?9 Kinder (glotzen sie schweigend an). Mathilde (entfaltet die Rolle und blickt hinein). Da haben wir's ! Kinder, ihr habt die Wohnung verfehlt, 10 ich feiere nicht mein Namensfest heute, ich bin nicht die Frau v. Bangen, sondern die Frau v. Langen. Die Frau von Bangen wohnt um eine Treppe hoher, im zweiten Stock. Versteht ihr, Kinder ? (Klingelt.) Lisette (tritt ein). Sie wiinschen, gnadige Frau ? Mathilde. Lisette, fiihre diese Kinder hinauf zu Frau v. Ban- gen. Sie haben ihre Gr-atulation hier an die unrechte Adresse gebracht. (Gibt die Rolle zuriick.) - — So, Kinderchen, folgt diesem Madchen, dann werdet ihr zu eurer Frau Patin kommen, zur Frau v. Bangen. 264 NEW GERMAN COURSE Lisette (die Hande ausstreckend). Kommt, Kinder ! (Fiihrt die Kinder hinaus ; ab.) Fiinfte Scene. Mathilde. Lisette. Schustersfrau. Mathilde. Ach, mein lieber, armer, guter Kaffee ! (Sie langt nach der Kanne ; vor der Tiir wird ein Wortwechsel horbar; Mathilde horcht auf.) Lisette (drauBen). Aber sagen Sie doch, wer Sie sind ! Schustersfrau. Will's schon sagen, aber Ihnen nicht. Lisette. Ich muB Sie ja doch anmelden. 11 Schustersfrau. Was anmelden? Ich melde mich schon selber an. Mathilde (aufstehend). Was geht denn da drauBen vor? [Sie eilt zur Tiir; im selben Augenblick tritt die Schustersfrau ein, gering aber ordentlich gekleidet ; sie spricht in aufgeregtem Tone und halt ein Papier in der Hand.] Schustersfrau. Ei, da ist sie ja selber ! Mathilde (tritt zuruck). Wer sind Sie denn ? Schustersfrau. Schau, schau, jetzt sind wir auf einmal fremd geworden ! — Mein Mann ist schon zwanzigmal umsonst herge- laufen. Mathilde. Was soil denn das alles heifien ? Schustersfrau. Was das heiBen soil? Ich bin die Schusters- frau von der Drachengasse und bin nun hier . . . Mathilde. Aber was geht denn das alles mich an ? Was wollen Sie denn hier ? Schustersfrau,. Geld will ich ; es ist die hochste Zeit ! Seit vier Jahren lassen Sie nur immer machen und arbeiten, 12 aber noch ist kein Heller bezahlt. Mathilde. Erlauben Sie ... Schustersfrau. Ich erlaube nichts, als mich zu bezahlen. Hier ist die Rechnung ! (Zeigt das Papier.) Ich gehe nicht fort, bevor ich mein Geld habe ! READING AND CONVERSATION 265 Mathilde. Das ist ja die reine Erpressung ! Ich bin keinen Heller schuldig und soil doch bezahlen, und noch dazu verlangt man das auf so unverschamte Weise ! (Wendet sich ab.) Schustersfrau. So ? Das ist unverschamt ? Nun warte, gna- dige Frau, ich will dir sagen, was unverschamt ist. Da horen Sie ! (Liest die Rechnung.) „Am 12. Januar 1867 — das sind jetzt fast f iinf Jahre ! — fur Frau v. Bangen ein Paar Schuhe . . . Mathilde. Schon wieder diese Frau v. Bangen ! — Nun ist mir alles klar. Schustersfrau. So ? Nicht wahr, jetzt kennen Sie mich ? — nicht wahr, jetzt erinnern Sie sich ? — nicht wahr, jetzt bezahlen Sie mich ? Mathilde. Davon ist keine Rede . . . Schustersfrau. Was ? Keine Rede ? Soil ich weiter lesen ? (Liest.) Am 28. Januar 1867 . . . Mathilde. So lassen Sie mich doch zu Worte kommen.^ Schustersfrau. Sobald ich zu meinem Gelde komme, sollen Sie zu Worte kommen. Mathilde. Diese Rechnung lautet auf : + eine Frau v. Bangen, nicht wahr ? Schustersfrau. Nun, haben Sie etwa ihren eigenen Namen vergessen ? Ja — fur die gnadige Frau Rosa v. Bangen. Mathilde. Das bin ich nicht. Schustersfrau. Was ? ! Mathilde. Mein Name ist Mathilde von Langen. Verstehen Sie ? von Langen, Mathilde von Langen, nicht : Rosa v. Bangen. Schustersfrau. Sie sind gar nicht die Frau v. Bangen ? Mathilde. Nein, gute Frau. Schustersfrau. Ja, wo ist denn diese Gnadige v. Bangen ? Mathilde. Um eine Treppe hoher, im zweiten Stock. (Klingelt.) Mein Madchen soil Ihnen die Wohnung der Frau v. Bangen zeigen. (Klingelt.) Wo steckt denn meine Lisette wieder ? Schustersfrau. Ich bitte um Verzeihung, gnadige Frau. Mathilde. Folgen Sie mir ; ich will Sie hinauffuhren. (Beide ab.) 266 NEW GERMAN COURSE Sechste Scene. Mathilde. Lisette. Frau v. Bangen. Lisette (eintretend). War mir's doch, als hatte Frau Mathilde geschellt. Ei ja, sie hat ihren Kaffee schon genommen and ich soil nun wegraumen ? j s (Am Tisch.) Ja, was ist denn das ? Aber so sind diese gnadigen Damen ! Sie hat den Kaffee gar nicht angeriihrt, lafit ihn kalt werden ! Ach, diese Launen, — und der Kaffee ist doch so trefflich ! Das will ich doch soviel als moglich gut machen. (Sie schenkt sich ein und trinkt.) Jetzt noch ein kleiner Nachgufi. (Trinkt schneii die Tasse leer.) Nun hore ich aber meine gnadige Frau schon zuriickkehren. (Sie steht auf und nimmt das Service vom Tisch und will fort.) Mathilde (Lisetten begegnend). Ach nein, Lisette! La6 diese Sachen nur noch hier ; stelle alles wieder auf den Tisch. Lisette (zogert). Mathilde. Nun schnell und hole noch eine zweite Tasse. Lisette (hat das Service auf den Tisch gestellt). Gnadige Frail . . . Mathilde. Was soil es ? Lisette. Noch eine zweite Tasse soil ich bringen ? Mathilde. Freilich ! Was ist da zu fragen ? Schnell ! Ich habe Frau v. Bangen eingeladen zu diesem ersten Versuch des frischen Mokkakaffees. Lisette. Frau v. Bangen will hier Kaffee trinken f Mathilde. Ist's denn das erste Mai, dafi Frau v. Bangen bei mir Kaffee trinkt ? Geh und hole die Tasse, eine zweite Tasse ! Augenblicklich ! Lisette. Ja, ja, sogleich, gnadige Frau. (Ab). Mathilde (geht an die Tur). O, nur herein, Frau v. Bangen. (Reicht ihr die Hand; Frau von Bangen tritt ein.) v. Bangen. Ergebenste Dienerin, Frau von Langen. Bin so frei, von Ihrer giitigen Einladung Gebrauch zu machen ; aber bitte, bitte, nur keine Umstande machen. Mathilde. Wollen Sie freundlichst Platz nehmen. Wo darf ich den Stuhl hinsetzen ? READING AND CONVERSATION 267 v, Bangen. Ach, Sie machen soviele Umstande l6 ; ich bin ja hier wie ZU Haiise. (Fafitselbst einen Stuhlund setzt sich rechts an den Tisch.) Mathilde. Meine Lisette wird sogleich eine Tasse bringen. v. Bangen. O bitte, hat gar nichts zu sagen, 17 nur keine Um- stande. Haben Sie schon gehort, dafi des Herrn Biirgermeisters Mops erkrankt ist ? Er hat sich iiberfressen. Sie konnen sich denken, wie die ganze Familie in Verzweiflung ist. Drei Dokto- ren haben an dem Mops herumkuriert, aber er ist noch nicht besser geworden. Mathilde. Schrecklich ! v. Bangen. Und die Tochter meiner Schneiderin wurde von den Blattern befallen. 18 Mathilde. Das arme Madchen ! v. Bangen. Und wissen Sie, daft die Gurken schon wieder teurer geworden sind ? Mathilde. Ist mir ganz neu. v. Bangen. Ja, wahrhaftig ! Aber Sie merken ja gar nicht auf alle diese Neuigkeiten ! Mathilde. Ich kann gar nicht begreifen, wo Lisette mit der Tasse bleibt. (Lisette erblickend, die eben eintritt.) Nun endlich, end- lich ! (Lisette stellt die Tasse vor Frau v. Bangen hin.) So, Lisette, jetzt bediene die gnadige Frau. Lisette. Ich, gnadige Frau ? (Zogert.) v. Bangen. O lassen Sie, lassen Sie ! I9 Nur keine Umstande ; ich bediene mich schon selbst. Mit Ihrer giitigen Erlaubnis ! (Legt Zucker in ihre Tasse.) Mathilde. Hole frisches Wasser, Lisette. Lisette. Sogleich. (Ab.) Mathilde. Bitte zu nehmen. V. Ba7lgen (ergreif t die Kanne, will einschenken — springt entriistet auf). Frau v. Langen, das diirfen Sie mir doch nicht bieten. Mathilde (aufstehend, entsetzt). Was beginnen Sie ? 2 ° Ist an dem Kaffee etwas geschehen? 21 v. Bangen. O nein, meine sehr gnadige, sehr giitige Frau von Langen, mit dem Kaffee ist nichts geschehen und wird ewig nichtS geschehen. (Sie dreht die Kanne um, zum Zeichen, dafi sie leer sei.) 268 NEW GERMAN COURSE Mathilde. Kein Kaffee ? ! v. Bangen. O Sie Komodiantin ! Mich so freundlich einzu- laden und mir dann leere Kannen vorzusetzen ! — Fiirwahr, das sollen Sie mir bezahlen, so wahr ich eine Zunge habe. Mathilde (klingelt). v. Bangen. O schellen Sie nur ! Soil mich vielleicht Ihre Magd vor die Tiire setzen ? Mathilde. Halten Sie ein ! — ein Irrtum . . . v. Bangen. Nein, es ist kein Irrtum. Sie wollten mich nur zum Narren halten. 22 Adieu, Frau von Langen. Sie sollen noch an mich denken. In einer halben Stunde hetze ich die ganze Stadt gegen Sie auf. 23 (Ab.) LlSette (tritt ein und bleibt verzagt stehen). Mathilde. Lisette, was ist's mit dem Kaffee ? 2 + Wer hat ihn getrunken ? Lisette (ganz verzagt). Gnadige Frau . . . Mathilde. Dein Gesicht bekennt schon alles. Du hast den Kaffe getrunken. Geh, Lisette, geh mir aus den Augen, auf immer, 2 5 — du bist deines Dienstes entlassen. Lisette (erschreckt, die Hande faltend). Ach, gnadige Frau ! Mathilde. Ja, auf der Stelle ! 26 Lisette. O lassen Sie mich doch bei Ihnen bleiben ! Mathilde. Schweig ! Trage das Service hinaus ! Lisette (nimmt das Service und geht weinend hinaus). Mathilde (fur sich). Ich werde sie doch nicht entlassen, denn sie ist sonst ein gutes Madchen. Jetzt mu$ ich jedoch zur Frau von Bangen gehen und mich mit ihr versohnen, sonst wiirden wir ein schreckliches Gerede haben. 27 (Ab.) 1 I am all attention. 2 I will give my whole attention to the coffee. 3 by degrees, one after the other. * the lowest price, s ask the lady to excuse me. 6 please (not be offended). 7 may he preserve you long. 8 may no care disturb you. 9 what shall I do with, etc. 10 mistaken the dwelling. " I must announce you. I2 see lassen, §150. J 3let me speak, u this account is for — . is and I am to clear off the table. I6 you make so much ceremony. 1 7 it is no matter. I8 was attacked with small-pox. *9 it is no matter (let it be). 20 what are f you doing ? 2I is something the matter with the coffee ? 22 you only wanted to make a fool of me. 2 3 I will arouse the whole town against you. 2 4 what about the coffee ? 2S go out of my sight forever ! 26 on the spot, instantly ! 27 a terrible scandal. READING AND CONVERSATION 269 53. Otu^iige au$ @tf)xtltt$ ,,%8xlf)clm Sett," 1 ^ifdjerfltufce, fingt im j£a$n l ■JMobie be§ ituljretljens (£§ Iad)e(t ber ®ee, er labet §nm 23abe, 3)er $na6e fcpef ein am gritnen @eftabe, 3)a fjort er etrt Elingen, 2Bie gtotert fo f% 2Bie ©ttmmen ber (Snget 3m ^3arabie3. Unb rote er erroacrjet in feltger Suft, 2)a jpiilen bie Staffer itmi urn bie SBruft, Unb e3 ruft an3 ben Xtefen : £ie6 Sfrtabe, 6tft mein ; 3d) lode ben ©deafer, Sdj §iery tr)n herein. 2 £irte, auf bem SBerge * SSartation be§ J^ufyreifyenS S^r fatten, lebt too# ! Sfjr fonnigen SBeiben ! £)er enne mnfe fctjetben, 2)er ©rnnmer ift rjin. 2Btr fafyren $u $erg, rotr tommen ftrieber, 2Benn ber $ndud rnft, roenn erroacr)en bte £ieber, SSenn mit tinmen bte (£rbe fid) lleibet neu, SBenn bie ©ritnnlein fltefjeit im lie61id)en Wlal 3(jr fatten, lebt morjl ! 3fjr fonnigen 2Beiben ! 2)er ©enne mnfc fct)etben r £)er @ommer tft tjtn. 3 5ltyettjager x etfdjetnt gegenitbet auf ber ^olje be§ ftelfen, jtoeite Satiation ©§ bonnern bk §5t)en, e3 gtttert ber ©teg, 9?td)t granet bem ©crju^en anf }cfjnnnblid)tem 2Beg. 270 • NEW GERMAN COURSE (£r fctjreitet berroegen $luf gelbern Don (£i3, 2)a pranget fein grilling, 2)a gritnet fein 9to3 ; Unb unter ben gitfcen em neblidjteS SD?eer, ©rfennt er bte Stable bcr $?enfd)en nicfjt mefyr ; 2)urd) ben 9iif3 nur ber SSolfen (Mltcft er bte 2Belt, Xtef unter ben SSaffern £)a§ griinenbe gelb. Wit bem ^fei(, bem S3ogen, &urd) ©ebirg unb Xal ®ommt ber ©d)uj3 ge^ogen gritt) am 99?orgenftraf)l. 9£ie im 9Retc^ ber Siifte Sftmig ift ber 2Beif), 2)urd) ©ebirg unb Stliifte |>errfd)t ber (Sdjiuje fret. Si)m gerjort ba£ 2Beite, 2Ba3 fein ^fet( erretc^t ; 2)a3 ift feme 23eute, 2Ba3 ba fleugt unb freudjt. 5 Sarm^crjigc SBriibcr 3 Sftafd) trttt ber Xob ben Sftenfcfjen an ; (£3 ift tfmt feine grift gegeben; (£3 ftitrgt ilm mitten in ber 33at)n f (£§ reifet ifjn fort uom Pollen Seben. S5ereitet ober nid)t, ^u gefjen, (Sr mufs t)or feinen 9ftid)ter ftetjen. 1 Act I, Scene i, 2 Act III, Scene i. 3 Act IV, Scene 3. READING AND CONVERSATION 271 54* (©cenett au$ „2$ifl)elm SeH" Der £}ut oes Cyrannen. (Sellers Cob. Note. — In order to adapt these scenes to performance on a school stage some liberty has been taken with the arrangement though not with the words. The workmen who first appear are conversing about the fortress that is being built by the tyrant and one of them is uttering Tell's words as they enter (Act I, Scene 3). <£ r ft e Scene 9ftel)rere Strbeitcr fotnmen im ©efprad). ©rfter ®efefl 28a3 |jcmbe fcautert, lonnen <£)&rtbe ftiit^en. (yiai) ben 33ergen jeigenb.) £)a£ |>au3 ber greiljeit fyat un3 ($ott gegritttbet. (2ftan bort etne trommel, e§ fommen Seute, bie einen |)ut auf einer ©tange tragen ; ein SluSrufer folgt iforten.) Btticiter ©efefl 2Ba3 mill bie trommel ? ' (Met ad)t ! 5lu3rufer 3n be£ ®aifer3 Dfotnen ! febxtt ! ©efeflett ©till bocfj ! §oret ! Slu^rufer St)r fetjet btefen |>ut r banner oon Urt. 5(ufrid)tett trjtrb matt ilm 2 auf £)of)er anb fiiEjrenb ; fie gefyen an bem £ut borbei gegen bie borbere ©jene, o§ne barauf ju adjten. SBaltljer, jetgt nad) bem SSatmberg $ater, iff 3 toafyr, ba£ auf bem Serge bort £)te Sciume bfuten, menu man eirten 6treitf) Srauf f iifjrte s mit ber 5ljt? Sett SBer fagt ba3, Slnabe ? 233attf>er £>er SDZetfter |)irt erjd^lt'g. 2)ie SBaume feten 9 ©ebannt, fagt er r unb toer fie fdjabige, §)em matf)fe fetne £>anb f)erau3 ^um ($rabe. £efl £)ie Saume finb gebannt, ba<§ ift bie 2Baf)rf)eit SBattijer (St, SBater, fie!) ben §ut bort auf ber ©tange. $3a3 fiimmert un§ ber jgut ? ^omm', lafj un3 gefyen. ^nbem er abgefyen toitf, tritt tljm. ^rie^arbt mit borge^altener ^?ife entgegen. 3n beS taiferS Stamen ! $aftet an I0 unb fte^t. £efl, greift in bie ^pife 2Ba3 mollt t^)r ? SBarum pallet it)r mid) auf ? " $rtep arbt St)r f)a&t'§ 9Jcanbat eeriest ; tfjr mfi&t un£ folgen. 274 NE W GERMAN COURSE 2eutf)ott> 3§r fyaht bem $ut ntcfjt 9?et>eren§ berotefen. greunb, lajg mttf) gefyen. $rieParbt gort, fort in3 ©efdngniS ! £)en $ater in3 @efdngm3 ! |)iife ! §i(fe ! 3" b« ©&ene rufmb. .Jperbei, ifyr banner, gute &eute, fjelft ! ©etoalt ! (&ttvalt ! ©ie fii^ren tf)tt gefangen. 9fl o H e t m a n n / *> er starrer, unb ^etermann, ber ©igrift, fommen fyerbei, mit bret anbern Sttannern. Stgrtft SSag giebt'3 ? OfJoffetmamt 2Ba3 I2 legft bu §anb an biefen 9D?ann ? $rtefjf)arbt (£r ift em getnb be3 Staifer3, em $errdter. £ett, fafet i^n $eftig ©in $errdter, id) ? Stoffelmamt £)u trrft bid), greunb. £)a3 ift £)er $eE, ein (Srjrenmann unb guter 33iirger. 238attljer, erbticft SBattfyet giirften unb eilt ttym entgegen ($ro§Oater, fu'lf ! ©eroalt gefdjtefjt bem $ater. 13 ^ricParbt 3n3 ($efdngni3, fort ! 2Baftf)er $iirft, Ijerbeteitenb 3dj Icifte ^urgfcrjaft, Ijattet Urn ®otte3 roiften, %ett, roa£ ift gefrf)ef)en ? 3ttelc§t!jat unb ©t auf f adj er fommen. READING AND CONVERSATION 275 S)e3 £anbbogt§ okrfjerrltdje ©etualt $erad)tet er unb mill fie rttdjt erfemten. ©tauffatfjer S)a3 t)atf berXell getan? 9Md)ttjal S)a3 Mgftbu, $ube! Seutfjolb @r f)at bem .gut nicf)t 9?et)eren^ bemiefen. SBattljer prft Unb barum foil er in<§ ®efangni3 ? greunb, Dftmm meine $urgfrf)aft art I4 unb latj ilm lebtg. $rteparbt $urg' bu fur btcf> unb beinen etgnen £eib. SKtr tun, ma3 unfer3 2(mte3. 15 gort mtt ifjm! 2Jlettf)tr)af, ju ben Sanbteuten Dtein, ba§ ift fd)reienbe ©etoatt. (Srtragen rotV3, 3)aJ3 man ttjn fortfiif)rt, fred), Dor unfern 5lugen ? Sigrift 2Btr ftnb bie ©tdrlern. greunbe, bulbef 3 nid)t 2Bir tjaben etnen Wx&zn an ben anbern. 16 f^riePatrbt SSer toibcrfc^t fid) bem Sefeljl be3 $ogt<§ ? Stfodj bret Sattbleute, f>erbeiettenb SBtr fjetfen end). %$a§> gibt'3 ? <3d)(agt fie §u $oben. ^ilbegarb, 2ft e dj 1 1) 1 1 b unb @ t § B e t Ij fommen juriitf . Sdj fjelfe mir fdjon fetbft @ef)t, gute Seute. fD^eint tfjr, menu id) bie ®raft ge6raud)en taollte, 3d) miirbe mid) oor tfjren ©ptefcen furdjten ? x * 276 NEW GERMAN COURSE SReldjtljal, ju ftrtef^arbt SSag^, tfyn au£ unfrer SOfttte toegjufiiCjren ! SBaltfjer prft unb Stauffarfjer @elaffen ! ffiufjtg ! gfrteparbt, jrfjreit 5(ufruE)r unb (Smporung ! 2ftan prt ^agbtjorner. SBei&er $)a fommt ber Sanbbogt. ^ricParbt, erfjebt bie ©timme Dfteuteret ! (Smporung ! ©tauffadjer (ScrjreF, bi§ bu berfteft, <5crjurfe ! 9Joffefotamt unb 9Jleld)tl)at SEBiUft bu fcfjtoetgen ? ftfriefjljarbt, ruft nod) tauter Qvl |nlf , §u |nlf ben SDtenern be3 ©efefce3 ! SBaftfjer prft 2)a ift ber SBogt. 2Bef) un§, tt)aarra§, 23ert a unb Hubert $ treten em. JKuboff ber §atta§ spiafc, ^la§ bem Sanbtiogt ! (Seller £reibt fie au^einanber. 9Sa3 lauft ba§> SBolf gufammen ? 23er ruft £tlfe ? Stttgemeine ©titte. 2Ber toar'3 ? 3d) mill e3 totffen ; &u ftnc^arbt, £)u tritt t)or. 2Ber btft bu, unb tva$ pftft bu biefen SKatm? READING AND CONVERSATION 277 $rieparbt ©eftrenger §err, id) bin bein SBaffenfnecijt Unb moipeftellter SSa^ter bet bem §ut. 2)iefen StD?amt ergriff id) iiber frifcfjer £at, 2Bie er bem Qui ben (£t)rengru§ berfagte. SBerfjaften raoHt' tc£) if)n, rate bu befafylft, Unb mit @emalt mill iljn ba^ S5olf entreiften. ($e$(er, nad) eine 5paufe SBeradjteft bu f o betnen ®aifer, Sett, Unb midj, ber f)ier an feiner OBtatt gebietet? $er§eif)t mtr, Ueber §err. %u$ Unbebad)t, %l\fyt au3 $erad)tung enrer tft 7 3 gefcrjefyn* (SJc^ier, nadj einigem ©ttttfdjtoetgen £)u bift em SD^eifter auf ber fcnbruft, XeE ; 9ftan f agt, bu ndjmft e£ auf l8 mtt jebem ©crjii|en ? 2Baltt)er Sett Unb ba$ muft toatyr fetn, §err ; 'nen 5tyfet fdjiefjt £)er $ater bir bom $aum auf rjunbert ©cfyrttte. (Scaler 3ft ba3 bein ®nabe,£etl? Sett 3a, tteber §err. ®e$er §aft bu ber SHnber mefjr ? Sett Qroet Slnaben, £err. ©efcler Unb metd)er iff 3, ben bu am meiften liebft? 2/8 NEW GERMAN COURSE £err, beibe finb fie mir gletd) liebe $inber. ©efeler yixm, Sell, toeit bu ben 2fyfel triffft bom SBaume 2Iuf fjunbert ©dfyrttte, fo roirft bu beine ®unft $or mtr betoaljren miiffen. Sftrnm bie 5Irmbruft, — $)u fjaft fie gleid) ^ur $cmb, — unb mad} 7 bid) fertig, (£inen Vtyfel tjon be£ ®naben $opf gu fdjtejsen. Sttte geben «3eid)en be§ ©tfjredenS. sea §err, toeId)e3 llngeljeure finnet Ujr Sflir an ? ^ 3d) foil 00m §aupte meine£ ®inbe3 — (Better $)u ttrirft ben 5fyfel frf)ief$en toon bem ®opf 2)e3 ®naben ; id) begeljr^ unb hull's. 3^foH Sttit metner 2Irmbruft auf ba$ liebe ^au^t 2)e£ etgnen ®inbe£ §te(en ? (Sfyer fterb' icf). (Seller 2)u fdjte^eft, ober fttrbft mit beinem Sfrtaben. £efl 3d) foil ber Sftorber toerben meine£ $inb£ ? §err, t^r tjabt feme SHnber, toiffet ntdjt, 2Ba3 fid) betoegt in eine3 35ater^ §er^en. 8d^er§t nic6)t, §err, mit biefen armen Seuten. 3I)r fef)t fie bleid) unb §itternb ftelm; fo raenig (Sinb fie tur§toeil3 geraoljnt au3 eurem 9ftunbe. READING AND CONVERSATION 279 ®ef?ler 2Ber fagt eud), baJ3 id) fdjerge ? §ter tft ber SIpfeL Sftan madje ^Return ; er nef)tne feme SSeite. 3e§t, ®cf)iil3e, trtff unb fet)'£e nid)t ba3 3tel ©tauffadjer |>err £anbuogt, ritfjrt end) ntdjt be<3 $inbe£ Urtfdjulb ? Jftoffefatamt £) benfet, ba$ em ©ott im §tmme( tft, 2)em tfyr miijst 9iebe ftetjtt fur eure £aten. ®C^(cr r jeigt auf ben ftnaben 90?an binb 1 ifjn an bte Stnbe bort. SBaftljet Sell 9fttd) birtben ? 9?em, id6> tutll rttc£)t gebunben fein. 3d) totH ©till fjalten, lute em £amm, unb and) ntdjt atmen. 9hibotf ber |)arra§ firlJTt ben £naben an ben 23cmm. 9htbolf ber $arra3 3)te 5lugen nur lag btr uerbmben, Sfrtabe. SBaWjer Sell SSarunt bte 5lugen ? benfet tf)r, id) fiirdjte 2)en pet( uon $ater3 §anb ? £efl, jum. Sanbbogt (Srlaffet nttr bm (Stfjufj. |ner tft mem §er$. ©r reifct bte 23ruft auf. Sftuft enre SReiftgen unb ftofjt mid) nteber. ®ej?Ier 3d) tutE bein £eben ntdjt, idj nnK ben <3djuf$. £eff ftefyt in fur^tertidjem jtampf, mit ben -Spanben jutfenb unb bte rottenben Stugen balb auf ben Sanbbogt, balb $um £nmmel geridjtet. ^totjtid) greift er in fetnen £od)er, ntntmt etnen jfaeiten ^)feit b,erau§ unb ftecft ib,n in feinen ©otter. £>er Sanbbogt benterlte atte biefe 23e; roegungen. 280 NEW GERMAN COURSE 2®altljer £ett, untcv ber Shtbe 3Sater f fdjiefj' bit. 3d) furdjt' mid) nid)t. £efl (£§ muf}. (Sr rafft fid) jufammen ltnb legt an. JKubeus ber bte ganje geit iiber in ber Ijeftigften ©bcmnung geftanben unb mit @ett>alt an fid) gefyaften, tritt Ijerbor §err £anbt)ogt, meiter raerbet tfyr'S rttdjt trei6en ; Sf)r roerbet n i cl) t. (53 mar nur eine ^ritfung. 31)r fdjroeigt, 6i3 man eudj aufruft. dub ens 3d) mill reben. 3d) barf 3. S)e3 ®onig3 (£t)re ift mir l)eilig; $)odj folc£)es3 Diegiment mufj $ a 6 ermerben. 2)a3 ift be3 ®onig3 SBWe ntdjt, id) barf 8 2kl)aupten. ©oldje ©raufamfett berbient 90?ein $olf ntdjt ; ba^u t)a6t iljr feine $ollmad)t. GJefeJer §a, trjr errutjnt end) ! Jftubens 3d) §ab r frill gefdjmiegen Qu alien fc^meren £aten, bie id) fat) ; Sftetn ferjenb 21uge t)ab ? tcf) gugefcrjloffen ; SD^ein itberjdjroellenb nnb emporte3 §er^ Igab' id) tjinabgebrttdt in meinen $ufen ; 2)od) langer fdjroeigen mar' $errat gugleidj $tn meinem SSaterlanb unb an bent ®aifer. icr ^erroegner, btefe ©pradje beinem §errn ? READING AND CONVERSATION 28 1 Rubens 2)er ®aifer tft litem «£>err, nidjt tf)r. — gret bin itf) 2Sie if)r geboren, ititb id) meffe mid) Wit eud) in jeber ritterlidjett SDigenb. 3d) f)ab' em ©djroert, Unb loer mir nal)t — ©taitffadjer, ruft Ser Stpfel tft gefatlen. ^nbem fid) atte nad) biefer ©ette getnenbet unb 35erta ^nrijdjen ;ftubeu$ unb ben Sanboogt fid) getrjorfen, 6at £ett ben ^feU abgebrMt. ^ijffefmamt £)er $nabe lebt. SBtelc ©ttmmctt £)er 2fyfe( ift getroffen. SSalt&et ftiirft fdjroanft unb brofit ju finfen, 23erta ^att il)tt. ($e§ler f erftauut @r t)at gefc^offen ? 3Bte? 2)er$afenbe! SSerta £)er Sfrtabe lebt. ^ommt -m euc^, guter better. 233oIt^er £etf, fommt mtt bent %p\d gefprungen $ater fjter tft ber 5tpfel.* XeH f Ijijre. 2Ba3 befell ify, £err ? 2)uftecfteft $lo§ eirten gmeiten $fetl gu btr. — Sa, ja, 3d) fat) eg mofjl. 2Sa3 meinteft bu bamtt ? * The boy with the apple on his head may step behind a screen just before Tell shoots. Then he may pick up another apple with an arrow stuck through it, that has been placed on the floor near him. This he brings to Tell. 282 NEW GERMAN COURSE Sell, berlegen ^)err f ba$ ift ctlfo braucpd) bet ben ©cfjiitjen. ®efeler 9?ein f %di, bie Hnttoort lafc' id) bir nid)t gelten ; 2I (S3 totrb toa3 2lnber£ 22 tt>of)l bebeutet fyaben. ©ag' mtr bte 2Saf)r()ett frtftf) unb fro()(id), %ett ; 2Ba3 e^ aud) fet, bent Seben fid)r 7 id) bir. 2Bo§u ber groeite ^JSfetl ? Sell 2M)(an ! o §err, 3Sei( tfyr mid) meineg £eben3 fyaht geftcrjert, ©o tt)tH id) end) bie SBaljrljett fagen. ©r §ief)t ben Spfeit au§ bem ©otter unb fteljt ben Sanbbogt mtt einem furdjtbaren 23Ucf an. Wit biefem §raeiten S|3fetl burcfjfdjofe id) — en d), SBemt id) metn liebeg $mb getroffen fjcttte, Unb eurer f raarjrlid), f)dtt 7 id) trirfjt gefet)(t. 2Bof)t, Sell. 2)eS SebenS f)ab 7 id) bid) gefidjert; 3d) gab metn ^Ritterroort, ba$ mitt id) fyalten. $)odj met! id) beinen bofen ©inn erfannt, Witt id) btcfj fufjren (affen 23 unb Oerroarjren, 2So roeber SOconb nod) Sonne bid) befd)eint, 3)amit id) ftdjer fet oor beinen ^Sfetten. ©rgreift ifjn, ^rtectjte. SBinbet tf)tt. £ea »irb ge&unben. <3tauffadjer O nun ift atteS, alle3 f)in. 2 4 SDftt euc^ (Sinb rair gefeffelt aEe unb gebunben. Scut^otb, nafjert fid) %ttt, eg erbarntt mid) 2 * ; bod) id) muf$ get)ord)en. READING AND CONVERSATION 283 £ebt toofji ! 2$altl)er £efl fid) mit fjeftigent Sdjmerj an ifjn fdjmiegenb D better ! SBatcr ! fieber SSater ! Sett f ^ebt bie Slxme 511m £immet 3)ort broben ift bettt better. 3>en ruf an. Stauffadjer XeH, jag' id) eurem SSetbe nidjts Hon end) ? fjebt ben £naben mit gnbtunfl an feine SBruft 2)er $ncuV ift wrt)erte|t; mtr rotrb ©ott fjelfett. tfteifst fid) fdjnetf loss unb folgt ben 'Saffenfnedjten. Dritt e Scene From Act IV, Scene 3 Strmgarb (eine arme #xau) nnb lelt (oerftedt) marten auf @ef?ter. ©eftler unb 9?ubolf ber £mrra§ tretert em im ©ejpradj ®e^ler 3d) f)a6 ? ben «5nt nttfjt aufgefterft gn 9'tftorf £e3 Sdjerge3 tnegen, ober nm bte |)er§en 2>e3 $o(f£ §u pritfen ; bteje fenn' id) langft. Ohtbolf ber £arra3 £>a3 QMf Ijat aber bod) gettiffe D^ec^te. ©efjler §)te ab^moagen, ift je|t feme 3 e ^* <2ie tooCien corixber. fetgarb toirft fid) Dor bem Sanbbogt nieber. 9(rmgarb 95armf)ergtgfett! §err Sanboogt ©nabe! ©nabe! 284 NEW GERMAN COURSE ®efeter 2£a3 brtngt i6)r end) auf off iter ©trafte mtr Sit 2Beg ? Quritcf ! 2trmgarb SD^etn 9Jtatttt Hegt im ©efangnte ; SDte armen SBaifen ftfjreht tract) S3rot. .Spabt DJattetb, ©eftrcnger « 292 NEW GERMAN COURSE Herr P. Das ist ziemlich alles, was wir in Hamburg gesehen haben, doch war mir ein Spaziergang, den wir am zweiten Tage machten, sehr interessant. In einem fremden Lande ist es im- mer lehrreich, durch die Straiten zu gehen und die verschiedenen Sitten und Trachten zu beobachten. Herr M. Fanden Sie es leicht, mit den Deutschen zu ver- kehren ? Herr P. Es wurde uns nicht schwer, denn wir hatten uns in der Konversation zu Hause schon geiibt. Auf diesem Spazier- gang sprachen wir mit einigen Leuten, die wir trafen, nur urn die Aussprache zu horen. Man sagt, daft jeder Ort in Deutsch- land seinen Dialekt habe, aber wahrend dieser Reise fand icfr keinen grofien Untersehied. Herr M. Unter gebildeten Leuten ist die Aussprache iiberall ziemlich gleich, nur in den niederen Klassen findet man Dialekte, in der Tat oft unverstandliche Dialekte, plattdeutsch zum Bei- spiel. Herr P. Ja, ich denke, da$ einer, mit clem ich redete, platt- deutsch sprach, denn ich konnte ihn gar nicht verstehen. Herr M. Das mag wohl der Fall gevvesen sein, es war viel- leicht ein mecklenburger Bauer, der die Stadt besuchte. Nun wohin reisten Sie von Hamburg ? Herr P. Nach Berlin. Wir fuhren mit der Bahn in sieben Stunden hin. Herr M. Wie weit ist Berlin von Hamburg ? Herr P. 286 Kilometer oder 179 englische Meilen. Herr M. Sie sind nicht sehr schnell gefahren, nur etwas liber 25 englische Meilen die Stunde. Herr P. Wir heilten sehr oft an, denn es war ein ,,Bummel- zug,"7 wir waren aber zufrieden ; denn beim Jangsamen Fahren kann man Land und Leute besser betrachten. Wir unterhielten uns audi mit den andern Reisenden. Die Wagen sind ganz anders gebaut als bei uns. In jedem Abteil sind zwei Banke einander gegeniiber wie in einem Omnibus. In Berlin trafen wir gute Freunde, welche alles Mogliche taten, um unseren Aufent- READING AND CONVERSATION 293 halt in der deutschen Hauptstadt interessant und lehrreich zu machen. Sie besorgten uns eine Pension bei einer sehr liebens- wiirdigen Familie in der Mittelstrafie, wo nur deutsch gesprochen wurde. Herr M. Wie lange blieben Sie in Berlin ? Herr P. Gerade eine Woche. Wahrend dieser Zeit gingen wir alle Tage spazieren oder fuhren in einer Droschke durch die Stadt. Herr M. Sie hatten nicht sehr weit von ihrer Pension zu gehen, um alle Sehenswiirdigkeiten zu finden. Herr P. Das ist wahr, denn die interessantesten Gebaude, Museen, und Monumente sind alle beisammen in der beriihmten Strasse, welche „Unter den Linden" heifit. Da besuchten wir die Universitats-Gebaude, das Opernhaus, die konigliche Biblio- thek, das neue Museum, die National Gallerie, die Akademie der schonen Kiinste, das Zeughaus und die beiden koniglichen Pa- laste. In dem inneren Stadtteil befmden sich prachtvolle Wohn- hauser. Herr M. Waren Sie im Theater ? Herr P. Ja, im „ Deutschen-Theater" in der Schumann StraBe, wo wir Theresina GeBner in „ Hero und Leander " sahen. Herr M. Sind Sie auch im Koniglichen Opernhaus gewesen ? Herr P. Ja, natiirlich. Wir haben dort „Tannhauser" von Wagner gehort. Was mir hier am meisten auffiel, war die gro.Se Biihne, die fur mehrere hundert Personen Spielraum gewahrt. Es war die groBartigste Musik, die ich je gehort habe. • Herr M. Haben Sie den Kaiser gesehen ? Herr P. Ja, wir hatten das Gliick, gerade vor dem Schlofi zu stehen, als er herausgeritten kam, um seinen gewohnlichen Nachmittagsspazierritt zu machen. Herr M. Ritt er ganz allein ? Herr P. Nein, er war von zwei Adjutanten begleitet, mit denen er sich lebhaf t unterhielt ; ein Mann seiner Leibgarde folgte ihm mit der Konigs-Standarte ; so ritt er, von einer gro- Ben Menschenmenge begrii^t, nach dem Tiergarten. 294 NEW GERMAN COURSE Herr M. Sie haben sich also in Berlin gut unterhalten. Herr P. Oh ja, nur muBten wir leider viel zu friih fort, denn unsere Zeit war sehr beschrankt ; ich habe nur noch den kleinen Ausflug zu erwahnen, den wir nach Potsdam, der Sommerresi- denz der preulMschen Konige, machten. Wir besuchten hier das SchloB „Sans Solicit wo Friedrich der GroBe lebte und starb, und den schonen Park mit der herrlichen Terrasse. Herr M. Welchen Ort besuchten Sie danach? Herr P. Von Berlin gingen wir direkt nach Leipzig, denn einer unserer Gesellschaft wollte in das dortige Konservatorium eintreten. Herr M. Er tat wohl daran, denn der beste Musik-Unterricht wird dort erteilt. Haben Sie einem Konzert in Leipzig beige- wohnt ? Herr P. Ja, wir haben ein wunderschones Konzert im Ge- wandhaus gehort. Herr M. Was haben Sie sonst Interessantes in Leipzig ge- funden ? Herr P. Das Interessanteste fur mich war die Freundlichkeit der Leute. Wir fanden sie sehr liebenswiirdig und entgegen- kommend. Herr M. Dafiir sind die Sachsen wohlbekannt. Herr P. In jedem Lande besuche ich gerne die Schulen, und in Leipzig wurde mir eine gute Gelegenheit hierzu geboten. Ein Lehrer nahm einen Tag Urlaub und fiihrte uns durch mehrere offentliche Schulen, wo wir sehr freundlich empfangen wurden und die Unterrichtsmethoden mit groBem Interesse be- obachteten. Herr M. Es freut mich, da.6 Sie ein so freundliches Wort iiber Leipzig zu sagen haben, denn ich wohnte selbst wahrend einiger Zeit dort und machte dieselbe Erfahrung in Betreff der Gutmutigkeit des Volkes wie Sie. Nun, wo war Ihr nachster Aufenthalt ? Herr P. Von Leipzig fuhren wir iiber Frankfurt am Main nach Mainz, da wir die Rheinreise machen wollten. In Frank- READING AND CONVERSATION 295 furt stiegen wir am Abend ab und blieben iiber Nacht, um das beriihmte Goethe-Haus zu besuchen. Die Reliquien aus dem Leben dieses grofien Dichters interessierten uns sehr, wie iiber- haupt die ganze Stadt Frankfurt. Wir waren gerne langer dort geblieben, aber wir muBten friih am andern Morgen fort. In Mainz nahmen wir gleich das Morgenboot nach Koln. Herr M. Ich bin sehr neugierig, Ihre Bemerkungen iiber den Rheinstrom zu horen. Herr P. Wir haben in kurzer Zeit so viel gesehen, dafi die Beschreibung sehr mangelhaft sein mu&. Unsere Erwartungen waren hoch gespannt, da wir so viel iiber die Schonheiten des Rheines, seine romantische Umgebung mit den malerischen Dorfern und den alten Burgen gehbrt hatten, und wir wurden nicht enttauscht, obgleich die Berge nicht so hoch sind, als wir erwartet hatten. Herr M. Sie sahen auch viele Weinberge, nicht wahr ? Herr P. Ja, die Gegend ist beriihmt wegen des Weines, und viele Weinberge sind so steil, dafS die Winzer fast senkrecht hinaufklettern miissen. Als wir an Bingen vorbeifuhren, dach- ten wir an das wohlbekannte Gedicht "Bingen on the Rhine" von Frau Norton, welches mit den Worten anfangt : " A soldier of the legion lay dying in Algiers." Auf einem hohen Felsen, Bingen gegeniiber, steht das Natio- nal-Denkmal, das Germania auf ihrer „ Wacht am Rhein " dar- stellt, und etwas weiter stromabwarts sahen wir den Mauseturm, bekannt durch das Gedicht von Southey; ''Bishop Hatto and the rats." Herr M. Diese Geschichte ist aber nicht wahr, denn der Turm wurde erst hundert Jahre nach dem Tode des Bischofs Hatto gebaut. Herr P. Zunachst kamen wir an die diistere, steile Felsen- wand, auf der die sagenhafte ,, Lorelei " sitzt und die Schiffer durch ihre Schonheit und ihren Gesang ins Verderben lockt. Dieser Felsen soil ein Echo fiinfzehnmal wiedergeben. Gegen- iiber der Universitats-Stadt Bonn liegt der beriihmte Drachen- 296 NEW GERMAN COURSE fels oder das Siebengebirge, woriiber Byron so schon geschrieben hat.* Wir kamen am Abend in Kbln an, und besuchten dort den beriihmten Dom ; und damit endete unsere Tour durch Deutsch- land, denn wir muiken am andern Morgen den Zug nach Rot- terdam nehmen. Von dort fuhren wir mit dem Dampfschiff ,, Staatendam " nach London, wo wir uns eine Woche aufhielten, und dann kehrten wir iiber Liverpool nach unserer Heimat zuriick. Herr M. Sie haben gut daran getan, diese Reise zu machen, denn die beste Art und Weise seine Ausbildung zu erganzen. ist fremde Lander zu besuchen, besonders wenn man fahig ist, die Sprache der Lander, in die man kommt, zu sprechen. E F B 1 You are heartily welcome. 2 Some time ago. 3 How were you pleased there ? 4 A mu- tual service. s What did the sea voyage cost you ? 6 Otherwise. 7 A slow train that stops at all stations. 58. Auf der Wohiiung-ssuche. Fremder (ins Haus eintretend). Entschuldigen Sie, haben Sie Zimmer zu vermieten ? Hausfrau. Jawohl, treten Sie gefalligst naher. 1 Was fur ein Zimmer wiinschen Sie ? Fremder. Ich wiinsche ein mobliertes Zimmer nebst Kammer. Hausfrau. Wir haben ein hiibsches Zimmer mit Kammer im zweiten Stock. Wollen Sie es sich ansehen ? Fremder. Ja, wenn es Ihnen angenehm ist. Hausfrau. Bitte sich gefalligst hinauf zu bemiihen 2 ; ich werde es Ihnen zeigen. Fremder. Das Zimmer gefallt mir. Was kostet es ? Hausfr-au. Ich lasse es Ihnen fiir fiinfzig Mark den Monat. Fremder. Ich finde den Preis nicht zu hoch ; ich werde das Zimmer mieten. Man bezahlt den Betrag voraus, nicht wahr ? * See Byron's vivid description of the Rhine scenery in Canto III of " Childe Harold," commencing : " The castled crag of Drachenfels Frowns o'er the wide and winding Rhine, Whose breast of waters broadly swells Between the banks which bear the vine." READING AND CONVERSATION 297 Hausfrau. J a, es ist hier so gebrauchlich. Fremder. Gut, hier sind fiinfzig Mark. Hausfrau. Danke verbindlichst. Fremder. Mein Gepack ist auf dem Bahnhofe ; ich werde es gleich hoi en lassen. 3 Hausfrau. Sehr wohl ; ich werde das Zimmer sogleich in Ordnung bringen. Fremder. Guten Morgen ; ich werde in einer Stunde zuriick sein. Hausfrau. Guten Morgen. 1 please walk in. 2 please step upstairs. 3 see § 150. 59. Im Gasthause. Fremder (ins Gasthaus eintretend und Platz an einem Tische nehmend). Kellner ! Kellner. Bitte sehr, womit kann ich dienen ? * Fremder. Ich bitte um die Speisekarte. Kellner (bringt dieselbe). Hier, mein Herr ! Was belieben Sie zu bestellen ? 2 Fremder. Bringen Sie mir zunachst3 eine Gemiise-Suppe. Kellner (die Suppe bringend). Was ist auBerdem gefallig ?* Fremder. Ich bitte um eine Portion Kalbsbraten mit griinem Salat. Kellner. Bedauere sehr, mit Kalbsbraten kann ich leider nicht mehr auf warten.s Fremder. Dann bitte ich um ein Beefsteak mit Kartoffel salat. Kellner (das Verlangte bringend). Befehlen Sie sonst noch etwas, 6 mein Herr ? Fremdei'. Ja, bringen Sie mir gefalligst einen Schokoladen- Pudding. — (Nach dem Essen.) Kellner, ich wunsche zu zahlen. Wieviel macht das zusammen ? Kellner (addierend). Zwei Mark fiinfundsiebzig, mein Herr. Fremder (gibt ihm das Geld und dazu ein Trinkgeld). 7 Kellner. Danke verbindlichst. 8 298 NEW GERMAN COURSE Fremder. Adieu ! Kellner. Empfehle mich bestens ! 9 1 How can I serve you ? 2 what are you pleased to order ? 3 first of all. * what more will you have ? 5 1 cannot serve you with roast veal. 6 do you order anything more ? 7 " drink money," i. e., a " tip." 8 Thank you very much, 9 your most obedient (lit. I com- mend myself to you). 60. Im Hutgeschafte. Herr N. (eintretend). Guten Tag ! Commis. Guten Tag, mein Herr. Womit kann ich Ihnen dienen ? Herr N. Ich mochte einen Hut kaufen. 1 Commis. Was fur einen Hut wiinschen Sie ? Herr N. Ich wiinsche einen Filzhut. Commis (nachdem Herr N. mehrere Hiite aufprobiert hat). Dieser Hut paBt Ihnen vortrefnich. 2 Herr N. J a, er gefallt mir. Was kostet er ? Commis, Er kostet zwolf Mark. Herr N. Bitte, senden Sie ihn nach meiner Wohnung. Hier ist meine Karte. Commis. Jawohl, ich werde es sogleich besorgen. 3 Herr N. Hier sind zwanzig Mark ; konnen Sie mir acht Mark zuriickgeben ? Commis. Gewi^, mein Herr. (Uberreicht ihm das Geld.) Herr N. Danke sehr. Commis. Adieu, mein Herr ! Besuchen Sie uns wieder ! 4 'See §149, 3. 2 fits you very well. 3 1 will attend to it immediately. * call again. 61. Bei dem Schneider. Kunde (eintretend). Guten Tag ! Schneider. Guten Tag, mein Herr ! Womit kann ich Ihnen dienen ? Kunde. Ich mochte mir einen Anzug machen lassen. * Schneider. Ich stehe zu Ihren Diensten. 1 Was fur einen Anzug wiinschen Sie ? Kunde. Ich wiinsche einen Reiseanzug, moglichst warm, fur den Winter READING AND CONVERSATION 299 Schneider. Welche Farbe ziehen Sie vor ? 2 Kande. Ich ziehe etwas dunkles vor. Bitte mir mehrere Muster zur Auswahl vorzulegen. 3 Schneider. GewiB, mit Vergniigen. Hier sind verschiedene dunkle Stoffe. Dieser dunkelblaue diirfte Ihnen vielleicht kon- venieren ; + er ist sehr gut und haltbar. Kunde. Der St off gefallt mir. Ich wiinsche Rock, Hose und Weste aus ein und demselben Stiicke ; — was wird von die- sem Stoffe der fertige Anzug s kosten ? Schneider. Ich kann Ihnen denselben fur 150 Mark herstellen. Kunde. Fur diesen Preis konnen Sie ohne Zweifel ein sehr gutes Futter, sowie gute Knopfe und Seide zu der Arbeit ver- wenden ? Schneider. Seien Sie aufter Sorge, mein Herr ; ich suche eine Ehre darin, nur das beste Material zu verarbeiten. Bis wann brauchen Sie den Anzug ? Kunde. Ich hatte ihn sehr gern 6 bis heute liber acht Tage. Schiieider. Gut, ich werde es moglich zu machen suchen, ihn bis dahin fertig zu stellen. ? Kunde. Wann darf ich zum Anprobieren kommen ? Schneider. Wenn es Ihnen angenehm ist, nachsten Sonn- abend Nachmittag. Kunde. Schon ; wollen Sie diese fiinfzig Mark einstweilen als Abschlagszahlung annehmen. Adieu ! Schneider. Danke verbindlichst, mein Herr. Empf ehle mich bestens. 8 1 1 am at your service. 2 vorziehen, to prefer. 3 show me samples to choose from. 4- may perhaps please you. s the complete suit. 6 1 should like to have it. 7 I will try to have it by that time. 8 I bespeak your favor. 62. In cler Buchhandlung-. Kunde (eintretend). Guten Morgen, Herr Fischer ! Buchhdndler. Guten Morgen, Herr Meyer ! Was verschaff t mir die Ehre Ihres Besuches ? 1 Kunde. Ich mochte 3 einige Biicher kauf en. 300 NEW GERMAN COURSE Buchhandler. Das ist sehr schon von Ihnen. 3 In welchem Genre 4 kann ich Ihnen dienen ? Kunde. Ich wiinsche zunachst den neuesten Supplementband zu Meyers Konversations-Lexikon. Buchhandler. Den habe ich leider nicht vorratig ; ich werde jedoch die Bestellung noch heute an meinen Kommissionar ab- gehen lassen,s sodafi der Band mit der nachsten Sendung hier eintrifft. Kunde. Schon ! Sodann brauche ich einige kleinere Schrif- ten, welche ich hier aufgeschrieben habe, von denen ich aber leider den Verleger nicht kenne. Buchhandler. Nun, das macht nichts ; wenn Sie mir den Namen des Autors angeben konnen, 6 so kann ich den Verleger leicht im Katalog auffinden. Kunde. Sie finden auf diesem Zettel Autor und alles ubrige genau angegeben. Tragen Sie jedoch, bitte, Sorge,? dafi ich von allem die neueste Auflage erhalte. Buchhandler. GewiB, das soil geschehen. Kunde. Ich werde nachste Woche die Sachen abholen las- sen. 8 Adieu ! Buchhandler. Sehr wohl, Herr Meyer. Empfehle mich Ihnen bestens. 1 the honor of your visit. 2 See § 149, 3. 3 That is very kind of you. 4 in what manner, s See § 150. 6 if you can give me the name of the author. ? please take pains. 8 See § 150. 63. Eine Einladung. Herr Braun (klopft an die Tur). Herr Miiller (im Zimmer.) Herein ! Herr B. (eintretend.) Guten Tag, Herr Miiller ! Herr M. Guten Tag, Herr Braun ! Wie geht's Ihnen ? Herr B. Ich danke, mir geht's gut, und Ihnen ? Herr M. Ich befinde mich leider nicht sehr wohl. 1 Herr B. Das tut mir sehr leid ! 2 Was fehlt Ihnen ? Herr M. Ich habe heute heftiges Kopfweh, und gestern hatte ich Fieber. READING AND CONVERSATION 301 Herr B. Ich wiirde an Ihrer Stelle einige Tage das Zimmer hiiten.3 Herr M. Ja, ich werde heute zu Hause bleiben und zum Arzt schicken. Herr B. Daran thun Sie wohl, denn es ist sehr stiirmisch und naBkalt drauBen. Herr M. Wollen Sie nicht Ihren Uberrock ablegen und ein wenig Platz nehmen ? Herr B. Danke sehr, ich habe keine Zeit. Ich kam nur im Vorbeigehen,* urn Sie fur morgen zu einem gemiitlichen Gesell- schaftsabend, den ich in meinem Hause arrangiere, einzuladen. Herr M. Sehr schmeichelhaft ! Wenn sich mein kleines Ubel bis dahin gelegt hat,* werde ich nicht ermangeln, Ihrer freund- lichen Einladung mit Vergniigen Folge zu leisten. 6 Herr B. Danke sehr. Also auf Wiedersehen ! Herr M. Auf Wiedersehen ! * 1 am not very well. 2 1 am sorry. 3 remain at home. 4. in passing, s if I am well by that time. 6 to comply with. 64. Ein Freimdschaftsdienst. Herr Herrmann. Gehen Sie heute in die Stadt, Herr Rein- haus ? Herr Reinhaus. Ja, ich habe versprochen, mich um zwolf Uhr bei meinem Bruder einzufinden. 1 Fahren sie mit der Bahn ? 2 Ja, mit dem Zehn-Uhr-Zuge. Darf ich Sie mit einem kleinen Auftrage belasti- Bitte, ich stehe zu Ihrer Verfiigung. 4 Ich wiirde Sie ersuchen diesen Brief Maximilian- straBe 20 abzugeben. Herr R. GewiB, das werde ich gern tun. Auf Wiedersehen ! Herr H. Auf Wiedersehen ! 1 1 have promised to be at my brother's at noon. 2 by railroad. 3 May I trouble you with an errand ? 4 1 am at your service. Herr H Herr R. Herr H gen ? 3 Herr R. Herr H 302 NEW GERMAN COURSE 65. In einem Geschaftsbureau. t Reisender (ins Bureau eintretend). Guten Morgen ! 1st Herr Schmidt zugegen ? l Geschdftsfuhrer. Nein ; Herr Schmidt ist verreist. 2 Reisender. Wissen Sie vielleicht, wann er zuruckkommt ? Geschdftsfuhrer. Leider kann ich Ihnen den Tag seiner Riickkunft nicht bestimmt angeben. Reisender. Erwarten Sie ihn diese Woche ? Geschdftsfuhrer. Nein, er kommt nicht vor nachster Woche Reisender. Wollen Sie ihm gefalligst 3 diese Karte geben, wenn er kommt ? Geschdftsfuhrer. GewiB ! Reisender. Ich danke Ihnen. Adieu ! Geschdftsfuhrer. Adieu ! 1 present (here). 2 out of town. 3 if you please. 66. Auf dem Postamt. Fremder. Wie hoch ist das Porto nach Amerika ? Beamtcr. Zwanzig Pfennig fur je 15 Gramm. Fremder. Und wie hoch im Inlande ? Beamier. Zehn Pfennig. Fremder. Bitte, geben Sie mir drei Postmarken zu 20 Pfennig und fiinf zu zehn Pfennig. Beamier (die Marken gebend). Das macht zusammen eine Mark zehn Pfennig (M. 1.10). Fremder. Wann schlieBt die Brief einnahme fiir. New York ? Beamier. Um zehn Uhr abends. Fremder. Ich danke sehr. 67. Auf dem Bahnhofe. Reisender (am Billettschalter). Wann geht der nachste Zug nach Berlin ab ? Beamier. Um zehn Uhr zwanzig. Reisender. Bitte, geben Sie mir ejn Billett zweiter Klasse, 1 Wie viel kostet es ? READING AND CONVERSATION 303 Beamier. Fiinfundachtzig Mark zwanzig Pfennig. Reisender. Wieviel Freigepack darf man mitnehmen ? Beamter. Fiinfundzwanzig Kilo. 2 Der Portier (raft in den Wartesaal). Einsteigen in der Richtung nach Berlin ! Der Reisende wahlt seinen Bahnwagen und steigt ein. Wenn er rauchen will, so wahlt er ein ,,Rauchcoupe"; wenn er aber nicht rauchen will, nimmt er ein Coupe mit der Aufschrift „Fiir Nichtraucher." Schafflier (wahrend der Reise in das Coupe schauend). Ihre Fahrkar- ten, meine H err en ! Der Reisende zeigt dem Schaffner seine Fahrkarte. Sdiaffner (in Berlin angekommen). Berlin ! Alles aussteigen ! Der Reisende steigt aus, nimmt eine Droschke und fahrt mit seinem Gepack" nach seinem Hotel. 3 1 The second class coaches correspond to our first class ; the " first class " to our Pullman palace cars. The rates are considerably less than with us. 2 25 Kilogramms= 55 lbs. Only a limited amount of luggage is carried free in foreign countries. 5 The rates for hack hire are moderate and are regulated by law, the tariff being posted in every droschke. 68. Geld, Mass unci Gewiclit. Das Dezimalsystem fur Geld, Mass und Gewicht wurde im Jahre 1872 im ganzen deutschen Reiche eingefuhrt. Nach die- sem System : 100 Pfennig == l 1 Mark = 23.85 cents. 100 Centimeter = 1 Meter = [39.37 inches. 100 Centigramm = 1 Gramm =15.4 grains. 100 Centiliter = 1 Liter = 2.1 13 pints. 1 Quadrat-Meter = 1.196 square yard. 100 Quadrat-Meter = 1 Quadrat-Hektometer (1 Hektar). Groiere Entf ernungen werden nach Kilometern (1,000 Meter) gerechnet, und fur groBeres Gewicht wird das Kilogramm (kurz Kilo), 1,000 Gramm, gebraucht ; z. B., 10 Kilo Zucker ; eine Entfernung von 25 Kilometern Das alte deutsche Wort ,,Pfund" (ein halbes Kilo) ist auch gebrauehlich. (Sieh FuBnote, Seite 37) 304 NEW GERMAN COURSE Die deutschen Munzen. An Goldmiinzen gibt es Zwanzig-, Zehn-, und Fiinf-Mark- stiicke. Aus Silber sind 5 Mark-, 2 Mark-, 1 Mark- und 50 Pfennig- Stiicke. Aus Nickel sind 20, 10 und 5 Pfennig-Stiicke, und aus Kupfer 2 Pfennig- und 1 Pfennig-Stiicke. Das Deutsche Thermometer. Man braucht in Deutschland das Thermometer nach Celsius, 2 bei dem der Gefrierpunkt o (Fah. 32) und der Siedepunkt 100 Grad (Fah. 212) ist. 1 The sign of equality is read " ist gleich," pi. " sind gleich." 2 The Celsius thermometer, named from its Swedish inventor, is the same as the centi- grade. It has superseded the " Reaumur " in Germany. 69. Brief wechsel. New York, den I5ten Dezember 1905. Herrn K. F. Koehler, Leipzig. Beiliegend senden wir Ihnen eine Postanweisung iiber 10 Mark, wofiir Sie uns gefalligst mit der Post ein Exemplar von Kohler's deutschem Worterbuch zusenden wollen. Achtungsvoll Maynard, Merrill & Co. Leipzig, den 2 5sten Dezember 1905. Herren Maynard, Merrill & Co. New York. In Beantwortung Ihres gefalligen Schreibens vom 1 5ten dieses Monats teile ich Ihnen ergebenst mit, daB ich Ihnen heute das gewiinschte Worterbuch habe zugehen lassen (118, 5, i). Ergebenst K. F. Koehler. TRANSLATION EXERCISES. These exercises are based, for the most part, on the reading exercises of Part II. The references are to the grammatical sections of Part I. An English word in parenthesis is not to be translated. Two words connected by a hyphen are to be translated as one word ; for example, finger-nail, ^ingentagel. A difficult sentence is sometimes rearranged within brackets in the German order, and constant refer ence should also be made to the sections on construction (Parti, §§ 1 14-118). The pupil is supposed to have mastered the elements of the grammar before mak- ing these translations. Use both forms of personal address (36, 4). e. g., 2>efUmere (beffinteren ©ie). 1. The Hands. (See No. 1, page 218.) Man x has two hands and ten fingers. Is the thumb a finger ? Yes, the thumb is a finger. On the end of each finger 2 is a finger-nail. The middle-finger is between (103) the index-finger and the ring- finger. The right hand is stronger than (80) the left hand, and the right arm is stronger than the left arm. One whose 3 left hand is stronger and more skillful than his (32, ior) right hand is left-handed. What do I hold in my right hand ? You hold (36, 4) a pen in your right hand (32, 10, c.) Which hand is (the) stronger, the right hand or the left hand ? The right hand is usually the stronger.4 Decline the German words 5 £>m9 er an d §Gtlb. 1 ber 3ftenjclj. z 5tm (Srtbe eine3 jeben $tnger§. 3 @iner, bejjen (89). * ftcirfev, or bie ftarteve. 5 X)efltntere (bcfltrtieren ©te) bie beutjd)en Shorter. (The pupil will also write the full declension of these nouns, as also of those given in the exercises following.) 2. The Cards. (See No. 2, page 218.) I have here several cards of different colors. 1 This card is white, this card is blue and this card is green. The white card is a visiting- card. My name is on it. 2 There are (86, 1) no names on the other cards. I hold these cards in my hand (32, 10 c). There are also sev- eral cards in this little box. I lay these cards into the box (103). 305 306 NEW GERMAN COURSE There are now six cards in the box. I take them out of the box and count them : one, two . . . What color is (fjctt) this card ? It is white. Is there a name on it ? 3 Yes, there is a name on it. Are there (86, i) names on the other cards? No, on the other cards there are no names. What is your name ? It is Edwin Jahn. Where do the cards lie [where lie the cards] ? They lie in the box. Where does the box stand ? It stands on the desk. Where do you stand ? I stand on the floor and by the desk. Decline the words 4 ®ctrte and <&tf)atf)tzl. ibon toerjdjtebener garbe. 2 jtel)t barauf. 3 ©tcbt ein 9iame barauf ? 4 S)ef(inicre (beftinicren 6te). (The pupil will also write the declensions in full.) 3. The Apple. (See No. 3, page 219.) The apple is an excellent fruit. Everybody is fond of l apples. They grow in all countries of the temperate zone. A great quantity of -them 2 are sent every year from the United States to 3 foreign coun- tries, especially to England. In which zone do apples grow best ? 4 They grow best in the tem- perate zone. Are you fond of apples ? 5 Yes, I am very fond of them. How many apples have you eaten to-day? I have eaten no applet to-day [I have to-day no apples eaten], but yesterday I ate two or three (123, 5). Whose apple is this ? It is yours (87, 6). Decline the words 2tyfet and Obft. 1 gem, fain, willingly, applies to anything that is done with pleasure, as, gem eff en, gem trtnfen, gern geben, etc. 2 bat)on. 3 nad) (104, 4). *am beften (80). s @fjen ©ie gern Stpfet ? 4. The Pen. (See No. 4, page 219.) The pen is very useful and in the hand of a great man it is " might- ier than the sword." Pens were formerly made of quills, 1 but now-a- days they are made of steel or of gold. I prefer 2 a gold-pen. Have you a gold-pen ? Yes, I have a gold fountain-pen with a diamond-point.3 TRANSLATION EXERCISES 307 Where did you get it ? * My father gave it to me as a Christmas- present.s What kind of a 6 pen is this ? It is (86, 5) a steel-pen. Decline and write the words geber and ©efdjenf. I aus jtieten gemadjt. 2 3§ V-*Y • . . t>or. 3 mit einer 2>iamantenfpi£e. 4 23or;er Ijaben ©ie fie ? (23ofyer Ijaft bu fie ?) 5 al3 ein 2Seit)nad)t§gefd)enr\ 6 23a§ fur eine. 5. The Time-piece. (See No. 6, page 220.) A time-piece tells us the time (shows us the hours). A watch is carried z in the pocket. A wall-clock hangs on the wall. A beauti- ful gold watch costs at-least 300 marks, 3 but a cheaper watch often keeps just as good time.3 Have you a watch with you ? 4 No, but I have one at home.S What did it cost (123, 5) ? It cost 40 marks. Is it of 6 gold or of silver? It is neither 7 of gold nor 7 of silver; it is of brass gold-plated. 8 What time 9 have you ? By my watch IO it is half past five, — a quarter to six, — ten minutes past seven, — three minutes after half past eight (69). What kind of IZ a time-piece is that? It is a wall-clock. What are the principal parts of 12 ^etgett ? Decline the word W)t\ 1 ifftcm tragi. 2 roenigftenS 300 Tlaxt. 3 gei)t oft ebenjo gut. *beiftd). sju|)aufe. 6 bort. 7tDeber — nod). 8 t>on Detgolbetem Sftefjing. 9 2Bie biel Ui)r. I0 9lad) meirter Uh,r. " 2Ba§ fiir eine? I2 2Betd)e3 finb bie ^auptformen bon. 6. The Book. (See No. 7, page 221.) There are many kinds x of books in the world ; some 2 are good and useful, others 2 are bad or useless. Let us (l5°) read only good books. We have no time to read useless books [useless books to read]. In order (129) to learn a foreign language [in order a foreign language to learn] one needs 3 a grammar and a reading-book. What kinds of books 4 do you prefer ? I prefer 5 biographical and historical works. How many books have you ? I have about a hundred books. 308 NEW GERMAN COURSE Name (i57) tome a historical work that you have read. I have read Schiller's " History of the Thirty Years' War." 6 What are the principal parts of nennett ? X (S§ gibt triete Strten. 2 einige — anbere. 3braud)t mart. 42Ba§ ji'tr 23iid)er? 5.3d) jtefye — bor. 6 „@efd)id)te be§ breifngjaljrigen ,f?tiege§." 7. The Garden. (See No. 9, page 222.) We have a beautiful garden. It contains vegetables, flowers, ber- ries, shrubs and fruit-trees. In summer we pick and eat the berries [pick and eat we the berries], but I prefer l the ripe fruit, especially apples and cherries. In autumn the gardener gathers the vegetables 2 and carries them 3 into the cellar. Where is your garden ? It is behind the dwelling-house. Is there a fence around the garden ? Yes, a hedge-fence. How large is the garden ? It is fifty meters 4 long and twenty meters wide. Your garden is larger than mine (87, 9), is it not 5 ? Decline Qfyv ©arten. What are the principal parts of etttljaltett. l 3tylk$t — box. 2 ba§ ©emiije. 3 e§. 4 fiinfgtg 2Jleter. s rtidjt roaljr. 8. The Year. (See No. 10, page 223.) The earth revolves around the sun 1 in 365, days 5 hours, 48 min- utes and 5 1 seconds. It is wonderful that all (the) years have exactly the same length. 2 The ships and the railroad-trains are not so regu- lar. The year is divided 3 into 52 weeks, each week into seven days, each day into 24 hours, each hour into 60 minutes and each minute into 60 seconds. How many months has the year ? The year has twelve months. Which month is the most beautiful ? In my opinion 4 June is the most beautiful. Where will you spend the next vacation ? 5 I intend to spend it (128, 2) in the Adirondacks. Why will you go-there? 6 I shall go-there because I enjoy the mountain-air and admire the landscapes [the mountain-air enjoy and the landscapes admire]. Decline the word Sftortat. What are the principal parts of etrttetfett ? 1 beroegt fid) itm bte Sonne. z genau btefetbe ^eitbauer Ijaben. 3 eingeteilt (at end of sen- tence). 4?ftad) metner SJietnung. s bte nadjfien getten (pi.)- 6 bortJ)tn geljen. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 309 9. Geography. (See No. 11, page 223.) Geography is very interesting. Every-one should study it before he goes travelling. 1 Americans travel a great deal 2 in Europe. They visit London, Paris, Berlin, Rome, Vienna and other great cities. One may learn a great deal by travelling. 3 Which foreign cities have you visited ? I have visited only London and Paris. Do you intend to visit other cities ? [Have you the intention other cities to visit ?] Yes, I intend to visit Berlin, Rome and Athens. Why did you not (123, 5) visit Rome when you were last* in Europe ? Because I had neither 5 time nor 5 money for it. 6 Decline the words Stmertfcmer and @tctbt. Conjugate the word gefyert in the present indicative and subjunctive. 7 1 elje er auf bie 3teife gef)t. 2 \djx bid. Hurdj ba% 9Mfen. 4 ba§ Ie|te Wlai. s toeber — nod). 6 bafiir. 7 im ^rafenS be3 3 n ^^ at ^ § un ^ be% J?onjunftib5. 10. The benevolent little Girl. (See No. 14, page 225.) Minna was a very benevolent girl. She loved the birds and fed them when x the ground was covered with snow and they found little to eat 2 [and they little to eat found]. Her parents were much pleased3 and said : You are our dear benevolent Minna. Be always good to the birds 4 and to all other s (93) animals. How did Minna feed the birds ? She scattered little-crumbs on the ground and the birds flew down and picked them up. Were the birds afraid of 6 Minna? Yes, they were afraid of her; for they did not know that she wished 7 to feed them [that she them feed would 7]. Give a synopsis of fltegert in the indicative (itf) fliege, id) flog, etc.) With which auxiliary verb is fliegett conjugated ? I totnn. 2 menig ju efjen. 3 freuten fid) \d)x. 4 gegen bie 2Sogel. 5 cttte anbeven. 6 fid; fitrd)ten toor, to be afraid of. See last stanza of page 241. 7 toottte. 11. The Canary Bird. (See No. 16, page 226.) Little Caroline loved the birds just as much as l Minna (did). She had a canary-bird that she kept 2 in a cage. The bird sang very happily and was not at all afraid of 3 Caroline, but one morning Caro- 3IO NEW GERMAN COURSE line found it dead in the cage. She wept when 4 she saw the dead bird, but her mother went out and bought another and put it into the cage. Caroline would have been very happy (123, 10) when 5 she saw the new bird, but she remembered that she had eaten a little-piece of sugar that her mother had given her for the bird [that she a little- piece of sugar, which her mother to-her for the bird given had, herself eaten had]. This made her very sad. What kind of a bird 6 did Caroline have ? She had a canary-bird. Did she take good care of the bird ? 7 Yes, she took very good care of it. Did the bird die [died the bird] ? Yes, Caroline found it dead in the cage. What (did) the mother do when she saw the dead bird ? She bought another and put it into the cage. Have you a canary-bird ? No, I have no canary-bird. Write a synopsis of fid) erntttem in the indicative and subjunctive. 'ebenfo fefyr tote. 2 in einem fttiftg Ijielt. 3 furd)tete fid) gar nidjt bov. *aU. s al§. 6 tt>a3 fur einen 33oget ? 7 pftegte fie ben SSogel gut ? 12. The Bee and the Dove. (See No. 17, page 227.) A bee fell into the water and would have drowned x if a dove had not thrown 2 a leaf to her [if a dove to-her not a leaf thrown had]. She crawled onto the leaf and flew away, but she did not (118, 5 h) forget the kindness of the dove ; for when a hunter was about to (123, 12) shoot the dove [when a hunter the dove shoot would] the bee came and stung him in the hand. This prevented him from hit- ting the dove.3 Then the dove thanked the bee, but the hunter did not thank her (dat.), he wished 4 to kill her, but she flew far away. Who fell into the water ? A little bee fell into the water. Who threw a leaf into the water ? A dove threw a leaf into the water. Who wished to shoot the dove ? A hunter wished to shoot the dove. Why did he not hit the dove ? Because the bee came and stung him in the hand [and him in the hand stung]. Do you believe this story ? No, I do not believe it. Why do you not believe it ? Because the bee and the dove are not such good friends [not such good friends are]. TRANSLATION EXERCISES 311 In which case is SBaffer in the sentence (Sine £Hette ftet in ba% SBaffer. It is s in the accusative. 1 tnare ertranfert. 2 jugeroorf en. 3 berfyinberte ifyn bte Xaubt %u treffen. 4 roottte. s fteljt. 13. The Peaches. (See No. 20, page 229.) A peasant bought in the city five peaches which he brought home with him x and gave one to each of his four boys 2 and one to-the mother. The oldest boy ate up his peach and planted the stone in order to (129) raise a tree. The second son sold his peach and re- ceived money enough for-it^to buy (129) twelve peaches in the city. f The youngest son ate up his peach and threw the stone away ; but Edward, the third son, gave his peach to-a sick boy. How many peaches did the peasant bring home with him from the city [brought the peasant from the city home with] ? He brought three. To-whom (90, 1) did he give them? He gave them to-his children and to-the mother. Which boy was the most generous (80) ? Edward was the most generous. Are you fond of 4 peaches ? Yes, I am fond of them, but I prefer 5 cherries. When are peaches ripe ? In this region 6 they are ripe in the month of July.7 Why did Edward give his peach to-the sick boy ? He gave it to- him (118, c, d) because he was goqd-hearted. Would you have given your peach to-a sick boy? That I do not know [that know I not], perhaps and perhaps not. I do not think that you would have done it. If I had two peaches I would give one to-a sick boy ; but if I had I only one I would eat it myself. That would be right, 8 would it not ? 9 It would at-least be very natural. We are all selfish. In which case is the word &tabt in the first sentence ? Go to the blackboard I0 and write the declension of @tctbt. 1 mit nctd) $au\t bradjte. 2 jebem feiner bier Jtnaben etrtert. 3bafitr. *@ffen o£>e toarf. 4 Ijinuntettaudjte. 5 bie Jtugel IjeTaufbradjte. 6 ber jo gut gegen fie getoefen tt>ar. 7 ju. 8 inbetn fie tfjn . . . 9aia§ gefdja^ mtt ? xo barauf. 11 in toa§ fiir einem SSagen? TRANSLATION EXERCISES 3 I 5 18. On the Harz. (See No. 32, page 240.) The Harz-mountains are (ift) in North Germany, between the Elbe and the Weser. The highest peak of the Harz is the Brocken, from which is often seen the " Spectre-of-the-Brocken." T In a hut on one of these mountains stands an arm-chair. In the arm-chair sits a man and on a foot-stool by his side 2 sits a maiden who tells him about (rjort) the evil mountain-spirits that appear at nights But the father sings : " Do not be afraid of 4 the bad mountain-spirits, for angels keep watch over thee day and night [keep day and night over thee watch]." Which is the highest peak of the Harz-mountains ? The highest peak is the Brocken. What is often seen from this peak [what sees one often from this peak out] ? The Spectre-of-the-Brocken is often seen. Where does the hut stand of which one speaks in the poem ? It stands on the mountain. Where does the maiden sit ? She sits on a foot-stool. Is she afraid of the bad mountain-spirits ? Yes, she is much afraid of them. What does the father sing ? He sings : " Do not be afraid, dear little-child, of the bad mountain-spirits." Why should the child not be afraid of the bad mountain-spirits ? Because the angels watch over her 5 day and night [day and night over her watch]. Are you afraid of ghosts ? No, I am not afraid of them ; they would not harm me [they would to-me no harm do]. Go to the blackboard and write the declension of 33erg. Have you ever visited the Harz-mountains ? No, I have never visited them. Why not? Because I made only a short trip 6 through Germany and had not time 7 to visit all the interesting regions. Do you intend 8 to visit Germany again ? Yes, certainly, I hope sometime 9 to study at 10 one of the German universities. At which university ? That I have not yet decided. 11 ^ort roo cm§ man oft . . . iieffi. 2 an ietner <8ette. 3 bie bet ^iadjt erfdjetttett. 4 f iircfit bid) ntdjt t>or. * fiber itjr 33adjt batten. 6 nttr eine fttrje Dtetje. •? tjatte fetne ^eit. s £aben Sic bic 2t.bii.cfjt. 9 einmal. ioauf. ll itodj ni$t entjcfjieben. 316 NEW GERMAN COURSE 19. A German Conversation. What would you do if you were rich ? If I were rich I would build a beautiful house. Would you live in the beautiful house ? Certainly I would live in it [would I therein dwell]. Do you live now (123, 1) in your own house ? No, I live in a house that I have rented. To whom does the house belong (170, 3) in which you now live? It belongs to Mr. Meyer. What kind of a man 1 is Mr. Meyer ? He is a very friendly and honest man. Is he a born German ? 2 Yes, he is a born German. Are you a German ? No, I am (an) American. Do you speak German [speak you German] ? Yes, I speak it, but not as well as English. Where did you learn (123, 5) German ? I learned it at-first in the school and later in the university. Were you ever in Germany ? Yes, last summer. 3 Which cities did you visit (123, 5) ? I landed in Hamburg and visited then Berlin, Dresden, Leipsic, Frankfort on the Main and made the tour-of-the-Rhine, from Mayence to (6t3) Cologne. Did you understand the language in Germany ? Yes, and I made myself also understood. 4 Do you find the German literature interesting ? Yes, especially the poetry. Name S some of the greatest German poets. Goethe, Schiller, Heine, Korner, Uhland and Freiligrath. Which German plays have you read ? I have read " Wilhelm Tell," " Maria Stuart " and " Jungfrau von Orleans." Who is the author of these plays ? (gen.) Schiller wrote them all. Which German romances have you read ? I have read " Immen- see," " Hoher als die Kirche " and " Peter Schlemihl." Have you read " Hermann und Dorothea ?" Yes, I have read that also [I have that also read]. Who is the author of-it ? 6 Goethe, the greatest (80) German poet. Have you read Goethe's " Faust " ? No, I have not yet read it. 1 2$a§ fiir etn ?Cftcmn. 2 etn geborener 2)eutfdjer. 3 im bortgen ©otntner. ^matfjte mid) audj berjtanblid). 5 ^enne (nennen ©ie) mir. 6 babon. HEIDENROSLEIN 317 J. W. v. Goethe Ettuas bewegt. Heinrich Werner. 1. Sah ein Knab' ein Ros - lein steh'n, Ros - lein auf der 2. Kna - be sprach : " Ich bre - che dich, Ros - lein auf der f$. Und der wil - de Kna - be brach's Ros - lein auf -===: . * ' der P m r—\- *=* £ mmm =t Hei - den, Hei - den,' Hei - den ; 9 z-r war Ros Ros P k^ V- so jung und mor - gen-schon, lein sprach : " Ich ste - che dich, lein wehr - te sich und stach, fc_l i =— 9 1 — rl N — H — "1 m i i - i e& :r - SE&*^ f^ lief er schnell, es nah' zu seh'n, sah's mit vie - len Freu-den. dass du e - wigdenkstan mich, und ich will's nicht lei -den.' half ihm doch kein Weh und Ach, musst es e - ben lei -den. ^£S -v^t-t £ mf cres. 1. • j- ■ — [_ k _L_| v J L v »_ r^f Ros- lein, Ros-lein, Ros -lein rot, Ros -lein auf der Hei - den. mf cres. -^ A , A- -#- -^ 0- *- £ jl. ~S: =g — I V- — ■ — v— -F 1 1 i Die dritte Strophe kraftig und bewegt, 3i» LORELEI Heinrich Heine. Mdssig. Friedrich Silcher. m m±S3 3& t =p — p-i— *> 3 i. Ich weiss niclit,was soil es be - deu - ten, dass ich so trau rig 2. Die schon - ste Jung - frau sit - zet dort o - ben wun-der Piufl- Den Schif-fer im klei - nen Schif-fe er-greift'smit wil-dem bin;. . ein Mahr-chen aus al - ten Zei - ten, das bar;. . ihr gold'-nes Ge - sch - meide blit - zet, sie Wen'; er schautnicht die Fel - sen - rif - fe, er *=2=± dim. PPi =te=£ :*=£ jzf A^^j: r ^rrt kommt mirnichtausdem Sinn. kammt ihr gol-de-nes Haar schaut hin -auf in die Hon'. c dim. — ±L # 0~~ Die Luft ist kiihl und es Sie kammt es mit gol - de-nem Ich glau - be, die Wel-len ver - n is J"— I*?/ £ 3. Strophe lebhaft und kraftig, die 4 Schlusstakte langsam und// wiederholt. dun - kelt, und ru - hig fliesst der Rhein, . . m/der Kam - me und singt ein Lied da - bei, . . . /"das schlin - gen am En - de Schiffer und Kahn;. . ^"und i 3i9 m- Gi - pf el des Ber-ges fun - kelt im A - bend-son -nen - schein. hat ei - ne wun-der - sa - me, ge-walt' - ge Me - lo - dei. das hat mit ih - rem Sin - gen die Lo - re - lei ge - than. sm pm^mMn^ 1 FRUHLINGSGRUSS Heinrich Heine. m p Einfach und zart. Felix Mendelssohn-Bartholdy ( 1809-1847 ). m=i=£=m^w mt- 1. Lei - se zieht durchmein Ge - miit lieb - li - ches Ge - Jau - te ; 2. Klinghin-aus bis an das Haus, wo die Blu-men sprie-ssen 3. Sprich zum Vog-lein, das da singt auf dem schwanken Zwei-ge, A BH £ a t=rt -#- a */ E^« -?: * £=SPS -LI "J i II 3 S*-*-«r^ ± ^- s s klin - ge, klei -nes Fruhlings-lied,kling' hin-aus in's Wei - te ! wenn du ei - ne Ro - se schaust,sag',ichlass sie grii - ssen ! und zum Bachlein,das ka klingt,dass mir kei -nes schwei - ge! m ««- f— f— r 9 A A ise*? fil 320 O TANNENBAUM p Andante. f^g^E^E^^E^ ■v— i. O Tannenbaum,o Tannenbaum ! Wie griinsinddei -ne Blat- ter. Du 2. O Tannenbaum, o Tannenbaum ! Du kannstmir sehrge -fal- len.Wie 3. O Tannenbaum, o Tannenbaum ! Dein Kleid will mich was lehren : Die -4-H— F« ■ iF^ii- £ 3*$* •^gT^rr- 8 i i *f£ S *| ?=* ^*: fc — b»- ±=f -k— tp 1P1 ifcteic tfc=g griinst nicht nur zur Som-mer-zeit,Nein auch im Win-ter,wenn es schneit.O oft hat nicht zur Weih-nachtszeit Ein Baum von dir mich hoch erfreut! O Hoff-nung und Be-stan-dig-keit Giebt Trost und Kraft zu je- der Zeit. O ippSiN^PJig^lliP p ?=F *-•- fH"^- S^-^ fefe 1 Tan-nen-baum, o Tan -nenbaum,Wiegriinsind dei - ne Blat - ter! Tan -nen-baum, o Tan - nenbaum,Du kannstmir sehr ge - fal - len ! Tan -nen-baum, o Tan - nenbaum ! Das soil dein Kleid mich leh - ren. ^m z—± m t===t :s ±=> GELUBDE 321 H. F. Massmann. G eh alien. e ftiiif^ Ich hab' mich Mein Herz ist Ach, Gott ! thu' Lass Kraft mich er ent er er - glom he • wer - I I ben mit Herz men, dir treu ben mein jung ben in Herz VOLKSWEISE, i*E i und mit Hand zu - ge -wandt, Her-zens -blut, und in Hand, dir, du zu zu mf 1p 1-J- »/ I 1 r ^E *3SE=& 1= Land voll Lieb' und Le - ben, mein deut Land der Frei'n und From-men, du herr fri-schem,freud'-gem Le - ben, zu frei - le - ben und zu ster - ben fur's heil' • sches Va - ter -land, dir, lich Her-manns-land, du em, from-mem Mut, zu ge Va - ter - land, zu r^=* m=± >/ bS Land voll Lieb' und Le - ben, mein deut Land der Frei'n und From-men, du herr frischem,freud'-gem Le - ben, zu frei • le - ben und zu ster - ben fur's heil' =- 9/ rtt. §5 1 — r 4= :& £eM sches Va - ter - land, lich Her-manns-land. em, from-mem Mut. ge Va - ter -land. rit. -t -#- -0- s 1 322 SCHIFFERGESANG Etwas bewegt. Neapolitanisches Volkslted: Santa Lucia. Soli: Wiederholung Chor. t4=J-- m *2 » P t=t *=r aoE 9t Schon glanzt des Mon-des Licht am Sieh' Ster - ne herr -lichgliih'n, Liif Freu' dich der Ju-gend-zeit mit P— == n — i=y Him - te Lie mels - bo - gen, er - wa - cnen, dern,Tan - zen ! Soli : Wiederholung Chor i m ±® -t lieb - licb die Liif • te weh'n, still sind die Wo • gen. ii - ber die Wei - len hin tanzt schon mem Na - chen. Lass dich, weil's Le - ben mai't, mit Ro - sen kran - zen ! 9± V— J±=£ 9/ wm Mein Schiff-lein war - tet dein, Lieb -chen, steig' furcht-los ein. Ho -re der Sehn-sucht Lied, die tief im Her -zen gliibt. Ju - gend flieht bald vor - bei, e - wig bleibt Lieb' und Treir! »/ m 'if mmm i 1 : 1E * » 4^- :*= I 1-3. Treu - lie - bend harr' ich hier, o komm' zu mir ! 9i= ■/. -P-> P- -r — r — 1 — £ — g- t *~ I DER ALPENHIRT 323 v Fallersleben. Frisch bewegt. mf VOLKSWEISE. n i§§^]i mf 1. Dorthoch auf der p 2. Daschau' ich die p 3. Und treibtmich der Al - pe, Dor -fer Win-ter m hin ist mei Ne - bel un - ter - ne Welt, da und Rauch und in's Thai, dann wo s mir at - me denk' ich : cres. auf Er-den am bes-ten ge - fallt. Da duf - ten die der Bergluft er - qui-cken-den Hauch.Daweissich von der Sommer kommt wie-der ein -mal ! Der Som-mer, der t=l m m -H^t 49- 1 F fcr j - t: . j_pTJ E £jE£*fa &s n 9 m f *=t± I Krau - ter, da mur - melt der Quell, da klin - gen die kei - nem Ge - larm und Ge - schrei^und spiel' ei - nen bringtmich zur Al - pe zu - ruck; /"da dro - ben ist 5-#- 4=1 -•- -&- i± 9 mf f^tm / r-t - 9 9 '- j : t=M m& IS l f .- f- £ M* w^^m Glocklein so lus - tig und hell, juch-he! so Landler auf mei -ner Schalmei,/"juch -he ! auf Al - les,mein Le - ben,mein Gliick juch- he ! mein lus -tig und hell, mei- ner Schalmei. Le - ben, mein Gliick ! -*- -*--9 / 9^ m £ t^M^M n 324 DIE WACHT Max Schneckenburger. Lebhaft und energisch. AM RHEIN Carl Wilhelm. =r :i ± r^f £=* 4 i. Es braust ein Ruf wie Don - ner - hall, wie Schwert-geklirr und 2. Durch Hun -dert-tau -send zuckt es schnell,und Al - ler Au - gen 3. So lang ein Tro-pfen Blut noch gliiht,noch ei - ne Faust den 4. Der Schwur er-schallt,die Wo - ge rinnt, die Fah-nen flat - tern Wo - gen -prall : bli - tzen hell ; De - gen zieht, hoch im Wind Zum Rhein,zum Rhein, zum deutschen Rhein ! wer der deut - sche Jiing -ling fromm und stark, be und noch ein Arm die Biich - se spannt, be am Rhein, am Rhein, am deutschen Rhein, wir &^m i m^^M^ will des Stromes Hii-ter sein? Lieb' Va-terland,magst ruhigsein,lieb' schirmtdie heil'-ge Lan-des-mark. Lieb' Va-terland,magstruhig sein, lieb' tritt kein Feind hierdeinen Strand ! Lieb' Va-terland,magstruhig sein, lieb' Al - le wol-len Hii-ter sein! Lieb' Va-terland,magst ruhig sein, lieb' -F 1 1 1 P- — r &> 1 — I — r *H— * — I — ; — I H — ; — * — * 1 1 — I H5>— s.- !-• — 3 ' m — p-^—p— hp-*— p — P — — 9^t GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Note. — The nom. and gen. sing, and nom. plur. of nouns is given in the manner usual in dictionaries, also the principal parts of strong or irregular verbs. Where the gen. sing. of a noun is like the nom. the fact is indicated by a dash and the same mark indicates that the nom. plur. is like the sing. The gender of nouns is indicated by the initials m. f. n. thus : die Blume, /. ( — , -n) ; der Finger, m. (-s, — ). Where an adverb is, only an unin- flected adjective the one form stands for both ; thus, schon may be translated beautiful or beautifully according to the context (§ 94). Separable verbs are so indicated by an accent mark on the prefix ; thus, aVdriicken. The references in parenthesis are to sections of Part I. Only such translation of each German word is given as corresponds to its use in this text. In the case of compounds and other long words the grammatical indications are, for the sake of brevity, frequently omitted. ab, off, away, down, exit, ab'driicken, to shoot (an arrow). Abend, m. (-s ; -e) evening. Abendmahl, n. supper. Abendsonnenschein, evening sunshine. Abend wolke,/ evening cloud, aber, but. ab'fahren, to depart, set sail. ab 'fallen, to fall off. ab'gehen, to go away. [ben. ab'geschrieben, copied ; inf. ab'schrei- Abgrund, m. abyss, precipice. ab'holen, to fetch, go and get. ab'kehren (sich), to turn away. ab'kiirzen, to shorten, abbreviate. ab'legen, to lay off. ab'leiern, to drawl (a speech or air). ab'mahen, to mow (grass). ab'nehmen, to take off. ab'pfliicken, to pick off. • Abschlagszahlung, /. part payment. Abschnitt, m. (-s, -e), division, part. ab'schreiben, to copy, ab'senden, to send (away). Absicht,/. ( — , -en), intention. absichtlich, intentional. ab'steigen, to descend. Abteil, m. (-s, -e), compartment. ab'wagen, to consider. ab'wenden, to turn away. ach ! ah 1 oh I Acht,/ attention, care; in — nehmen, to take care of. achten, to respect, notice, achtungsvoll, respectful. achzen, to sigh, moan. Adel, m. (-s), nobility. Adresse,/. ( — , -n), address. Affe, m. (-n, -n), monkey, ape. Afrika, Africa. Ahnlichkeit, / ( — , -en), similarity. Akademie,/ ( — , -n), academy. allein, adv. alone ; conj. but. allerecht, most genuine. allerliebst, very dear. allernachst, the very next, the lowest, alleruntertanigst, most obedient. alles, all, everything. allezeit, forever, always. allgemein, general. allzuviel, too much. Alpen, pi. the Alps. Alpenhirt, m. alpine shepherd. Alpenjager, m. alpine hunter. als, when, as ; besser — , better than. also, so, thus, therefore. 325 326 NEW GERMAN COURSE alt, old ; die Alten, the old ones. altdeutsch, old German. Alter, n. (-s), age. Altorf, a Swiss village, now Altdorf. am = an dem, at the (105). Ameise,/ ( — , -en), ant. amerikanisch, American. Amt n. (-es, Amter), office ; Post — , post-office. amiisieren, to amuse. an, to, on, by, at. ander, other; ein andermal, another time ; eins urns andere, one after the other; noch andere Arten, other kinds ; am andern Morgen, the next morning. an'erkennen, to recognize. Anfang, m. ( — s, Anfange), beginning; am — , in the beginning. an'fangen, to begin, do. an'geben, to state, specify. an'gehoren, to belong to. Angel,/ ( — , -n), fish-hook. angenehm, agreeable. Anger, m. (-s, — ), green field. an'glotzen, to stare at. an'kleiden (sich), to dress one's self. an'klopfen, to knock (at a door). an'kommen, to arrive. an'kiinden, to announce. Ankunft,/ arrival. an'legen, to take aim. an'melden, to announce. an'nehmen, to accept. an'probieren, to try on (clothes). an'richten, to cause. an'riihren, to touch. an'schauen, to look at. an'sehen, to look at. an'sinnen, to demand, exact of one. an'spannen, to harness up (horses). Anstreicher, m. (-s, — ), house-painter. an'treten, to approach. an 'tun, to do, offer. Antwort,/ ( — , en), answer. antworten, to answer. [vately). an'vertrauen, to confide to one (pri- an'zeigen, to point out. Anzug,#z.(-s,Anziige), suit (of clothes). Apfel, m. (-s, Apfel), apple. Apfelbaum, m. apple-tree. Appetit, tn. appetite. April, m. April. Arbeit,/. (— , -en), work. arbeiten, to work, study. Arbeiter, m. (-s, — ), workman. Arbeitslohn, m. wages. Arm, m. (-es, -e), arm. arm, poor. Armbrust,/ crossbow. Armut,/ poverty. arrangieren, to arrange. Art,/ ( — , en), manner, way. Arzt, m. (-es, Arzte), physician, doctor. Asche,/. ashes. Asien, Asia. Ast, m. (-es, Aste), branch (of a tree). astronomisch, astronomical. Atem, m. breath ; — holen, to breathe. atmen, to breathe. auch, also. Aue,/ ( — , -n), meadow. auf, on, upon, in. auf bewahren, to lay up, keep. auf bliihen, to blossom. Aufenthalt, m. stay, visit. auf essen, to eat up. [tion. auf 'fallen, to impress one, strike atten- auf'finden, to find, look up a thing. Aufgabe,/ ( — , -en), task, lesson. auf'geben, to give up. auf'gehen, to rise, go up (the sun). auf'geregt, excited, angry. aufgeschrieben, written down. auf'halten (sich), to stay, live. auf'heben, to pick up ; hob ihn auf, picked him up. auf'hetzen (gegen), to excite, to arouse (against). auf horchen, to listen. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 327 auf klopfen, to break open. Auflage,/. ( — , -n), edition (of a book). auf machen, to open. auf merken, to pay attention to. [tion. Aufmerksamkeit, /. (— , -en), atten- auf nehmen, to take up, compete with. auf passen, to watch. auf pflanzen, to erect, set up. auf picken, to pick up. auf putzen, to dress up. [erect. aufrecht, upright ; — stehen, to stand auf regen, to excite, anger. auf richten, to set up. auf rufen, to call out, ask. Aufruhr, m. uproar. aufs = auf das, upon the (105). Aufschrift,/. ( — , -en), inscription. auf stecken, to set up. auf tragen, to order, command. auf treten, to appear on the scene. Auge, n. (-S,-n), eye. Augenblick, m. moment. augenblicklich, instantly. Auglein, n. (-s, — ), little eye. August, m. August. aus, out, from. Ausbildung,/ culture, education. auseinander, from each other ; — gehen, to separate. Ausflug, m.(-s, Ausfliige), excursion. Ausgang, m. (-s, Ausgange), result, aus'geben, to give out. [exit. aus'gehen, to go out. aus'kramen, to take out. Auslander, m. (-s, — ), foreigner, auslandisch, foreign, aus'laufen, go out, sail. Ausrufer, m. (-s, — ), crier, herald, aus'ruhen, to rest. aus'schauen, to look out. aus'sehen, to appear, look like. aufier, besides, out of. auBerdem, besides that. auBerhalb, outside of. Aussprache,/. pronunciation. aus'sprechen, to pronounce, aus'steigen, descend (from a coach), aus'strecken, to stretch out. Australien, Australia. aus'iiben, to exert. Auswahl,/ ( — , -en), choice. auswendig, outside; — lernen, to learn by heart. aus' Ziehen, to move out. Auszug, m. (-es, Ausziige), extract. Autor, m. (-s, -en), author. Axt,/. ( — , Axte), axe. Bach, m. (-es, Bache), brook. Bachlein, n. (-s, — ), little brook. Backe,/ ( — , -n), cheek. backen, to bake. Backer, m. (-s, — ), baker. Bad, n. (-es, Bader), bath. Bahn,/. ( — , -en), path, way. Bahnhof, vi. railway station. Bahnwagen, m. passenger coach. bald, soon ; bald — bald, now — now. baldig, immediate. Balken, m. (-s, — ), beam, timber. Band, m. (-es, Bande), volume ; n. (-es, Bander, ribbon. bang, timid, fearful, bangen, to fear. Bank, /. ( — , -en), money bank ; //. Banke, seat, bench. Bannberg, a hill near Altorf. bannen, to banish, conjure, bewitch. Bar, m. (-en, -en), bear. [rick I. Barbarossa, red-beard, Emperor Frede- barmherzig, merciful ; " barmherzige Briider," brothers of mercy. Barmherzigkeit,/ mercy, charity. Baron, m. (-s, -e), baron. Baronin,/ ( — , -nen), baroness. Bart, m. (-es, Barte), beard. Bassin, n. reservoir, pond, bat, asked, inf. bitten. 328 NEW GERMAN COURSE bauen, to build; — lassen, to have built, to cause to be built (150). Bauer, m. (-n, -n), peasant ; n. (-s, — )., bird-cage. Bauernknecht, m. farm-hand. Baum, m. (-es, Baume), tree. Bayern, Bavaria. Beamte, m. (-n, -n), official, beantworten, to answer. Beantwortung, /. reply. Becherlein, n. (-s, — ), little goblet, bedauern, to regret. bedeckt, covered; inf. bedecken. bedeuten, to signify, mean, bedeutend, important. bedienen, to serve. Bediente, m. (-n, -n), the servant. bediirfen, to need, require. beeilen (sich), to hasten. befallen, to befall, attack. Befehl, m. (-s, -e), command, [mand. befehlen (befahl, befohlen), to com befestigen, to attach, make fast. befiehlt, commands; inf. befehlen. befinden (sich), to be, be found; was befindet sich, what is there ? befremdet, astonished. begeben (sich), to go or betake one's self (to some place). begegnen, to meet. begehren, to demand, begleiten, to accompany, begraben, to bury. begreifen, to understand, begriissen, to greet, salute. behalten, to keep, behaupten, to assert, bei, by, at the house of. [birds. beide, both ; die beiden Vogel, the two beiliegend, enclosed. Bein, n. (-es, -e), leg. beinahe, nearly, beisammen, together. Beispiel, n. (-s, -e), example. [at. bei'wohnen (dat.), to attend, be present bekennen, to confess, reveal, bekommen, to get, obtain; {with dat.) to agree with one's health. belastigen, to trouble. belebt, lively. belieben, to like, choose {dat.) to please ; wie es Ihnen beliebt, as you please. beloben,, to praise, bemerken, to observe. Bemerkung,/. ( — , -en), remark. bemiihen (sich), to take the trouble, try. benachrichtigen, to inform. beobachten, to observe. bequem, comfortable. Beredsamkeit, /. eloquence. bereit, ready. bereiten, to prepare. bereitet, prepared, ready, bereits, already. Berg, m. (-es, -e), mountain, bergen (barg, geborgen), to conceal. Bergesgeist, m. mountain spirit, ghost. Bergeshohe, f. mountain height. Bergluft,/! mountain air. Bergmann, m. miner, bersten (barst, geborsten), to burst, beruhen, to depend upon, beruhigen, to quiet, calm, beriihmt, celebrated, besagen, to say, mention ; der besagte Hans, the said Hans, bescheinen, to shine upon. bescheren, to give, bestow upon. beschirmen, to defend. beschlieSen, to end, conclude, beschrankt, limited. Beschreibung, / ( — , -en) description. Beschiitzer, m. (-s, — ), protector besehen, to view, look at. besiegen, to conquer. Besitz, m. possession. [daily. besonder, especial; besonders, espe- besorgen, to provide, besser, better; " zu was (etwas) bes- serem," to something better. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 329 best, best ; am besten, the best. Bestandigkeit, / constancy, bestatigen (sich), to be confirmed. bestehen, to consist ; besteht aus, con- besteigen, to mount. [sists of. bestellen, to order. Bestellung,/. ( — , -en), order, bestimmen, to determine. bestimmt, definite, determined. bestrafen, to punish. Besuch, m. (-es, -e), visit. besuchen, to visit. [lor. Besuchszimmer, n. drawing room, par- beten, to pray. betrachten, to observe, regard. Betrag, m. (-es, Betrage), amount, sum. Betreff, m. relation; in — ■, with regard betreffen, to concern. [to. betreten, to tread, set foot upon, betruben, to grieve, trouble. betriibt, sad. [deceive, betriigen (betrog, betrogen), to cheat Bett, n. (-es, -en), bed. betteln, to beg. Beute,/. booty, bevor, before. bewahren, to keep, guard, preserve. bewahren, to show T , prove, bewegen (sich), to move, agitate. Bewegung,/. ( — , -en), motion, action. bewiesen, proved, shown; inf. bewei- bewohnbar, inhabitable. [sen. bewohnen, to inhabit. bezahlen, to pay. bezeichnen, to mean, designate, signify. Bibliothek, /. ( — , -en), library. Biene, / ( — , -n), bee ; Bienchen, n. Bier, n. (-es, -e), beer. [little bee. bieten, (bot, geboten), to offer. Bild, n. (-es, -er), picture, bilden, to form, construct. Bilder-Gallerie,/. picture gallery. Billet, n. (-es, -e), ticket (of admission). Billetschalter, m railroad ticket office. billig, just, cheap, fair. Billion, f. in German a million million. binden (band, gebunden), to bind. Binnen-Alster, an artificial pond or reservoir for pleasure boats in Ham- Birnbaum, m. pear tree. [burg. bis, to, until. MB, bit ; inf. beiBen. biBchen, a little bit. Bitte,/ ( — , -n), request, petition. bitte, please ; inf. bitten, beg, ask ; ich bitte um, I ask for, please give me. bitterbose, very angry. blasen (blies, geblasen), to blow. Blatt, n. (-es, Blatter), leaf. Blattchen, n. (-s, — ), little leaf. Blattern, pi. small-pox ; mit — befal- len, attacked with small-pox. blau, blue. bleiben (blieb, geblieben), to remain. bleich, pale. Blick, m. (-es, -e), look, sight. Blindenanstalt,/ blind asylum. blitzen, to lighten, shine. bloB, bare ; only. bliihen, to bloom. Bliimchen, n. (-s, — ) little flower. Blume,/ ( — , -n), flower. Blumengarten, m. flower-garden. BlumenstrauB, m. bouquet. Blut, n. blood. Bliite,/ ( — , -n), blossom. bluten, to bleed. [ground. Boden, m. (-s, Boden), floor, soil, Bogen, m. (-s, — ), bow. Bonne,/. ( — , -n), bean. Boot, n. (-es, -e), boat. borgen, to borrow. Borse,/. ( — ,-n), purse, stock-exchange. bose, bad, wicked. boslich, wickedly, unkindly. bot, offered; inf. bieten. brach, broke ; inf. brechen. braten (briet, gebraten), to roast. brauchen, to need, use. brauchlich, customary. 33Q NEW GERMAN COURSE brausen, to roar. Braut,/. ( — , Braute), bride. Brautigam, m. (-s, -e), bridegroom. brav, brave, nice, good. brechen (brach, gebrochen), to break. breit, broad. brennen (brannte, gebrannt), to burn. Bretterzaun, m board-fence. Brief, m (-es, -e), letter ; ein — Nah- nadeln, a paper of sewing needles. Briefeinnahme, / receiving of letters at post office. Brief wechsel, m. correspondence. Brief marke,/ postage stamp, bringen (brachte, gebracht), to bring. Brot, n. (-es,-e), bread; in pi. loaves. Bruchteil, m. fraction. Briicke,/ ( — , -en), bridge. Bruder, m. (-s, Briider), brother, brummen, to hum, buzz. Brunnen, m. (-s, — ), fountain, spring. Brunnenwasser, n. spring-water. Briinnlein, n. (-s, — ), little brook. Brust,/. (— , Briiste), breast, bosom. Brut, / brood. Bube, m. (-n, -n), boy, fellow. Buch, n. (-es, Biicher), book. Buchh'andler, m. bookseller. Biichse,/ ( — , -n), box, rifle. Biichslein, n. (-s, — ) little box. Buchstabe, m. (-n, -n) letter of the biicken (sich), to bow. [alphabet. Biihne,/ ( — , -n), stage (of a theater). Bummelzug, m. a slow train making many stops. Bund, m. (-es, Biindc), union. Biindel, n. (-s, — ), bundle. Bundesrat, in. federal council. bunt, many colored, variegated. Burg/ ( — , -en), castle. biirgen, to go security, give bail. Burger, m. (-s, — ), citizen. Biirgermeister, m. mayor. Biirgschaft, / security ; — leisten, to go security, bail. Bursche, m. (-n, — n), fellow. Biirstchen, n. (-s, — ), little brush. Busen, m. (-s, — ), bosom. C Celsius, inventor of the Celsius ther- mometer. Charakter, ///. (-s, -e), character. Citrone,/ ( — , -n), lemon. Commis, m. ( — , — ), salesman. Cylinderhut, m. silk hat. da, there, here ; — doch, since, because. dabei, therewith. Dach, n. (-es, Dacher), roof. Dachboden, m. garret. dadurch, by it, through it. dagegen, on the contrary. daher, therefore; hither, along. Dame,/. ( — , -n), lady. damit, so, in order that. Dampfer, m. (-s, — ), steamship. Dampfkessel, m. steamboiler. Dampfschiff, n. steamboat. danach, to it, after it. daneben, to one side. Dank, m. thank. danken, to thank. dann, then. daran, by it. [wards. darauf, upon it, upon which, then, after- dar'bringen, to present, offer. darf , dare, may ; inf. diirfen. darin, in it. darinnen, therein, in it. dar'reichen, to reach to one, give. dar'stellen, to represent. dariiber, over it, concerning it. darum, therefore. daB, that. Datum, m. (-s, Data), date. Daumen, m. (-s, — ), thumb. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 331 davdn, away ; of it. dazu, thereto ; besides, in addition. dazwischen, between. Deckel, m. (-s, — ), cover. Degen, m. (-s, — ), sword. dehnen, to extend. dein, deine, dein, pi. deine, thy ; der, die, das deinige (87, 9). Deklination, / ( — , -en), declension. deklinieren, to decline. denken (dachte, gedacht), to think. denn, then, for. dergleichen, the like, such, der-, die-, dasjenige, that one (89, 7). der-, die-, dasselbe, the same ; wie hei- fien dieselben ? what are they called ? deshalb, therefore. deutsch, German, deutsch-franzosisch, German-French ; der — e Krieg, Franco-Prussian war. Deutschland, Germany. Dezember, m. December. Dialekt, m. (-s, -e), dialect. Dichter, m. (-s, — ), poet. dick, thick. Dieb, m. (-es, -e), thief, dienen, to serve. Diener, m. (-s, — ), servant. Dienerschaft, /. ( — , -en), servants. Dienst, m. (-es, -e), service. Dienstag, m. Tuesday. dieser (-e, -es), (dies, das), this ; pi. diesmal, this time. [diese, these. Ding, n. (-es, -e), thing, direkt, direct. doch, though, I pray you. Doktor, m. (-s, -en), doctor. Dom, m. (-es, -e), dome, cathedral. Donau,/ Danube (river). Donnerhall, m. thunder-peal. donnern, to thunder. Donnerstag, m. Thursday. Dorf, n. (-es, Dorfer), village. dort, dorten, there, yonder. Drache, m. (-en, -n), dragon, kite. Drachenfels — Siebengebirge, name of mountain chain. Drachengasse, f. name of a street. Drang, m. (-es), pressure. drauBen, without, outside. Dreschmaschine, /. threshing machine. dringen (drang, gedrungen), to press, force (one's way). drinnen, within, dritte, third ; zum drittenmal, for the third time. drittgrofite, third largest. drohen, to threaten. Droschke,/. ( — , -n), hack, cab. driiber = dariiber, over it. driicken, to press. Druckerei,/. ( — , -en), printing office. duften, to be fragrant. dulden, to permit, suffer. Dunkel, n. darkness. dunkel, dark. dunkelblau, dark blue. dunkeln, to darken, durch, through, by. [pierce. durchboren, to bore through, penetrate, durchschieften, to shoot through. diirfen, to dare, may (149, 1). diirr, dry. Durst, m. thirst, duster, dark, gloomy. E eben, even, just now; level. ebenfalls, also, likewise. Echo, 11. (-s, -s), echo. echt, genuine. Ecke,/. (— , -n), corner. edel, noble. edelmiitig, noble-minded. Ehegatte, m. (-n, -n), husband. ehemalig, former, old, late. eher, rather, sooner. Ehre,/ ( — , -n), honor. EhrengruB, m. salute of honor. 332 NEW GERMAN COURSE Ehrenkreuz, «. cross of honor. Ehrenmann, m. honorable man. ehrerbietig, respectful. ehrlich, honest. Ei, n. (-es, -er), egg ; interj. ah ! Eidgenossen, //. sworn companions. eigen, own. Eile,/ haste ; — haben, to be in haste. eilen, to hasten. ein, a, one ; so — Mann, such a man ; der eine . . . der andere, the one . . . einander, each other. [the other. ein'dringen, to press in, to fill. ein'fach, simple. ein' fallen, to occur to the mind. EinfluB, m. (^Hisses, -fliisse), influence. ein/fiihren, to lead into, introduce. einige, several, some. [hotel. Einkehr,/. turning in ; putting up at a ein'kehren, to turn in, put up. ein'laden, to invite. Einladung,/. ( — , -en), invitation. ein'lassen, to let in, admit, einmal, once. ein'richten, to arrange. einsam, lonely. ein'scharfen, to impress upon, ein'schenken, to pour out, fill. ein'schlafen, to fall asleep. ein'schleichen, to steal lightly in. einst, once. ein'steigen, to enter (a carriage). einstweilen, meanwhile. eintonig, monotonous. Einwohner, m. (-s, — ), inhabitant. Einzahl,/. singular. einzeln, single. Eis, n. ice. Eisen, n. iron ; von — , made of iron. Eisenbahn,/. railroad. Elbe,/. Elbe (river). elegant, elegant. elektrisch, electric. Elend, n. misery. Elfenbein, n. ivory. Elsafi-Lothringen, Alsace-Lorraine. Eltern,//. parents. empfangen, to receive. [parlor. Empfangszimmer, n. reception-room, empfehlen (sich) (empfahl, empfoh- len), to recommend one's self ; ich empfehle mien, a polite form of sal- utation, [ren. emport, shocked, aroused ; inf. empo- Emporung,/ (— , -en), rebellion. Ende, n. end; am Ende, finally, at last. endlich, at last, finally. Endung,/. (— , -en), ending. Energie,/. energy. Engelein, n. (-s, — ), little angel. England, England. englisch, English. entblofien, to bare. entdecken, to discover. entfalten, to unfold. entfernt, distant. Entfernung,/ ( — , -en), distance. entfliehen, to flow, pass away. [one). entge'genhalten, to offer, bold out (to entge'genkommen, to come to meet. entgegenkommend, hospitable. entge'gentreten, to go to meet. entglommen, kindled, enthused. enthalten, to contain. entlassen, to dismiss. entreiBen, to tear away, liberate. entriistet, angered. entscheiden (entschied, entschieden), to decide. entschuldigen, to excuse. entsetzt, shocked. enttauscht, deceived. entweder, either ; entweder — oder, either — or. Epigramm, n. (-s, -e), epigram. erbarmen (sich), to move to pity; es erbarmt mien, I am sorry. erbarmlich, miserable. Erbarmung,/ mercy. Erbe, m. (-n, -n), heir. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 333 erblicken, to see, notice, observe. Erbse,/ (— , -n), pea. Erde,/. (— , -n), earth, ground. Erdteil, m. continent. erdulden, to endure, suffer. [rence. Ereignis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), occur- erfahren (erfuhr, erfahren), to learn, experience. Erfahrung,/. ( — , -en), experience. erforden, to require, demand. erfreuen, to rejoice, gladden. Erfiillung,/. ( — , -en), fulfillment. erganzen, to complete, add to. ergeben (sich) (ergab, ergeben), to submit, surrender, give up ; Ihr er- gebener Diener, your obedient ser- vant ; -st, respectfully. erglanzen, to shine. ergreifen (ergriff, ergriffen), to seize. erhalten (erhielt, erhalten), to receive ; to keep, maintain. erheben (sich) (erhob, erhoben), to arise. erhielt, received ; inf. erhalten. erhohen, to increase. erinnern (sich), to remember. erkalten (sich), to take cold. erkennen, to recognize, perceive. erklaren, to declare, explain. erkranken, to fall ill. erkiihnen (sich), to dare, presume. erkundigen (sich), to inform one's self. erlassen, to excuse from. erlauben, to allow. Erlaubnis, / permission. erleiden (erlitt, erlitten), to suffer. Erlkonig, Earlking, an evil spirit of Northern mythology. erlosen, to release. ermangeln, to fail. Ernte,/ ( — , -n), harvest. [tyranny. Erpressung, /. ( — , -en), oppression, erquicken, to quicken, refresh. erraten (erriet, erraten), to guess. erreichen, to reach, attain. erschallen, to resound. erscheinen (erschien, erschienen), to appear. erschrecken (erschrak, erschrocken), to be frightened, erst, first. erstaunt, astonished, ersuchen, to request. erteilen, to give, impart, ertragen (ertrug, ertragen), to endure, erwachen, to awake. erwahlen, to choose, elect, erwahnen, to mention. Erwartung,/. ( — , -en), expectation, erwerben (erwarb, erworben), to win, gain, acquire, erwidern, to reply. erzahlen, to relate. erzeigen, to show. erzeugen, to generate, erziehen (erzog, erzogen), to raise. Essen, n. eating, food, essen (a!3, gegessen), to eat. etwa, about, perhaps, possibly. etwas, some, something. euer, eure, euer, pi. eure, your ; der, die, das eurige, yours. ewig, forever, eternal. Ewigkeit,/ (— , -en), eternity. Exemplar, n. (-es, -e), copy. fahig, able. Fahne,/. (— , -n), flag. [go. fahren (fuhr, gefahren), to ride, drive, Fahrgeld, n. fare. Fahrkarte,/. ticket (for fare). Fahrmann, m. ferryman. Fall, m. (-s, Falle), fall, case. fallen (fiel, gefallen), to fall. falsch, false, counterfeit. falten, to fold, wrinkle. Familie,/. ( — , -n), family. fand, found; inf. finden. fangen (fing, gefangen), to catch. 334 NEW GERMAN COURSE Farbe,/. ( — , -n), color. FaB, n. (-sses, Fasser), barrel, tub. fast, almost. Faust,/ (— , Fauste), fist. Februar, m. February. Fechtmeister, m. fencing-master. Feder,/ ( — , -n), feather, pen, spring. Federhalter, m. penholder. fehlen, to fail, ail, miss. fehlerhaft, deficient. Feiertag, m. (-es, -e), holiday. fein, fine. Feind, m. (-es, -e), enemy. Feld, n. (-es, -er), field. Fels, m. (-en, -en), rock, cliff. Felsenriff, n. rocky reef. Felsenwand,/. rocky wall, precipice. Fenster, n. (-s, — ), window. Fensterscheibe, /. window-pane. fertig, ready ; — machen, to make ready, complete. fesseln, to chain, fetter, fest, fast, firm. Festgesang, m. festive song. Feuer, n. fire. Feuersglut,/ fiery red. Fieber, n. (-s, — ), fever. fiel, fell ; inf. fallen. Filzhut, m. felt hat. nnden (fand, gefunden), to find, ting, caught ; inf. fangen. Finger, m. (-s, — ), finger. Finsternis,/. darkness. Fischerknabe, m. fisher-boy. Flachs, m. flax, flattern, to flutter. Flaum, m. down, fuzz. Fleisch, n. flesh, meat. FleiB, m. (-es), industry. fleiBig, industrious. fleugen = fliegen, to fly. fliegen (flog, geflogen), to fly. flieBen (floB, geflossen), to flow, flink, quick, quickly. Flinte,/ (— , -n), gun, rifle. flog, flew ; inf. fliegen. Flb'te,/ (— , -n), flute. FluB, m. (-sses, Fliisse), river. fliistern, to whisper. Flut,/. (— , -en), flood. folgen, to follow. folgsam, obedient. Form,/. ( — , -en), form. fort'bluhen, to bloom always. fort'gehen, to go away. fort'geleiten, to accompany out. fort'laufen, to run away. fort'reiBen, to tear away. fort'werfen, to throw away. Frage,/ ( — , -en), question. fragen, to ask. [Main. Frankfurt am Main, Frankfort on the Frankreich, France. Frau, / ( — , -en), woman, wife, lady; — Nachbarin, lady neighbor. frech, bold. frei, free. Freigepack, n. baggage carried free. Freiheit,/. freedom. freilich, indeed. Freitag, m. Friday, fremd, strange, foreign. Fremde, m. (-n, -n), stranger, fressen, to eat, devour. Freude,/ (— , -n), joy. freudig, joyous. freuen (sich), to rejoice, be pleased. Freundin,/ ( — , -nen), lady friend, freundlich, friendly. Freundlichkeit,/. ( — , -en), friendliness. Freundschaft, / ( — , -en), friendship. Freundschaftsdienst, m. friendly ser- friedlich, peacefully. [vice. Friedrich, Frederick; — der GroBe, Frederick the Great. frieren (fror, gefroren), to freeze. frisch, new, fresh ; iiber frischer Tat, in the very act. Frist,/ (— , -en), time, respite, froh, happy. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 335 frohlich, joyous, happy. fromm, pious, devoted. Frosch, m. (-es, Frosche), frog. Froschkonig, m. frog-king or prince. Frucht,/. (— , Friichte), fruit v friih, early. Friihling, m. (-s, -e), spring. FriihlingsgruB, m. spring greeting. Friihlingslied, n. spring song. Fuder, n. ( -s, — ), wagon-load. fiigen (sich), to submit. fiihlen, to feel. fuhr, rode; inf. fahren. fiihren, to lead ; deal (a blow). Fiihrer, m. (-s, — ), guide, leader. Fuhrwerk, n. (-s, -e), cart, wagon. Fiillfcder,/ fountain-pen. Funke, m. (-n, -n), spark. fur, for ; was — ein, what kind of ? furchtbar, terrible. [afraid of. fiirchten, to fear; sich — vor, to be fiirchterlich, terrible. furchtlos, fearless. Fiirst, m. (-en, -en), prince. fiirwahr, indeed, truly. FuB, m. (-es, FiiBe), foot. FuBboden, m. floor. Futter, n. (-S, — ), lining; fodder. fiittern, to fodder, feed; line (a coat). gab, gave ; inf. geben. Gallerie,/ ( — , -n), gallery. ganz, whole, entire ; die ganze Zeit, all the time ; den ganzen Tag, all day. ganzlich, entirely. gar, very (adds force to other words) ; — nicht, not at all (see § 92, 4 and garstig, ugly, nasty. [20). Garten, m. (-s, Garten), garden. Gast, m. (-es, Gaste), guest. Gasthaus, n. restaurant. geballt, closed ; die geballte Hand, the closed hand, fist. Gebaude, n. (-s, — ), building. gebaut, built ; inf. bauen. geben (gab, gegeben), to give. gebieten (gebot, geboten), to command. gebildet, cultivated. [mountains. Gebirge, n. (-es, -e), mountain chain ; gebraten, roasted; inf. braten. Gebrauch, m. (-es, Gebrauche), use, usage, custom. gebrauchlich, common, customary. gebraucht, used ; inf. brauchen. Geburtsort, m. birth-place. [ory. Gedachtnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), mem- gedampft, suppressed. Gedanke, m. (-n, -n), thought ; in Ge- danken, absent minded. [tend. gedenken (gedachte, gedacht), to in- Gedicht, n. (-es, -e), poem. geehrt, honored ; inf. ehren. Gefahr,/ ( — , -en), danger. gef alien (gefiel, gef alien), to please. gefallig, pleasing ; Ihr — es Schreiben, your favor ; — st, if you please. Gefangene, m. (-n, -n), prisoner, cap- tive. Gefangnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), prison. Gefecht, n. (-es, -e), battle. Gefrierpunkt, m. freezing point. gefroren, frozen ; inf. frieren. gegangen, gone ; inf. gehen. gegen, toward, against. Gegend,/ ( — , -en), region. gegenseitig, mutual. [object. Gegenstand, m. (-es, Gegenstande), Gegenteil, n. opposite ; im — , on the gegeniiber, opposite to. [contrary. Gegenwart, /. presence. gehabt, had ; inf. haben. Gehause, n. (-s, — ), case (of a watch). Geheimnis, n. (-nisses, -nisse), secret. gehen (ging, gegangen), to go. Gehirn, n. (-es, -e), brain. gehorchen, to obey. gehoren, to belong to. gehorig, due, proper. 336 NEW GERMAN COURSE geht, goes ; inf. gehen. Geist, m.(-es, -er), ghost/ spirit. Geizhals, m. miser. gekleidet, dressed; inf. kleiden. gekrochen, crept ; er kam — , he came gekiirzt, abridged. [creeping. Gelarm, n. noise. gelassen, calm, quiet. Gelauten, (-s, — ), ringing. Geld, «. (-es, -er), money ; noch so vieles — , ever so much money. Geldmarkt, m. money market. Geldstiick, ;/. (-es, -e), coin. Gelegenheit, /. ( — , -en), opportunity. gelernt, learned ; inf. lernen. geliebt, loved ; inf. lieben ; mein Ge- liebter, my beloved one. [ceed. gelingen (gelang, gelungen), to suc- gelobt, praised; inf. loben. gelten, to be worth, be valid. Geliibde, n. (-s, — ), vow. [chamber. Gemach, «. (-es, Gemacher), room, Gemahl, m. consort, husband (or wife). Gemah'lin,/ ( — , -nen), wife. Gemaldegallerie, / picture-gallery. GemaBheit,/. accordance, gemischt, mixed. Gemiise, n. (-s, -e), vegetables. Gemiisegarten, m. vegetable garden. Gemiise-Suppe,/ vegetable soup. Gemiit, m. (-es, -er), mind, soul, gemiitlich, pleasant, comfortable. genannt, named, called; inf. nennen. genau, exact. genug, enough. Geographie,/. geography. Gepack, n. baggage, luggage. gerade, exactly, just ; straight, even, gerechnet, reckoned; inf. rechnen. Gerechtigkeit,/. justice. Gerede, n. disagreeable talk, scandal. Gericht, n. (-es, -e), dish (of food), gering, little, small, simple. Germania, poetical name for Germany. gern, willingly, fain, gladly. Gesammtbevolkerung, total population. Gesang, m. (-es, Gesange), song. Gesangbuch, n. song book. Geschaft, m. (-es, -e), business. geschaftig, busy. Geschaftsbureau, n. business office. Geschaftsfiihrer, m. business manager. Geschaftsmann, m. business man. Geschaftsreisende, m. commercial trav- eller. geschehen (geschah, geschehen), to happen, be done. Geschichte,/. (— , -n), story, history. geschickt, skillful. [race. Geschlecht, n. (-es, -er), sex, gender, Geschmeide, n. (-es, — ), jewelry. GeschoB, n. (-es, -e), shot. Geschrei, n. outcry. geschrieben, written ; inf. schreiben. geschwind, swift. gesehen, seen; inf. sehen. [ion. Gesell(e), m. (-n, -n), fellow, compan- Gesellschaft,/ ( — , -en), company. Gesellschaftsabend, m. evening party. Gesetz, «. (-es, -e), law. gesetzgebend, law-making. gesetzlich, lawful. Gesicht, n. (-es, -er), face, countenance. gespannt, intense. Gesprach, n. (es, -e), conversation. Gestade, n. (-es, -e), shore, bank. Gestalt,/ ( — , -en), form. gestern, yesterday. gestorben, died ; inf. sterben. gestreng, stern, strict ; gestrenger Herr, your excellence. gesund, healthy; adv. healthful; der Gesunde, the healthy person. gesungen, sung ; inf. singen. getan, done ; inf. tun. Getrabe, n. trot. getragen, carried ; inf. tragen. Getrank, n. (-es, -e), drink. Getreide, n. (-s, -e), grain. getreu, faithful. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 337 geiibt, practiced ; inf. iiben. gewachsen, grown ; inf. wachsen. ge waff net, armed. gewahren, to grant, afford, [violence. Gewalt, /. ( — , -en), force, authority, gewaltig, powerful. Gewand, n. (-s, Gewander), garment. Gewandhaus, n. name of a concert hall in Leipsic. Gewicht, n. (-es, -e), weight. gewiB, certain. Gewissen, n. conscience, gewohnlich, usual. gewohnt, accustomed, geworden, become; inf. werden. gewiinscht, wished, ordered. gib, give; imperative of geben. ging, went ; inf. gehen. [tree. Gipfel, m. (-s, — ), summit, top of a Gitter, n. (-s, — ), grate, bars, glanzen, to shine. Glaube, m. (-ns), belief. glauben, to believe, suppose, imagine, gleich, adj. like, alike, same, equal to ; adv. immediately ; Gleiches mit Glei- chem, like for like, " tit for tat." gleichgesinnt, like-minded, glitzern, to glitter. Glocke,/. ( — , -n), bell, clock. Glocklein, n. (-s, — ), little bell, glorreich, glorious. Gliick, n. luck, fortune. gliicklich, happy, fortunate. Gliickwunsch, m. good wish. gliihen, to glow. Glut,/ (— , -en), glow. Gnade, / grace, mercy ; Eure Gnaden, your grace. [spect). gnadig, good, gracious (a title of re- Goethe-Haus, the birthplace of Goethe. Gold, n. gold ; golden {adj.) made of goldgelb, golden yellow. [gold. Goldmine,/. ( — , -n), gold-mine. Gold-Orange,/ golden orange. Goller, n. (-S, — ), doublet, jacket. Goslar, the name of a town. gotish, Gothic. Gott, m. (-es, Gotter), God. gottlob, thank God. Grab, n. (-es, Graber), grave. graben (grub, gegraben), to dig. Grad, m. (-es, -e), degree. Graf, m. (-en, -en), count. gramen, to grieve. Grammatik, / ( — , -en), grammar. Gras, n. (-es, Graser), grass. graBlich, horrible. Gratulation,/ ( — ,-en), congratulation. gratulieren, to congratulate. [afraid. grauen, to be terrified ; mir graut, I am Grausamkeit,/ ( — , -en), cruelty. grausen, to be terrified. greifen (griff, gegriffen), to grasp. Greis, m. (-es, -e), old man. Grenadier, m. (-s, -e), grenadier. Griffel, tn. (-s, — ), slate-pencil. Grille,/ ( — , -n), cricket. [coin). Groschen, m. (-s, — ), groshen (a small groB, large, great. groBartig, splendid. GroBvater, m. grandfather. griin, green. Grund, m. (-es, Griinde), ground, cause; zu Grunde gehen, to fail. Grundbesitz, m. landed estate. griinden, to found, establish. Griinder, m. (-s, — ), founder. griinen, to become green, thrive ; die griinenden Hoh'n, the blooming griiBen, to greet, salute. [heights. gulden = golden. Gummischuh, m. rubber shoe. Gurke,/ ( — , -n), cucumber. Gut, n. (-es, Giiter), property, estate, gut, good. Gute,/ kindness, gutgenug, goodenough. giitig, kind, good. Gutmiitigkeit,/ kindness. Gutsherr, m. landlord, proprietor. 338 NEW GERMAN COURSE Gymnasium, (-s, Gymnasien), a school for the classics and ancient languages (prep, for the university). Haar, n. (-es, -e), hair. haben (hatte, gehabt), to have. Hafen, m. (-s, Hafen), harbor, haven. Hagelkorn, n. hailstone. hageln, to hail. Hahn, m. (-es, Hahne), cock ; den — spannen, to cock a gun. halb, half. Halite,/ (— , -n), half. Halle,/. (— , -n), hall. halten (hielt, gehalten), to hold, keep : fest to hold fast ; Wacht keep watch, to guard ; an sich — , to restrain one's self. Haltung,/ ( — , -en), manner, style. Hand,/ ( — , Hande), hand. Handchen, n. (-s, — ,) little hand. handeln, to act ; unrecht — gegen, to do wrong to. Handlung,/ ( — , -en), action, conduct. Handschrift,/ handwriting. Handschuh, m. glove. hangen (hing, gehangen), to hang. Hannover, Hanover (a city). Harke,/ (— , -n), rake. harren, to wait anxiously. Harz, m. the Harz mountains. HaB, m. hate. hassen, to hate. haBlich, ugly, hateful. hatte, had ; inf. haben. [knot. Haubchen, n. (-s, — ), little crest, top- Hauch, m. (-es, -e), breath. Haupt, n. (-es, Haupter), head, chief. Haupt-Agentur,/ chief agency. Haupt- Autoritat, / chief authority. Hauptf orm, / principal part (of verb). Hauptmann, m. captain. Hauptsatz, m. principal clause. Hauptstadt, /. capital. Haus, n. (-es, Hauser), house; zu Hause, at home. Hausflur,/ hallway, corridor. [wi.'e. Hausfrau,/ lady of the house, house- Hauslein, n. (-s, — ), little house. hauslich, domestic. Haustier, n. domestic animal. [ben. heb — herauf , pick up ; inf. herauf 'he- heben (hob, gehoben), to lift. Heer, n. (-es, -e), army. Heerfiihrer, m. commander, chieftain. heftig, violent. Heide,/ ( — , -n), heath, heather. Heidenroslein, n. little heath-rose. heilig, holy, sacred. Heimat,/ home, native land. heimlich, secretly. heimtuckisch, treacherous. Heinrich, Henry. heiraten, to marry. heiB, hot. heiBen, (hieB, geheiBen), to be called, to have a name ; es heiBt, it is said ; er heifit, his name is heiter, happy, joyous. heizen, to heat. Held, vi. (-en, -en), hero. helfen, (half, geholfen), to help. hell, clear, bright. Heller, m. a small coin, not now in use. her, here, a prefix indicating motion to- wards the speaker, hin und her, to and fro. herab 'fallen, to fall down. herab'lassen, to condescend. heran'schleichen, to sneak up. herauf 'heben, to pick up. herauf'holen, to bring up. herauf'kommen, to come up. heraus'geben, to give out, give up. heraus'reiten, to ride out. herbei'eilen, to hasten up to. herbei'fliegen, to fly near. herbei'fuhren, to lead in, cause. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 339 Herbst, m. (-es, -e), autumn, fall. herein ! come in ! herein'gucken, to look in, peek in. herein'kommen, to come in. herein'ziehen, to draw in. heffallen, to fall upon. hei/fliegen, to fly about (here). her'kommen, to come ; wo kommst du her ? whence comest thou ? Hermann, hero who delivered Germany from Roman dominion. Hermannsland, poetical for Germany. Herr, m. (-n, -en), sir, lord, master, Mr. her/reichen, to reach here, give over. Herrenhaus, n. mansion. Herrin,/ ( — , -nen), mistress, lady. herrlich, glorious, splendid. Herriichkeit, f. ( — , -en), splendor. herrschen, to rule. her'sagen, to recite. her'stellen, to make ready. herum'kurieren. to treat (for illness). herum'spazieren, to walk about. herun'tersetzen, to make lower, to re- duce. hervor'ragend, important, eminent. hervor'steigen, to ascend. hervor'strecken, to stretch forth. Herz, n. (-flus, -en), heart. Herzensblut, n. heart's blood. herzig, lovely. herzinnig, heartily. herzlich, hearty. Hessen, a state of the German empire. Heu, n. hay ; — ernte, hay harvest. heute, to-day ; — morgen, this morning; — iiber acht Tage, a week from to- heutzutage, now-a-days. [day. Hexe,/. ( — , -n), witch, sorceress. hier, here. Hilfe,/ help. hilfreich, helpful. Hilfsverb, n. auxiliary verb. himmelgrofi, as big as the sky. Himmelsbogen, m. arch of heaven. hin, away, past, lost. hinab'drucken, to suppress, press down, hinab'fallen, to fall down, hinab'genommen, taken down; inf. hinabnehmen. hinab'sinken, to sink down, hinab'steigen, to descend, hinauf fiihren, to conduct up. hinauf gehen, to ascend, hinauf klettern, to climb up. hinauf schauen, to look up. hinauf tragen, to carry up. hinaus'gehen, to go out. hindern, to hinder. fcindurch, throughout. hinein'blicken, to look into, hinein'dringen, to press in, fill, hinein'gucken, to peek into, hinein'schleichen, to steal into, hinein'treten, to walk in. hin'flieBen, to flow on, away, hing, hung; inf. hangen. hin'gehen, to go along. hin'gesetzt (sich), seated himself. Hinsicht,/ ( — , -en), respect, hin'streuen, to scatter about, hinter, behind. hinterlassen, to leave behind, hinun'tersteigen, to descend. hinweg, away. hinzu'fiigen, to add. [proach. hinzu'kommen, to come to (a place) ap- Hirte, m. (-n, -n), shepherd. hob, lifted ; inf. heben. hob — auf, picked up ; inf. auf heben. Hoch ! high ; inierj. Hurrah ! Hof, m. (-es, Hofe), yard, court, hoffen, to hope. Hoffnung,/ ( — , -en), hope. Hoff nungsgriin, n. good hope. Hofleute, pi. courtiers, hoflich, courteous, polite, Hoflichkeit,/. politeness. Hofraum, m. court yard." hoh = hoch, high. 340 NEW GERMAN COURSE Hohe, /. (— , -en), height; in die — werfen, to toss up. hohl, hollow. Hohle,/. ( — , -n), cave, cavern, hold, lovely, charming. holen, to fetch. Holz, u. (-es, Holzer), wood. Holzlage,/. woodroom. horbar, audible. horch ! hark ! listen ! horchen, to listen. hdren, to hear. Hose,/ ( — , -n), pants, pantaloons. Hotel, n. (-s, -s), hotel. hub — hob, lifted ; inf. heben. hiibsch, pretty. Hiigel, m. (-s, — ), hill. Hund, m. (-es, -e), dog. Hunger, m. hunger; — haben, to be hungry; — leiden, to suffer hunger. Hut, m. (-es, Hate), hat ; /. guard, pro- hiiten, to keep, guard. [tection. Hiiter, m. (-s, — ), defender, protector, Hutgeschaft, n. hat store. [keeper. Hutmacher, m. hatter. Hiitte,/. (— , -n), hut. ihr, her, their. ihrige (der, die, das), hers, theirs (87, 8). im = in dem, in the (105). immer, immerdar, always, continually. Inbrunst,/! ardor, deep emotion. indem, while. Indien, India. Inland, n. inland. innehalten, to stop, halt. innere (der, die, das), inner, interior. innig, heartily. ins = in das, in the (105). Inspektor, m. (-s, -en), overseer. interessant, interesting. [self. interessieren (sich), to interest one's irren, to err. Irrtum, m. (-s, Irrtiimer), error, mis- Isabeau, Isabeau. [take. Italien, Italy. ja, yes, surely, indeed, however. Jagdhorn, n. hunting horn. jagen, to hunt. Jahr, n. (-es, -e), year. Jahreswechsel, m. New Year. Jahreswende, /. change of seasons, new year. Jahreszeit,/ season of the year. Jahrmarkt, m. annual fair. Januar, m. January, jawohl, yes indeed. je, ever, always. jeder, (-e, -es), each, every, jederman, everybody. jedoch, however, jemand, anyone. jenseit, on the otner side, jetzig, present. jetzt, now; nocn — , stfll. Johann, John, juchhe ! hurrah 1 Jude, m. (-n, -n), Jew. Jugend,/ youth. Jugendzeit,/ time of youcn. Juli, m. July. jung, young. Jungfrau, /. maiden. Jiingling, m. (-s, -e), youth, jiingst, recently. Juni, m. June. Juwel, n. (-es, -en), jewel. K Kaffee, m. coffee. Kafig, m. (-s, -e), cage. Kahn, m. (-es, Kahne), boat. Kairo, Cairo. [/. empress. Kaiser, m. (-s, — ), emperor; Kaiserin, GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 34> Kaiserreich, n. empire. Kajiite,/. ( — , -n), cabin (of a ship). Kalbsbraten, m. roast veal. kalt, cold. Kalte,/. cold. kam, came ; inf. kommen. Kamerad, m. (-en, -en), comrade. Kamm, m. (-es, Kamme), comb. kammen, to comb. [room. Kammer, f ( — , -n), chamber, bed- Kammerlein, n. little sleeping room. Kampf, m. (-es, Kampfe), struggle. Kanarienvogelchen, n. little canary bird. kann, can ; inf. konnen. Kanne,/. ( — , -n), can. Kanonengebriill, n. roar of cannon. Karte,/. ( — , -n), card. Kartoffel,/. ( — , -n), potato. Kartoffelsalat, m. potato salad. Kastchen, n. (-s, — ), little box. Kasten, m. (-s, — ), box. Katalog, m. (-s, -e), catalogue. Kathchen, Kitty, dim. of Katharine. Katze,/ (— , -n), cat. kaufen, to buy. kaum, scarcely. kehren, to turn. kehrt, turns ; inf. kehren, — nicht wie- der, returns not again. [ an y (87). kein, keine, kein, //. keine, no, not Keller, m. (-s, — ), cellar. Kellner, m. (-s, — ), waiter. kennen, to know ; — lernen, to become acquainted with. kennt, knows ; inf. kennen. Kerl, m. (-s, -e), fellow. Kern, m. (-es, -e), kernel. Kind, n. (-es, -er), child. Kindchen, n. (-s, — ), little child. Kinderchen, pi. little children. Kindergarten, m. kindergarten. Kinderstube, / nursery. kindlich, childish. Kinn, n. (-es, -e), chin. Kirche,/. ( — , -n), church. Kirchhof, m. churchyard, graveyard. Kirschbaum, m. cherry tree. Kirsche,/. ( — , -n), cherry. Klage,/ ( — , -n), complaint. Klagelied, n. mournful song. klagen, to complain, lament. klaglich, sad, mournful. Klang, m. (-es, Klange), sound. klar, clear. Kleid, n. (-es, -er), dress, clothing. klein, little, small. Kleinod, n. (-s, -e), treasure. Klingel,/ (— , -n), little bell. klingeln, to ring (as a little bell). Klingen, n. musical sound. klingen (klang, geklungen), to sound. klirren, to clash, sound aloud. klopfen, to knock. Kluft,/. ( — , Kliifte), chasm, gorge. klug, intelligent. Knabe, m. (-n, -n), boy. knapp, close, abrupt. Knecht, m. (-es, -e), farm servant. Knie, n. (-es, -e), knee. Knopf, m. (-es, Knopfe), button. Knosplein, n. (-s, — ), little bud. kochen, to cook. Kocher, m. (-s, — ), quiver (for arrow). Koffer, m. (-s, — ), trunk. Kohl, m. cabbage. Koln, Cologne (a city). kommen (kam, gekommen), to come. Kommissionar, m. commissioner. Komodiantin,/ comedienne. Konig, m. (-s, -e), king. Konigin,/ ( — , -nen), queen. koniglich, royal. Konigreich, n. kingdom. Konigskind, n. king's child. Kb'nigssohn, m. king's son, prince. Konigs-Standarte, /. royal standard. Konigstochter, f king's daughter. konnen, can, to be able. Kontinent, m. continent. konvenieren, to please, suit. 342 NEW GERMAN COURSE Konversations-Lexikon, n. encyclope- Konzert, n. (-es, -e), concert. [dia. Kopf, m. (-es, Kbpfe), head. Kopfchen, n. (-s, — ), little head. Kopfkissen, n. pillow. kopfschiittelnd, shaking the head. Kopfweh, n. headache. [tion. Korperschaft, / corporation, organiza- Kost,/ food. kostbar, expensive, kosten, to cost ; to taste, kostlich, precious, delightful. Kraft,/. (— , Krafte), strength. Kramerin,/ peddler woman. [(79). krank, sick ; der Kranke, the sick one Krankheit,/. ( — , -en), sickness, [land. Kranz, m. (-es, Kranze), wreath, gar- kranzen, to wreathe, crown. Kraut, n. (-es, Krauter), herb, plant. Kreide,/ chalk, crayon. Kreis, m. (-es, -e), circle, kreuchen = kriechen, to creep. Kreuzer, m. a small silver coin, kriechen (kroch, gekrochen), to creep. Krieg, m. (-es, -e), war. kriegen, to get, obtain ; to make war. Kriegsfall, m. case of war. Krone,/ ( — , -n), crown. Krug, m. (-es, Kriige), pitcher. Kriimchen, n. (-s, — ), little crumb. Kiiche,/ ( — , -n), kitchen. Kuckuck, m. (-s, -e), cuckoo. Kugel,/ (— , -n), ball, bullet. Kuh,/ ( — , Kiihe), cow. kiihl, cool, kiihlen, to cool. Kuhreihen, m. a melody to call cows, kummern, to concern. Kunde, m. (-n, -n), customer. Kunde,/ ( — , -n), intelligence, news, kiinftig, future. Kunst,/ ( — , Kiinste), art, skill. Kupfer, n. copper. kurz, short, shortly. Kiirze,/ brevity. Kurzweil, /. jest, amusement. kiissen, to kiss. Kutscher, m. (-s, — ), coachman. lacheln, to smile. Laden, m. (-s, Laden), store (shop). laden, to load ; invite. lag, lay ; inf. liegen. Lager, n. (-s, — ), couch, camp, resting place ; Lagerbier, n. beer that has lain in storage to improve. Lamm, n. (-es, Lammer), lamb. Lammchen, n. little lamb. Land, n. (-es, Lander), land, country. landen, to land. Landesmark, /. boundary. Landhaus, n. country house, mansion. Landler, m. waltz music. Landmann, m. countryman, farmer. Landvogt, m. governor, lang, long. langen (nach), to reach for. Langeweile,/ weariness, Fr. ennui. langsam, slow, langst, long ago, long since, langweilig, tiresome, lassen, to let, leave, lastig, troublesome. Lastwagen, m. lumber wagon, lateinisch, Latin. Laub, n. (-es), foliage, leaves. Laube,/ ( — , -n), arbor. Lauf, m. (-es, Laufe), course, running, laufen (lief, gelauf en), to run ; herum- — , to run around; kam gelaufen, came running (138, 2). Laune,/ ( — , -n), humor, whim. Laut, m. (-es, -e), sound, laut, loud, aloud ; prep, according to. lauten, to sound ; lautet auf, relates to. lauten, to ring. Leben, n. (-s), life. leben, to live ; lebe hoch ! Hurrah ! — Sie wohl ! farewell ! GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 343 lebhaft, lively. ledig, free, unmarried. leer, empty. legen, to lay. Lehnstuhl, m. arm-chair, Lehrbuch, n. text-book. Lehre,/. ( — , -n), teaching, lesson. lehren, to teach. Lehrer, m. (-s, — ), teacher. Lehrer-Seminar, n. Normal School. lehrreich, instructive. Leib, m. (-es, -er), body. Leibgarde,/ body guard. Leiche,/. ( — , -n), corpse. leicht, light, easy. leichtbeschwingt, light-winged. Leid, n. (-es), harm, hurt; einem ein Leids tun, to hurt, harm one. leiden (litt, gelitten), to suffer ; permit; er leidet an Fieber, he suffers with leider, alas, unfortunately. [fever. leihen (lieh, geliehen), to lend. Leipzig, Leipsic. leise, lightly, softly, leisten, to render; einen Dienst — , to leiten, to lead. [render a service. Lenz, m. (-es, -e), Spring. lernen, to learn, study. Lesebuch, n. reading book. lesen (las, gelesen), to read. Leseiibung, / reading exercise, letzt, last. leuchten, to shine, lighten. Leute, //. people. Licht, n. (-es, -er), light. lieb, dear ; am liebsten, super I. ^/"gern (80, 5); — haben, to love, like. Liebchen, n. beloved one. Liebe,/ love. lieben, to love, like, liebenswiirdig, amiable, lovely. lieblich, lovely. Lieblingshund, m. pet dog. liebreich, lovely. Lied, n. (-es, -er), song, tune. liegen (lag, gelegen), to lie. liegt, lies ; inf. liegen. Lilie,/. (— ,-n), lily. Lilienfinger, m. lily-finger. Limonade,/. lemonade. Linde,/. ( — , -n), linden-tree. Lineal, n. (-s, -e), ruler, straight-edge. Linie,/ ( — , -n), line. link, left ; links, to the left ; ( — han- dig), left-handed. List,/. ( — , -en), trick, art. loben, to praise. Loch, n. (-es, Locher), hole, locken, to lure, entice. Lorbeer, m. (-s, -en), laurel. Lorelei, a fabled sorceress of the Rhine, los, loose, free ; — werden, to get rid of ; gebt ihn — , set him free, loschen, to quench. los'reiBen, to tear away, rescue. Lowe, m. (-n, -n), lion. Luft,/ (— , Liifte), air. liigen (log, gelogen), to tell a lie. Lungenentziindung, / inflammation of the lungs. Lust,/. ( — , Liiste), desire, pleasure, lustig, happy, joyous. Lustspiel, n. comedy. lyrisch, lyric. M machen, to make ; das macht nichts, that is no matter. Macht,/ ( — , Machte), might, power, mag, may ; inf. mogen ; das mag sein, that may be. Mai, m. May (the month). Maid,/ maid. maien, to be like May; ,,weil's Leben mai't," in youth. Mainz, Mayence (a city). Mai, n. (-es, -e), time ; einmal, once, malerisch, picturesque. [said. man, one, they, people ; — sagt, it is 344 NEW GERMAN COURSE mancher (-e, -es), many a ; //. manche, many ; manches, many a thing. manchmal, sometimes. Mandat, n. (-es, -e), command. mangelhaft, deficient. Mann, m. (-es, Manner), man. mannicher, = mancher, many a. Mantel, m. (-s, Mantel), mantle, cloak, Mar,/ tale. [robe. Marchen, n. (-s, — ), legend, fable. Mark,/, mark, the unit of money value. Marmelstein, m. marble. Marmorbild, n. marble statue. Marz, m. March. MaB, n. (-es, -e), measure. maBig, moderate. Material, n. (-s, -e), material. Mathilde, Matilda. matt, faint, exhausted, limp. Matte,/ ( — , -n), mat, greensward. Mauer,/ ( — , -n), wall. [animal). Maul, n. (-es, Mauler), mouth (of an Maultier, n. mule. Maus,/ ( — , Mause), mouse. Mauseturm, m. mouse-tower. Mecklenburg, a German state. Mecklenburger, m. a citizen of Mecklen- Meer, n. (-es, -e), sea, ocean. [burg. mehr, more. mehren, to increase. meiden (mied, gemieden), to avoid. mein, my ; der, die, das meinige, mine. (87, 8). meinen, to mean, think, say. Meinung, / ( — , -en), meaning, inten- tion, opinion. meist = meistenteils, for the most part ; generally. Meister, tn. (-s, — ), master. Melodei = Melodie,/. (— , -n), melody. Mensch, m. (-en, -en), man, human being. Menschenmenge, / crowd of people. merken, to observe. messen (maB, gemessen), to measure; sich — mit, to be a match for, to be Messer, n. (-s, — ), knife. [equal to. Messing, n. brass. Meuterei,/ ( — , -en), mutiny. Mignon,/ favorite, darling. Milch,/ milk, militarisch, military. mir, to me (82, 1). MiB^eschick, n. misfortune, mit'bringen, to bring with one. Mitglied, n. member. Mitleid, n. pity, sympathy. mit'nehmen, to take with one. [dinner. Mittag, m. noon ; zu — essen, to eat mit'teilen, to inform, impart. Mittelfinger, m. middle finger. mittelmaBig, middling good. Mittelpunkt, 771. central point, center, mitten, in the midst. Mittwoch, m. Wednesday. mobliert, furnished (as a house). Mode,/ ( — , -n), fashion; Frau — , dame Fashion. modern, modern, mogen, may. moglich, possible ; moglichst warm, as warm as possible. [nels. Mokkabohne, / Mocha beans or ker- Mokkakaffee, m. Mocha coffee. Monat, m. (-s, -e), month ; vor sechs Monaten, six months ago. Mond, 771. (-es, -e), moon. Montag, m. Monday. Monument, 71. (-s, -e), monument. Mops, m. (-es, -e), pug dog. Mord, m. (-es, -e), murder. Morder, m. (-s, — ), murderer. Morgen, m. (-s, — ), morning; heute — , this morning. morgen, to-morrow; — friih, early to- morrow morning. Morgengesang, m. morning song. Morgenrot, n. morning-red, dawn, morgens = des Morgens, of a morning, in the morning. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 345 morgenschon, beautiful as the morning. Morgenstrahl, m. morning light. Morgenstunde, / morning hour, miide, tired. Miihe,/ ( — , -n), trouble, pains. Muhme,/. ( — , -n), aunt, nurse. Miinchen, Munich (a city). Mund, m. (-es, Miinder), mouth. Miindlein, n. (-s, — ), little mouth. Miindung, /. ( — , -en), mouth (of a Miinster, m. (-s, — ), cathedral, [river). munter, lively. [coin. Miinze,/. ( — , -n), coin ; Gold — , gold murmeln, to -murmur, mutter. Museum, »/ (-s, Museen), museum. Musik,/ music. [of music. Musik-Konservatorium,?z. conservatory Musik-Unterricht, m. instruction in musizieren, to make music. [music. muB, must ; inf. miissen. miissen, must. muBig, idle, indolent. Muster, n. (-s, — ), sample. Musterwort, n. specimen word. Musterzeitung,/. fashion paper. Mut, m. (-es), spirit, courage. Mutter,/. ( — , Mutter), mother. Mylord, my Lord. Myrte,/ ( — , -n), myrtle. N nach, after, to, according to ; — und — , by degrees ; weinen — , to weep for. Nachbar, m. (-s, -n) ; Nachbarin, /. ( — , -nen), neighbor. [hood. Nachbarschaft, /. ( — , -en), neighbor- nachdem, after. Nachen, m. (-s, — ), boat. NachguB, m. another cup. nachlaBig, careless. Nachmittag, m. afternoon. Nachmittagsspazierritt, afternoon ride (on horseback). [tion. Nachricht,/. ( — , -en), news, informa- nachst, nearest, next. Nacht, / (— , Nachte), night. nachtlich, nightly. Nachtlied, n. evening song. Nadel, / ( — , -n), needle. Nadelbiichslein, n. little needle-box. nahe, near; naher, comp. ^/"nahe. nahm, took ; inf. nehmen. Nahnadel,/. sewing needle. nahrhaft, nourishing. Nahrung,/ food, nourishment. Name, m. (-ns, -n), name; nur dem Namen nach, only by name, namens, named. Namensfest, n. birthday. namlich, namely. Narr, m. (-en, -en), fool; einen zum Narren halten, to make a fool of one. narrish, foolish. naB, wet. naBkalt, damp and cold, national, national. [ment. National-Denkmal, n. national monu- Natur,/ ( — , -en), nature. natiirlich, natural, of course. Nebel, m. (-s, — ), fog, mist. Nebelstreif, m. streak of mist. neben, near, by the side of. Nebensatz, m. dependent clause. neblich, misty, foggy. nehmen (nahm, genommen), to take. nein, no. Nelke,/ (— , -n), pink. [call. nennen (nannte, genannt), to name, Nest, n. (-es, -er), nest. Netz, n. (-es, -e), net, web. [new. neu, new; etwas Neues, something neugierig, curious, anxious. Neuigkeit,/. ( — , -en), news. Neujahr, n. New Year. neulich, recently, the other day. nicht, not ; nichts, nothing. Nichtraucher, m. non-smoker. Nickel, «. nickel. nicken, to nod. 346 NEW GERMAN COURSE nie, niemals, never, nieder, down. nie'derbeugen, to bow down, nie'derneigen, to bow down, [sit down, nie'dersetzen, to set down ; (sich), to nie'derstoBen, to knock down, nie'derwerfen, to throw down, niedrig, low, humble. niemals, never. niemand, nobody, no one. nimm, imperative of nehmen, to take. noch, yet, still; — nicht, not yet; — so viel, ever so much. nochmals, once more, norddeutsch, North-German. Not,/. ( — , Note), need, distress. notig, necessary. Novellenschreiber, m. novel writer. nun, now ; — gut, very well. nur, only. NuB,/. (— , Niisse), nut. niitzlich, useful. Ob, if, whether, although ; als — , as if; — auch, although. Oben, above, up there. oberherrlich, superior. Obgleich, although. Obst, n. fruit. Obstbaum, m. fruit tree. Obstgarten, m. orchard. Oder, /. a river of Germany. Oder, or. Ofen, m. (-s, — ), stove, often, open, offentlich, public, offnen, to open. oft, often. Ohne, without. [foolish. Ohnewitz, a name meaning without wit, Ohr, n. (-es, -en), ear. Opernhaus, n. opera-house, ordentlich, decently. Ordnung,/. ( — , -en), order. Ort, m. (-es, Orter or Orte), place. Osterreich, Austria. Ostsee,/ the Baltic sea. Paar, n. (-es, -e), pair ; ein paar, a few. Pacht,/. ( — , -en), rent, lease. Pachter, m. (-s, — ), farmer, tenant. Pacht geld, n. rent-money (for land). Packet, n. (-es, -e), package. Palast, m. (-es, Palaste), palace. Papier, n. (-es, -e), paper. Paradies, n. paradise. Park, m. (-es, -e), park. Passagier, m. passenger. passen, to fit, suit. Patin,/. ( — , -nen), godmother. Patron, m. (-s, -e), patron, fellow. Pause,/ (— , -n), pause. Pension,/ ( — , -en), boarding house. Person,/ ( — , -en), person. Personlichkeit,/ ( — , -en), personage. Pfarrer, m. (-s, — ), pastor, preacher. pfeifen (pfiff, gepfiffen), to whistle. Pfeil, m. (-es, -e), arrow. Pferd, n. (-es, -e), horse. Pfirsich, m. (-s, -e), peach. Pfirsichbaum, m. peach-tree. Pflanze,/ ( — , -n), plant, pflanzen, to plant. [tomed to. pflegen, to take care of; to be accus- Pflicht,/ (— , -en), duty. Pfund, n. (-es), pound. Pike,/ (— , -n), pike. Plan, m. (-es, Plane), plan, plattdeutsch, low German. Platz, m. (-es, Platze), place, spot ; — nehmen, to take a seat, plotzlich, sudden. pochen, to rap, knock. Politik,/ politics. politisch, political. Polizei,/ police. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 347 Polizeidiener, m. policeman. Polizist, m. policeman. Popanz, m. bugbear, scarecrow. Portier, m. (-s, -s), porter, door-keeper. Portion,/ ( — , -en), portion. Porto, n. postage. Post,/. (— , -en), post, mail; mit der — , by mail. Postamt, n post office. Postanweisung,/ post office order. Postmarke,/ postage stamp. prachtvoll, splendid. Pranger, m. (-s, — ), pillory. pranget, shines, glows ; inf. prangen. Prasentierteller, m. server. Preis, m. (-es, -e), prize, price. PreuBen, Prussia. preuBisch, Prussian. Privatschule,/ private school. Probe,/ ( — , -n), test, proof, rehearsal. Prosit ! (Lat.) much good may it do you ! priifen, to examine, test. Priifung,/ ( — , -en), test, rehearsal. Puff ! bang ! Pult, n. (-es, -e), desk. Punktum, enough said, that is all. Purpur, m. purple. Purpurrose,/ purple rose. Q Quadrat, n. (-es, -e), square. Quartier, n. (-es, -e), quarters (rooms). Quell, m. (-s, -e), spring. R Rabe, m. (-n, -n), raven. Rad, n. (-es, Rader), wheel. Rand, m. (-es, Rander), edge, brink. Rang, m. (-es, Range), rank. rasch, quick. rasen, to rage, go mad. rastlos, restless, [gen, to take counsel. Rat, m. (-es, Rate), counsel; — pfle- Ratsel, n. (-s, — ), puzzle, riddle. Raubtier, n. beast of prey. Rauch, m. (-es), smoke ; — coupS, rauchen, to smoke. [smoking car. Raum, m. (-es, Raume), space, room. rauschen, to rustle. Realgymnasium, n. same as Real- schule with Latin added. Realschule,/ a school of practical arts, sciences and modern languages. Re'aumur, a thermometer now gener- ally superseded in Germany by the Celsius (see p. 304). Rechenbuch, n. arithmetic, [count, bill. Rechnung, / ( — , -en), reckoning, ac- recht, right, real; — haben, to be right ; rechts, to the right. Recht, n. (-es, -e), right ; euch soil — werden, you shall have justice. Rede, / ( — , -n), speech, talk; — stehen, to answer for. reden, to speak, to say. redlich, honest. Kegel,/ (— , -n), rule. regelmafiig, regular. Regen, m. rain. Regenbogen, m. rainbow. Regenschirm, m. umbrella. Regentropfen, m. raindrop. Regenwasser, n. rain-water. regieren, to govern, rule. Regierung,/ ( — , -en), government. Regierungsform,/ form of government. Regiment, n. government. regnen, to rain. Reich, n. (-es, -e,) kingdom ; adj. rich. reichen, to reach. [empire. Reichskanzler, m. chancellor of the Reichstag, m. imperial diet. Reigen {or Reihen), m. (-s, — ), a dance with song and music. rein, clear, pure. Reis, n. (-es, -er), twig, branch. Reise,/ ( — , -n), journey. Reiseanzug, m. traveling suit. 348 NEW GERMAN COURSE Reisegeld, n. traveling money, fare. Reisende, m. (-n, -n), traveler. Reisige, m. (-n, -n), trooper. reiBen, (riB, gerissen), to tear. reiten (ritt, geritten), to ride. Reiter, Reitersmann, m. horseman. reizen, to charm. Reliquien, pi. relics. rennen (rannte, gerannt), to run. Republik,/. ( — , -en), republic. Respekt, m. (-es), respect, regard. Reverenz,/. reverence. [river. Rhein, m. Rheinstrom, m. the Rhine Rheinreise, /. Rheintour,/ the tour of Richter, m. (-s, — ), judge, [the Rhine. Richtung,/. ( — , -en), direction. rief , called ; inf. rufen. Riese, m. (-n, -n), giant. Rigiberg, in. name of a mountain. Rindfleisch, n. beef. Ring, m. (-es, -e), ring. Ringfinger, m. ring-finger. rinnen (rann, geronnen), to run, flow. Rinnstein, m. gutter. RiB, m. (-sses, -sse), crack, opening. Ritter, m. (-s, — ), knight. Rittergut, m. landed estate. ritterlich, knightly. Ritterwort, n. word of honor. Rock, m. (-es, Rocke), coat. Rolle,/ ( — , -n), roll, role (in a play). rollen, to roll. Roman, m. (-s, -e), romance. romantisch, romantic. Rose,/. ( — , -n), rose. Rosenband, n. rose-wreath. rosig, rosy. Rb'slein, n. (-s, — ), little rose. RoB, n. (-sses, -sse), horse. Rostbraten, m. roast beef. rot, red. rotlich, reddish. Riicken, m. (-s, — ), back. Riickkunft, /. return. Ruf, m. (-es, -e), call rufen, to call. Rune,/ rest. ruhig, quiet. rund, round. Russe, m. (-n, -n), Russian. RuBland, Russia. S Saal, m. (-es, Sale), hall. Sache,/ ( — , -n), thing. sachlich, neuter (gender). Sachse, m. (-n, -n), Saxon. Sachsen, Saxony. saen, to sow (seed). sagen, to say, tell. sagenhaft, fabled. sah, saw ; inf. sehen. [instrument). Saite, / ( — , -n), string (of a musical Salat, m. (-es, -e), salad, lettuce. Salz, n. (-es, -e), salt. Same(n), m. (-ns, -n), seed. sammeln, to gather, collect. Samstag, m. Saturday. sanft, soft, gentle. sang, sang ; inf. singen. sank, sank ; inf. sinken. Sans Souci (French), without care, the name of a palace at Potsdam. satt, full ; — werden, to have enough. Satz, m. (-es, Satze), sentence, sauer, sour, hard. Saule,/ (— , -n), column, sauseln, to rustle. Scene {or Szene),/ ( — , -n), scene. Schachtel,/ ( — , -n), box. Schade(n), m. (-ns, Schaden), harm. Schadel, m. (-s, — ), skull. [matter. schaden, to harm ; schadet nichts, no schadigen, to harm. Schaf , n. (-es, -e), sheep, schaffen, to do, create. [Schaferin. Schafer, m. (-s, — ), shepherd; fern. Schaffner, m. (-s, — ), conductor, schalkhaft, roguishly. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 349 Schalmei,/. ( — , -en), a reedpipe. S chart jahr, n. leap-yt ar. Scham,/ shame. Schande,/. shame, disgrace. scharen v sich), to gather about one. scharf, sharp. Schatten, m. (-s, — ), shadow, shade. Schatz, m. (-es, Schatze), treasure. schauen, to see, look at, schau an ! see ! Schaukelbrett, m. swinging board. Schaum, m. (-es, Schaume), foam. Schauspiel, n. drama, play. scheiden (geschied, schieden, to sepa- rate, depart. [to appear. scheinen (schien, geschienen), to shine, schellen, to ring (a bell). Schemel, m. (-s, — ), foot-stool. Schere,/ ( — , -n), shears; die kleine — , the scissors. scheren, to shear ; to care about ; was schert mien das, what do I care for that. Scherenschleifer, m. shears -grinder. Scherz, m. (-es, -e), joke. scherzen, to joke, jest. Scheune, / ( — , -n), barn. schicken, to send. schieben (schob, geschoben), to shove. S chief ertaf el,/, slate. schien, seemed ; inf. scheinen. schieSen (schoB, geschossen), to shoot. Schiff, n. (-es, -e), ship, boat. Schiffer, m. (-s, — ), boatman. Schiffergesang, m. boatman's song. Schifflein, n. (-s, — ), little boat. Schild, m. (-es, -e), shield; n. (-es, -er), sign-board. Schildwache,/. guard, sentinel. schimmern, to shine. Schimpf, m. (-es, -e), disgrace. schimpfen, to insult. Schirm, m. screen ; Regen — , umbrella. Schlacht,/. (— , -en), battle. Schlaf, m. (-es), sleep. schlafen (schlief, geschlafen), to sleep. Schlafer, m. (-s, — ), sleeper. Schlaf kammerlein, n. little bedroom. Schlaf zimmer, n. bedroom. [strike. schlagen (schlug, geschlagen), to beat, schlecht, bad. schleichen (schlich, geschlichen), to sneak ; hinein — , to steal into. Schleier, m. (-s, — ), veil. Schlesien, m. Silesia. [close. schlieBen (schloB, geschlossen), to Schlitten, m. (-s, — ), sleigh, sled. SchloB, 11. (-es, Schlosser), castle. Schluck, m. (-es, -e), sip, swallow. Schmaus, m. (-es, -e), feast; einen — halten, to make a feast. schmecken, to taste. schmeichelhaft, nattering. schmeicheln, to flatter. Schmerz, m. (-es, -en), pain, trouble. schnarren, to rattle. [snow-drop. Schnee, m. (-s), snow; — glockchen, schneiden (schnitt, geschnitten), to cut. Schneider, m. (-s, — ), tailor; f. -in. schneien, to snow, schnell, quick. schnitzen, to carve. [ding. Schokaladen-Pudding, chocolate pud schon, already. schon, beautiful, fine; very well. Schonheit,/. (— , -en), beauty. Schopfer, m. (-s, — ), creator. 'SchoB, m. (-es, SchoBe), lap. Schottland, n. Scotland. Schrecken, m. (-s), terror, horror. schrecklich, dreadful. Schreibbuch, n. writing book. [write. schreiben (schrieb, geschrieben), to Schreiben, n. (-s, — ), writing; letter. schreien (schrie, geschrieen), to cry, Schrein, m. (-es, -e), coffin, [scream. schreiten (schritt, geschritten), to step, stride. Schrift, / ( — , -en), writing ; Schrif- ten, pi. books, works. 35o NEW GERMAN COURSE Schriftstiick, n. document. Schritt, m. (-es, -e), step. schroff, steep. Schuh, m. (-es, -e), shoe. Schulbesuch, m. school attendance. Schuld,/. ( — , -en), debt, guilt. schuldig, guilty, indebted. Schuldigkeit, /. (— , -en), indebted- ness, debt. Schule,/ ( — , -n), school. Schiiler, m. (-s, — ), scholar, pupil, Schurke, m. (-n, -n), rascal. Schufi, m. (-sses, Schiisse), shot. Schustersfrau,/. shoemaker's wife. schiitteln, to shake. Schiitze, m. (-n, -n), hunter, archer. schiitzen, to shelter, defend. Schiitzenhof, m. meeting place for schwach, weak. [marksmen. Schwalbe,/. (— , -n), swallow. Schwalbenpaar, n. pair of swallows. schwamm, swam ; inf. schwimmen. schwank, flexible, wavering. schwanken, to stagger. schwarz, black. schwatzen, to chatter, prattle. Schweif, m. (-es, -e), tail, [be silent. schweigen (schwieg, geschwiegen), to schweigend, silently. Schwein, n. (-es, -e), pig, swine. Schweiz,/. Switzerland. schwer, heavy, difficult, severe. Schwert, n. (-es, -er), sword. Schwertgeklirr, n. clang of swords. Sch wester,/ ( — , -n), sister. schwierig, difficult. schwimmen (schwamm, geschwom- men), to swim. Schwimmer, m. (-s, — ), swimmer. schwinden (schwand, geschwunden), to vanish, disappear. schwmdlich, dizzy. Schwindsucht,/. consumption. Schwur, m. (-es, Schwiire), vow, oath. Sedan, a city in France. See, tn. (-s, -n), lake ; /. ( — , -n), sea. Seehafen, m. ocean harbor. Seele,/. ( — , -n), soul. Seereise,/ sea voyage. Segen, m. (-s, — ), blessing, segnen, to bless. sehen (sah, gesehen), to see. [osity. Sehenswiirdigkeit, /. ( — , -en), curi- Sehnen, n. longing. Sehnsucht,/ longing. sehr, very, very much, sei, imperative of sein, to be. Seide, / silk. Seife,/. ( — , -n), soap. sein, seine, sein, //. seine ; der, die, das seinige, his (87, 1-8). [weeks. seit, since ; — drei Wochen, for three seitdem, since. Seite,/. ( — , -n), side, page, seiber, self, myself ; sieh doch — , see selbst, self. [for yourself, selig, blessed, happy, senden (sandte, gesandt), to send Sendung,/. (— , -en), package, senkrecht, perpendicular. Senne, m. (-n, -n), herdsman. Service, n. service (dishes). setzen, to set, put ; (sich), to take a seat. sicher, sure, safe, certain, sichern, to assure. siedend, boiling; inf. sieden. Siedepunkt, m. boiling point. Sieger, m. (-s, — ), victor, conqueror. Sigrist, m. sexton. Silber, n. silver. singen (sang, gesungen), to sing, sinken (sank, gesunken), to sink. Sinn, m, (-es, -e), mind, sense, thought, sinnen (sann, gesonnen), to meditate. Sitte,/ ( — , -en), custom, manners, sitzen (saB, gesessen), to sit. Sklave, m. (-n, -n), slave. SO, thus, so. sodaB, so that. soeben, just now. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 351 sofort, at once, immediately. sogleich, immediately. Sohn, m. (-es, Sonne), son. solcher (-e, -es),//. solche, such. Soldat, m. (-en, -en), soldier. soldatisch, soldier-like. sollen, shall. Sommer, m. (-s, — ), summer. Sommerresidenz,/. summer residence. Sommerzeit,/". summer time. sonderbar, strange, peculiar. sondern, but (109, 4). Sonnabend, m. Saturday. Sonne,/ ( — , -n), sun. sonnig, sunny. Sonntag, m. Sunday. [what else ? sonst, else, otherwise ; was — noch ? Sorge,/. ( — , -n), care, anxiety. sorgen, to provide for. sorgsam, careful. soviel, as much, as well. Spanien, Spain. spannen, to strain, make tense ; den Hahn — , to cock a gun. Spannung,/ ( — , -en), tension, excite- Spargel, m. (-s, — ), asparagus, [ment. SpaB, m. (-es, SpaBe), joke. spat, late ; spater, later. spazieren, to go for pleasure. Spaziergang, m. pleasure walk. Spazierritt, m. pleasure ride. Spazierstock, m. walking-stick, cane. Speise,/. ( — , -n), food. Speisekarte, / bill of fare, speisen, to -eat. Speisezimmer, n. dining-room. Spektakel, m. (-s, — ), noise, show. Spiegel, m. (-s, — ), mirror. spiegelklar, very clear. Spiel, n. (-es, -e), play. Spielkamerad, m. playmate. Spielraum, m. room for a play, space. SpieB, m. (-es, -e), spear. Spinne,/. ( — , -n), spider, spinnen (spann, gesponnen), to spin. Spinnrad, n. spinning wheel. sprach, spoke, inf. sprechen. Sprache,/. ( — , -n), language, speech. sprang, sprang, jumped ; inf. springen. sprechen (sprach, gesprochen), to speak. [exercise. Sprechiibung,/ ( — , -en), conversation Sprichwort, n. proverb. sprieBen (sproB, gesprossen), to sprout, springen (sprang, gesprungen), to spring, jump. [ing. Spruch, m. (-es, Spriiche), speech, say- spiilen, to rinse, spiiren, to feel, trace. Staat, m. (-es, -en), state. Staatsmann, m. statesman. stach, stung ; inf. stechen. Stadt,/. (— , Stadte), city. Stadtteil, ni. part of the city. stahl, stole ; inf. stehlen. Stahlfeder,/ steel pen. Staket, n. (-s, -e), picket fence. Stammbuch, n. album. stammen, to originate. Standuhr,/. shelf -clock. Stange,/ ( — , -n), pole. [hard. stark, strong ; es regnet — , it rains Statt,/ place, stead, statt, instead of. stechen (stach, gestochen), to sting. stecken, to stick, hide. [chasm). Steg, m. (-es, -e), footplank (over a stehen (stand, gestanden), to stand. stehlen (stahl, gestohlen), to steal, steif, stiff. [cend. steigen (stieg, gestiegen), to rise, as- steigern, to raise, compare. steil, steep. Stein, ni. (-es, -e), stone. Stelle,/. ( — , -n), place, spot, stellen, to place, set. Stellung,/. (— , -en), position. Stern, m. (-es, -e), star, stets, always, continually, [the pansy. Stiefmiitterchen, n. little stepmother, 352 NEW GERMAN COURSE stieg — ab, descended ; inf. ab'steigen. Stil, m. (-es, -e), style. still, still. Stille,/. silence. still'schweigen, to keep silence. Stimme,/. ( — , -n), voice. Stock, m. (-es, Stocke), stick, cane, story of a house. Stoff, m. (-es, -e), stuff, material, stolz, proud. storen, to disturb. Strafe,/. ( — , -n), punishment. Strahl, m. (-es, -en), ray. strahlen, to shine, radiate. Strand, m. (-es, -e), strand, shore. Strafie,/ (— , -n), street. StraSenbahn,/ street railroad. StraBen-Toilette,/. street costume. Strauch, m. (-es, Straucher), shrub. streben, to strive, [strike to the ground. strecken, to stretch ; zu Boden — , to Streich, m. (-es, -e), stroke, blow. streiten (stritt, gestritten), to quarrel, darum — , to quarrel about it. streng, severe. Strohhut, tn. straw hat. [river. Strom, m. (-es, Strome), stream, a large stromabwarts, down stream. Strumpfband, n. garter. Stubenmadchen, n. servant maid. Stuck, n. (-es, -e), piece. Stiickchen, n. (-s, — ), little piece. Student, m. (-en, -en), student, studieren, to study. Stuhl, tn. (-es, Stiihle), chair, stumm, dumb, silent. Stunde,/. ( — , -n), hour. stundenlang, for hours. Sturm, m. (-es, Stiirme), storm, stiirmisch, stormy. stiirzen, to rush, plunge, overthrow, stiitzen, to lean, support, suchen, to seek, siidwarts, southwards. Bummen, to hum. Siinde,/ ( — , -n), sin. [volume. Supplementband, m. supplementary siiB, sweet. System, n. (-s, -e), system. Tabaksdose,/ tobacco-box. Tadel, m. blame, fault. Tafel,/ (— , -n), table, tablet; black- board ; bei — , at dinner, [one day. Tag, vi. (-es, -e), day; eines Tages, taglich, daily. Tal, n. (-es, Taler), valley. Tanne, /. (— , -n), Tannenbaum, m. fir tree, Christmas tree. tanzen, to dance. tapfer, brave. Tasche,/ ( — , -en), pocket. Taschentuch, n. pocket handkerchief. Taschenuhr,/ watch. Tasse,/. ( — , -n), cup. [fact. Tat, / ( — , -en), deed ; in der — , in tat, did ; inf. tun. Taube,/. ( — , -n), dove. taumeln, to stagger. tauschen, to mislead, deceive. Teil, m. (-es, -e), part. teilen, to divide, share. See mit'teilen. Tellerlein, n. little plate. Temperanzler, m. (-s, — ), teetotaler. Terasse,/ ( — , -n) terrace. [will. Testament, n. (-es, -e), testament, teuer, dear. Theater, n. (-s, — ), theatre. tief, deep. Tiefe,/. (— , -n), depth. Tier, n. (-es, -e), animal. Tierchen, n. (-s, — ), little animal. Tiergarten, m. zoological garden. Tinte,/. ( — , -n), ink. Tisch, m. (-es, -e), table. Tischlein, n. (-s, -e), little table. Titel, m. (-s, — ), title. Tochter,/. ( — , Tochter), daughter. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 353 Tdchterlein, «. little daughter. Tod, m. (-es), death. Ton, m. (-es, Tone), tone. [gate. Tor, m. (-en, -en), fool; n. (-es, e), tot, dead. Totenbahr,/ death bier. Tour,/. ( — , -en), tour. Tracht,/. (— , -en), costume, traf , hit, met ; inf. treffen. trage, lazy, idle. tragen (trug, getragen), to carry, wear. Trane,/ (— , -n), tear. trauen, to trust, venture. Trauerkleid, n. mourning dress. trauern, to mourn, to droop. Traum, m. (-es, Traume), dream, traumen, to dream, traun, in truth, really. traurig, sad. treffen (traf, getroffen), to hit, meet, trefflich, excellent. [ry on, do. treiben (trieb, getrieben), to drive, car- trennbar, separable. trennen, to separate, divide. Trennung,/. ( — , -en), separation. Treppe, /. (— , -n), stairs, die — hin- auf , up stairs ; die — hinab, down treu, faithful. [stairs. Treue,/. faithfulness. treuliebend, truly loving, trinken (trank, getrunken), to drink. trocken, dry. Trommel,/ ( — , -n), drum. Trompete,/ (— , -n), trumpet. Tropfen, m. (-s, — ), drop. Trost, m. consolation, trotz, in spite of. trotzen, to defy. triiben, to soil, roil. Tuch, 11. (-es, Tiicher), cloth, shawl. Tugend,/ ( — , -en), virtue. Tulpe,/ (— , -n), tulip. tun (tat, getan), to do. Tiir, (— , -en), door, tiirmen, to tower, mount high. Turmuhr,/ tower-clock. Tyrann, m. (-en, -en), tyrant. U Ubel, n. (-s, — ), evil, indisposition. iiben, to practice. iiber, over, above, across ; for. iiberall, everywhere. [overeat. iiberfressen (iiberfraB, iiberfressen\ to iibergeben (iibergab, iibergeben), to de- iiberhaupt, in general. [liver over. Ubermacht,/ superior power. iiberreichen, to deliver, hand over. Uberrock, m. overcoat. [to overflow. ii'berschwellen (schwoll, geschwollen), Uberschwemmung, / flood. ii'bersetzen, to set across. iiberset'zen, to translate. iibertreffen (iibertraf, iibertroffen), to iibertrieben, excessive. [surpass iiberzeugen, to convince. iibrig, over, remaining. Ubung,/ ( — , -en), exercise. Ufer, n. (-s, — ), bank (of a river). Uhr,/ ( — , -en), watch, clock. um, around ; — zu, in order to ; — willen, for the sake of. umarmen, to embrace. um'drehen, to turn over. umflattern, to flutter about. Umgebung,/ ( — , -en), surroundings. umgiirten, to gird on. Umhangtuch, n. shawl. umher, around. umkranzen, to wreathe. um'sehen (sah, gesehen) (sich), to umsonst, in vain. [look about. Umstand, m. (-es, Umstande), cere- mony, circumstance. [dence. Unabhangigkeit, / ( — , -en), indepen- unartig, naughty. Unbedacht, m. thoughtlessness. unbegrenzt, unbounded. unbekannt. unknown. 354 NEW GERMAN COURSE unbestimmt, indefinite. und, and. ungebildet, uncultivated. ungeduldig, impatient. ungefahr, about. [monster. Ungeheuer, n. (-s, — ), atrocious thing, Ungemach, n. (-es, -e), misfortune. Ungliick, n. misfortune. ungliicklich, unfortunate. Universitat,/. ( — , -en), university. Unkosten,//. expenses. unmutig, ill-humored. unrecht, wrong. Unschuld,/ innocence. unschuldig, innocent. unser (-e, — ),//. unsere, our; der, die, das unsrige, ours. unten, below. unter, under. unterbrechen (unterbrach, unterbro- chen), to interrupt. unterhalten (unterhielt, unterhalten), to entertain, converse. Unterhaltung, /. ( — , -en), conversa- unterirdisch, subterranean. [tion. unterliegen (unterlag, unterlegen), to be defeated. [men. unternahm, undertook ; if if. unterneh- unternehmen (unternahm, unternom- men), to undertake. [ m g- Unternehmung,/ ( — , -en), undertak- Unterricht, m. (-s), instruction. Unterrichtsmethode, /. method of in- struction. Unterschied, m. (-es, -e), difference. untertanig, humble. un'tertauchen, to dive. untrennbar, inseparable. unverletzt, unharmed. unverschamt, impudent, shameless. unverstandlich, unintelligible. unweit, not far from. Uri, name of a Swiss canton. Urlaub, m. leave of absence, furlough. Ursprung, m. (-es, Urspriinge), origin. Variation,/. (— , -en), variation. Vase,/ ( — , -n), vase. Vater, m. (-s, Vater), father. Vaterland, n. fatherland. Veilchen, n. (-s, — ), violet. verachten, to despise. Verachtung,/. disrespect. verarbeiten, to use up, employ. verbessern, to repair ; sich — , to cor- rect one's self. [ment. Verbesserung, / (— , -en), improve- verbeugen (sich), to bow. [tion. Verbeugung, / ( — , -en), bow, saluta- verbinden (verband, verbunden), to bind up. verbindlich, kindly; ich danke ver- bindlichst, many thanks. verborgen, concealed ; im Verborgenen, in concealment. [brennen. verbrannt, burned (cremated) ; inf. ver- Verbrechen, n. (-s, — ), crime. Verbrecher, m. (-s, — ), criminal. verdanken, to owe, be indebted to. Verderben, n. destruction ; v. to spoil ; perish. verdienen, to deserve, merit, earn. verehren, to honor, revere. vereinigt, united. Verfasser, m. (-s, — ), author. verfehlen, to miss. verf iigen (sich) to go, betake one's self. Verfiigung, / ( — , -en), disposal, ser- vice. vergangen, past ; inf. vergehen. vergebens, vergeblich, in vain. vergessen (vergaB, vergessen), to for- vergeBlich, forgetful. [get. vergiB, forget ; imp. of vergessen. VergiBmeinnicht, n. forget-me-not. Vergniigen, n. (-s, — ), pleasure. Vergniigungsort, m. pleasure resort. vergraben, buried. verhaften, to arrest. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 355 verheiraten, to marry. verkaufen, to sell. verkauft, sold; inf. verkaufen. verkehren, to converse, associate with Verlagsbuchhandlung,/ book publish ing house. [quire Verlangen, n. desire ; v. to demand, re verlassen (verlieB, verlassen), to leave Verleger, m. (-s, — ), publisher. verletzen, to harm, wound, violate sich — , to hurt one's self. verlieren (verlor, verloren), to lose. verlor, lost ; inf. verlieren. [lost. verloren, lost; — gegangen, (gone) Verlust, m. (-es, -e), loss. vermeiden (vermied, vermieden), to shun, avoid. vermieten, to let (lodgings). vernehmen (vernahm, vernommen), verodet, deserted. [to hear. Verrat, m. treason. Verrater, m. (-s, — ), tiaitor. verrenken, to sprain, verriickt, crazy, insane. Vers, m. (-es, -e), verse. versagen, to refuse. verschaffen, to provide. verscheuchen, to drive away, verschieden, different. verschlingen (verschlang, verschlun- gen, to swallow, devour, verschwand, vanished, disappeared ; inf. verschwinden. verschwinden (verschwand, ver- schwunden), to disappear, vanish, versohnen, to reconcile. versprach, promised ; inf. versprechen. versprechen (versprach, versprochen), to promise. verstanden, understood ; inf. verstehen. verstandlich, intelligible. [self. verstecken (sich), to hide, conceal one's verstehen (verstand, verstanden), to understand. Versuch, m. (-es, -e), attempt, trial. versuchen, to try. verteilen, to divide. vertraut, acquainted, trusted. vertreten (vertrat, vertreten), to repre- verursachen, to cause. [sent. verwahren, to lay up, save, guard, keep. verwegen, bold, daring; Verwegener! m. bold one. verwelken, to wither, wilt. verwenden (verwandte, verwandt), to use, employ. Verwickelung, / (— , -en), complica- tion, plot. verwiinschen, to bewitch, enchant. verwiinscht ! intejj. confound it 1 verzagt, in despair. verzaubern, to enchant, bewitch. verzeihlich, pardonable. Verzweiflung,/ despair. Vetter, m. (-s, -n), cousin. Vieh, n. (-es), cattle. viel, much ; viele, many. vielleicht, perhaps. vierspannig, with four horses. Vierteljahr, n. quarter of a year. Vogel, m. (-s, Vogel), bird ; —nest, n. bird's nest. Voglein, n. (-s, — ), little bird. Vogt, m. (-es, Vbgte), governor. Volk, n. (-es, Volker), people. Volksschule, / public school. voll, full. vollkommen, complete. Vollmacht,/. ( — , -en), authority. vollstandig, complete. von, of, from ; — Eisen, made of iron. vor, before. voraus, in advance. vorbei'fahren, to pass by. vorbei'fliehen, to flee past. vorbei'gehen, to pass by. vordere, front. vor'fahren, to drive in front of. vorgehalten, held before (one) ; inf. vor- halten, 356 NEW GERMAN COURSE vorig, former ( — e Woche), last week. vor'kommen, to occur, call, visit. vor'legen, to lay before (one), to show. Vorliebe,/. taste, passion, vorratig, ready, on hand. vor' setzei: , to set before (one). vortrefflich, excellent, very well, vorii'bergehen, to pass by. vorwarts, forward ; — heiBt es hier, forward is the word here, vor'zeigen, to exhibit, display, vor'ziehen, to prefer. Vulkan, m. (-es, -e), volcano. W wachsen (wuchs, gewachsen), to grow. Wacht,/. ( — , -en), watch ; — halten, to stand guard. Wachter, m. (-s, — ), watcher, guard, wacker, brave. Waffenknecht, m. man-at-arms. Wagen, m. (-s, — ), wagon, carriage. wagen, to venture. wahlen, to choose. Wahlrecht, n. right of suffrage. Wahn, m. (-es), delusion. wahnsinnig, insane. wahr, true ; niclit — ? is it not so ? wahrend, during. wahrhaftig, indeed, truly. Wahrheit,/. (— , -en), truth, wahrlich, truly, indeed. wahrscheinlich, probably. Waisenkind, n. orphan-child. Wald, m. (-es,Walder), woods, forest. wallen, to undulate (of water). Walther, Walter (Tell's boy). Wand,/. (— , Wande), wall. Wanderer, m. (-s, — ), traveler, wan- Wandtafel,/ blackboard. [derer. Wanduhr,/. wall-clock. Wange,/. ( — , -n), cheek. [then. wann, when; dann und — , now and warf , threw ; inf. werfen. warm, warm. Warte,/. ( — , -n), watchtower. warten, to wait ; to take care of. Wartesaal, m. waiting-room. warum, why. was, what (sometimes = warum, why). Wasche,/. washing. waschen (wusch, gewaschen), to wash. Waschfrau,/. washerwoman. Waschmange,/ mangle (for ironing). Wasser, n. (-s, — ), water. Wasserfall, m. waterfall, cataract. Wasserpatscher, m. water-paddler. weben (wob, gewoben), to weave. Weber, m. (-s, — ), weaver. Webersche, relating to Weber. Weckuhr,/. alarm-clock. weg, away. weg'fiihren, to lead away. weg'raumen, to clear off (a table). Wen, n. woe, pain. wehen, to wave, float, blow. Wehmut,/ sadness. wehren (sich), to defend one's self. Weib, n. (-es, -er), wife, woman. weiblich, feminine. weich, soft. weichen (wich, gewichen), to yield. Weide, / ( — , -n), willow; pasture. Weih, m. (-es, -e), eagle. Weihnachten, //. Christmas. Weihnachtszeit,/ Christmas time. weil, because, while. Weilchen, n. a little while. Wein, m. (-es, -e), wine. Weinberg, m. vineyard. weinen, to weep, cry. Weise,/. ( — , -n), way, manner; tune. weisen (wies, gewiesen), to show. Weisheit,/ ( — , -en), wisdom. weiS, know ; inf. wissen. weiB, white. weit, far, wide; weiter, further. Weite,/. ( — , -n), distance. Weizen, m. wheat. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 357 welcher (-e, -es), pi. welche, who; welken, to wilt, wither. [which. Welle,/. ( — , -n), billow, wave. Welt,/. (— , -en), world. weltberiihmt, famous. Weltmacht, / world-power. wem, to whom (go, i). wenden (wandte, gewandt), to turn. wenig, little. wenn, when, if. wer, who (90, 1). [become. werden (wurde or ward, geworden), to werfen (warf , geworfen), to throw. Werk, n. (-es, -e), works (of a clock). Wert, m. (-es, -e), worth, value ; adj. worth, worthy ; — halten, to esteem highly ; werter Herr, dear sir. wessen, whose (90, 1). Weste,/. ( — , -n), vest, waistcoat. Wette,/. ( — , -n), wager, bet ; um die — , for a wager. Wetter, n. (-s, — ), weather. Wettrennen, n. race, running match, wich, yielded ; inf. weichen. wichtig, weighty, important. widersetzen, to resist, wie, how, like ; — viele, how many, wieder, again, wie'dergeben, to give back, wiederholen, to repeat. wiederholt, repeatedly. wie'derkehren, to return. wie'dersehen, to see again ; auf Wie- dersehen, till we meet again, wiegen (wog, gewogen), to weigh ; — (regular) to rock ; — dich ein, rock thee to sleep, wiehern, to neigh (as horses), wies, showed ; inf. weisen. Wiese,/. ( — , -n), meadow, wieviel, how much ; um — Uhr, at what time ; der wievielte, what date wiewohl, though, however. (7 2 )« wild, wild. Wildheuer, m. gatherer of wild hay. Wildpret, n. wild game. Wilhelm, William. Wille, m. (-ns, -n), will. willig, willing. Wind, m. (-es, -e), wind. winken, to beckon. Winter, m. (-s, — ), winter. Winzer, m. (-s, — ), vine-dresser. Wipfel, m. (-s, — ), top (of a tree). Wirt, m. (-es, -e), landlord ; / -in. wissen (wufite, gewuBt), to know. Witwe,/. ( — , -n), widow. wo, where. Woche,/. ( — , -n), week. wodurch, by what. wofiir, for which. Woge,/ ( — , -n), wave. Wogenprall, m. roar of waves. woher, whence (direction toward the speaker). wohin, whither (direction away from the speaker) ; — gehen Sie ? where are you going? wohl, well, indeed, wohlan ! well ! now then ! wohlbekannt, well known, wohlbestellt, duly appointed. wohlgenahrt, well nourished. Wohlsein, n. welfare. Wohltater, m. (-s, — ), benefactor, wohltatig, benevolent. wohnen, to live, dwell. ' Wohnhaus, n. dwelling-house. Wohnung,/ ( — ,-en), dwelling. Wohnungssuche,/ lookingfor lodgings. Wohnzimmer, n. sitting-room. Wolf, m. (-es, Wolfe), wolf. Wolke,/ (— , -n), cloud. » Wolkensteg, m. cloudy pathway, wollen, to want, will, womit, with what. wonach, after what. Wonne,/(— , -n), joy. woran, on what, of what ; — starb er ? of what did he die ? 358 NEW GERMAN COURSE worauf, upon which. woraus, from what ; — besteht . . . ? what does . . . consist of? Wort, n. (-es, Worter andWorte), word. Worterbuch, n. dictionary. Wortfolge,/ order of words, wortlich, literally. Wortwechsel, m. dispute. wuriiber, over what, concerning what. WOZU, why, wherefore, for what purpose. Wunde,/. ( — , -n), wound, wunderbar, wonderful. wunderlich, queer, quaint, wundermild, very kind, wundern (sich), to wonder, be surprised, wundersam, wonderful, wunderschon, very beautiful. wundervoll, wonderful. Wunsch, m. (-es, Wiinsche), wish. wiinschen, to wish. Wurzel, /. ( — , -n), root. Wiirzlein, n, (-s, — ), little root. Zahl,/ ( — , -en), number, zahlen, to count, zahlreich, numerous. Zahnarzt, m. dentist. zart, tender. zartlich, tender, kind. Zauberschein, m. magic light, zehn, ten ; die Zehner, the tens. Zehnmarkstiick, n. a coin of ten marks. Zeichen, n. (-s, — ), sign. Zeigefinger, m. index finger. zeigen, to show, point out. [clock). Zeiger, m. (-s, — ), pointer (hand of a Zeit,/. ( — , -en), time, tense. Zeitform,/ tense. Zeitung, / ( — , -en), newspaper. Zeitwort, n. verb. Zelt, n. (-es, -e), tent. zerreiBen (zerriB, zerrissen), to tear in pieces. zerschlagen (zerschlug, zerschlagen) to beat in pieces. zerschmelzen (zerschmolz, zerschmol- zen), to melt. zertrat, trampled on; inf. zertreten. zertreten (zertrat, zertreten), to tread under foot. [notice). Zettel, m. (-s, — ), bit of paper (for a Zeughaus, n. armory. [go. Ziehen (zog, gezogen), to draw, pass, Ziel, n. (-es, -e), aim, mark, goal, end. zielen, to aim. ziemlich, tolerably; about. zierlich, delicately, nicely. Zifferblatt, n. dial (of a clock). Zimmer, n. (-s, — ), room. Zitat, n. (-s, -e), quotation. Zither,/ ( — , -n), zither (a musical in- strument). zittern, to tremble. zogern, to hesitate. zu, to, too. zucken, to twitch, thrill, tremble. Zucker, m. sugar. zu'decken, to cover up. zu'driicken, to close (as the eyes). zuerst, first of all. zufrieden, satisfied Zug, m. (-es, Ziige), train. zu'gewandt, inclined ; inf. zu'wenden. zugleich, at once, at the same time. zu'horen, to listen to. zum = zu dem, to the (105). zunachst, next. Zunge,/. (— , -n), tongue. zur = zu der, to the (105). zuriick, back. zuriick'bringen, to bring back. zuriick'geben, to give back, restore. zuriick 'kehren, to return, turn back. zuriick 'kommen, to come back, return. zuriick'schauen, to look back. zuriick'schicken, to send back. zuruck'schlagen, to strike back, turn back. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 359 zuriick'ziehen, to draw back, retreat. zusammen, together. zusam' menpacken, to pack up. zusam'menraffen (sich), to collect one's self. zusam' menrollen, to roll up. zu'schauen, to look at, observe. Zuschauer, m. (-s, — ), spectator. zu'schlieBen, to close, lock, zu'senden, to send (to one). zuverlassig, reliable, zuweilen, sometimes. zu'werfen, to throw (to one). zwar, indeed, in truth. Zweck, m. (-es, -e), purpose. Zweig, m. (-es, -e), twig, branch, zweigen, to sprout, branch out. zweimal, twice. Zwerg, m. (-es, -e), dwarf. Zwieback, m. rusk (a kind of biscuit). Zwiebel,/ ( — , -n), onion, zwinken, to twinkle, wink, zwischen, between. zwitschern, to twitter. zwolf, twelve. zwolfmal, twelve times. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. Note. — The references in parenthesis are to the sections of Part I. to the German-English vocabulary. See also the note about, etwa, ungefahr; — to do, im Begriffe sein zu tun. a (an), ein, eine, ein (30). accept, an'nehmen (nahm, genommen). acquainted, bekannt. act, die Tat ( — , -en) ; v. handeln. active, tatig. admire, bewundern. afraid of, sich fiirchten vor (159). afterwards, nachher. again, wieder, noch einmal. against, gegen, wider. [Wochen. ago, vor, seit ; two weeks — , vor zwei agreeable, angenehm. all, aller(-e, -es),//. alle (92, 10). along, langs. already, schon. also, auch. always, immer. American, der Amerikaner (-s, — ); adj. amerikanisch. angel, der Engel (-s, — ). . animal, das Tier (-es, -e). another, ein anderer; one — , each Other, einander (92, 12). anything, etwas (92, 13); not — , nichts. ape, der Arte (-n, -n). [schienen). appear, erscheinen (erschien, er- apple, der Apfel (-s, Apfel). arise, auf'stehen (stand, gestanden). arm, der Arm (-es, -e) ; — chair, der Lehnstuhl. around, urn, herum. arrival, die Ankunft ( — , Ankiinfte). arrive, an'kommen (kam, gekommen). as, wie ; — well — , so gut wie ; — if, als ob. ascend, hinauf'steigen (stieg,gestiegen). ask, fragen ; bitten (bat, gebeten). attentive, achtsam. author, der Verfasser (-s, — ); der Autor (-s, -en), autumn, der Herbst (-es, -e). auxiliary verb, das Hilfszeitwort. avoid, vermeiden (vermied, vermi.eden). away, weg, fort. bad, schlecht, bose ; the bad (one), der Bose. bag, der Sack (-es, Sacke); a — of diamonds, ein Sack Diamanten. bake, backen (buk, gebacken). ball, der Ball (-es, Balle); die Kugel (~,-n). bank (of earth), die Bank ( — , Banke) ; (for money) die Bank ( — , -en). barn, die Scheune ( — , -n). basket, der Korb (-es, Kbrbe). battle, die Schlacht ( — , -en). be, sein (war, gewesen); (146). be {imperative), sei, seien Sie (146). beam, der Balken (-s, — ). beast, das Tier (-es, -e) ; — ot prey, das Raubtier. [g en )' beat (strike), schlagen (schlug, geschla- beautiful, schon ; superl. der (die, das) because, weil. [schonste. become, werden (wurde, geworden). bed, das Bett (-es, -en). bee, die Biene ( — , -n). 360 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 361 beer, das Bier (-es, -e). before, vor, ehe. beg, bitten (bat, gebeten). behind, hinter. believe, glauben. belong, gehoren (170, 3). below (down-stairs), unten. bend", biegen (bog, gebogen). benevolent, wohltatig. Berlin, Berlin. berry, die Beere ( — , -n). best, best ; the — , der (die, das) beste, am besten (80, 5). better, besser (80, 1). between, zwischen. bewitch, verwiinschen. bid, heiBen (hieB, geheiBen); — him come in, heiBen Sie ihn hereintreten. bill (account), die Rechnung ( — , -en). bind, binden (band, gebunden). biographical, biographisch. bird, der Vogel (-s, Vogel). bite, beiBen (biB, gebissen). blackboard, die Tafel ( — , -n). blue, blau. boat, das Boot (-es, -e). boatman, der Schiffer (-s, — ), der Bootsmann. body, der Korper (-s, — ). book, das Buch (-es, Biicher). bom, geboren ; inf. gebaren. both, beide ; die beiden. bow, der Bogen (-s, — ). bow, die Verbeugung ( — , -en) ; v. sich verbeugen. box, die Schachtel ( — , -n). boy, der Knabe (-n, -n). brass, das Messing (-s). brave, tapfer. bread, das Brot (-es, -e) ; two loaves of — ■, zwei Brote. break, brechen (brach, gebrochen). breast, die Brust ( — , Briiste). bride, die Braut ( — , Braute). bridge, die Briicke ( — , -n). bright, hell, klar, blank. bring, bringen (brachte, gebracht). broad, breit, weit. Brocken (the highest peak of the Harz mountains) ; the " Spectre of the — ," das Brockengespenst. brook, der Bach (-es, Bache). brother, der Bruder (-s, Briider). build, bauen. building, das Gebaude (-s, — ). bull's-eye, das Schwarze (-n). business, das Geschaft (-es, -e). but, aber. butter, die Butter ( — ). button, der Knopf (-es, Knopf e). buy, kaufen. cage, der Kafig (-s, -e). California, Californien. call, rufen (rief, gerufen) ; " nennen (nannte, genannt); to be called, hei- Ben (157, 1). camp, das Lager (-s, — ). can, konnen (konnte, gekonnt). canary-bird, der Kanarienvogel. cannot, kann nicht, konnen nicht. capable (of), fahig (81). card, die Karte ( — , -n). [pflegen. care, die Sorge ( — , -n) ; to take — of, careful, vorsichtig. Caroline, Karoline. carriage, der Wagen (-s, — ). carry, tragen (trug, getragen). case, der Fall (-es, Falle) ; in this — , in diesem Falle. cat, die Katze ( — , -n). catch, fangen (fing, gefangen). cattle, das Vieh (-es). cellar, der Keller (-s, — ). certainly, gewiB. chain, die Kette ( — , -n). chair, der Stuhl (-es, Sttihle) ; arm — , der Lehnstuhl. 362 NEW GERMAN COURSE change, verwandeln. chapter, das Kapitel (-s, — ). charm, der Zauber (-s, — ). charming, reizend. cheap, billig. cheese, der Kase (-s, — ). cherry, die Kirsche ( — , -n). child, das Kind (-es, -er). Christian, der Christ (-en, -en). Christmas,//. Weihnachten ; — pres- ent, das Weihnachtsgeschenk. church, die Kirche ( — , -n). city, die Stadt (— , Stadte). class, die Klasse ( — , -n). clean, rein. clear, klar. cliff, die Klippe ( — , -n). clock, die Uhr ( — , -en). cloth, das Tuch (-es, Tiicher). coat, der Rock (-es, Rocke). cold, kalt ; to take — , sich erkalten. collection, die Sammlung ( — , -en). Cologne, Koln. color, die Farbe ( — , -n). comb, der Kamm (-es, Kamme); v. kammen. come, kommen (kam, gekommen); — back, zuruck'kommen. comfortable, bequem. command, der Befehl (-es, -e) ; v. be- fehlen (befahl, befohlen). common, gebrauchlich. company, die Gesellschaft ( — , -en). comparative, der Komparativ. compel, zwingen (zwang, gezwungen). complete, vollstandig, samtlich ; — works, s'amtliche Werke. conjugate, konjugieren. constantly, fortwahrend. construct, bilden. consumption, die Schwindsucht. contain, enthalten (enthielt, enthalten). continually, fortwahrend. contrary, on the — , im Gegenteil. conversation, die Konversation ( — , en). cool, kiihl. copper, das Kupfer (-s). [ben. copy, ab'schreiben (schrieb, geschrie- correct, richtig. cost, kosten. couch, das Lager (-s, — ). counsel, der Rat (-es, Rate). count, der Graf (-en, -en); v. zahlen. country, das Land (-es, Lander) ; in the — , auf dem Lande. cover, die Decke ( — , -n) ; v. bedecken. crawl, kriechen (kroch, gekrochen). crazy, verriickt, wahnsinnig. creep, kriechen (kroch, gekrochen). cruel, grausam ; — to, grausam gegen (81, 3)- crumb, die Krume ( — , -n) ; little — , das Kriimchen. cry, weinen. cup, die Tasse ( — , -n). cut, schneiden (schnitt, geschnitten). 1) dance, der Tanz (-es, Tanze) v. tanzen. dangerous, gefahrlich. dark, dunkel. daughter, die Tochter ( — , Tochter). day, der Tag (-es, -e) ; which — of the month, der wievielte (72) ; the whole — , den ganzen Tag {ace. of time) ; by — , bei Tage or am Tage. dead, tot. dear, lieb, teuer. death, der Tod (-es). December, der Dezember. decline, declinieren. deed, die Tat ( — , -en). deep, tief. [schlagen. defeat, die Niederlage ( — , -n) ; v. deliver, befreien ; (goods) abliefern. denote, bezeichnen. desert, die Wiiste ( — , -n). desk, das Pult (-es, -e). diamond, der Diamant (-en, -en). ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 363 dictionary, das Worterbuch. die, sterben (starb, gestorben) ; to — of hunger, Hungers sterben. different, verschieden. difficult, schwer, schwierig. difficulty, die Schwierigkeit ( — , -en). dig, graben, (grab, gegraben). diligent, fleifiig. dining-room, das Speisezimmer. dinner, das Mittagessen. director, der Direcktor (-s, -en). disappear, verschwinden (verschwand, verschwunden). distinctly, deutlich. divide, dividieren, einteilen. do, tun (tat, getan) ; machen ; what are you doing ? was machen Sie ? dog, der Hund (-es, -e). door, die Tur ( — , -en). dove, die Taube ( — , -n). Dresden, Dresden. dress, das Kleid (-es, -er) ; die Klei- dung ( — , -en) ; v. kleiden, an'kleiden. drink, trinken (trank, getrunken). drive, treiben (trieb, getrieben) ; fahren (fuhr, gefahren). drown, ertrinken (ertrank, ertrunken). during, wahrend. dwell, wohnen. dwelling, dwelling-house, die Woh- nung ( — , -en). E each, jeder, -e, -es ; — other, einander. earth, die Erde. easily, leicht. eat, essen (aB, gegessen); — up, auf- essen ; (of animals) fressen ; the eat- ing (food), das Essen (-s). Edward, Eduard. egg, das Ei (-es, -er). either — or, entweder — oder. Elbe, die Elbe (river). empty, leer. enchant, bezaubern, verwunschen. encourage, ermutigen. [( — , -en.) end, das Ende (-s, -n) ; die Endung enemy, der Feind (-es, -e). England, England. English, englisch. enjoy, genieBen (genoB, genossen). enough, genug. enter, ein'treten (trat ; getreten) ; on entering, beim Eintreten. erect, auf'recht, gerade. especially, besonders. evening, der Abend (-s, -e) ; this — , heute abend, ever, je, jemals. every, jeder, -e, -es ; — body, jeder- mann; — time, jedesmal. evil, bose, iibel. exactly, genau. excellent, vortrefflich. except, ausgenommen. exercise, die (J bung ( — , -en). explain, erklaren. explanation, die Erklarung ( — , -en); to refer to the — , die Erklarung auf- suchen. fabulous, fabelhaft, sagenhaft. fall, fallen (fiel, gefallen). family, die Familie ( — , -n). far, weit ; — away, weit weg ; too — , zu weit. father, der Vater (-s, Vater). feed, fiittern. fence, der Zaun (-es, Zaune) ; hedge — , die Hecke ( — , -en), few, wenig. field, das Feld (-es, -er). find, finden (fand, gefunden). fine, fein, schon. finger, der Finger (-s, — ) ; —nail, der Fingernagel. fire, das Feuer (-s, — ). 364 NEW GERMAN COURSE first, erst ; at — , zuerst. [( — , -n). flag, die Fahne ( — , -n) ; die Flagge floor, der FuBboden or der Boden (-s, flow, fliefien (floB, geflossen). [Boden). flower, die Blume ( — , -en), garden, der Blumengarten. fly, fliegen (flog, geflogen) ; — away, weg'fliegen ; — down, nie'derfliegen. fond, to be — Of, gern essen, trinken, etc. foot, der FuB (-es, FiiBe) ; — stool, der Schemel (-s, — ); three feet high, drei FuB hoch. ioXyprep. fur; conj. denn. forbid, verbieten (verbot, verboten). foreign, fremd; a — language, eine fremde Sprache. forest, der Wald (-es, Walder). forget, vergessen (vergaB, vergessen). forgetful, vergeBlich. form, die Form ( — , -en). former, f riiher ; — ly, vormals. fortification, die Festung ( — , -en). fortunate, gliicklich. fountain, der Brunnen (-s, — ); — pen, die Fiillfeder. [Main. Frankfort on the Main, Frankfurt am fresh, frisch. friend, der Freund (-es, -e). friendly, freundlich. frighten, erschrecken ; to be frightened, erschrecken (erschrak, erschrocken). frog, der Frosch (-es, Frosche); prince, der Froschkonig. fruit, die Frucht ( — , Friichte); das Obst (-es) ; — tree, der Obstbaum. fugitive, der Fliichtling (-s, -e). G garden, der Garten (-s, Garten). gardener, der Gartner (-s, — ). gather, sammeln. generous, groBmiitig. gentleman, der Herr (-n, -en). geography, die Geographie ( — , -en). German, der Deutsche (-n, -n) ; a — , ein Deutscher ; adj. deutsch. Germany, Deutschland; North — , Norddeutschland. get, bekommen (bekam, bekommen); go and — , holen. ghost, der Geist (-es, -er). giant, der Riese (-11, -n). girl, das Madcben (-s, — ). give, geben (gab, gegeben). glass, das Glas (-es, Glaser) ; a — of water, ein Glas Wasser. glove, der Handschuh. go, gehen (ging, gegangen) ; where are you going? wohin gehen Sie? — out, aus'gehen. gold, das Gold (-es) ; adj. golden ; a — pen, eine Goldfeder. good, gut ; — -hearted, gutherzig. goodness, die Giite. goose, die Gans ( — , Ganse). grammar, die Grammatik ( — , -en), grasp, greifen (griff, gegriffen); to — after, nach etwas greifen. grass, das Gras (-es, Graser). grave, das Grab (-es, Graber). great, groB. green, griin. [Erde. ground, der Boden (-s, Boden), die grow, wachsen (wuchs, gewachsen). H hair, das Haar (-es, -e). [( — , -n). hall, der Saal (-es, Sale); die Halle Hamburg, Hamburg, hammer, der Hammer (-s, Hammer), hand, die Hand ( — , Hande). handkerchief, das Taschentuch. hang, h an gen (hing, gehangen). [ver. Hanover ; from — , aus or von Hanno- happen, geschehen (geschah, gesche- hen). happy, gliicklich, frohlich ; happily, glucklicherweise. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 365 Harz, der Harz (-es); — mountains, hastily, hastig. [das Harzgebirge. hat, der Hut (-es, Hiite). have, haben (hatte, gehabt). hay, das Heu (-es). head, der Kopf (-es, Kopfe). health, die Gesundheit. heathen, der Heide (-n, -n). help, h elf en (half, geholfen) ; cannot — it, kann es nicht vermeiden. Henry, Heinrich. her, ihr, ihre, ihr; pi. ihre ; — self, selbst. here, hier. [verborgen). hide, verstecken, verbergen (verbarg, high, hoch ; higher, hoher. himself, selbst, sich selbst. his, sein, seine, sein; pi. seine (87, 1). historical, historisch. hit, treffen (traf, getroffen). hold, halten (hielt, gehalten). home, die Heimat ; at — , zu Hause ; to go — , nach Hause gehen. honest, ehrlich. honorable, ehrenhaft. hope, die Hoffnung ( — , -en). horse, das Pferd (-es, -e). hour, die Stunde ( — , -en). house, das Haus (-es, Hauser); at the — Of, bei. how, wie ; — many, wiviele. however, aber, jedoch (109, 3). human being, der Mensch (-en, -en), hundred, hundert. ( hunger, der Hunger (-s) ; to suffer — , hungry, hungrig. [Hunger leiden. hunter, der Jager (-s, — ). hurry, die Eile ; v. sich beeilen. hurt, verletzen. hut, die Hiitte ( — , -n). ice, das Eis (-es). if, wenn. ill, krank. illiterate, ungebildet. immortal, unsterblich. impart (information), mit'teilen. important, wichtig. in, in, auf ; to come — , herein'kommen. index-finger, der Zeigefinger. Indian, der Indianer (-s, — ). indolence, die Faulheit. indolent, trage, faul. industrious, fieiflig. inform {one's self), erkundigen (sich). instead of, statt, anstatt. intelligent, intelligent. [ben. intend, beabsichtigen ; die Absicht ha- intention, die Absicht ( — , -en). interesting, interessant. into, in. invite, ein 'laden (hid, geladen). Jew, der Jude (-n, -n). jewelry, das Geschmeide (-s, — ) ; die Juwelen, pi. John, Johann. July, Juli, m. just, richtig, gerecht; —as good as, ebenso gut wie. K keep, behalten (behielt, behalten); to — watch Over, Wacht halten liber. key, der Schlussel (-s, — ). [schlagen. kill, todten, tot'schlagen (schlug, ge- kind, die Art ( — , -en) ; what — of, was f iir ein ; adj. gutig. kindness, die Giite. king, der Konig (-s, -e). kingdom, das Reich (-es, -e), das Konigreich. kitchen, die Kuche ( — , -n). knife, das Messer (-s, — ). knock, klopfen. [wissen (157). know (a person), kennen; (a fact), 366 NEW GERMAN COURSE M lady, die Dame ( — , -en), die Frau ( — , lake, der See (-s, -n). [-en). lamb, das Lamm (-es, Lammer). land, Ian den. landed-proprietor, der Gutsbesitzer. landscape, die Landschaft ( — , -en). language, die Sprache ( — , -n). large, groB ; how — , wie groB. last, letzt, vorig; — week, vorige late, spat ; later, sp'ater. [Woche. laugh, lachen. lay, legen. lazy, tr'age, faul. lead-pencil, der Bleistift (-es, -e). leaf, das Blatt (-es, Blatter). learn, lernen ; learned, gelehrt. leact, at — , wenigstens. left, link ; to the — , links ; handed, linkhandig. Leipsic, Leipzig, lend, leihen (lieh, geliehen). lesson, die Aufgabe ( — , -n), die Lek- tion ( — , -en). letter, der Brief (-es, -e). lie, to — down, liegen (lag, gelegen) ; to tell a — , lugen (log, gelogen). life, das Leben (-s, — ). lift, auf'heben (hob, gehoben). light, das Licht (-es, -er) ; adj. leicht. like, lieben, gern haben ; adj. ahnlich. limp, hinken. literature, die Literatur ( — , -en). little, klein ; a — , ein wenig. live, leben ; (in a house) wohnen. long, lang. look, sehen (sah, gesehen), schauen ; — up, hinaufsehen ; — down, hinun- tersehen or hinunterschauen. Lord, der Herr (-n, -en), lose, verlieren (verlor, verloren). love, die Liebe ; v. lieben. low, niedrig. lyric, lyrisch. maid, die Jungfrau ; -servant, das Dienstmadchen. maiden, das Madchen (-s, — ). make, machen. man, der Mann (-es, Manner). many, viele ; how — , wie viele ; — a, mancher, -e, -es,//. manche. map, die Landkarte. •[ (-s, — ). mark, die Mark (a coin) ; das Zeichen market, der Markt (-es, Markte). marry, heiraten. master, der Herr (-n, -en), der Meister. match, das Ziindholz. Mayence, Mainz. may, mogen (mochte, gemocht) (148, 4). me, dat. mir; ace. mich (82, 1). measure, das MaB (-es, -e) ; v. messen, (maB, gemessen). meet, treffen (traf, getroffen). metal, das Metal (-s, -e). [inches. meter, das Meter (-s, — ), = 39.37 memory, das Gedachtnis (-nisses, -nisse). middle-finger, der Mittelfinger. mighty, machtig. milk, die Milch. mine, der, die, das meinige (87, 8). minute, die Minute ( — , -n). mirror, der Spiegel (-s, — ). mix, mischen. money, das Geld (-es, Gelder) ; no — , kein Geld ; no — at all, gar kein Geld (92, 20). month, der Monat (-s, -e) ; what day of the — ? der wievielte (72). moon, der Mond (-es, -e). morning, der Morgen (-s, — ) ; adv. morgen ; this — , heute morgen ; to- morrow — , morgen friih. mortal, sterblich. most, meist, meistens ; the — of them, die meisten von ihnen ; — beautiful, der, die, das schonste. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 367 mother, die Mutter ( — , Mutter). mountain, der Berg (-es, -e) ; — air, die Bergluft ; — spirit, der Berggeist ; — chain, die Gebirgskette. mouse, die Maus ( — , Mause). Mrs., Frau. much, viel ; very — , sehr viel ; for how — , fiir wie viel. my, mein, meine, mein, pi. meine (87, myself, selbst (82, 3). [1). N name, der Name (-n, -n) ; by — , dem Nam en nach ; what is your — ? wie heiBen Sie ? my — is John, ich heiBe Johann ; v. nennen (nannte, genannt.) natural, naturlich. naughty, unartig. necessary, notig. need, die Not ( — , Note) ; in — of (in want of), bediirftig (81, 1). [—in. neighbor, der Nachbar (-n, -n); fern. neither — nor, weder — noch. never, nie, niemals. new, neu. news, die Nachricht ( — , -en) ; die Neuigkeit ( — , -en), newspaper, die Zeitung ( — , -en). night, die Nacht (— , Nachte). no, nein ; (not any), kein (-e, — ) ; pi. keine ; — one, niemand, keiner. northward, nordlich. not, nicht ; is it — SO ? nicht wahr ? nothing, nichts. nourishing, nahrhaft. [tage. now, jetzt, nun; now-a-days, heutzu- nut, die NuB ( — , Niisse). O oar, das Ruder (-s, — ). Oblige, verbinden (verband, verbun- den); einem einen Gefallen tun. observe, beobachten. occur, vor'kommen (kam, gekommen). often, oft, haufig. old, alt. on, auf, an. once, einmal ; — more, noch einmal. one, (mem.) ein ; (pron.) man; no — , niemand ; — says, man sagt. only, nur. open, off en ; v. offnen, auf'machen. opinion, die Meinung ( — , -en); in my — , nach meiner Meinung. opposite, gegeniiber. or, oder. orange, die Apfelsine ( — , -n). orchard, der Obstgarten. Order, der Befehl (-s, -e) ; v. befehlen (befahl, befohlen) ; bestellen ; in — to, um zu. Orphan, die Waise ( — , -n). other, der (die, das) andere; another, noch ein ; each — , einander (92, 12). ought, sollte (149, 5). our, unser, -e, — ; pi. unsere (87, 1). out, aus. outside, auBerhalb. over, iiber. owe, schuldig sein. own, eigen. page, die Seite ( — , -n). pail, der Eimer (-s, — ). paint, die Farbe ( — , -n) ; to — a house, ein Haus anstreichen. painter, der Maler (artist) (-s, — ) ; der Anstreicher (house-painter) (-s, — ). pair, das Paar (-es, -e) ; — of shears, die groBe Schere ; — of scissors, die kleine Schere ( — , -n). pale, bleich ; to turn — , erbleichen (erblich, erblichen). paper, das Papier (-s, -e) ; news — , die Z°itung ( — , -en) ; a — of sewing needles, ein Brief Nahnadeln. 368 NEW GERMAN COURSE paragraph, der Paragraph (-s, -en). parents, die Eltern,//. park, der Park (-es, -e or -s). parlor, das Besuchszimmer. part, der Teil (-es, -e). passive, passiv ; in the — voice, im Passivum. patient, der Kranke (-n, -n, or -n, -n). pay, bezahlen. peach, der Pfirsich (-s, -e). peak {point), die Spitze ( — , -n). peasant, der Bauer (-s, -n). pen, die Feder ( — , -n) ; a gold — , eine Goldfeder. pencil, der Bleistift (-s, -e). people, das Volk (-es, Volker), pi. die Leute. perfect, perfekt, vollstandig. perhaps, vielleicht. permit {consent to), leiden (litt, gelitten). philologist, der Philologe (-n, -n). photograph, die Photographie ( — , -n). piano, das Klavier (-es, -e). pick, pfliicken, — up, auf'picken, auf- picture, das Bild (-es, -er). [heben. piece, das Stuck (-es, -e). pitcher, der Krug (-es, Kriige). plant, die Pflanze ( — , -n) ; v. pflanzen. play, das Spiel (-es, -e); das Schau- spiel ; v. spielen. please, gefallen (gefiel, gefallen); — give me, bitte geben Sie mir ; as you — , nach Belieben; are you pleased. with ? freuen Sie sich liber ? plural, die Mehrzahl, der Plural, pocket, die Tasche ( — , -n). poem, das Gedicht (-es, -e). poet, der Dichter (-s, — ). poetry, die Poesie ( — , -n). police, die Polizei ; — officer, der Poli- zeidiener. [gen sie. polite, hoflich; — to them, hoflich ge- poor, arm. post-office, die Post, das Postamt. pound, das Pfund (-es, -e). pour, gieBen (goB, gegossen). powerful, machtig. praise, loben ; preisen (pries, gepriesen). prefer, vor'ziehen (zog, gezogen); I — , ich ziehe vor. [anwesend. present, das Geschenk (-es, -e); adj. president, der Prasident (-en, -en). pretty, schon, hiibsch. price, der Preis (-es, -e). prince, der Prinz (-en, -en). princess, die Prinzessin ( — , -nen). principal parts, die Hauptformen; what are the of ? welches sind die Hauptformen von? prize, der Preis (-es, -e). punctuality, die Punktlichkeit. pupil, der Schiiler (-s, — ). push, schieben (schob, geschoben) ; — Off, ab'stoBen (stieB, gestoBen). put, setzen ; stecken ; tun (tat, getan). Q quantity, die Quantitat ( — , -en). queen, die Konigin ( — , -nen). quietly, ruhig. quill, der Kiel (-es, -e). R train, der railroad, die Eisenbahn; Eisenbahnzug. rain, der Regen (-s, — ) ; v. regnen. reach {attain), erreichen. read, lesen (las, gelesen). [Lesebuch. reading, das Lesen (-s) ; book, das receive, erhalten (erhielt, erhalten). recently, neulich, kurzlich. [genesen. recover {from illness), genesen (genas, red, rot. reflexive, reflexiv. refreshing, erfrischend. regard, betrachten. region, die Gegend ( — , -en). regular, regelmaBig. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 369 rejoice, sich freuen (159). relate, erzahlen. release, befreien. remain, bleiben (blieb, geblieben). remember, sich erinnern. rent (a house), mieten. resemble, gleichen (glich, geglichen). return, zuriick'kommen (kam, gekom- men. Rhine, der Rhein (-es) ; — wine, der Rheinwein ; the tour of the — , die Rheintour. rich, reich. [gefahren). ride, reiten (ritt, geritten) ; fahren (f uhr, right, recht ; to the — , rechts. ring, der Ring (-es, -e); finger, der ripe, reif. [Ringfinger. rise, auf'stehen (stand, gestanden) ; the sun rises, die Sonne geht auf. river, der FmB (Flusses, Fliisse). rock, der Fels (-en, -en); der Felsen (-s, — ). [romisch. Roman, der Romer (-s, — ) ; adj. romance, der Roman (-es, -e). roof, das Dach (-es, Dacher). roOm, das Zimmer (-s, — ). rose, die Rose ( — , -en) ; — bush, der Rosenstrauch. rule, regieren. ruler {straight-edge), das Lineal (— s, -e). run, laufen (lief, gelaufen) ; — away, fort'laufen. S sad, traurig. sake ; for the — of, um . . . willen. sale, der Verkauf (-es, Verkaufe) ; for — , zu verkaufen. salt, das Salz (-es, -e). same, der-, die-, dasselbe (89, 1). satisfied, zufrieden. save, ersparen. say, sagen. scatter, streuen. scholar, der Schuler (-s, — ). school, die Schule ( — , -en) ; — house, das Schulhaus. scissors, die kleine Schere ( — , -n). scold, schelten (schalt, gescholten). Scotland, Schottland. sea, die See ( — , -n). season, die Jahreszeit ; at this — , zu dieser Jahreszeit. second, die Sekunde ( — , -n) ; adj. der, die, das Zweite. see, sehen (sah, gesehen). seldom, selten. selfish, eigensiichtig. sell, verkaufen. [(r57> *)• send, schicken, senden (sandte, gesandt) sentence, der Satz (-es, Satze). servant, der Diener (-s, — ) ; farm — , der Knecht (-es, -e); girl, das Dienstmadchen ; die Magd (-, Magde). serve, dienen. [geht unter. set, setzen; the sun sets, die Sonne several, einige, mehrere. sharp, scharf. shears, die Schere ( — , -n). sheep, das Schaf (-es, -e). shepherd, der Schafer (-s, — ). shine, scheinen (schien, geschienen). ship, das Schiff (-es, -e) ; — wreck, der Schiffbruch. shoot, schiefien (schoft, geschossen). should, sollen (149, 5). I shovel, die Schaufel ( — , -n). show, zeigen ; (to point out), an'zeigen. shrub, der Strauch (-es, Straucher). shut (the door), zu'machen. sick, krank ; the — man, der Kranke. side, die Seite ( — , -n). silver, das Silber ; adj. silbern. sing, singen (sang, gesungen). sink, sinken (sank, gesunken). sir, Herr (-n, -en) ; yes — , ja (Herr). sister, die Schwester ( — , -n). sit, sitzen (sa6, gesessen). skillful, geschickt. 37o NEW GERMAN COURSE slate, die Schiefertafel. slave, der Sklave (-n, -n). sleep, der Schlaf (-es) ; v. schlafen (schlief, geschlafen). slip, aus'gleiten (glitt, geglitten). slowly, langsam. small, klein. smell, der Geruch (-es, Geruche); v. riechen (roch, gerochen). sneak, schleichen (schlich, geschlichen); to — into, ein'schleichen. snow, der Schnee (-s). sofa, das Sofa (-s, -s). soldier, der Soldat (-en, -en). some, etwas. sometimes, zuweilen, manchmal. son, der Sohn (-es, Sonne). song, der Gesang (-es, Gesange). soon, bald ; sooner, eher, f riiher. sorceress, die Zauberin ( — , -nen), die Hexe ( — , n). soul, die Seele ( — , -n). sparkle, funkeln. speak, sprechen (sprach, gesprochen). spectre, das Gespenst ; the — of the Brocken, das Brockengespenst {an optical illusion). speech, die Rede ( — , -n). spend {the time), zu'bringen (brachte, gebracht). spider, die Spinne ( — , -n). spite, der Groll (-es) ; HaB (-sses) ; in — of, trotz. spoon, der Loffel (-s, — ). spring, der Friihling (-s, -e). spring {of water), der Bmnnen (-s, — ); v. springen (sprang, gesprungen). stairs, die Treppe ( — , -en) ; up — , oben ; down — , unten. stand, stehen (stand, gestanden); — erect, gerade stehen. star, der Stern (-es, -e). state, der Staat (-es, -en), steal, stehlen (stahl, gestohlen). steam-boiler, der Dampfkessel. steel, der Stahl; — pen, die Stahlfeder. steep, steil. sting, stechen (stach, gestochen). stone, der Stein (-es, -e). store {shop), der Laden (-s, Laden). story, die Geschichte ( — , -n) ; die Erzahlung ( — , -en). stove, der Ofen (-s, Ofen). street, die StraBe ( — , -n). strike, schlagen (schlug, geschlagen); to — against, an'stoBen (stieB, ge- stoBen). [als. strong, stark; stronger than, starker student, der Student (-en, -en). study, studieren, lernen. succeed, gelingen (gelang, gelungen). such, solcher, -e, -es,pl. -e (89, 1). suffer, leiden (litt, gelitten). sugar, der Zucker (-s). summer, der Sommer (-s, — ). sun, die Sonne ( — , -n). sweet, suB. Switzerland, die Schweiz. sword, das Schwert (-es, -er). synopsis, die Synopsis ( — , Synopsen). table, der Tisch (-es, -e). take, nehmen (nahm, genommen). teach, lehren. teacher, der Lehrer (-s, — ). tell, sagen, mit'teilen. temperate, maBig. tent, das Zelt (-es, -e). \dai). thank, der Dank (-es) ; v. danken {with thankful, dankbar. that, pron. dieser, das, jener (89, 1); conj. daB. the, der, die, das, //. die (29). theatre, das Theater (-s, — ). them, sie; to — , ihnen (82, 1). then, dann, da. there, da, dort; — are, es gibt, es sind (86, 1). ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 371 therein, darin. therefore, deshalb, darum. thief, der Dieb (-es, -e). think, denken (dachte, gedacht) (157, 1) ; glauben. third, der, die, das dritte (71). this, dieser, -e, -es; pi. diese (89, 1). thorn, der Dorn (-es, -en). though, obgleich ; as — , als ob. throne, der Thron (-es, -e). through, durch. throw, werfen (warf, geworfen) ; to — away, weg'werfen. thumb, der Daumen (-s, — ). time, die Zeit ( — , -en) ; piece, die Uhr (— , -en). tired, miide; — of his work, seiner Arbeit miide (81, 1). to, prep, nach, zu, an ; adv. bis. to-day, heute. together, zusammen ; all — , alle zu- saramen. tolerably, ziemlich. to-morrow, morgen ; the day after — , iibermorgen; — evening, morgen abend. too, zu. tooth, der Zahn (-es, Zahne). tour, die Tour ( — , -en) ; the — of the Rhine, die Rheintour. tower, der Turin (-es, Tiirme). tradesman, der Geschaftsmann. translate, iibersetz'en. translation, die Ubersetzung. travel, reisen. traveler, der Reisende (-n, -n) tree, der Baum (-es, Baume). trouble, die Mtihe ; to take — , sich die Muhe geben. true, treu, wahr. trunk, der Koffer (-s, — ) ; {of a tree), der Stamm (-es, Stamme). try, versuchen. turn, drehen ; — away, sich aVkehren. typewriter, die Schreibmaschine. u umbrella, der Regenschirm or der Schirm (-s, -e). uncle, der Onkel (-s, — ). under, unter. [standen.) understand, verstehen (verstand, ver- unhappy, ungliicklich. unite, vereinigen. United States, die Vereinigten Staaten. university, die Universitat ( — , -en), unskillful, ungeschickt. until, bis. up, auf, oben. us, uns (82, 1). useful, niitzlich. useless, nutzlos, unniitz. usually, gewohnlich. vacation, die Ferien (pi). vain, eitel ; in — , vergebens. vegetables, das Gemiise (-s, — ). verb, das Zeitwort. very, sehr. Victoria, Victoria. victorious, siegreich. victory, der Sieg (-es, -e). village, das Dorf (-es, Dbrfer). virtue, die Tugend ( — , -en). visit, der Besuch (-es, -e) ; v. besuchen. visiting-card, die Visitenkarte. Voice, die Stimme ( — , -n) ; the — of the verb, die Form des Verbs. W wagon, der Wagen (-s, — ). walk, gehen (ging, gegangen). wall, die Mauer ( — , -n) ; (inside wall) die Wand ( — ,Wande); clock, die Wanduhr; map, die Wandkarte. war, der Krieg (-es, -e). warm, warm. 372 NEW GERMAN COURSE watch (time-piece), die Uhr ( — , -en) ; the " watch on the Rhine," die Wacht am Rhein; dog, der Wachthund ; tower, der Wacht- turm ; v. wachen, Wache halten. water, das Wasser (-s, — ) ; — fowl, der Wasservogel ; a glass of — , ein weak, schwach. [Glas Wasser. weather, das Wetter (-s, — ). web, das Netz (-es, -e). wedding, die Heirat ( — , -en). week, die Woche ( — , -n) ; every four weeks, alle vier Wochen. weep, weinen. well, gut. Weser, die Weser (a river of Germany). what, was ; — kind of a, was fiir ein. when (interrog.) wann ; (cond.) wenn ; (past time) als. where, wo, wohin. whether, ob. which, welcher (-e, -s) ; //. welche ; der, die, das,//, die (91). while, die Weile; prep, wahrend. whistle, pfeifen (pfiff, gepfiffen). white, weiB. who, wer>(go). [Tag. whole, ganz ; the — day, den ganzen whom, wen ; to — , wem or an wen (go). whose, wessen (90). why, warum. wide, breit. wild, wild. will, der Wille (-ns) ; v. wollen (148). willingly, gern ; I go — , ich gehe gern. win, gewinnen (gewann, gewonnen). window, das Fenster (-s, — ). windy, windig. wine, der Wein (-es, -e). wish, der Wunsch (-es, Wiinsche) ; v. wiinschen ; do you — ? wiinschen Sie or mochten Sie? (149, 3). witch, die Hexe ( — , -n) ; die Zauberin with, mit. ( — , -nen). within, inwendig, binnen. without, ohne. [ (-es, -er). woman, die Frau ( — , -en), das Weib wonderful, wundervoll. wood, das Holz (-es, Holzer) ; woods, der Wald (-es, Walder). [(42). word, das Wort (-es, -e or Worter) work, die Arbeit ( — , -en) ; das Werk (-es, -e) ; writings, Werke ; v. arbei- ten. world, die Erde ; die Welt ( — , -en), worth, der Wert (-es, -e); adj. wert, wiirdig ; ten marks — of, fiir 1 o Mark, would, wiirde, imp. sub. d)tt)efter, j^ter. Some are from verbs, as bdS ©e= I)br, //fc sense of hearing, from fyorett, /# hear ; bct£ @emd(be, //&£ paint- ing, from malett, to paint. The words formed with this prefix are very numerous and are mostly of the neuter gender. 9JUjf-. This prefix has the same negative signification as mis-, dis-, etc., in English; e.g., bct3 SDftjfterftatlbttte, misunderstanding; bte Ofltjsgtmft, disfavor ; ba$ TOj^trauert, suspicion. Utt- has the same meaning as the English negative particles un-, in-, dis-, mis-, etc.; e.g., bte UttgUtcffettcjfett, unhap pines s ; bct$ Utl- gtittf, misfortune; bte Utt()bfltd)fett, incivility ; bctS Uttfrcmt, zew\% t folly. 23ct— implies an addition to something ; e. g., bct$ 33etfptel, example; ber 33ettrctCj, contribution ; bte ^Betlage, supplement ; ber S3eifall, applause. Ur- denotes primeval, original; e.g., ber UrfprUTtg, origin; bte Ur- foelt, the primeval world ; ber UrtrjClIb, primeval forest. SSer- and 3er-. Nouns with these prefixes are mostly from infini- tives having these prefixes ; e.g., bd$ ^ertrctttert, confidence, from tier- trctuett, to trust ; ba3 33erfpre^ett r the promise, from t)erfpred)ert, to prom- ise; bte S8tX§an$iie, the lion. -ling. With this suffix are formed some masculine nouns denoting the passive recipient of an action, sometimes in a diminutive or depen- dent sense, as, ber $itttg(tttg, the youth, from \un§, young; ber gremb* Httg, the stranger, from fremb, strange ; ber (MttftUttg, the favorite, from (&Un)t, favor ; ber 2Betd)iing, the weakling, from tnetcf), weak, soft, effem- inate. -c. With this suffix are formed, from adjectives, abstract nouns, mostly feminine, the root vowel of which is modified (if a, 0, or u); e. g., from grojj, great, bte ©rofte, size; from ftarf, strong, bte @tarfe, strefigth ; from fyod), high, bte @ofye, height; from brett, broad, bte 33rette, the breadth. -tttg forms from verbs (and sometimes from adjectives) nouns ex- pressing condition or quality ; e. g., from fymbent, to hinder, bag Ditt- benttg, hi?idra?ice ; from bebitrfett, to need, bag £3ebitrftttg, need; from fittfter, dark, bte gtttftenttg, darkness. -f o( and -f c( form nouns from verbal roots ; e.g., from fcfytCtett, to send, bag ed)icf[af, fate; from irrett, to wander, bag ^rrfaf, error ; from ratett, to guess, bag Dtatf el, puzzle. -tum (English -dom) denotes quality or condition ; e. g., from retd), rich, ber $Retd)tUm, wealth; from etgett, 0O/«, bag (StgetttUm, property ; from nxtdjfert, A? ^a/, ba^> 2Satf)3tum, growth ; from irrett, A? in lordship). With this suffix are formed nouns of two classes. (a) with nouns; e. g., from grettttb , friend, bte greuttbfdjaft, friend- ship; from ^)err, master, bte @errfdj)aft, dominion; from OJMfter, w«j- /erctd)teu, to despise,' from Ctdjtert, to respect ; t)enttd)ten, to destroy, from ntd)t, not; fcerfptelen, to lose by play, from jptelen, to play ; rjerfprecfyen, to promise, from fpredjett, to speak. $cr- adds force to a verb in the direction of separation, destruction, or decay ; e. g., jerretjen, to tear in pieces, from ret^ett, to tear ; ytx- bredjett, to break in pieces, from brerfjett, to break ; gerfpalten, to split in two, from fpalten, to split. ge- has, in its present use, a very indefinite meaning ; originally it meant with or together, and this sense is apparent in collective nouns such as ba% ©ebtrge, the mountain-chain; bit ©eittetttbe, the commu- nity; but with verbs this signification has been obscured or lost. It is found in all the forms of a few verbs such as gef alien (gefiel, gef alien), to please ; gefdjefyen (gefdjal), gefd)el)en), to happen, and as the regular prefix to past participles, as in loben (lobte, gelobt). APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR XI FORMATION OF ADVERBS All adjectives and many participles may be used in their uninflected form as adverbs ; e. g., gut, well ; fdjbtt, beautifully ; ettt^iicfenb, charm- ingly ; ctltSgqetcfyrter, excellently. Derivative and compound adverbs are from various sources, espe- cially from nouns ; e. g., From Me Wet, the manner, kind, we have berctrt, thus, in this manner. From bte ©eftctlt, the form, fashion : bergeftdlt, in such a manner. From bet* ^dH, the case : falls, in case ; feittertf au% in ?io case. From baS tylal, the time: tuetmatS, often; jetttaiS, ever; tttema(3, never. From bte Sftafje, the measure : etrttgerma^ert, in some degree ; belarttt' terma^ert, as is knowti. From ber Drt, the place : aflerortett, everywhere ; attberortett, some- where else. From bte ^ette, the side : bteSfett3, on this side ; afterfett$, on all sides. From ber Xet(, the part : mehteStette, for my part ; attbertttet(3, on the other hand ; metftettteU$,/tfr the most part. From ber 23kg, the way : affertoegS, everywhere ; fettte3tt>eg$, in no way ; \x\\$)\0Z§, freely , quickly. From bte Setfe, the while : eittftlDeilett or mitttertt)et(e, in the mean- time. From bte $Betfe, the way, manner : moglid)erit)et|e, as far as possible ; merftt>itrbtgertt)etfe, in a remarkable manner; auSttafjmStoeife, by excep' Hon ; tropf erttretfe, by drops ; ftltf etttoetf e, by degrees, gradually. From bte £eit, the time: aller^ett, all the time; jebeqett, at every time. From ber £ag, the day : tagttcf), daily ; tag£, by day. From bte (Stttttbe, the hour : ftiittblttf), hourly. From bte 9tCttttr, the nature : rtaturltdj, naturally, of course. From ber gtmmet, the heavens : ljumrtettodrtS, toward heaven. Some adverbs are formed by the union of a noun and a preposition ; e.g., $urM, backwards; Utttertt)eg3, on the way; bet^ettett, in time; guroetlert, sometimes ; ixhtxfyaupt, in general ; bergart, up hill ; ftromauf, upstream ; j;afyrcm§, Jatjrettt, year out, year in (all the year around}. Some adverbs or adverbial phrases are formed by the union of an adjective and a preposition; e. g., bet ttettem, by far ; ttt Ctfterrt, in all Xll NEW GERMAN COURSE respects ; tior fuqettt, not long ago ; ctttf S befte, in the best manner ; am metften, most of all ; lVJtx\\, first ; ttbtxaii, everywhere. Some adverbs are formed by adding the ending -titf), or -(trtgS, to an adjective ; e. g., |rf)tt)erltd), hardly, scarcely ; ganoid), totally ; rteu(id), of late ; ftafyrltd), truly; f itrjltd), recently ; btmbUrtg^, blindly ; ia()lmg3, precipitously, suddenly. Some adverbs are case-forms of adjectives, especially genitives; e. g., (Utber3, otherwise ; ftet$, continually, always; red)t3, to the right; ltrtf$, to the left; bereitS, already; etttft, sometimes, once; erftertS , firstly ; beftettS, in the best manner ; fyodjftett^, at the most ; ttac^ften^, soon. Words of other parts of speech, — pronouns, prepositions and con- junctions, — are mostly primitive or are derived or compounded in a manner apparent without explanation. Prepositions and conjunc- tions are mostly of adverbial origin. THE KINSHIP OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS Grimm's Law The similarity between many English and German words gives evidence of a common origin ; but this relationship has only in recent times been made the subject of profound and exact study. To German philologists, especially to Rask and Grimm, we owe the discovery of the laws that have prevailed in the process of word-formation as new dialects have been suc- cessively evolved one from another in past times. This law of phonetic change, first formulated by Jacob Grimm, is called from him Grimni's law, — in German fiaurberfcfjtebimg, permutatio7i of con- sonants. It is too large a subject for an elementary grammar, belonging rather to the broad domain of comparative philology and going back to the remote origin of Indo-European speech. One of its lessons, however, is of practical importance to every student of German. This is the observation of the similarities between the words of modern English and the High Ger- man which we are studying. Only enough examples can here be given to attract attention to the subject and to cultivate the habit of close observation of the numerous instances to be found in all comparison of the two languages. A brief classified list of words will answer this purpose. APPENDIX TO THE GRAMMAR Xlll Letters are classed as Labials, Dentals, Gutturals, Liquids, Nasals and Semi-vowels.* Labials i . English p corresponds to German f , ff , pf. deep, tief g a P e i gaffert soap, ©eife open, offen 2. English b corresponds to German b. ball, ^ «S ^0*